PX Developer Version 1 Operating Manual (Monitor Tool)

PX Developer Version 1

Operating Manual

(Monitor Tool)

-SW1D5C-FBDQ-E

-SW1D5C-FBDQMON-E

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

(Always read these instructions before using this product.)

Before using this product, thoroughly read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual and pay careful attention to safety and handle the products properly.

The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this products. For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system, refer to the User’s Manual for the CPU module.

In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as

"

!

WARNING " and "

!

CAUTION".

!

!

WARNING

CAUTION

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.

Note that the

!

CAUTION level may lead to serious consequences according to the circumstances.

Always follow the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal safety

.

Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.

[Startup/Maintenance Precautions]

CAUTION

The online operations have to be executed after the manual has been carefully read and the safety has been ensured.

Failure to do so may cause a miss operation which results in machine damage or an accident.

A-1 A-1

CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT

(1) Mitsubishi programmable controller ("the PRODUCT") shall be used in conditions; i) where any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT, if any, shall not lead to any major or serious accident; and ii) where the backup and fail-safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the

PRODUCT for the case of any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT.

(2) The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries.

MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED

TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT,

PRODUCT LIABILITY) FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO

PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT

INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS, PRECAUTIONS, OR WARNING CONTAINED IN

MITSUBISHI'S USER, INSTRUCTION AND/OR SAFETY MANUALS, TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND

GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT.

("Prohibited Application")

Prohibited Applications include, but not limited to, the use of the PRODUCT in;

 Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies, and/or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT.

 Railway companies or Public service purposes, and/or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User.

 Aircraft or Aerospace, Medical applications, Train equipment, transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator, Incineration and Fuel devices, Vehicles, Manned transportation, Equipment for

Recreation and Amusement, and Safety devices, handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or

Chemicals, Mining and Drilling, and/or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property.

Notwithstanding the above, restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion, authorize use of the

PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications, provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail-safe, redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required. For details, please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region.

A-2 A-2

REVISIONS

Print date

*

Manual number

Dec., 2002 SH (NA)-080370E-A

Oct., 2003 SH (NA)-080370E-B

Jun., 2004 SH (NA)-080370E-C

Feb., 2005 SH (NA)-080370E-D

*

The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

Revision

First edition

Addition

Section 8.6, Section 8.6.1 to 8.6.5, Section 9.15.14, Appendix 1.7,

Appendix 2.3

Correction

Section 2.1.3, Section 2.1.4, Section 2.2, Section 2.3, Section 3.1,

Section 3.2, Section 5.1, Section 6.2.1, Section 6.3.1, Section 6.5.2,

Section 7.3.1, Section 7.4.1, Section 7.6, Section 7.7.1, Section 7.7.4,

Section 8.4, Section 8.5, Section 9.3, Section 9.5, Section 9.11,

Section 9.14, Section 9.15, Section 9.15.8, Section 9.15.9,

Section 10.1, Section 10.3.5, Section 11.3.4, Section 12.1,

Section 12.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.2, Appendix 1.3, Appendix 1.4,

Appendix 1.5, Appendix 2, Appendix 2.1, Appendix 3

Section 7.3.4 to 7.3.9 changed to Section 7.3.2 to 7.3.7

Appendix 1.7 changed to Appendix 1.8

Appendix 2.3 changed to Appendix 2.4

Deletion

Section 7.3.2, Section 7.3.3

Model Addition

Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU

Addition

Appendix 1.9, Appendix 4

Correction

Generic Terms, Abbreviations And Terms, Section 1.2,

Section 2.1 to 2.2, Section 4.5, Section 5.1, Section 6.3, Section 7.2.6,

Section 7.3.1, Section 7.4.1, Section 7.7.4, Section 8.4 to 8.5,

Section 9.3, Section 9.14, Section 10.1, Section 10.3.7, Section 10.5,


Appendix 1.2, Appendix 1.6 to 1.7, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 3

Correction

Section 2.2

A-3 A-3

Print date

*

Manual number

Feb., 2006 SH (NA)-080370E-E

Mar., 2007 SH (NA)-080370E-F

*


Revision

Correction

Generic Terms, Abbreviations And Terms, Section 1.1, Section 1.2,

Section 2.1.2, Section 2.1.3, Section 2.1.4, Section 2.1.6, Section 2.2,

Section 3.2, Section 7.1.3, Section 7.3.1, Section 7.4.1, Section 7.6.2,

Section 7.7, Section 7.7.1, Section 7.7.3, Section 7.7.5, Section 7.7.8,

Section 8.5.1, Section 8.6, Section 9.1.1, Section 9.3, Section 9.4,

Section 9.5, Section 9.11, Section 9.12, Section 9.14, Section 9.15.9,

Section 10.1, Section 10.3.1, Section 10.3.2, Section 10.3.3,

Section 10.3.4, Section 10.3.5, Section 10.3.6, Section 10.4,

Section 10.5, Section 10.5.1, Section 10.5.2, Section 10.5.7,

Section 10.6.1, Chapter 11, Appendix 1.2, Appendix 1.3, Appendix 2.1,

Appendix 3, Appendix 4.2, Index

Additions


Section 11.1.1, Appendix 3, Appendix 3.2, Appendix 3.2.1

Correction

Section 1.2, Section 2.1.2, Section 2.1.3, Section 2.2, Section 3.2,

Section 5.1, Section 6.3.1, Section 6.3.2, Section 7.2, Section 7.3,

Section 7.4, Section 7.5, Section 7.7, Section 7.7.5, Section 8.6.2,

Section 9.1.4, Section 9.3, Section 9.8, Section 10.3.1, Section 10.3.2,

Section 10.3.3, Section 10.3.4, Section 10.4, Section 10.5, Chapter 11,


Appendix 1.2, Appendix 1.3, Appendix 1.8, Appendix 1.9.2,

Appendix 1.9.3, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 5.2,



Section 11.1 changed to Appendix 3.1

Section 11.3 changed to Appendix 3.1.2

Section 11.4 changed to Appendix 3.1.1

Appendix 3 changed to Appendix 4

Appendix 4 to 4.3 changed to Appendix 5 to 5.3

A-4 A-4

Print date

*

Manual number

Jun., 2008 SH (NA)-080370E-G

Jan., 2009 SH (NA)-080370E-H

*


Revision

Model Addition

Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU

Addition

Section 9.1.4, Appendix 4

Correction

MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS, ABBREVIATIONS, AND TERMS,


Section 2.1.6, Section 2.2, Section 3.2, Section 4.6, Section 5.1,

Section 6.1, Section 6.3.1, Section 6.4.2, Section 7.1, Section 7.1.3,

Section 7.3.1, Section 7.5, Section 7.6.2, Section 7.7, Section 7.7.1,

Section 8.3, Section 8.5.1, Section 9.1.1, Section 9.1.3, Section 9.3,

Section 9.8, Section 9.14, Section 9.15.2, Section 10.1, Section 10.3.7,

Section 10.3.9, Section 10.5.1 to 10.5.3, Section 10.5.6, Section 10.5.8,


Appendix 1.2.1, Appendix 1.2.2, Appendix 3.1.1 [4], Appendix 3.1.2 [2],

Appendix 4 to 5.3 changed Appendix 5 to 6.3

Addition

Section 6.6, Section 8.6, Section 9.4, Section 10.5.8, Appendix 2

Correction

GENERIC TERMS, ABBREVIATIONS, AND TERMS, Section 1.2,



Section 6.5.2, Section 7.3.1, Section 7.3.2, Section 7.3.5, Section 7.4.1,

Section 7.4.2, Section 7.4.4, Section 7.6, Section 7.7.3, Section 8.1,

Section 8.2, Section 8.4 to 8.5.3, Section 9.1.1, Section 9.1.4,


Section 10.3.3, Section 10.3.8, Section 10.4, Section 10.5,

Section 11.1.1, Section 12.1, Appendix 1.1 to 1.3, Appendix 1.7,

Appendix 3.1.1 [4], Appendix 3.1.2 [2], Appendix 3.2,

Appendix 4.1.1 [4], Appendix 4.1.2 [2], Appendix 4.2, Appendix 5,

Appendix 6, Appendix 6.2, Appendix 7.2

Section 8.6 to 8.6.5 changed to Section 8.7 to 8.7.5




A-5 A-5

Print date

*

Manual number

Dec., 2009 SH (NA)-080370E-I

Dec., 2010 SH (NA)-080370E-J

*


Revision

Addition

CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT, Section 7.2.7,

Section 8.6.4, Section 10.3.14, Section 10.5.12, Section 10.6.3,

Appendix 2.1

Correction

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 1.2, Section 2.1.2, Section 2.1.4,


Section 5.1, Section 6.3.1, Section 6.6, Section 7.2, Section 7.2.1,

Section 7.2.3, Section 7.2.4, Section 7.3.1, Section 7.4.1, Section 7.7.1,

Section 8.5.1, Section 8.6.1 to 8.6.3, Section 8.6.5, Section 8.7,

Section 8.7.1, Section 8.7.4, Section 9.1.4, Section 9.2 to 9.4,


Section 9.16.9, Section 9.16.14, Section 10.3.1 to 10.3.3,


Section 10.6, Section 12.1, Appendix 1.1 to 1.3, Appendix 4.1.1 [4],

Appendix 4.1.2 [2], Appendix 5.1, Appendix 6, Appendix 7.2


Section 10.6.2 changed to Section 10.6.3

Appendix 2 changed to Appendix 2.2

Addition

Section 9.5, Section 9.17.12, Appendix 1.6, Appendix 1.7

Correction

MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS, ABBREVIATIONS, AND TERMS,

Section 1.1, Section 1.2, Section 2.1.4, Section 2.1.6, Section 2.2,


Section 6.4.1, Section 6.6, Section 7.2 to 7.2.2, Section 7.2.5,

Section 7.2.6, Section 7.3.1, Section 7.4.1, Section 7.5, Section 7.6,

Section 7.7.1, Section 7.7.6, Section 8.5.1 to 8.5.3, Section 8.6.6,


Section 9.16, Section 9.17, Section 9.17.3, Section 11.2,

Section 11.2.1, Section 12.1, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.2.2,

Appendix 1.8, Appendix 1.10, Appendix 4.1.1 [1], Appendix 4.1.2 [1],

Appendix 5 to 5.2, Appendix 6, Appendix 7.1, Appendix 7.2

Section 9.5 to 9.16 changed to Section 9.6 to 9.17

Appendix 1.6 to 1.9 changed to Appendix 1.8 to 1.11

A-6 A-6

Print date

*

Manual number

Oct., 2011 SH (NA)-080370E-K

Feb., 2014 SH (NA)-080370E-L

*


Revision

Addition

Section 7.7.9, Section 9.2, Section 10.5.13, Section 10.5.14,

Appendix 4,

Correction

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL,


Section 2.1.2, Section 2.2, Section 3.1, Section 3.2, Section 4.1 to 4.5,

Section 5.1, Section 5.2, Section 6.3.1 to 6.3.4, Section 6.3.9,

Section 7.2.6, Section 7.3.1, Section 7.3.2, Section 7.3.4 to 7.3.7,

Section 7.4.1 to 7.5, Section 7.7.1, Section 7.7.3 to 7.7.5, Section 7.7.8,



Section 9.13, Section 9.16, Section 9.17, Section 9.18.1,


Section 10.3.1 to 10.3.3, Section 10.3.8, Section 10.3.9,

Section 10.3.13, Section 10.4, Section 10.5, Section 10.5.8,

Section 10.5.12, Chapter 11 to Section 11.2.1, Section 12.1,

Appendix 1.2, Appendix 1.2.2, Appendix 1.3, Appendix 5.1,

Appendix 5.1.1 [1], Appendix 5.1.1 [4], Appendix 5.2, Appendix 7,

Appendix 8.1, Appendix 8.2



Addition

Section 10.7.2, Section 10.8.2

Correction


Section 2.1.2 to 2.1.4, Section 2.2, Section 3.2, Section 4.5,

Section 5.1, Section 5.2, Section 6.3.1, Section 6.4.1, Section 6.6,

Section 7.2.1, Section 7.3.1, Section 7.4, Section 7.4.1, Section 7.4.5,

Section 7.4.6, Section 7.5 to 7.7.1, Section 8.5.1 to 8.5.3, Section 9.1.1,

Section 9.4 to 9.6, Section 9.11, Section 9.16, Section 9.17,


Section 10.2, Section 10.3.2 to 10.3.4, Section 10.4, Section 10.7,

Section 10.7.1, Section 10.8, Section 10.8.1,Chapter 11 to11.1.2,

Section 12.1, Appendix 1.1 to 1.2.2, Appendix 4, Appendix 6 to 8,

Appendix 8.2, Section 8.3

A-7 A-7

Print date

*

Manual number

Jul., 2015 SH (NA)-080370E-M

Correction

*


Revision

GENERIC TERMS, ABBREVIATIONS, AND TERMS, Section 2.1.4,

Section 2.1.6, Section 2.2, Section 5.1, Section 6.5.2, Section 7.6,

Section 7.7.3, Section 8.6.1, Section 8.6.7, Section 9.5, Appendix 1.10,

Appendix 7, Appendix 8.1

Japanese manual version SH-080260- AF

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights that may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

c 2002 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

A-8 A-8

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi MELSOFT series Integrated FA software.

Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of MELSOFT series thoroughly in advance to ensure correct use.

CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ................................................................................................................................ A-1

CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT ............................................................................................... A-2

REVISIONS ...................................................................................................................................................... A-3

INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................................. A-9

CONTENTS ...................................................................................................................................................... A-9

MANUALS ...................................................................................................................................................... A-15

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...................................................................................................................... A-16

MANUAL ORGANIZATION ........................................................................................................................... A-18

GENERIC TERMS, ABBREVIATIONS, AND TERMS ................................................................................. A-20

1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................................ 1-1

1.1

Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 1-1

1.2

Features .................................................................................................................................................. 1-3

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................................. 2-1

2.1

System Configuration ............................................................................................................................. 2-1

2.1.2

Communication route................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.3

Serial/USB connection ............................................................................................................... 2-11

2.1.4

Network board ............................................................................................................................ 2-13

2.1.5

Printer ......................................................................................................................................... 2-14

2.1.6

Monitoring system configuration with Monitor Tool .................................................................. 2-15

2.2

Operating Environment ........................................................................................................................ 2-19

2.3

Folder Configuration of Monitor Tool ................................................................................................... 2-24

3

4

FUNCTION OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................ 3-1

3.1

Function Overview .................................................................................................................................. 3-1

3.2

Function List ............................................................................................................................................ 3-2

MODE ADMINISTRATION .................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1

Mode Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2

Mode Types ............................................................................................................................................ 4-1

4.3

User Authorities ...................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.4

Mode Transition ...................................................................................................................................... 4-2

4.5

Mode Change ......................................................................................................................................... 4-2

4.6

User Setting ............................................................................................................................................ 4-3

4.7

Changing Mode after Installation ........................................................................................................... 4-4

A-9 A-9

5

6

START AND EXIT .................................................................................................................................. 5-1

5.1

Starting Monitor Tool .............................................................................................................................. 5-1

5.2

Exiting Monitor Tool ................................................................................................................................ 5-7

SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATION ..................................................................... 6-1

7

6.1

Overview of Screen Configuration ......................................................................................................... 6-1

6.2

General Operation of Screen ................................................................................................................. 6-2

6.2.1

Closing a window ......................................................................................................................... 6-2

6.2.2

Maximizing a window ................................................................................................................... 6-2

6.2.3

Minimizing a window .................................................................................................................... 6-3

6.2.4

Restoring a window ..................................................................................................................... 6-3

6.2.5

Changing the window size ........................................................................................................... 6-3

6.3

Monitor Toolbar ....................................................................................................................................... 6-4

6.3.1

Contents of monitor toolbar ......................................................................................................... 6-4

6.3.2

Screen display buttons .............................................................................................................. 6-10

6.3.3

Stop buzzer button ..................................................................................................................... 6-12

6.3.4

Print screen button ..................................................................................................................... 6-12

6.3.5

Screen alignment button ............................................................................................................ 6-12

6.3.6

Find button ................................................................................................................................. 6-13

6.3.7

Change mode button ................................................................................................................. 6-13

6.3.8

Setting window button................................................................................................................ 6-13

6.3.9

Exit button .................................................................................................................................. 6-13

6.4

Monitor Window .................................................................................................................................... 6-14

6.4.1

Types of monitor window ........................................................................................................... 6-14

6.4.2

Display form of monitor window ................................................................................................ 6-14

6.5

Pop-up Window .................................................................................................................................... 6-16

6.5.1

Types of pop-up window ............................................................................................................ 6-16

6.5.2

Display form of pop-up window ................................................................................................. 6-16

6.6

Task Tray Icon ...................................................................................................................................... 6-17

MONITOR FUNCTION ........................................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1

Control Panel .......................................................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1.1

Faceplate display ......................................................................................................................... 7-2

7.1.2

Switching groups to be displayed ................................................................................................ 7-2

7.1.3

Displaying the pop-up tuning screen ........................................................................................... 7-2

7.2

Trend Graph............................................................................................................................................ 7-3

7.2.1

Displaying a trend graph .............................................................................................................. 7-4

7.2.2

Collecting trend data .................................................................................................................... 7-8

7.2.3

Switching groups to be displayed ................................................................................................ 7-9

7.2.4

Displaying the latest value ........................................................................................................... 7-9

7.2.5

Changing the display magnification .......................................................................................... 7-10

7.2.6

Exporting to CSV file .................................................................................................................. 7-12

7.2.7

Displaying CSV file .................................................................................................................... 7-13

7.3

Alarm List .............................................................................................................................................. 7-15

7.3.1

Displaying alarm list ................................................................................................................... 7-16

7.3.2

Confirm check ............................................................................................................................ 7-23

7.3.3

Displaying selected alarms ........................................................................................................ 7-23

A-10 A-10

7.3.4

Deleting recovered alarms......................................................................................................... 7-24

7.3.5

Confirming all alarms ................................................................................................................. 7-24

7.3.6

Printing an alarm list .................................................................................................................. 7-25

7.3.7


7.4

Event List .............................................................................................................................................. 7-27

7.4.1

Displaying event list ................................................................................................................... 7-28

7.4.2

Confirm check ............................................................................................................................ 7-36

7.4.3

Deleting all events ...................................................................................................................... 7-36

7.4.4

Confirming all events ................................................................................................................. 7-37

7.4.5

Printing an event list................................................................................................................... 7-38

7.4.6


7.5

User-created Screen ............................................................................................................................ 7-40

7.6

Pop-up Faceplate ................................................................................................................................. 7-42

7.6.1

Displaying a faceplate ................................................................................................................ 7-44

7.6.2

Displaying a pop-up tuning screen ............................................................................................ 7-44

7.7

Pop-up Tuning Screen ......................................................................................................................... 7-45

7.7.1

Displaying a pop-up tuning screen ............................................................................................ 7-47

7.7.2

Collecting tuning trend data ....................................................................................................... 7-51

7.7.3

Tuning trend collection instruction ............................................................................................. 7-52

7.7.4

Changing a current value .......................................................................................................... 7-53

7.7.5

Auto tuning ................................................................................................................................. 7-54

7.7.6

Changing the display magnification .......................................................................................... 7-63

7.7.7

Collected tag list ......................................................................................................................... 7-64

7.7.8


7.7.9

AT reflection target ..................................................................................................................... 7-66

8 OTHER FUNTION .................................................................................................................................. 8-1

8.1

Starting/Stopping Buzzer ........................................................................................................................ 8-1

8.2

Print Screen ............................................................................................................................................ 8-2

8.3

Screen Alignment ................................................................................................................................... 8-3

8.4

Find ......................................................................................................................................................... 8-4

8.5

Displaying the PLC Communication Status ........................................................................................... 8-7

8.5.1

Displaying the communication status .......................................................................................... 8-7

8.5.2

Displaying the redundant system status ................................................................................... 8-10

8.5.3

Collection period for each communication type ........................................................................ 8-12

8.6

Server/Client Monitoring System ......................................................................................................... 8-14

8.6.1

Setting data in the secondary server/clients ............................................................................. 8-14

8.6.2

Procedure for copying the setting data ..................................................................................... 8-16

8.6.3

Switching server ......................................................................................................................... 8-17

8.6.4

Connecting to server .................................................................................................................. 8-18

8.6.5

Acquiring the server setting data ............................................................................................... 8-18

8.6.6

Time adjustment among OPSs ................................................................................................. 8-19

8.6.7

Displaying the server/client communication status ................................................................... 8-20

8.7

Automatic CSV File Export ................................................................................................................... 8-21

8.7.1

Automatic trend CSV file export ................................................................................................ 8-24

8.7.2

Automatic alarm CSV file export ............................................................................................... 8-29

8.7.3

Automatic event CSV file export................................................................................................ 8-31

8.7.4

Automatic CSV file deletion ....................................................................................................... 8-33

8.7.5

Disk free space check................................................................................................................ 8-34

A-11 A-11

9 SETTING ................................................................................................................................................ 9-1

9.1

Common Setting Window ....................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1.1

Displaying and operating the setting window.............................................................................. 9-1

9.1.2

Inputting to data setting grid ........................................................................................................ 9-4

9.1.3

Registering and saving the settings ............................................................................................ 9-6

9.1.4

Copying monitoring environment of monitor tool to other computers ........................................ 9-8

9.2

User Authority Setting ........................................................................................................................... 9-10

9.3

User Setting .......................................................................................................................................... 9-12

9.4

Monitor Target Project Setting ............................................................................................................. 9-13

9.5

OPS Setting .......................................................................................................................................... 9-21

9.6

Monitor Variable Setting ....................................................................................................................... 9-27

9.7

Control Panel Setting ............................................................................................................................ 9-30

9.8

Trend Setting ........................................................................................................................................ 9-32

9.9

Alarm Setting ........................................................................................................................................ 9-34

9.10

Event Setting ................................................................................................................................... 9-35

9.11

User-created Screen Setting .......................................................................................................... 9-36

9.12

Unit Setting ...................................................................................................................................... 9-42

9.13

Faceplate Display Pattern Setting .................................................................................................. 9-43

9.14

Faceplate Display Scale Setting ..................................................................................................... 9-46

9.15

Faceplate MV Characters Setting .................................................................................................. 9-48

9.16

Lockout Tag Setting ........................................................................................................................ 9-49

9.17

Option Setting .................................................................................................................................. 9-51

9.18

Setting under This Condition .......................................................................................................... 9-64

9.18.1

Changing the mode ................................................................................................................... 9-64

9.18.2

Displaying the control panel ...................................................................................................... 9-65

9.18.3

Displaying a trend graph ............................................................................................................ 9-66

9.18.4

Displaying an alarm ................................................................................................................... 9-67

9.18.5

Displaying an event ................................................................................................................... 9-69

9.18.6

Setting character string displayed on faceplate ........................................................................ 9-71

9.18.7

Design lockout tag ..................................................................................................................... 9-72

9.18.8

Specifying a font ........................................................................................................................ 9-73

9.18.9

Specifying a display color .......................................................................................................... 9-74

9.18.10

Specifying a beep sound ........................................................................................................... 9-77

9.18.11

Changing the transfer setup ...................................................................................................... 9-78

9.18.12

Connecting to Simulator ............................................................................................................ 9-79

9.18.13

Specifying a printer .................................................................................................................... 9-80

9.18.14

Changing the window mode ...................................................................................................... 9-81

9.18.15

Using automatic CSV file export................................................................................................ 9-82

10 FACEPLATE ......................................................................................................................................... 10-1

10.1

Faceplate Display ............................................................................................................................ 10-1

10.2

Lockout Tag ..................................................................................................................................... 10-7

10.3

Displaying Parts on Faceplate ........................................................................................................ 10-8

10.3.1

Operation display types ............................................................................................................. 10-8

10.3.2

Changing the I/O mode ........................................................................................................... 10-10

10.3.3

Changing the Control mode .................................................................................................... 10-12

10.3.4

Changing the PGS motion type ............................................................................................... 10-15

10.3.5

Executing step No. setting ....................................................................................................... 10-17

A-12 A-12

10.3.6

Time in the step setting............................................................................................................ 10-18

10.3.7

PV value setting ....................................................................................................................... 10-19

10.3.8

SV value setting ....................................................................................................................... 10-22

10.3.9

MV value setting ...................................................................................................................... 10-24

10.3.10

Count value setting .................................................................................................................. 10-26

10.3.11

Batch count operation .............................................................................................................. 10-27

10.3.12

Count/Timer operation ............................................................................................................. 10-28

10.3.13

Status operation ....................................................................................................................... 10-29

10.3.14

Command button operation ..................................................................................................... 10-30

10.4

Tag Types ..................................................................................................................................... 10-31

10.5

Loop Tag Faceplate ...................................................................................................................... 10-33

10.5.1

PID, PIDP, SPI, IPD, BPI, R, 2PID .......................................................................................... 10-35

10.5.2

2PIDH ....................................................................................................................................... 10-37

10.5.3

ONF2, ONF3 ............................................................................................................................ 10-40

10.5.4

PGS .......................................................................................................................................... 10-42

10.5.5

PGS2 ........................................................................................................................................ 10-44

10.5.6

MOUT ....................................................................................................................................... 10-47

10.5.7

MONI ........................................................................................................................................ 10-48

10.5.8

SWM ......................................................................................................................................... 10-49

10.5.9

MWM ........................................................................................................................................ 10-51

10.5.10

SEL ........................................................................................................................................... 10-53

10.5.11

BC, PSUM ................................................................................................................................ 10-55

10.5.12

PFC_SF, PFC_SS, PFC_INT ................................................................................................. 10-57

10.5.13

PVAL ........................................................................................................................................ 10-59

10.5.14

HTCL ........................................................................................................................................ 10-61

10.6

Status Tag Faceplate .................................................................................................................... 10-64

10.6.1

NREV, REV, MVAL1, MVAL2 ................................................................................................. 10-65

10.6.2

TIMER1, TIMER2, COUNT1, COUNT2 .................................................................................. 10-67

10.6.3

PB ............................................................................................................................................. 10-69

10.7

Alarm Tag Faceplate ..................................................................................................................... 10-71

10.7.1

ALM .......................................................................................................................................... 10-72

10.7.2

ALM_64PT ............................................................................................................................... 10-73

10.8

Message Tag Faceplate ............................................................................................................... 10-74

10.8.1

MSG ......................................................................................................................................... 10-76

10.8.2

MSG_64PT .............................................................................................................................. 10-77

11 MONITORING WITH USER-CREATED SCREEN ............................................................................. 11-1

11.1

Utilizing GT SoftGOT ...................................................................................................................... 11-1

11.1.1

Setting procedure to use the interaction function between the Monitor tool and GT

SoftGOT ..................................................................................................................................... 11-3

11.1.2

Monitoring procedure using the interaction function between the Monitor tool and GT

SoftGOT ................................................................................................................................... 11-12

11.2

Utilizing Microsoft

R

Visual Basic

R

Application ............................................................................. 11-15

11.2.1

Using procedure for ActiveX control........................................................................................ 11-16

12 TROUBLE OCCURRENCE ................................................................................................................. 12-1

12.1

Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 12-1

12.2

Convenience Function .................................................................................................................... 12-5

A-13 A-13

APPENDIX.......................................................................................................................................................... B-1

Appendix 1 Communication of the Monitor Tool ........................................................................................ B-1

Appendix 1.1 Communication types ....................................................................................................... B-1

Appendix 1.2

Event notification ............................................................................................................... B-4

Appendix 1.2.1

System configuration that can receive event notification ...................................... B-5

Appendix 1.2.2

Settings for executing event notification ................................................................ B-8

Appendix 1.3

Collecting current value data .......................................................................................... B-13

Appendix 1.4

Collecting tag data .......................................................................................................... B-15

Appendix 1.5

Writing tag data ............................................................................................................... B-16

Appendix 1.6

Collecting process data ................................................................................................... B-17

Appendix 1.7

Communication error ...................................................................................................... B-18

Appendix 1.8

Return check ................................................................................................................... B-19

Appendix 1.9

PLC status check ............................................................................................................ B-20

Appendix 1.10

Measures for delayed collection periods ........................................................................ B-24

Appendix 1.11

Communication with Redundant CPU............................................................................ B-25

Appendix 1.11.1

Communication route for monitoring ................................................................... B-25

Appendix 1.11.2

Monitor operation when the system is switched ................................................. B-25

Appendix 1.11.3

Monitor operation when a communication error has occurred ........................... B-26

Appendix 2 Refreshing the monitoring data in the server/client monitoring system ............................... B-28

Appendix 2.1

Refreshing the monitoring data in a secondary server .................................................. B-28

Appendix 2.2

Refreshing the monitoring data in clients ....................................................................... B-29

Appendix 3 Monitor Tool Startup Option ................................................................................................... B-30

Appendix 3.1

Starting under hiding status ............................................................................................ B-30

Appendix 3.2

Switching between monitor toolbar show/hide after starting ......................................... B-31

Appendix 3.3

Starting the Monitor Tool by the Mode That Matches the Authority of the Specified User .... B-32

Appendix 4 Operation authority for tag data items ................................................................................... B-33

Appendix 5 External Control of the Monitor Tool ...................................................................................... B-40

Appendix 5.1

ActiveX control ................................................................................................................ B-40

Appendix 5.1.1

Tag Data Access Control ..................................................................................... B-41

Appendix 5.1.1 [1] Custom Property ................................................................................................ B-42

Appendix 5.1.1 [2] Method ............................................................................................................... B-45

Appendix 5.1.1 [3] Event .................................................................................................................. B-45

Appendix 5.1.1 [4] Error list .............................................................................................................. B-46

Appendix 5.1.2

Faceplate Control ................................................................................................. B-54

Appendix 5.1.2 [1] Custom Property ................................................................................................ B-54

Appendix 5.1.2 [2] Error list .............................................................................................................. B-55

Appendix 5.2

MonCtrl command ........................................................................................................... B-59

R

Appendix 6 Warning Message Appears on Windows Vista or later ...................................................... B-63

Appendix 6.1

Overview of warning message ....................................................................................... B-63

Appendix 6.2

Methods for preventing the warning message ............................................................... B-64

Appendix 7 Functions Added to and Changed from Old Version ............................................................ B-70

Appendix 8 Version Compatibility ............................................................................................................. B-76

Appendix 8.1

Monitor tool version compatibility ................................................................................... B-76

Appendix 8.2

Version compatibility between monitor tool and programming tool ............................... B-78

Appendix 8.3

Combined use of monitor tool and GX application ........................................................ B-79

INDEX ................................................................................................................................................................ C-1

A-14 A-14

MANUALS

The following manuals are also related to this product.

Refer to the following table for ordering a manual.

Related manuals

Manual name

PX Developer Operating Manual (Programming Tool)

Explains FBD language programming, compilation, online operations, and debug methods with PX Developer. (Sold separately.)

PX Developer Programming Manual

Explains details of programming with PX Developer, lists of FB parts, and the PID

PX Developer Operating Manual (GOT Screen Generator)

Explains the generation procedure for GOT screen project and details about generated

PX Developer Operating Manual (InTouch Interaction)

Explains the interaction between PX Developer monitor tool and SCADA software (InTouch).

PX Developer Operating Manual (JoyWatcherSuite Interaction)

Explains the interaction between PX Developer monitor tool and SCADA software

Manual number

(model code)

SH-080369E

(13JU38)

SH-080371E

(13JW00)

SH-080772ENG

(13JU61)

SH-080773ENG

(13JU62)

SH-080976ENG

(13JU70)

CAUTION

Please note that we do not guarantee commercially available software compatible with Microsoft

R

Windows

R

Operating System introduced in this manual.

The software copyright of this product belongs to Mitsubishi Electric

Corporation.

No contents in this manual can be reproduced or duplicated in any form or by any means without permission.

Although we make utmost efforts, this manual may not completely follow the revisions of the software and hardware.

In principle, this software should be purchased by one set per personal computer or by license purchase.

This product (including this manual) can only be used under the software license agreement.

Please note that we are not responsible for any influence resulting from operating this product (including the manual).

The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.

A-15 A-15

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

PURPOSE

Describes the purpose of operations for each chapter or section.

BASIC OPERATION

Describes the operations to set the intended settings.

A-16

DISPLAY/SETTING SCREEN

Describes the screen display procedure.

Reference location

leads to the reference location.

DISPLAY/SETTING DATA

Describes the display contents on the screen.

A-16

There are also the following types of explanations.

POINT

Informs items to be noted and useful functions relevant to the contents in the chapter or section.

REMARKS

Supplements contents in the chapter or section.

The following table explains symbols in this manual and their description.

Symbol Description

Expresses an item in a window or dialog box, or a menu on the menu bar.

[ ]

[ ] [ ] expresses the drop-down menu.

Example: [File] [Save the setting data]

( )

" "

<< >>

Indicates the related button.

Example: "Go to Previous Folder" button ( )

Expresses a command button.

Example: "OK" button

Expresses dialog box tab.

Example: <<General>> tab

A-17 A-17

MANUAL ORGANIZATION

This manual consists of 12 chapters and APPENDICES.

The contents of the manual: The steps from the system programming to the run of DC processing on CPU module by using the PX Developer. The steps are shown as follows:

< Operating procedures before running the process control system >

Operating procedure 1: The setting and wiring of the process control system Reference

Install CPU module, Network module, Input/Output module, the related equipments of PLC, and the process control system and other external equipments to realize wiring

QCPU User's Manual

(Hardware Design,

Maintenance and Inspection)

Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU

User's Manual

(Function Explanation,

Program Fundamentals)

Operating procedure 2: Confirm the base of using the FBD language of PX Developer for programming

Confirm both of the FBD language form and the instruction/data which can be used on CPU module

Reference

PX Developer Programming

Manual

Operating procedure 3: Set PX Developer

Confirm the system which can be used by PX Developer

Confirm the function which can run on PX Developer

Connect the personal computer to the network of the process control system

Install PX Developer to the personal computer

Reference

PX Developer Operating

Manual (Programming Tool) and (Monitor Tool)

Method of installing the PX

Developer (Included with the product)

Operating procedure 4: Programming with the programming tool

Start the programming tool of PX Developer

Remember the screen display and basic operation of the programming tool

Create the project of PX Developer with the programming tool

Programming with the programming tool in FBD language

Compile FBD language program with the programming tool

Download the program to CPU module with the programming tool

Online operation and debug with the programming tool

(To the next page)

A-18

Reference

PX Developer Operating

Manual (Programming Tool)

A-18

(From the previous page)

Operating procedure 5: Set the monitor tool

Start the monitor tool of PX Developer

Switch the monitor tool mode to the engineer mode

Confirm the screen configuration and basic operation

Set the display mode of the monitor target and the monitor screen

Operating procedure 6: Execute test operation and confirm/adjust the setting

Display the monitor screen and reconfirm the settings

Confirm the content of tag data by monitoring the faceplate

Execute test operation and tuning

Reference

Chapter 5

Chapter 4

Chapter 6

Chapter 9

Reference

Chapter 7

Chapter 10

Operating procedure 7: Set the user-created screen (User monitor screen)

Create the user-created screen (user monitor screen) with Microsoft

Basic R with ActiveX control

R

Visual

Assign the created user-created screen to the buttons of the monitor toolbar so that the screen can be started from the monitor tool

Reference

Chapter 11

Chapter 9

Operating procedure 8: Run the process control system

Switch the monitor tool mode to operator mode

Display the monitor screen and begin system monitor

Run the process control system with the program which has been downloaded to

CPU module

Reference

Chapter 4

Chapter 7

QCPU User's Manual

(Hardware Design,

Maintenance and Inspection)

QCPU User's Manual



QnUCPU User's Manual



A-19 A-19

GENERIC TERMS, ABBREVIATIONS, AND TERMS

The following table shows the generic terms, abbreviations, and terms in this manual.

(1) Generic terms and abbreviations

Generic term/abbreviation Description

PX Developer

Programming tool

Monitor tool

GX Works2

GX Developer

GX Simulator

GX Simulator2

GX application

GX project

Simulator

OPS

Standalone

Server

Primary server

Secondary server

Client

GT SoftGOT

GT Designer2

GT Designer3

Windows

Windows

Windows

Windows Vista

Windows

R

R

R

R

8.1

8

7

XP

Personal computer

Process CPU

Redundant CPU

CPU module

R

Generic term for PX Developer Version 1 (SW1D5C-FBDQ-E) and PX Developer Monitor Tool

(SW1DNC-FBDQMON-E)

For PX Developer, Programming Tool and Monitor Tool are installed.

For PX Developer Monitor Tool, only Monitor Tool is installed.

Abbreviation for PX Developer programming tool

Abbreviation for PX Developer monitor tool

Abbreviation for GX Works2 Version 1 (SW1DNC-GXW2-E Version 1.98C) or later

Abbreviation for GX Developer Version 7 (SW7D5C-GPPW-E Version 7.20W) or later

Abbreviation for GX Simulator Version 7 (SW7D5C-LLT-E Version 7.27D) or later

Abbreviation for GX Works2 simulation function

Generic term for GX Works2 and GX Developer interacted with PX Developer

Generic term for GX Works2 project and GX Developer project included in PX Developer

Generic term for GX Simulator2 (GX Works2 simulation function) and GX Simulator

Abbreviation for Operator Station

Abbreviation for a monitor tool configured by of the standalone monitoring system with only one

OPS, not interacting with other OPSs

Abbreviation for a monitor tool which starts up as Server in the server/client monitoring system interacting with multiple OPSs

Abbreviation for a server to which clients connect primarily

Abbreviation for a server to which clients automatically reconnect when a primary server error occurs

Abbreviation for a monitor tool which starts up as Client in the server/client monitoring system interacting with multiple OPSs

Generic term for GT SoftGOT1000 Version 2, GT SoftGOT1000 Version 3, and GT SoftGOT2000

Version 1

Abbreviation for GT Designer2 Version 2

Abbreviation for GT Designer3 Version 1

Generic term for Microsoft R

Microsoft

Microsoft

R

R

Windows

Windows

R

R

Windows R 8.1 Operating System,

8.1 Pro Operating System, and

8.1 Enterprise Operating System

Generic term for Microsoft

Microsoft

R

Windows

R

R Windows R 8 Operating System,

8 Pro Operating System, and

Microsoft R Windows R 8 Enterprise Operating System


R

Windows

R

7 Starter Operating System,

Microsoft R

Microsoft

R

Microsoft R

Microsoft

R

Windows R

Windows

R

Windows R

Windows

R

7 Home Premium Operating System,

7 Professional Operating System,

7 Ultimate Operating System, and

7 Enterprise Operating System

Generic term for Microsoft R

Microsoft

R

Windows Vista

R

Microsoft R

Microsoft

R

Microsoft R

Windows Vista

Windows Vista

Windows Vista

R

R

R

Windows Vista R Home Basic Operating System,

Home Premium Operating System,

Business Operating System,

Ultimate Operating System, and

Enterprise Operating System


Microsoft

R

Windows

R

R Windows R XP Professional Operating System and

Home Edition Operating System

Generic term for IBM-PC/AT-compatible personal computer

Generic term for Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, and Q25PHCPU

Generic term for Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU

Generic term for the Process CPU and Redundant CPU

A-20 A-20

Generic term/abbreviation Description

QCPU

PC CPU module

Computer link module

E71

QE71

For A series

Generic term for Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU, Q00CPU, Q00UCPU, Q01CPU, Q01UCPU, Q02CPU,

Q02HCPU, Q02PHCPU, Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q03UDECPU, Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDHCPU,

Q04UDVCPU, Q06HCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q06UDVCPU,

Q10UDHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q12HCPU, Q12PHCPU, Q12PRHCPU, Q13UDHCPU,

Q13UDEHCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU, Q25HCPU, Q25PHCPU,

Q25PRHCPU, Q26UDHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU, Q26UDVCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, and

Q100UDEHCPU

Abbreviation for MELSEC-Q series-compatible PC CPU module manufactured by CONTEC CO. ,

LTD.

Generic term for A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-R4, A1SJ71C24-PRF, A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-

PRF, and A1SCPUC24-R2

Generic term for AJ71UC24, A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-R4, and A1SJ71UC24-PRF For AnU series

Serial communication module

For QnA series

Generic term for AJ71QC24, AJ71QC24-R2, AJ71QC24-R4, AJ71QC24N, A1SJ71QC24,

A1SJ71QC24-R2, AJ71QC24N-R2, AJ71QC24N-R4, A1SJ71QC24N, and A1SJ71QC24N-R2

Generic term for QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, and QJ71C24N-R4 For Q series

Redundant type extension base unit Abbreviation for Q65WRB extension base unit for redundant system

CC-Link IE Controller Network module

Generic term for QJ71GP21-SX and QJ71GP21S-SX

MELSECNET/H module

Ethernet module

Generic term for QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25, QJ71LP21G, and QJ71BR11

Generic term for E71, QE71, and Q series-compatible E71

Generic term for AJ71E71-S3, A1SJ71E71-B2-S3, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-

B5T, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-T, AJ71E71N-B5,

A1SJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N3-T, and A1SJ71E71N3-T

Generic term for AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71-B2, A1SJ71QE71-B5, AJ71QE71N-T,

A1SJ71QE71N-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N-B5, AJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-B2,

AJ71QE71N-B5T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T, AJ71QE71N3-T, and A1SJ71QE71N3-T

Q series-compatible E71

CC-Link module

C24

G4 module

CC-Link IE Controller Network

Generic term for QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, and QJ71E71

Generic term for AJ61BT11, A1SJ61BT11, AJ61QBT11, A1SJ61QBT11, QJ61BT11, and

QJ61BT11N

Generic term for computer link module and serial communication module

Abbreviation for AJ65BT-G4(-S3) peripheral connection module

Abbreviation for CC-Link IE Controller Network system compatible with the Q series

MELSECNET/H

MELSECNET/10

Abbreviation for MELSECNET/H network system compatible with the Q series

Abbreviation for MELSECNET/10 network system compatible with the AnU, QnA/Q4AR

MELSECNET/10 compatible mode

Abbreviation for function and performance-compatible mode so that the MELSECNET/H network system can have upward compatibility to existing MELSECNET/10 network system

CC-Link IE Controller Network board Abbreviation for CC-Link IE Controller Network interface board

MELSECNET/H board

MELSECNET/10 board

Ethernet board

CC-Link board

Network module

Abbreviation for MELSECNET/H interface board

Abbreviation for MELSECNET/10 interface board

Generic term for Ethernet PC card and Ethernet interface board supported by Windows

R

Generic term for A80BDE-J61BT11, A80BDE-J61BT13, Q81BD-J61BT11, and Q80BD-J61BT11N

Generic term for MELSECNET/10(H) network module of QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, and

QJ71BR11, and Ethernet interface module of QJ71E71(-B2)

(2) Terms

DDC

FBD

ST

FB

Term Description

Abbreviation for Direct Digital Control

A control of controller functions with a digital device.

Abbreviation for Function Block Diagram defined in IEC61131-3

Programs are created by connecting variables, constants, and blocks containing specific processing, according to the flow of data signal.

Abbreviation for Structured Text defined in IEC61131-3

Programs are created by writing arithmetic operations and logical operations in text format.

Abbreviation for Function Block

A block with a specific function used in a program.

A-21 A-21

Tag

Tag data

Tag data item

Tag FB

Global variable

Faceplate

Term Description

Lockout tag

Identification symbol attached to each DDC processing defined by JIS

This can be likened to a tag attached to process control equipment.

Summarizes data attached to DDC processing indicated with a tag (process condition data/process status data).

Accessing the tag data can monitor status and set conditions of the relevant DDC.

Each data item that makes up tag data

Function block works as a controller or an indicator containing tag data

Variables registered in the global variable declaration window in programming tool.

Gauge window on which an indicator such as a controller is displayed in image format

Values assigned to tag data are manipulated.

Eye-graph tag displayed on a faceplate that indicates precautions for operations and restrictions according to operation authority

Also, this designates making the settings to the faceplate.

DV

Deviation

Difference between setting value (SV) and process variable (PV)

PID control

Auto tuning step response method

Auto tuning limit cycle method

Project ID code

Assignment information database

Operation mode

Backup mode

Separate mode

Debug mode

Operation mode change

System A

System B

Control that calculates and outputs a manipulated variable (MV) to have the process variable (PV) reach to the same value as the setting value (SV) sooner and precisely by combining P action (proportional action), I action (integral action), and D action (derivative action)

Method that detects dynamic characteristics by moving the plant and automatically obtains proportional gain

(Kp), integral time (Ti), and derivative time (Td) of PID based on the Ziegler-Nichols step response method

Method that detects dynamic characteristics by moving the plant and automatically obtains proportional gain

(Kp), integral time (Ti), and derivative time (Td) of PID based on the vibration amplitude and vibration period caused by two-step action (on-off action) of manipulated variable (MV)

Identification code used to check whether the monitor target project ( tool matches the project in the CPU module

Section 9.4) set with the monitor

‘*.mdb’ file which is created when compilation is executed in the programming tool

This file stores assignment information of variables for storing data such as tag data, global variable and device information of the CPU module.

Mode for determining the operation method of the redundant system

The following three modes are available.

• Backup mode

• Separate mode

• Debug mode

Mode for normal operation of the redundant system

If a failure or an error occurs in the control system, the standby system switches to the control system to continue the control of the redundant system.

The operation mode can be switched to the separate mode using GX application.

Mode for maintaining a system (partial modification of a program, replacement of modules mounted on the main base unit) without stopping the control during run of the redundant system

During this mode, different programs can be executed in the control system and standby system.

System switching cannot be made in this mode (User switching is possible).

The operation mode can be switched to the backup mode using GX application.

Mode for performing a debug using a single system prior to redundant system operation

This permits operations without connecting tracking cables.

In this mode, the CPU module is fixed to system A, control system.

(Tracking of the redundant system is not performed.)

Set/cancel this mode in the redundant parameter setting of GX application.

Switching of the operation mode for system A and system B using GX application while the redundant system is running

The operation mode can be switched between the backup mode and separate mode.

System to which system A connector for tracking cable is connected in the redundant system

System to which system B connector for tracking cable is connected in the redundant system

A-22 A-22

Term Description

System switching

System switching

User switching

Control system

Standby system

Tracking transfer function

Redundant system

Redundant parameter

Well-known port number

Modal dialog box

Modeless dialog box

Control switching to backup system to continue system control and network communication when a trouble occurs in the system that performs control in the redundant system (when a failure or an error occurs in the power supply system, mounted module, or network)

(Switching between control system and standby system to avoid system down)

The following two types are available.

• System switching

Automatic system switching by the redundant system when a trouble occurs

• User switching

System switching by sequence program/GX application

A system that performs program operation, system control, and network communication in the redundant system

When system A and system B start concurrently in the backup mode, the system A will be the control system.

(Concurrent startup: One system starts within three seconds after the other system has started.)

When the system A and system B start separately, a system that starts first will be the control system.

Backup system to continue system control in case of a failure or an error in the module in the control system in the redundant system (The CPU module in the standby system does not calculate programs.)

When system A and system B start concurrently in the backup mode, the system B will be the standby system.

(Concurrent startup: One system starts within three seconds after the other system has started.)

When the system A and system B start separately, a system that starts later will be the standby system.

Data transfer function that keeps the data of control system and standby system consistent

This function enables the standby system to serve as the control system to continue the system control in case of system down of the control system.

The Redundant CPU can perform tracking transfer without making the tracking settings, as it tracking transfer setting data has been set by default. (Change tracking transfer setting data using GX application.)

System configured using Redundant CPUs

This system consists of two basic systems including CPU modules, power supply modules, and network modules. (If module error occurs in one system, the other system continues the system control. Thus, system reliability is improved.)

To configure the redundant system, prepare two sets of the systems where the above modules of the same models are mounted on the base unit, and connect the CPU modules with tracking cables.

Parameter for setting operation mode of Redundant CPU system and tracking transfer setting data (tracking setting)

Use GX application to set the parameter.

Port number used in main protocols of TCP/IP

Assigned in the range of 0 to 1023.

A dialog box that avoids any operations other than relating to the open dialog box until it is closed

A dialog box that can be left open while performing any other operations

A-23 A-23

MEMO

A-24 A-24

1 OVERVIEW

MELSOFT

1 OVERVIEW

1.1 Overview

PX Developer is a software package which supports processing DDC on CPU module.

PX Developer consists of programming tool and monitor tool. The programming work is done in FBD language. DDC processing monitor is done with tag data.

PX Developer

Programming tool (FBD program editing function,

FBD Ladder compile function)

Monitor tool (DDC monitoring function)

FBD: Function Block Diagram. DDC: Direct Digital Control.

1

The monitor tool mentioned in this manual is a software tool monitoring and controlling DDC processing on CPU module.

<Monitor Tool Screen>

1-1 1-1

1

1 OVERVIEW

MELSOFT

The monitor tool monitors and controls DDC processing executed in the way of tag

FB with the programming tool.

Inside Tag FB, there is a data area called tag data. This tag data is arranged on the

PLC device. When a program with this tag FB is executed, the tag data can show the logical status of DDC processing at any time. Meanwhile, the monitor tool controls

DDC processing logic itself through parameters in this tag data.

Monitor tool communicates with CPU module, and monitors/controls this tag data.

The content of tag data can be read and displayed on various kinds of monitor screens. And values can be written to the tag data by users' operation.

The global variables and devices can be read and displayed on the various kinds of monitor screens.

CPU module

PLC Device

(R device)

PVP

TIC001

M_PID

MVN

CASIN

CASOUT

TAG FB

:

:

:

FUNC

MODE

MDH

ALM

INH

ALML

CTNO

:

:

:

:

:

Monitor tool accesses tag data, monitors and controls DDC process on CPU module.

Device read out

Device write in

Tag data

Monitor tool

Various monitoring functions

Personal computer

The monitoring status with the insertion of tag data

Besides, monitor tool offers ActiveX controls which can be acquired/set the desired values inside tag data or display faceplates. As a result, the desired user graphic screens (user monitor screens) can be created with Microsoft

R

Visual Basic

R

.

User-created screens made with ActiveX control are easy to be opened by pressing buttons on the monitor tool.

1-2 1-2

1 OVERVIEW

MELSOFT

1.2 Features

(1) Shorten configuration time of process control system with tag monitoring control function.

Various standard functions are installed inside the monitor tool for tag monitoring control, which are necessary for the start adjustment of process control system.

Communication processing does not need to be programmed, because monitoring work can be done by easily setting tags made by PX Developer programming tool.

[

Standard monitor function installed inside PX Developer monitor tool

]

<Tuning trend graph> <Control panel>

<Trend graph>

<Faceplate>

<Alarm list> <Event list>

(2) Various connection methods with CPU

The monitor tool can monitor and operate up to 16 CPU modules via CC-Link IE

Controller Network, MELSECNET/10(H) or Ethernet network.

The serial/USB connection, CC-Link connection and GOT transparent are allowed for adjusting the CPU.

[Communication route of PLC transfer setup that can be set in the monitor tool]

Communication route

Serial/USB

MELSECNET/10

MELSECNET/H

CC-Link IE Controller Network

Ethernet

CC-Link

GOT transparent

Adjustment Application

: usable

: unusable

1-3 1-3

1 OVERVIEW

MELSOFT

(3) Operation environment with single/multiple windows adapted to different purposes.

According to different purposes, single-window mode and multi-window mode can be selected. The former can always display only one screen in maximal size.

The latter can display several screens at the same time, furthermore, the window's size and its arrangement can be changed freely through easy setting.

<Single-window mode>

<Multi-window mode>

(4) Mis-operation by persons not concerned can be avoided by managing user names and passwords.

In monitor tool, operators without registering user names and passwords

(without right) cannot change modes to change numerical values and setting.

Setting the mode to the lock mode enables to avoid mis-operations by persons not concerned even operators are out.

Lock Mode

Only monitoring is available.

Operator Mode

(for monitoring)

The monitoring operation is available.

*1

User name and password specifying mode modification

Engineer Mode

(for design and management)

The monitoring operation and setting data change are available.

*1

*1: The monitoring operation is for monitoring/changing the tag data.

1-4 1-4

1 OVERVIEW

MELSOFT

(5) Interaction with GT SoftGOT is possible

Graphic screens created with GT Designer2 can be displayed by starting up GT

SoftGOT from the Monitor tool. The existing GOT screens can be utilized and also graphics can be created using familiar GT Designer2 or GT Designer3.

Calling monitor tool functions such as faceplate from GT SoftGOT reduces working hours for creating screens.

Monitor toolbar

Switches the GT SoftGOT base screen.

GT SoftGOT base screen

A graphic screen that is displayed full-screen on the desktop.

Faceplate screen

Monitors or operates tags and performs tuning.

GT SoftGOT touch switch

Pops up each screen for Monitor tool.

(6) Auto-generation of GOT screen is possible

GOT screen project can be generated automatically from PX Developer project by using the monitor tool to execute simple setting such as placing screens and then following the wizard to enter required items. This reduces working hours for creating monitoring operation screens.

1-5

< Monitor tool >

< GOT screen project >

1-5

1 OVERVIEW

MELSOFT

(7) Support user-created screen made by Microsoft

R

Visual Basic

R

Monitor tool provides ActiveX control to get tag data value. To use this control on the graphs made by Microsoft

R

Visual Basic

R

, the tag data can be monitored.

Click button on the screen to open the faceplate

Display the monitoring value of tag data on the user-created screen

(8) Application to Redundant CPU

Monitoring and control can be performed by redundant system including

Redundant CPUs.

When the system is switched, the monitoring/control target is automatically changed.

QnPRHCPU Redundant configuration

Tracking cable

PX

Developer

(9) Monitoring is enabled by the monitor tool only.

The personal computer in which GX application has not been installed can be monitored by the PX Developer Version 1.06G or later monitor tool only.

(10) Connecting to Simulator

Offline debugging is possible with Simulator in PX Developer Version 1.28E or later.

This enables simulation of setting check and monitor operation without connecting a CPU module.

1-6 1-6

1 OVERVIEW

MELSOFT

(11) Configuring the server/client monitoring system is possible

1) Improving communication performance between the monitor tool and PLCs

A server performs communication with PLCs in a batch, so communication loads on PLCs can be reduced and communication performance can be improved.

2) Displaying the same monitor screen with the monitor tool on every OPS

The monitoring data collected/managed by a server can be displayed on clients. In other words, the same monitor screen can be displayed with the monitor tool on every OPS.

3) Continuous monitoring is possible regardless of server errors

Installing a primary server and a secondary server in the monitoring system enables continuous monitoring when an error occurs in the primary server, for clients switch the server to connect automatically.

4) Synchronizing a buzzer stop and check/deletion of an alarm/event

When an operation, such as a buzzer stop and check/deletion of an alarm/event, is performed in one of OPSs in the monitoring system, its result synchronizes in every OPS in the monitoring system.

A operation result in one OPS synchronizes in all other OPSs in the monitoring system.

Monitor tool clients

Access the monitoring data collected/managed by a server and display it.

PX

Developer

PX

Developer

PX

Developer

Personal computers

(client)

Monitor tool server (primary)

Communicates with PLCs in a batch and collects/manages/displays the monitoring data.

Personal computer

(primary server)

PX

Developer

Ethernet

PX

Developer

Monitor tool server (secondary)

Synchronizes the setting data

with the primary server to

provide against outages of the

primary server.

Personal computer

(secondary server)

CC-Link IE Controller Network, MELSECNET/10(H), Ethernet

1-7

QnPHCPU QnPHCPU

Tracking cable

QnPRHCPU (redundant system)

Tracking cable


POINT

In the redundant server system, the setting data can be changed in the primary server. The secondary server starts up using the setting data of the primary server.

The monitoring data is not equalized between primary and secondary servers.

The monitoring data equalization is a process that synchronizes the monitoring data, such as trend and alarm, between primary and secondary servers.

1-7

1-8

1 OVERVIEW

MEMO

MELSOFT

1-8

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

MELSOFT


2.1 System Configuration

This section deals with system configuration of monitor tools.

2.1.1 Supported CPU

Process CPU: Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU

Redundant CPU: Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU

2.1.2 Communication route

(1) Connecting to Process CPU

QnPHCPU +


QnPHCPU

MELSECNET/H Remote I/Omodule

RS-232 cable

MELSECNET/10(H)

(RemoteI/O network)

QnPHCPU

QnPHCPU + CC-Link module

RS-232 cable

1)-3

RS-232 cable

USB cable

1)-1

G4 module

1)-4

RS-422 conversion cable

PX

Developer

1)-2

QnPHCPU +

CC-Link IE Controller Network,

MELSECNET/H module


MELSECNET/10(H) board

2) 3) 4) 5)

CC-Link IE

Controller Network,

MELSECNET/10(H)

(PLC network)

Twisted pair cable

7) 8) 6)

CC-Link board

Commercially available Ethernetboard

QnPHCPU + Ethernet module

Twisted pair cable

USB cable

RS-232 cable

GOT

Ethernet

QnPHCPU

2

2-1 2-1


MELSOFT

2

Supported route when using Process CPU

When Process CPU is applied for normal operations as operator station, configuring the system that can receive the event notification is required. For details, refer to Appendix 1.2.

No. Connection method Precautions for connection

1)-1 CPU module

Applicable only for adjusting the CPU.

If applied for performing normal operations of the CPU as operator station, the performance cannot be guaranteed. *

1

One CPU module can be connected from one personal computer by USB cable. *

2

1)-3

Serial/USB connection

MELSECNET/10(H) remote



1

Use the type of AJ65BT-G4-S3.

2)

3)

5)

8)

MELSECNET/10 connection

(When using the MESECNET/

10 board)


(When using the MESECNET/ H board)

CC-Link IE Controller Network connection

GOT transparent connection*

6


1

The PLC must be set to the MELSECNET/10 compatible mode.

When connecting a PLC using different types of networks in single network connection or connecting in coexistence network connection, the performance as an operator station in normal operation is not guaranteed. *

1

The MELSECNET board and PLC must be set to the MELSECNET/10 compatible mode.


1


1

CC-Link IE Controller Network compatible version of Process CPU is required.*

3

The driver for CC-Link IE Controller Network board which supports the event notification function is required.*

4

Applicable only for adjusting the CPU when connecting a PLC using different types of networks in single network connection or connecting in coexistence network connection.


1

The performance as an operator station in normal operation is not guaranteed under the following conditions. *

1

• The IP addresses of the Ethernet module and personal computer are not in the same segment.

• When a wireless LAN adapter (NZ2WL) *

5

is applied for communication route.

• Single network connection in which a PLC is connected using different types of networks or in coexistence network connection.



1

CC-Link Ver.1 and Ver.2 boards cannot be used together.

Connection method via GOT is the same as that of GX application.

Note that, GOT transparent function via GOT 2000 is not supported by GX

Developer.



1

2-2 2-2


MELSOFT

*1: This happens as the monitor tool cannot receive event notification. For the system configuration that can receive event notification, refer to Appendix 1.2.

*2: Refer to POINT in Section 2.1.3 .

*3: The Process CPU whose first five digits of serial number is 10042 or later is required.

*4: The driver for CC-Link IE Controller Network board (SW1DNC-MNETG-B) version 1.08J or later is required.

*5: Use a wireless LAN adapter corresponding to national standards where it is used. For details, refer to the manuals of wireless LAN adapter.

*6: For details of GOT transparent function, refer to the following manuals:

• GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Product) For GT Works3 Version1

• GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3

• GOT-A900 Series User's Manual (Connection System Manual)

• GOT-F900 SERIES HARDWARE MANUAL [Connection]

2-3 2-3


(2) Connecting to Redundant CPU of redundant system

(backup mode/separate mode)

QnPRHCPU redundant configuration

MELSOFT


Tracking cable

Tracking cable

Redundant type extension base unit

+ serial communication module


MELSECNET/10(H)

(remote I/O network)

RS-232 cable

USB cable

RS-232 cable

Tracking cable

QnPRHCPU+CC-Link IE

Controller Ne twork, MELSECNET/H module redundant configuration

MELSECNET/H remote I/O module or serial communication module

RS-232 cable

1)-2,3

1)-2 1)-1

PX

Developer

CC-Link IE Co ntroller Network,

MELSECNET/H board

2) 3) 4)

CC-Link IE

Controller Network,

MELSECNET/10(H)

(PLC network)

QnPRHCPU +

CC-Link module redundant configuration

Tracking cable

Tracking cable

G4 module

1)-4


Twisted pair cable

6) 7) 5)

CC-Link board

Commercially available

Ethernet board

QnPRHCPU +

Ethernet module redundant configuration

Twisted pair cable


Tracking cable

Ethernet


Tracking cable


+ CC-Link module

Twisted pair cable

USB cable

RS-232 cable

GOT

Tracking cable


+ Ethernet module


Tracking cable

2-4 2-4


MELSOFT

Supported route when using Redundant CPU (redundant configuration)



1)-1

Serial/USB connection

1)-3

2)

4)

CPU module


MELSECNET/10 connection*

4





1

Connect a cable to the CPU module in either of system A or system B.

(The communication is performed with the CPU module of another system via tracking cable.)


2

When connecting via the serial communication module mounted to the redundant type extension base unit, the version of Redundant CPU needs to be compatible with the redundant type extension base unit. *

3



1



1



1


The driver for MELSECNET/H interface board and the MELSECNET/H module whose versions support Redundant CPU are required. *

5

When connecting PLCs using different types of networks in single network connection or connecting in coexistence network connection, the performance as an operator station in normal operation is not guaranteed. *

1


5

When connecting PLCs using different types of networks in single network connection or connecting in coexistence network connection, the performance as an operator station in normal operation is not guaranteed. *

1

CC-Link IE Controller Network compatible version of Redundant CPU is required.

*

6

The CC-Link IE Controller Network module whose version supports Redundant

CPU is required.*

7


8



1

2-5 2-5


MELSOFT

No.

7)

Connection method


11

Precautions for connection

The Ethernet module of function version D or later is required to support the

Redundant CPU.

When connecting via the Ethernet module mounted to the redundant type extension base unit, the version of Redundant CPU needs to be compatible with the redundant type extension base unit. *

3


1



9



• Connection via the Ethernet module mounted to a redundant type extension base unit.

• When using monitor tool with Windows Vista R or later, the IP addresses of

Ethernet modules of both system A and system B are not on the same segment.

The driver for CC-Link Ver.1 board and CC-Link module whose versions support

Redundant CPU are required. *

10



1


When connecting via the CC-Link module mounted to the redundant type extension base unit, the version of Redundant CPU needs to be compatible with the redundant type extension base unit. *

3




Developer.


1


*2: Refer to POINT in Section 2.1.3.

*3: The Redundant CPU whose first five digits of serial number is 09012 or later is required.

*4: The MELSECNET/10 board is inapplicable, as the driver (SW DNF-MNET10) is incompatible with the Redundant

CPU.

*5: For MELSECNET/H interface board, refer to Section 2.1.4 (1). For MELSECNET/H interface module, the function version D or later is required.


*7: The CC-Link IE Controller Network module whose first five digits of serial number is 10041 or later is required.



*10: For CC-Link Ver.1 board, refer to Section 2.1.4 (3). For CC-Link module, the QJ61BT11N whose first five digits is

06052 or later is required.






2-6 2-6


MELSOFT

(3) Connecting to Redundant CPU of single configuration (debug mode)

QnPRHCPU single CPU configuration


+ serial communication module



MELSECNET/10(H)

(remote I/O network)

RS-232 cable

USB cable

RS-232 cable

MELSECNET/H remote I/O module or serial communication module

RS-232 cable

1)-2,3

1)-2

PX

Developer

1)-1

QnPRHCPU+CC-Link IE

Controller Network, MELSECNET/H module single CPU configuration


MELSECNET/H board

2) 3) 4)

CC-Link IE

Controller Network,

MELSECNET/10(H)

(PLC network)

QnPRHCPU + CC-Link module single CPU configuration

G4 module

1)-4


6)

Twisted pair cable

5)

Commercially available

Ethernet board

QnPRHCPU + Ethernet module single CPU configuration


CC-Link board

Ethernet


Twisted pair cable

7)

USB cable

RS-232 cable


+ CC-Link module

GOT


+ Ethernet module

QnPRHCPU

Single CPU configuration

2-7

POINT

When monitoring the Redundant CPU in the debug mode, power off the other

Redundant CPU or disconnect the CPU from network. Otherwise, a communication error may occur or PX Developer may not normally monitor.

2-7


MELSOFT

Supported route when using Redundant CPU (single CPU configuration)



1)-1

1)-3

2)

4) connection

CPU module


MELSECNET/10 connection*

4





1


2

When connecting via the serial communication module mounted to the redundant type extension base unit, the version of Redundant CPU needs to be compatible with the redundant type extension base unit. *

3



1



1



1



5


1


5


1

CC-Link IE Controller Network compatible version of Redundant CPU is required.*

6

The CC-Link IE Controller Network module whose version supports Redundant

CPU is required. *

7


8



1

The Ethernet module of function version D or later is required to support the

Redundant CPU.

When connecting via the Ethernet module mounted to the redundant type extension base unit, the version of Redundant CPU needs to be compatible with the redundant type extension base unit. *

3


1



9



• Connection via the Ethernet module mounted to a redundant type extension base unit.

2-8 2-8


MELSOFT

No.

7)

Connection method


11

Precautions for connection

The driver for CC-Link Ver.1 board and CC-Link module whose versions support

Redundant CPU are required. *

10



1


When connecting via the CC-Link module mounted to the redundant type extension base unit, the version of Redundant CPU needs to be compatible with the redundant type extension base unit. *

3




Developer.


1


*2: Refer to POINT in Section 2.1.3.


*4: The MELSECNET/10 board is inapplicable, as the driver (SW DNF-MNET10) is incompatible with the Redundant

CPU.

*5: For MELSECNET/H interface board, refer to Section 2.1.4 (1). For MELSECNET/H interface module, the function version D or later is required.


*7: The CC-Link IE Controller Network module whose first five digits of serial number is 10041 or later is required.



*10: For CC-Link Ver.1 board, refer to Section 2.1.4 (3). For CC-Link module, the QJ61BT11N whose first five digits is







2-9 2-9


MELSOFT

(4) Using the PC CPU module

MELSECNET/H

(Remote I/O network)

QnPHCPU/

QnPRHCPU


MELSECNET/H

(Remote I/O network)

MELSECNET/H remote I/O module

QnPHCPU/QnPRHCPU

+CC-Link module

Twisted pair cable

G4 module

QnPHCPU +Serial communication module QnPRHCPU

RS-232 cable

MELSECNET/H board

RS-232 cable

USB cable

QnPHCPU/

QnPRHCPU

RS422 cable

QCPU

1)-4 1)-3 1)-2

Serial/USB

PC CPU module

1)-1 4)

Ethernet

QnPHCPU/QnPRHCPU

+Ethernet module

MELSEC

NET/H module

CC-Link module

QnPHCPU/QnPRHCPU

+MELSECNET/H module

2) 3)

MELSECNET/H

(PLC network)

PX Developer

5)

QnPHCPU/QnPRHCPU

+CC-Link module

BUS I/F driver

MELSECNET/H

CC-Link

Main base module (Q series bus)

Supported route when using PC CPU module



1)-1 CPU module

1)-3 connection

MELSECNET/H remote

Same with the precautions for Serial/USB connection of (1) to (3).

2)

4)


(When using the MESECNET/

H module)

Same with the precautions for MELSECNET/10 connection of (1) to (3). *

2

However, applicable only for adjusting the CPU.


1

Same with the precautions for MELSECNET/H connection of (1) to (3). *

However, applicable only for adjusting the CPU.

2


1

Ethernet connection Same with the precautions for Ethernet connection of (1) to (3).

5) CC-Link connection Same with the precautions for CC-Link connection of (1) to (3). *

2


*2: If accessing other station via MELSECNET/H module and CC-Link module, the PC CPU must be set to control the network modules.

2-10 2-10


MELSOFT

2.1.3 Serial/USB connection

(1) Connection cables for serial/USB connection

The connection method of serial/USB connection cable is the same when they are connected to GX application. For the applicable cables, refer to the following manuals:

 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)

 GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual

POINT

The USB cable connection is not applicable in the following connection structure.

Only one personal computer and one CPU module can be connected by USB cable.

<Structures cannot be constructed>

One personal computer installed with several USB ports is connected to multiple CPU modules.

CPU module

USB cable

USB ca ble

CPU module

One personal computer is connected to multiple CPU modules through USB hub.

CPU module

USB cable

USB hub

USB cable

USB c able

CPU module

REMARK

By connecting a tracking cable to the Redundant

CPU in either of system A or system B,

QnPRHCPU in both systems can be monitored.

(The communication is performed with the CPU module of another system via tracking cable.)

QnPRHCPU

Tracking cable

RS-232 cable (QC30R2) or USB cable

PX

Developer

2-11 2-11


MELSOFT

(2) Precautions on USB connection

1) A communication error may occur when the personal computer communicates with the CPU module after setting the resume function, suspend setting, power-saving function or standby mode.

Do not set any of the above functions for communication with the CPU module.

2) A communication error may occur and normal operation may not be recovered if connecting and disconnecting a USB cable, resetting the CPU module or turning the power ON/OFF is performed frequently during communication with the CPU module.

When a communication error occurs and normal operation is not recovered, remove a USB cable from the CPU module, and then reconnect it after more than five seconds.

(Even after this operation, an error may occur at the initial communication.

Communication, however, will be performed normally at the second time and later.)

2-12 2-12


MELSOFT

2.1.4 Network board

The following describes the applicable network boards to PX Developer Monitor Tool.

For details of corresponding operating systems of network boards, refer to the each network board manual.

(1) MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET/H, CC-Link IE Controller Network board

Network Board

MELSECNET/10

MELSECNET/10 *

MELSECNET/H

CC-Link IE

3

Controller Network

A70BD-J71QLP23 (For PC/AT, optical)

A70BD-J71QBR13 (For PC/AT, coaxial)

Q81BD-J71LP21-25 (For PC/AT, optical) *

4

Q80BD-J71LP21-25 (For PC/AT, optical) *

4

Q80BD-J71LP21S-25 (For PC/AT, optical)

(With external power supply) *

4

Q80BD-J71LP21G (For PC/AT, optical) *

4

Q80BD-J71BR11 (For PC/AT, coaxial) *

4

Q81BD-J71GP21-SX (For PC/AT, coaxial) *

9,

*

10

Q81BD-J71GP21S-SX (For PC/AT, optical)


9,

*

10

Q80BD-J71GP21-SX (For PC/AT, optical) *

9,

*

10

Q80BD-J71GP21S-SX (For PC/AT, optical)


9,

*

10

Driver

SW3DNF-MNET10 (For PC/AT, optical) *

SW0DNC-MNETH(-B)

(For PC/AT, optical) *

5,

*

6,

*

7,

*

8,

SW1DNC-MNETG-B *

11,

*

12,

*

*

14

13,

*

15

1,

*

2

*1: MELSECNET/10 board is inapplicable to Redundant CPU.

*2: Can be used only for Microsoft

R

Windows

R

98 Operating System and Microsoft

R

Workstation Operating System Version 4.0

*3: Should be used in the MELSECNET/10 compatibility mode.

Windows NT

R

*4: The product whose first five digits of serial number are "06032" or later is required to connect to the

Redundant CPU.

*5: Cannot be used for Microsoft

R

Windows

R

Millennium Edition Operating System

*6: The driver (SW0DNC-MNETH(-B)) version 90K or later is required to connect to Redundant CPU.

*7: For Windows

R

7, the driver (SW0DNC-MNETH-B) version 21X or later is required.

*8: For Windows

R

8, the driver (SW0DNC-MNETH-B) version 26C or later is required.

*9: When connecting with the following CPUs, the CPU module whose first five digits is 10042 or later is required.

Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU, Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU

*10: When connecting with Redundant CPU, the CC-Link IE Controller Network module whose first five digits is


*11: To connect to Q02PHCPU or Q06PHCPU, the driver (SW1DNC-MNETG-B) version 1.03D or later is required. (When connecting to other Process CPU or Redundant CPU, the driver for QnHCPU can be used.)

*12: For Windows

*13: For Windows

R

R

7, the driver (SW1DNC-MNETG-B) version 1.11M or later is required.

8, the driver (SW1DNC-MNETG-B) version 1.16S or later is required.

*14: Cannot be used for Windows

*15: For Windows

R

R

8.1.

8.1, the driver (SW1DNC-MNETG-B) version 1.17T or later is required.

2-13 2-13


MELSOFT

The following table shows the Ethernet board/card whose operations are guaranteed by us.

Maker Model

3COM EthernetLink LAN PC Card

Allied Telesis

TDK

CentreCOM LA-PCM Ethernet PC Card LAN Adapter

RE2000 (ISA)

10BASE-T LAN card (Model: LAN-CD021BX)

If there are restrictions on Ethernet module to Ethernet board, follow the restrictions.

Network Board

CC-Link Ver.1

CC-Link Ver.1

CC-Link Ver.2

A80BDE-J61BT11 (Ver.1 Board) *

1

A80BDE-J61BT13 (Ver.1 Board) *

1

Q81BD-J61BT11 (Ver.2 Board) *

1

Q80BD-J61BT11N (Ver.2 Board) *

1

Driver

SW4DNF-CCLINK-B (for PC/AT) *

SW1DNC-CCBD2-B (for PC/AT) *

2,

4,

*

*

3

5,

*

6

*1: CC-Link Ver.1 and Ver.2 boards cannot be used together with the same PC.

*2: If connecting to a Redundant CPU, SW4DNF-CCLINK-B of version G or later is required.

*3: Cannot be used for Microsoft

R

XP

R

Windows

Home Edition, and Windows Vista

R

R

Millennium Edition Operating System, Microsoft

R or later.

*4: For Windows Vista

R

, the driver (SW1DNC-CCBD2-B) version 1.04E or later, for Windows

R

(SW1DNC-CCBD2-B) version 1.08J or later is required.

*5: For Windows

R

8, the driver (SW1DNC-CCBD2-B) version 1.13P or later is required.

*6: Cannot be used for Windows

R

8.1.

Windows

7, the driver

2.1.5 Printer

No limitation in this application.

Printer on personal computer can be used.

2-14 2-14


MELSOFT

2.1.6 Monitoring system configuration with Monitor Tool

(1) Server/client monitoring system configuration

In the server/client monitoring system, up to eighteen OPSs

*1

and up to sixteen

PLCs are connectable. In this case, clients access the monitoring data

*2 collected/managed by a server.

*1: One primary server, one secondary server, and up to sixteen clients, coming to eighteen in all, in the server/client configuration

*2: Clients can display the following kinds of the monitoring data collected by

Server.

 Setting data

 Tag data (Displayed on the control panel and pop-up windows)

 Trend data

 Alarm data

 Event data

18 OPSs

Monitor tool clients

Access the monitoring data collected/managed

by a server and display it.

PX

Developer

Monitor tool server (primary)

Communicates with PLCs in a batch

and collects/manages/displays the

monitoring data.

Personal computer

(primary server)

PX

Developer

PX

Developer

PX

Developer

Personal computers

(client)

Ethernet

PX

Developer

Monitor tool server (secondary)

Synchronizes the setting data with the primary server to provide against outages of the primary server.

Personal computer

(secondary server)


2-15

QnPHCPU QnPHCPU

Tracking cable


Tracking cable


POINT

The CC-Link IE Controller Network or Ethernet connection is recommended if five or more PLCs are to be connected.

2-15


MELSOFT

<System configuration preparing for server outages>

1) Installing two servers (primary and secondary)

Preparing and running a backup server (secondary server) which uses the same setting data as a regular server (primary server) enables the server/client monitoring system configuration providing against server outages. However, the monitoring data is not equalized

*1

even though two servers are running.

Redundant servers enables automatic server switching in the event of a fault of the primary server. Afterward, the connection server can be manually switched after restoration of the primary server. Refer to Section 9.5 for the setting method,

Section 8.6.3 for switching server.

In the redundant server system, the setting data can be changed in the primary server. The secondary server starts up using the setting data of the primary server.

*1: The monitoring data equalization is a process that synchronizes the monitoring data, between the primary server and the secondary server.

(Normal)

Ethernet

PX

Developer

Communication

PX

Developer

PX

Developer

PX

Developer

Primary server

Clients


Secondary server

(Primary server fails)

Ethernet

PX

Developer

Down

PX

Developer

PX

Developer

Connecting to the secondary server automatically

Communication

PX

Developer

Primary server

Clients


Secondary server

2-16 2-16


MELSOFT

2) Installing one server

The server/client monitoring system that has one server (does not have a redundant server) can also be configured.

In the event of a server failure, a client can be connected to PLCs*

1

, and restarted as a substitute server that uses the same setting data*

2

as one used by an original server before the failure.

Change the connection server in the client side when starting a new server. For the setting method, refer to Section 9.5.

*1: To connect a client restarted as Server to PLCs via the same communication route as the failed server, mounting the same network board on a personal computer (client) as a personal computer (server) is necessary.

Also, for connecting a client to PLCs directly, change the PC transfer setting in the monitor target project setting ( Section 9.4).

*2: A client gets the setting data from a server and saves it in itself during executing. Therefore, when restarting as Server, a client can use the setting data gotten from a server immediately before.

(Normal)

Ethernet

PX

Developer

Communication

PX

Developer

PX

Developer

PX

Developer

Server

Clients


2-17

(Server fails)

Ethernet

PX

Developer

Down

Server

Communication

PX

Developer

Client

Standalone

Connecting to PLCs directly.


POINT

The monitoring data that had been collected by a failed server cannot be transferred to a substitute server.

After recovering, a regular server also cannot receive the monitoring data collected by a substitute server during the outage.

2-17

2-18


PX

Developer

MELSOFT

In the standalone monitoring system, one OPS and up to sixteen PLCs are connectable.

For the system configuration in normal operation, refer to Appendix 1.2.1.

Monitor tool

Communicates with PLCs and collects/manages/displays the monitoring data.


QnPHCPU QnPHCPU

Tracking cable


Tracking cable


Up to 16 PLCs

(3) Multiple CPU system with Process CPU

The multiple CPU system including Process CPU can be monitored when the following conditions are satisfied.

 A network module is controlled by each Process CPU, and each Process CPU communicates with control CPU via that network module.

 The whole network includes up to 16 CPUs, including Process CPU of multiple CPU system and CPU module of single CPU system. (In the following diagram, 3 QnPHCPUs are counted.)


Management

Management

QnPHCPU

QnPHCPU

Network module

Network module

QnPHCPU

Network module

Other CPU

Other CPU

<System configuration with multiple CPU system>

* The redundant system does not support the multiple CPU system.

POINT

The CC-Link IE Controller Network or Ethernet connection is recommended if five or more PLCs are to be connected.

2-18


MELSOFT

2.2 Operating Environment

The following table describes is the operating environment.

Computer

CPU

Item Description

PC/AT compatible where Microsoft R Windows R Operating System runs

Required memory

Refer to "Applicable operating system and the corresponding required personal computer performance" in this section.

Hard disk free space

Disk drive

When installing : Hard disk 200MB or more

When operating: Free space of virtual memory 100MB or more

CD-ROM disk drive

Network interface

Pointing devices

Operating system *

2,

*

3

One of the following is required

Ethernet board

*1

MELSECNET/10 interface board

MELSECNET/H interface board

CC-Link IE Controller Network board

Serial, USB and CC-Link board can only be used for adjustment.

2-button mode mouse or the compatible pointing device

Microsoft R Windows NT

Service Pack 3 or later *

4

Microsoft R Windows R

R Workstation Operating System Version 4.0 (English Version)

2000 Professional Operating System (English Version)

Microsoft or later *

5

Microsoft R

R Windows

1 or later *

5

Windows

R

R

XP Professional Operating System (English Version) Service Pack 1

XP Home Edition Operating System (English Version) Service Pack

Microsoft

R

Microsoft

R

Microsoft

Microsoft

R

R

Windows Vista

Windows Vista

Windows Vista

Windows Vista

R

R

R

R

Home Basic Operating System (English Version)

Home Premium Operating System (English Version)

Business Operating System (English Version)

Ultimate Operating System (English Version)

Microsoft

Microsoft

Microsoft

Microsoft

Microsoft

Microsoft

Microsoft

Microsoft

Microsoft

Microsoft

Microsoft

Microsoft

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Windows Vista

Windows

R

R

Enterprise Operating System (English Version)

7 Starter Operating System (English Version)

Windows

R

Windows

R

7 Home Premium Operating System (English Version)

7 Professional Operating System (English Version)

Windows

Windows

R

R

Windows

Windows

R

R

7 Ultimate Operating System (English Version)

7 Enterprise Operating System (English Version)

8 Operating System (English Version)

8 Pro Operating System (English Version)

Windows

Windows

Windows

Windows

R

R

R

R

8 Enterprise Operating System (English Version)

8.1 Operating System (English Version)

8.1 Pro Operating System (English Version)

8.1 Enterprise Operating System (English Version)

Required software package

When PX Developer Version 1.04E or earlier is used

When PX Developer Version 1.06G or later is used

GX Developer Version 7

(SW7D5C-GPPW Version 7.20W or later is required) *

None

6

*1: In the server/client monitoring system configuration, Ethernet boards are necessary for OPS's network interface as network between a personal computer (server) and ones (client) is the Ethernet connection.

*2: Monitor tool cannot be installed on Microsoft R Windows R 98 Operating System and Microsoft R Windows R Millennium

Edition Operating System.

Big fonts (Details setting of Screen properties) are not supported.

*3: The operation on virtual PC environment is not supported. This product may not operate normally.

*4: USB is inapplicable for Microsoft R Windows NT R Workstation 4.0 Operating System, as it will cause a communication error.

*5: Select "Windows Classic" from the Theme dropdown list in the Display Properties in Windows R XP Service Pack2, or install Windows R XP Service Pack3.

*6: GX Developer must be installed because the communication library in GX Developer is used for communication between monitor tool and Process CPU.

2-19 2-19


MELSOFT

Item Description

Related software package

Programming language

Versions of software package required for interaction between PX Developer and GT

SoftGOT1000

Related software Model name

Version

Base screen switching

PX Developer

Security level change

PX Developer Version 1 SW1D5C-FBDQ-E *

7

GT SoftGOT1000 Version 2

SW2D5C-GTD2-E

GT Designer2 Version 2

SW2D5C-GTWK2-E function call

1.14Q or later

2.47Z or later

GT SoftGOT1000 Version 3 SW1DNC-GTWK3-E 3.01B or later

1.31H or later

Not supported

2.47Z or later

3.37P or later

GT Designer3 Version 1 SW1DNC-GTWK3-E 1.01B or later 1.01B or later

Versions of software package required for interaction between PX Developer and GT

SoftGOT2000

Related software


GT SoftGOT2000 Version 1


Model name

SW1D5C-FBDQ-E *

7

SW1DNC-GTWK3-E

SW1DNC-GTWK3-E

Versions of software package required for GOT screen generator

Using GT Designer2

Related software


Model name

SW1D5C-FBDQ-E *

7

Version

1.42U or later

1.105K or later

1.105K or later

Version

1.18U or later


SW2D5C-GTD2-E

SW2D5C-GTWK2-E

2.73B or later

Using GT Designer3

Related software



Model name

SW1D5C-FBDQ-E *

7

SW1DNC-GTWK3-E

Version

1.28E or later

1.23Z or later

Versions of software package required for debugging with Simulator

Using GX Simulator

Related software


Model name

SW1D5C-FBDQ-E

*7

Version

1.28E or later

GX Developer Version 8

GX Simulator Version 7

SW8D5C-GPPW-E

SW7D5C-LLT-E

8.94Y or later

7.27D or later

Using GX Simulator2 *

8

Related software


GX Works2 Version 1

Model name

SW1D5C-FBDQ-E

*7

SW1DNC-GXW2-E

Version

1.42U or later

1.98C or later

Programming language

Visual Basic

Microsoft

Microsoft

Microsoft

Microsoft

Microsoft

Microsoft

R

R

R

R

R

R

Development software

Visual Basic

Visual Basic

R

R

6.0

.NET 2002

Visual Basic R .NET 2003

Visual Studio 2005 Visual Basic R

R

Visual Studio 2008 Visual Basic

Visual Studio 2010 Visual Basic R

*7: For software that has Monitor Tool only, the model name is SW1DNC-FBDQMON-E.

*8: When connecting GX Simulator2 to monitor tool, the operating environment of monitor tool is the same as that of GX

Works2. For the operating environment of GX Works2, refer to "GX Works2 Installation Instructions".

2-20 2-20


MELSOFT

Item Description

Recommended

SCADA software package

Versions of SCADA software package whose operations are verified

Recommended SCADA software Version

Wonderware InTouch 10.0 or later

JoyWatcherSuite 6.0 or later

Note that the operations are not guaranteed when using the mixture of the SCADA software other than mentioned above and ActiveX control provided by the monitor tool.

Check the system before operations.

Applicable operating system and the corresponding required personal computer performance

Operating System

Windows NT R Workstation 4.0

(Service Pack 3 or later) (Pentium R

Required Personal Computer Performance

CPU *

1

Required

Pentium R 133MHz or more

300MHz or more recommended)

Windows R 2000 Professional

Pentium

(Pentium R

R 133MHz or more

300MHz or more recommended)

Windows

R

XP

(Service Pack 1 or later)

Windows Vista R

Pentium R

Pentium R

300MHz or more

1GHz or more

64MB or more

64MB or more

128MB or more

Windows

Windows

Windows

R

R

R

7 (32-bit edition)

7 (64-bit edition)

8 (32-bit edition)

Pentium R 1GHz or more

64-bit (x64) processor 1GHz or more


1GB or more

1GB or more

2GB or more

1GB or more

Windows R

Windows R

Windows R

8 (64-bit edition)

8.1 (32-bit edition)

8.1 (64-bit edition)




2GB or more

1GB or more

2GB or more

*1: Cannot be used in the multi processor environment.

POINT

Folder and file access authorization

This product may make change access to the files of the installation destination folder and sub-folder.

Hence, file change access enable must have been set for these folders and files by the user who uses this product.

If file change access enable has not been set, this product may not operate normally.

When this product is used, it is recommended to log on as the user of the administrators group who has the authority to control all of the computer.

When Windows

R

XP, Windows Vista new functions cannot be used.

R or Windows

R

7 is used, the following

If any of the following new functions is used, this product may not operate normally.

Windows XP Mode

Start of application in Windows

Fast user switching

R compatible mode

Remote desktop

DPI setting other than 100% (set the size of text and illustration other than

[smaller-100%])

Windows Touch or Touch

Modern UI

Client Hyper-V

Windows

R supported.

XP (64-bit edition) and Windows Vista

R

(64-bit edition) are not

2-21 2-21


MELSOFT

POINT

Monitor tools cannot be used with the built-in guest account in Windows Vista

R or later.

Version compatibility between server and client

In the server/client monitoring system, clients and a connection server must have the same product language, and clients must satisfy the following conditions of versions.

Version of server

Version of server and client

Connectability of client

1.20W

1.23Z

1.28E

1.31H to

1.34L

1.42U

1.44W

Version of client version of server

Version of client > version of server

1.23Z Version of client version of server

Version of client < 1.23Z


1.28E Version of client version of server

Version of client < 1.28E


1.31H Version of client version of server

Version of client < 1.31H


1.42U Version of client version of server

Version of client < 1.42U


1.44W Version of client version of server

Version of client < 1.44W


: Applicable, : Not applicable

In the redundant server system, a primary server and secondary server must have the same product language and product version.

Using monitor tools in the server/client monitoring system configuration

When using the Ethernet connection for communication between a server and the PLC, two Ethernet boards need to be mount on the server to configure two

Ethernet network separately, for the PLC communication and the server/client communication. In this case, the server address needs to be specified with IP address format in the monitor tool execution type setting ( Section 9.5) on the server.

Set to use fixed IP addresses in the network connection setting on personal computers (server/client). (The server/client monitoring system cannot be configured with the setting to obtain IP addresses automatically.)

Personal computers (server/client) need to be connected to the same segment network. The following functions are not available among personal computers connected to different segments.

"Time adjustment among OPSs" function (

"Synchronizing a buzzer stop" function (

Section 8.6.6)

Section 8.1)

2-22 2-22


MELSOFT

POINT

Server/client are required to allow the communication to the monitor tool via a network in Windows

R firewall setting.

For details of Windows

R firewall setting, refer to the POINT in Appendix 1.2.2.

User account control (UAC)

In the following cases, the monitor tool needs to be started up setting

"Privilege Level" to "Run this program as an administrator".

When the setting mentioned above is set, all user-created screens

*1

set in the user-created setting also need to be set to "Run this program as an administrator".

In addition, when communication with the PLC is simultaneously performed using another MELSOFT application

*2

, the MELSOFT application also needs to be set to "Run this program as an administrator".

(1) When "Privilege Level" of the application that is set in the user-created screen setting is set to "Run this program as an administrator", "Privilege

Level" of the monitor tool also needs to be set to "Run this program as an administrator."

(2) When the "Time adjustment among OPSs" function is used in the server/client monitoring system, the monitor tools started as Secondary

Server or Client need to be set to "Run this program as an administrator".

(3) When PX Developer is installed in the system area

*3

of Windows, the monitor data file

*4

of the monitor tool is not saved in the folder of PX

Developer installation destination. The data file is saved in the virtualized folder

*5

for each user by the virtualization function of Windows

R

.

Therefore, the monitor data file cannot be shared between users.

To save the monitor data in the folder of PX Developer installation destination, "Privilege Level" of the monitor tool needs to be specified to

"Run this program as an administrator."

For the method to execute programs as an administrator, refer to Section

5.1.

*1: Applications such as GT SoftGOT and Visual Basic

*2: PX Developer programming tool, GX application or etc.

*3: Folders such as "Program Files" and "Windows"

*4: Monitoring data file includes the following:

• Setting data file

• Trend binary data file (when the storage folder is not specified or in the system area)

• Alarm list/Event list data file

• Trend/Alarm/Event automatic CSV file (when the output folder is not specified or in the system are)

*5: For example, when PX Developer is installed in the "Program Files", the file is stored in the "C:\Users\User_name\AppData\Local\VirtualStore\ProgramFiles\FBDQ" as default.

2-23 2-23


2.3 Folder Configuration of Monitor Tool

MELSOFT

Following will explain the folder configuration and file when the monitor tool is stated up correctly and project made by programming tool is monitored.

The default folder structure of monitor tool is as follows.

[Folder structure after the monitor tool is started.]

C:\

Melsec

Fbdq Store application program files.

Prjdata Store assignment information database files of monitor target project.

(Read files under file package when the monitor tool is started)

.mdb Copies of the assignment information database files configured by results

compiled through programming tool.

Setdata Store setting data files.

M_SET.MDB Monitor tool configures data files.

M_USER.MDB Monitor tool user configures information files.

M_OPS.mdb Monitor tool execution type setting data files.

Sysdata

M_SET.mdb

M_USER.mdb

M_OPS.mdb

M_MASTER.mdb

Store system data files.

Monitor tool configures data files, and stores initial setting.

Monitor tool user configures information files, and store initial setting.

Monitor tool execution type setting data files, and store initial setting.

Master data files of monitor tool, and store master tag data.

Tmpprjdata

.mdb

Store assignment information database files of monitor target project.

Used as temporary folder when modifying registration on monitor target project setting screen.

The folder is renamed as Prjdata when saving setting data (close the monitor target project setting screen, save with file menu).

Copies of assignment information database files configured by results compiled through programming tool.

WorkClient

Workdata

ALARM. DAT

EVENT.DAT

WorkServer

Trenddata

.DAT

Store temporary files for Client.

Store wording files. One file is created for one trend pen.

Alarm list data files, written when monitor tool is ended, read when it is started.

Event list data files, written when monitor tool is ended, read when it is started.

Store temporary files for Server.

Store trend binary data files. One file is created for one trend pen.

This folder package can change the save detination by option setting.

Trend binary data files.

<Tag item> File name: Project name_Tag name_Item name_sampling period.DAT

<Monitor variable> File name: Project name_Monitor variable name_sampling period.DAT

Userdata

TrendCSV

.csv

AlarmCSV

.csv

Store CSV files provided by automatic CSV file export.

Store CSV files provided by automatic trend CSV file export.

The position of storing this folder can be changed by option setting.

Automatic trend CSV files. One file is created for one group.

<When the sampling period is 1s or 10s (one file is created in an hour)>

File name: TrendGroup*

1

(trend group No.)_(storage date)_(time).csv

<When the sampling period is 1 min, 5 min or 10 min (one file is created in a day)>

File name: TrendGroup*

1

(trend group No.)_(storage date)_.csv

*1: With the settings to include a group name, replaced with a group name

Store CSV files provided by automatic alarm CSV file export.


Automatic alarm CSV files. One file is created in a day.

File name: Alarm_(storage date).csv

EventCSV

.csv

Store CSV files provided by automatic event CSV file export.


Automatic event CSV files. One file is created in a day.

File name: Event_(storage date).csv

Data that can be edited

2-24 2-24


MELSOFT

POINT

Do not open or edit the folders/files other than the data that can be edited.

However, the copy operation target folders/files of setting data can be copied/pasted. ( Section 9.1.4)

Installation directory can be changed when installing.

The positions of the "Trenddata", "TrendCSV", "AlarmCSV" and "EventCSV" folders, which store trend binary data files and the files output by automatic

CSV file export, can be changed by option setting.

(2) Reference files in the server/client monitoring system configuration

In a secondary server and clients, by default, file paths in the following settings in clients are the same as in a primary server. If applications/sound files are installed/located to different paths in a secondary server and clients, change their paths individually in these settings.

 Applications registered in the user-created screen setting

 Sound files of Minor alarm/Major alarm/Event in the option setting

2-25 2-25

3 FUNCTION OVERVIEW

MELSOFT

3 FUNCTION OVERVIEW

3.1 Function Overview

The functions of PX Developer monitor tool are as follows

3

Monitor function

Buzzer stop

Print screen

Pop-up tuning

Screen Align

Find

Control panel

Trend graph

Alarm list

Event list

User-created screen

Pop-up faceplate

Manage Mode

Setting

Display PLC communication status

Server/client communication status

Switch Server

Automatic CSV file export

Exit

The primary functions performed by toolbar and their corresponding set function screens are introduced here.

For details, refer to "Section 9.18 Setting under This Condition".

Acquire server setting data

Display up to 8 faceplates simulating the process control device

Control panel setting

A time sequence change chart that displays trend item value. Trend setting

A list that maximum displays 2000 alarm records

A list that maximum displays 2000 event records

Applied program pointed by start which can display the usercreated screen.

A faceplate that can display simulating the process control device by using pop-up window.

Alarm setting

Event setting

User-created screen setting

A faceplate that can display a tuning pop-up window

(faceplate + tuning trend graph + tag monitor).

Stop alarm buzzer.

Hardcopy of whole screen in the print display.

Overlap the diagrams in display or redisplay after vertical arrangement.

Find tag, Control panel, and Trend graph. Display pop-up faceplate after finding it.

Determining function limit according to the authority of user.

(Mode divided into: lock mode, operator mode engineer mode)

Set up work conditions of each function.

Display the communication status between a monitor tool and

CPU modules.

Display the communication status between a server and clients in the server/client monitoring system.

Clients can manually switch the server to be connecting when

"Redundant Server" is activated.

Option setting

Option setting

Control panel setting, trend setting.

User authority setting

User setting

Monitor target project setting

OPS setting

OPS setting

Clients load the setting data from a server when it is changed in the server.

Save trend, alarm and event data in CSV files automatically as histories.

Stop monitor, exit monitor tool.

OPS setting

Trend setting

Option setting

3-1 3-1

3 FUNCTION OVERVIEW

MELSOFT

3.2 Function List

The functions of monitor tool are shown here. "Authority" in the table shows the mode in which this function can be used. A certain function cannot be selected and used in other modes.

For details, refer to "Chapter 4 MODE ADMINISTRATION".

Monitor function (General operation) list

General operation of monitor window

Close window

Maximize/Minimize Window

General operation of faceplate

Change window size

SPA (stop alarm) reset

Setting/Removing Lockout Tag

Change I/O mode

Change control mode

Change motion type

PV value setting

SV value setting

MV value setting

Count value setting

Batch count operation

Counter/timer operation

Status operation

E/O/L

E/O/L

E/O/L

E/(O)

E/(O)

E/(O)

E/(O)

E/(O)

E/(O)

E/(O)

E/(O)

E/(O)

E/(O)

E/(O)

E/(O)

Section 6.2

Section 6.2.1

Section 6.2.2 to

Section 6.2.4

Section 6.2.5

Section 10.1

Section 10.1

Section 10.2

Section 10.3.2

Section 10.3.3

Section 10.3.4

Section 10.3.7

Section 10.3.8

Section 10.3.9

Section 10.3.10

Section 10.3.11

Section 10.3.12

Section 10.3.13

(Authority...E: Engineer mode/O: Operator mode/(O): Operator mode with operation authority/L: Valid for lock mode)

REMARK

3

In the operator mode, only tag levels permitted by User Authority Setting (

Section 9.2) can be operated with the setting/removing lockout tag function of the faceplate general operation.

3-2 3-2

3 FUNCTION OVERVIEW

MELSOFT

Monitor function (Monitor window) list

Control panel|

Display

Operation

Trend graph

Display

Operation

Alarm list

Display

Operation

Group tab display (Maximum 500 group)

Faceplate display (Maximum 8 per screen)

Switch groups to be displayed

Faceplate operation

Display pop-up tuning screen

Group tab display (Maximum 125 group)

Trend graph display (maximum 8 per screen)

Switch groups to be displayed

Latest value display

Gridline Interval setting

Y-axis scale setting

Export to CSV file

Display CSV file

Display system alarm detail screen

Display pop-up faceplate screen

Alarm display

Confirm check

Selected display of alarm

Delete Recovered Alarms

Confirm all

E/O/L

E/O

E/O/L

E/O/L

E/O/L

E/(O)

E/O/L

E/O/L

E/O/L

E/O/L

E/(O)

E/O/L

E/(O)

E/(O)

Section 7.1

Section 7.1.2

Chapter 10

Section 7.1.3

Section 7.2

Section 7.2.3

Section 7.2.4

Section 7.2.6

Section 7.2.7

Section 7.3

Section 7.3.1

Section 7.6

Section 7.3.1

Section 7.3.2

Section 7.3.3

Section 7.3.4

Section 7.3.5

Event list

Display

Operation

Export to CSV file

Operation record

State change record

Information record

Monitor target project load history

Monitor tool start/stop history

Confirm check

Delete all

Confirm all

E/(O)

E/(O)

E/(O)

E/(O)

Section 7.3.7

Section 7.4

Section 7.4.2

Section 7.4.3

Section 7.4.4

User-created screen

Export to CSV file E/(O)

E/O/L

Section 7.4.6

Section 7.5


3-3 3-3

3 FUNCTION OVERVIEW

MELSOFT

Monitor function (Pop-up window) list

Pop-up faceplate

Display

Operation

Pop-up tuning

Faceplate display

Faceplate operation


E/O/L

E/(O)

E/O/L

Section 7.6

Section 7.6.1

Chapter 10

Section 7.6.2

Section 7.7

Display

Operation

Faceplate display

Tag monitor display

Tuning trend display

Faceplate operation

Tuning trend collecting instruction

Change current value

E/(O)

E/(O)

Auto tuning (Step Response method/Limit Cycle method) E/(O)

Gridline interval setting

Tuning function


Collected tag list

Export to CSV file

E/(O)

E/O/L

E/(O)

Chapter 10

Section 7.7.3

Section 7.7.4

Section 7.7.5

Section 7.7.7

Section 7.7.8


Other functions (Monitor toolbar)

Stop Buzzer

Print screen

Screen Alignment

Find

Change Mode

Exit

Help Menu

Display operating manual

E/(O)

E/(O)

Section 8.1

Section 8.2

Cascade display

Tile display

Search by tag name

Search by control panel group name

Search by trend graph group name

Switch Server/Connect Server

Acquire server setting data

PLC error display

E/O/L

E/O/L

E/O/L

E/O/L

Section 8.3

Section 8.4

E/O/L

E/(O)

Section 4.5

Section 5.2

Display PLC communication status

Display E/O/L

Section 8.5

Reset E/(O)

Display server/client communication status E/O/L Section 8.6.7

Section 8.6.3/

Section 8.6.4

Section 8.6.5

Monitor Tool

GOT Screen Generator

About PX Developer


3-4 3-4

3 FUNCTION OVERVIEW

MELSOFT

Other functions (Automatic functions)


Automatic trend CSV file export

Automatic alarm CSV file export

Automatic event CSV file export

Automatic CSV file deletion

Disk free space check

E/O/L

E/O/L

E/O/L

E/O/L

E/O/L

Section 8.7

Section 8.7.1

Section 8.7.2

Section 8.7.3

Section 8.7.4

Section 8.7.5

(Authority ... Valid in E: Engineer mode/O: Operator mode/L: Lock mode)

List of usable software component in Microsoft

R

Visual Basic

R

Tag data access control

Faceplate control

Setting (General operation) list

Section 11.2

Common item of setting window

Setting item selection

Apply setting

Button operation

Setting cancel

E

Section 9.1

Section 9.1.1

Menu

File

Edit

Save the setting data

Export setting data to CSV file

Generate GOT screen

Close

Cut

Copy

Paste

Delete

Delete row

(Authority...E: Engineer mode/O: Operator mode/L: Valid for lock mode)

3-5 3-5

3 FUNCTION OVERVIEW

MELSOFT

Setting (Item) list

Change in a

Function Setting secondary server


General

Change of the values of tag data item

Trend graph

Pop-up tuning

Alarm/event

Stop buzzer

Print screen

Exit monitor tool

Process instruction values/Mode

Alarm threshold values

Tuning parameter values

Process design values

Export to CSV file

Export to CSV file


Export to CSV file

Print

Confirm

Delete

E

Section 9.2

PLC communication status

Reset

Setting/removing lockout tag

Operator1 level

Operator2 level

Operator3 level

Operator4 level

Engineer level

User setting

User name

Password

Authority

E

Section 9.3


Project name

Assignment information database file

Transfer setup

Simulator Connection

E

Section 9.4

OPS setting

Monitor tool execution type setting

OPS list

E

Section 9.5

Monitor variable setting

Variable name/Device

Data type

Variable type

Low limit

High limit

Digits after decimal point

Unit

Comment

E

Section 9.6

Change in clients


(Change... : Changeable, : Not changeable)

3-6 3-6

3 FUNCTION OVERVIEW

MELSOFT

Change in a



Group name

Tag name

E

Section 9.7

Trend setting

Group name

Sampling period


Tag data item

Y-axis scale top limit, bottom limit

E

Section 9.8

Alarm setting

Change in clients

Event setting

Section 9.10

E

User-created screen setting

Unit setting

Application

E

Section 9.11

Argument

Section 9.12

Unit E

Faceplate display pattern setting

Tag type selection

String of display and operation button

Character string color/background color of operation button and display (indicator)

E

Section 9.13

Faceplate display scale setting

Tag name

PV graph display scale bottom limit

PV graph display scale top limit

PV graph display division number

PV graph display direction

PV graph base point when both direction is set

Faceplate MV characters setting

Tag name

MV graph display character (0%)

MV graph display character (100%)

Lockout tag setting

E

E

Section 9.14

Section 9.15

Lockout tag name

Text color, background color

Authority level

E

Section 9.16



3-7 3-7

3 FUNCTION OVERVIEW

MELSOFT

Change in a


Option setting

Change in clients

Setting window font

Monitor window font

Printer

General

Window mode

Minor alarm color

Major alarm color

Return check interval (s)

Return check timeout (s)

PLC status check interval (s)

Write tag data (even if the PC's and

PLC's project ID codes are different)

Automatic CSV file deletion time (0 to 23)

Server/client

Alarm/ event

General

Minor alarm

Disk free space check size (MB)

Exit monitor tool when windows logoff or shutdown

Time adjustment among OPSs

Switch/Reconnect server during screens are displayed

Alarm/Event display on 2nd Line of monitor toolbar

Alarm/Event display format of monitor toolbar

Highlighted display while alarms occur

Event notification UDP port No.(HEX)


Automatic alarm CSV file deletion

Alarm CSV file storage period (days)

Automatic alarm CSV file export target folder

Tag data item display of alarm

Unconfirmed alarms deletion at delete recovered alarms


Automatic event CSV file deletion

Event CSV file storage period (days)

Automatic event CSV file export target folder

Tag data item display of event

Unconfirmed events deletion at delete all

Buzzer type

Beep sound time interval

Beep sound frequency

Sound file

E

Section 9.17



3-8 3-8

3 FUNCTION OVERVIEW

MELSOFT

Option setting

(continued)

Change in a


Major alarm

Buzzer type


Alarm/ event

Event


Sound file

Buzzer type


Buzz sound frequency

Sound file

SV limit excess setting

Background color

Text color

Alarm area color (No alarm)

Button text color

Button background color

PV bar positive direction color

Faceplate

Trend graph

PV bar negative direction color

PV bar both direction color (Positive)

PV bar both direction color (Negative)

PV high/low limit value bar color

PV high high/low low limit value bar color

SV/MV limit value bar color

SV/MV pointer color

SV(Target) pointer color

MV status color

Frame color (No lockout tag)

Item name display

Gridline

Gridline color

Background color

Graph 1 to 8 color

Trend binary data storage folder

Automatic trend CSV file export target folder

Automatic trend CSV file export file name

Automatic trend CSV file export time

(0 to 23)

Automatic trend CSV file deletion

Trend CSV file storage period (days)

E Section 9.17

Change in clients



3-9 3-9

4 MODE ADMINISTRATION

MELSOFT


4.1 Mode Overview

4.2 Mode Types

When using the monitor tool, register the users in advance and define their password and authority. (Engineer or Operator1 to 4)

When starting the monitor tool, the mode is in the lock mode with which any operations of settings or values cannot be performed.

The monitoring operation can be executed within the user authority with specifying a user name and a password, and changing the mode.

Before the operator leaves, if the lock mode is set, the mis-operation by irrelevant persons can be avoided.

4

Among the monitoring tools 3 kinds of modes can be set for every user

Mode name

Engineer Mode

Description

A mode with which the monitoring operation (monitoring/changing tag data) and setting data change are available

Corresponding user's authority

Engineer

Operator Mode A mode with which the monitoring operation is available

Lock Mode A mode with which only the monitoring is available

Operator4

Operator3

Operator2

Operator1

(No designated user)

4.3 User Authorities

In the monitor tool, the user authority can be set up to 6, and the operation restrictions for the functions that need the security of monitoring/control can be set depending on user authority for changing the mode.

The operation restrictions for the authority of engineer/ lock are fixed, however, that for the authority of operator1 to 4 can be set with User Authority Setting ( Section 9.2).

Operation restriction item

User authority

Engineer Operator (1 to 4) Lock

Monitor tool setting

Exit monitor tool

Stop buzzer/Print screen


Export data to CSV file of trend graph

Export data to CSV file of pop-up tuning/


Export to CSV file/Print/Confirm/Delete of

Alarm data

Reset the maximum value/number of times of PLC communication status

Setting/Removing lockout tag

Available only for users whose authority is specified for the corresponding operation on User Authority Setting

( Section 9.2)

: Applicable, : Not applicable

(For details of operation authority of functions with each mode, refer to "Section 3.2 Function List")

4-1 4-1


MELSOFT

4.4 Mode Transition

At the starting time, the lock mode is used.

The operation for exiting the monitor tool can be executed by a user who has the authority only.

Lock mode

Starting

Operator mode

<User authority>

Operator1 to 4

*1

Change mode

Engineer mode

<User authority>

Engineer

4

Only a user who has the authority

Exit

*1: The display is switched in accordance with status of operator1 to 4.

4.5 Mode Change

POINT

Specify the authority for operator1 to 4 on User Authority Setting (

9.2), and set the authority specified for user name with User Setting

Section

( Section 4.6, Section 9.3) to change the operation range for each operator.

The operation authority for operator1 to 4 after installation is the initial setting status ( Section 9.2).

The mode can be changed by specifying a user name and a password registered with the Change Mode function beforehand.

(

User name, its corresponding authority and password are registered by user settings.

Section 4.6, Section 9.3)

1.

Click the "Change Mode" button on the monitor toolbar.

2.

One of the following two operations can be executed in the "Change Mode" dialog box.

(In the setting operator/engineer mode)

Input character string to user name and password item.

Click the "OK" button.

(Return to lock mode)

Click the "Lock" button.

POINT

The security level of GT SoftGOT can be changed in accordance with the user authority which changes the mode by setting the security level change on Usercreated Screen Setting. For details, refer to Section 9.11.

4-2 4-2


MELSOFT

4.6 User Setting

To register the individual user name and password of each operator for operation, the mode must be changed to the engineer mode after a start of the monitor tool.

In the following procedure, display the user setting window and make necessary user setting.

Only in the engineer mode, can the user setting be executed.

For details about the setting window, refer to Section 9.3.

1.

Click the "Setting window" button on the monitor toolbar.

2.

The monitor tool setting window is displayed.

3.

Select "User Setting" in the setting item on the left side of the screen, then set freely on the user setting graph displayed on the right side.

4.

Click the "Apply" button after finishing inputting all the user name, password and authority.

5.

Execute the instruction in the menu: [File]

[Save the setting data] (even without this operation, the setting result will be automatically saved into the setting data file when the monitor tool finishes its task).

6.

Close the setting window.

4-3 4-3


MELSOFT

4.7 Changing Mode after Installation

In order to execute change mode, the user name and password should be registered through the user setting beforehand. ( Section 4.6, Section 9.3)

But when the monitor tool starts, the setting window cannot be displayed, and the mode is the lock mode.

After the installation, the user setting has not yet been executed. In order to display the user setting window and use it as the initial screen, the following user name and password have been registered in advance.

If the mode is changed with designated user name and password, all function of the monitor tool can be operated when the mode changes into the engineer mode.

User Name Password Authority admin admin Engineer

1. Click the "Change Mode" button in the monitor toolbar.

2. Input user name (admin) and password

(admin), and then click the "OK" button.

(The mode will be changed into engineer mode.)

POINT

If the user name and password for the registered engineer-authority user have been forgotten and the operation cannot be performed, set the "product ID" in the

"User Name" and "Password". The mode can be changed using the first engineer-authority user registered in the user setting.

(The product ID is given in the "License certificate" packed with the product.

Replace delimiters in the product ID with "-".)

4-4 4-4

4-5


MEMO

MELSOFT

4-5

5

5 START AND EXIT

MELSOFT

5 START AND EXIT

5.1 Starting Monitor Tool

PURPOSE

Start the monitor tool.

The execution type (Standalone/Server/Client) can be selected to be suited for the system configuration and the role of an OPS, in the monitor tool execution type setting dialog box displayed from the OPS setting ( Section 9.5).

BASIC OPERATION

The following describes a starting method from the start menu of

Microsoft

R

Windows

R

Operating System.

1. The cursor moves this way: [Start]

[Program] [MELSOFT Application]

[PX Developer].

2. Click [Monitor Tool].

3. Start monitor tool of PX Developer.

The starting screen appears.

Immediately after the installation, a monitor tool is started up as Standalone by default.

4. The monitor toolbar appears on the top of the screen.

POINT

The security level of GT SoftGOT can be changed in accordance with the user authority which changes the mode by setting the security level change on Usercreated Screen Setting. For details, refer to Section 9.11.

REMARK

Use of PX Developer Version 1.04E or earlier

To use monitor tool, GX Developer Version 7(SW7D5C-GPPW-E Version 7.20W) or later is necessary. Without the above-mentioned software, the corresponding information will be shown at beginning, and the monitor tool cannot be started.

5-1 5-1

5 START AND EXIT

(1) Procedure for starting up a monitor tool as Standalone

MELSOFT

1. Click the "Setting window" button on the monitor toolbar.

2. Select [OPS setting] in the monitor tool setting screen, and click the "Setting..." button.

3. The monitor tool execution type setting dialog box is displayed.

Select "Standalone" in the "Execution Type" and click the "OK" button.

5

4. Click the "Apply" button in the OPS setting screen, and exit the monitor tool.

5. Restart the monitor tool.

5-2 5-2

5 START AND EXIT

(2) Procedure for starting up a monitor tool as Server

MELSOFT




Select "Server" in the "Execution Type" and click the "OK" button.

To run a redundant server, refer to Section 9.5 and set the required items.

5-3



POINT

A primary/secondary server starts up acquiring the setting data from another server.*

1

*1: A primary server acquires the setting data only when it is restarted checking

“Acquiring setting data from Secondary Server next start time”.

5-3

5 START AND EXIT

(3) Procedure for starting up a monitor tool as Client

MELSOFT



5-4


Select "Client" in the "Execution Type", enter IP addresses of the connection server and client, and execute the "Connection Test".

( Section 9.5)

Then click the "OK" button.

To connect a redundant server, refer to Section

9.5 and set the required items.



POINT

A client starts up acquiring the setting data from a server.

In the redundant server system, a client firstly connects to a primary server. If it cannot connect to the primary server, then it connects to a secondary server.

5-4

5 START AND EXIT

<Method to execute programs as an administrator>

MELSOFT

(1) When user account control (UAC) is enabled

All users including administrator are fixed at and operate as "standard user".

To execute programs in administrator authority, specify "Run as administrator".

(2) When user account control (UAC) is disabled

Programs can be executed by logon user.

(Specifying "Run as administrator" is not necessary.)

(3) Procedure to execute programs as an administrator

The following shows a procedure to execute the monitor tool as an administrator when UAC is enabled.

Select "Monitor Tool", right-click, and select "Run as administrator".

* When the user account that is logging on to Windows

R is an administrator, the following message will be displayed. *1

Selecting "Allow" or "Yes" enables to execute as an administrator.

<Windows Vista

R

> <Windows

R

7 or later>

*1: For the method to prevent this screen from appearing, refer to

Appendix 6.

5-5 5-5

5 START AND EXIT

MELSOFT

(4) Setting to always execute programs as an administrator

To always "execute programs as an administrator", set as follows.

When using Windows

R

8 or Windows

R

8.1, select

"Monitor Tool", right-click, and select "Open file location".

1) Select "Monitor Tool", right-click, and select

"Properties".

2) Select the <<Compatibility>> tab and check "Run this program as an administrator".

5-6 5-6

5 START AND EXIT

5.2 Exiting Monitor Tool

MELSOFT

PURPOSE

Exit monitor tool.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Click the "Exit" button in the monitor toolbar.

2. Click the "Yes" button in the dialog box.

3. Exit the monitor tool.

POINT

The operation for exiting the monitor tool can be executed by a user who has the authority.

A user who has the authority for exiting the operation is a user for whom user-authority ( Section 9.2) is specified to exit the monitor tool

( Section 4.6, Section 9.3).

"Exit the monitor tool" will stop all the data collecting process.

When the monitor tool is closed, the user-created screen started with it

( Section 7.5) will also be entirely shut off.

Windows

R

can be logged off/shut down during the monitor tool execution. Note that when the monitor tool is in the following status,

Windows

R

cannot be logged off/shut down.

When a current user does not have the authority for exiting the monitor tool operation*

1

When a modal dialog box or a message box is displayed

When applying the setting data*

2

When switching/connecting the server

When acquiring the server setting data

*1: Only when "Follow the user authority setting" is set to "Exit monitor tool when windows logoff or shutdown" in Option Setting (General)

*2: Monitor Target Project Setting (apply, reload), Trend Setting, Option

Setting (changing the trend binary data storage folder and the related automatic CSV file export), during the processing for applying Monitor

Variable Setting

5-7 5-7

5-8

5 START AND EXIT

MEMO

MELSOFT

5-8

6 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATION

MELSOFT

6


6.1 Overview of Screen Configuration

The screens displayed by monitor tools can be approximately classified as follows:

Monitor toolbar

Monitor

Window

Multi-window mode

Single-window mode

Pop-up window

Message dialog box

Task tray icon

Menus to select primary functions. They are always on the top of the screen and will not be cascaded by other windows.

Normal windows with variable sizes, possible to be maximized and minimized.

Windows displayed in maximum size, unable to be displayed simultaneously within a plurality of windows.

Usually displayed in front of other windows, with variable sizes, maximization and minimization unallowable.

Used for display of confirmations and settings, fixed window-size.

An appropriate task tray icon is displayed depending on the execution type of the monitor tool.

1

4

1

4

The number of screens that can be displayed is subject to the type of the screen.

Besides monitor toolbars, 4 monitor windows and 4 pop-up windows can be displayed simultaneously under the multi-window mode.

Monitor tool bar

Monitor window

Pop-up window

Message dialog box

Task tray icon

6-1 6-1


6.2 General Operation of Screen

MELSOFT

Title bar

A title bar indicating the name of each screen will be available on the upper part of each window.

Close button

Maximize button

Minimize button

The title bar can be used to display the system menu for primary operations of the window. And the system menu can be displayed via two ways.

Right click the title bar on the upper part of the window.

Press Alt + Space

6.2.1 Closing a window

PURPOSE

Close a displayed window

BASIC OPERATION

Use any one of the methods shown below to close a window except a toolbar.

Click the close button at the upper right corner of the window.

Select the [Close] option from the system menu.

Press Alt + F4.

Click the "Close" button on the faceplate. (Except the control panel)

6.2.2 Maximizing a window

PURPOSE

the toolbar.

To extend a displayed window to a window overlapping the whole screen below

BASIC OPERATION

Use any one of the methods shown below to maximize a window.

Click the maximize button at the upper right corner of window.

Select the [Maximize] option from the system menu.

Press Alt + Space and press x key.

Double click the title bar at the top of the window.

6

6-2 6-2


6.2.3 Minimizing a window

MELSOFT

PURPOSE

Temporarily close a displayed window and show buttons of taskbars of Microsoft

Windows Operating System.

BASIC OPERATION

Use any one of the methods shown below to minimize a window.

Click the minimize button at the upper right corner of the window.

Select the [Minimize] option from the system menu.

Press Alt + Space and press n key.

6.2.4 Restoring a window

PURPOSE

To restore the maximized window back to its original state before maximization.

BASIC OPERATION

original size.

Use any one of the methods shown below to restore a maximized window to its

Click the restore button at the upper right corner of the window.

Select the [Restore] option from the system menu.

Press Alt + Space and press r key.

6.2.5 Changing the window size

PURPOSE

Change the size of a displayed window.

BASIC OPERATION

(1) Change the width of a window

Scroll the cursor at the right or left of the window until the cursor becomes a right-left directional arrow, and then pull the border of the window rightward or leftward (hold the key of the mouse and move it).

(2) Change the height of a window

Scroll the cursor at the upper or lower of the window until the cursor becomes an upper-lower directional arrow, then pull the border of the window upward or downward.

(3) Change the width and height simultaneously

Move the cursor to one corner of the window till the cursor becomes a slant two-direction arrow, and then pull the border of the window toward any direction.

REMARK

The window size is not changeable after maximized (full-screen display).

The characters size will be automatically adjusted according to the window size.

6-3 6-3


6.3 Monitor Toolbar

MELSOFT

The monitor toolbar is displayed on the top of the screen after the monitor tool is started.

The major function menu is displayed in button form, on the monitor toolbar.

6.3.1 Contents of monitor toolbar

1)

The following is the monitor toolbar in the monitor tool.

2) 3) 4)

5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17)

(1) The list of the displayed components

The components on the monitor toolbar are as follows.

Depending on difference of modes etc, there are also situations in which buttons are not displayed. (The details will be recounted in later part of the passage.)

No. Item

1)

Alarm/event display area Display alarm/events.

2)

Faceplate screen display button

Display pop-up faceplate screens of the tag associated with alarm/events.

3)

Date/time display area

4)

Help menu display button

Display current date/time.

Display help menu.

5)

Control panel screen display button Display control panel screen.

6)

Trend graph screen display button Display trend graph screen.

7)

Alarm list screen display button Display alarm list screen.

8)

Event list screen display button Display event list screen.

9)

User-created screen button 1 to 4

Start up registered application program and display user-created screen.

10)

Stop buzzer button

11)

Print screen button

12)

Cascade window button

13)

Tile window button

14)

Find button

15)

Change mode button

16)

Setting window button

17)

Exit button

Stop the buzzer beep.

Print the displayed screen.

Cascade monitor window.

Tile the monitor window.

Display find dialog box.

Display change mode dialog box.

Display setting window.

Exit monitor tools.

Multi

Single

No registration:

*

1

*

1

:

:

*

1

(L: Lock mode, O: Operator mode, E: Engineer mode, Setting: Setting window is displayed

: Valid display, : Gray display indicates an invalid click, : Nothing displayed)

*1: The button is displayed only for a user who has the authority for the operation.

6-4 6-4


Lock Mode (No User-created Screen Setting, multi-window mode)

MELSOFT

Depending on different modes and settings, unavailable buttons will not be displayed.

cannot be clicked when the setting window is opened.

The applications registered to User-created Screen Setting or icons registered to detail setting of User-created Screen Setting are displayed on the 9) user-created screen button 1 to 4. (For details of the registration, refer to Section 9.11.)

Cascade window button 12)/ Tile window button 13) is only displayed in multiwindow mode, not in single-window mode. Window mode can be switched with option setting (General). ( Section 9.17 (1))

Setting window button 16) is only displayed in engineer mode. Switching to the engineer mode can be implemented with change mode button 15).

The following are some display samples of the monitor toolbars.

Operator Mode (User-created screen Setting 3 activated, multi-window mode)

Engineer Mode (User-created screen Setting 1 to 4 activated, multi-window mode, 1 row of alarm messages)

Setting window in display (No User-created screen Setting, multi-window mode)

Setting window in display (User-created screen Setting 3 activated, single-window mode, 2 rows of alarm messages)

(3) Alarm and event display area

The upper portion of the monitor toolbar is the area where 2 rows of messages are shown.

6-5 6-5


MELSOFT

(a) Alarm and event display

The first line of alarm and event display shows the up-to-date alarm.

The second line can display alarm and event at user’s disposal.

The option at the second line can be executed with option setting

(Alarm/Event general) of function setting. ( Section 9.17 (2))

1) Case1: selected "alarm" in option setting (Alarm/Event general)

The first row

The second row

The unconfirmed latest alarm highlighted in alarm list screen.

The second alarm after the unconfirmed latest alarm highlighted in alarm list screen.

2) Case2: selected "event" in option setting (Alarm/Event general)

The first row

The second row

The unconfirmed latest alarm highlighted in alarm list screen.

The unconfirmed latest event message in event list screen.

<Display form of alarm>

Occurrence date

Occurrenec time

Tag name

Tag comment

Alarm content *1

Faceplate display button

A 01/26/2002 11:13:23AM TIC001

************** **************

..

*1: The display format as to the tag data items is according to "Tag Data Item Display of Alarm" of

Option Setting (Alarm/Event).

<Display form of event>

Occurrence date

Occurrenec time

Tag name

Tag comment

Event content

Faceplate display button

A 01/26/2002 11:13:23AM TIC001

************** ************** ..

When a tag name/tag comment is too long to display in the area, it is cut-down. When a tag name/tag comment is cut-down, suspension points (...) are attached to it.

Example) TAG012345678 TAG012345678

TAG0123456789 TAG012345678...

In the "Alarm/Event display format of monitor toolbar" of the option setting, the display format of tag names and tag comments can be changed. The display format is selectable from three choices, "Tag Name", "Tag Comment", and "Tag Name + Tag Comment".

Tag comments are not displayed for system alarms because they do not have any tag comments.

6-6

POINT

Display character counts of tag names, tag comments, and alarm/event contents may flexibly vary, because the size of the display areas varies depending on the screen resolution.

The following table shows approximate display character counts when "Tag Name

+ Tag Comment" is selected as the display format.

Resolution

800 600

1024 768

1280 1024

1600 1200

Tag name

12 characters

12 characters

12 characters

12 characters

Tag comment Alarm/event content

6-6


MELSOFT

(b) Faceplate display button

The faceplate display button appears at the right end of the alarm/event display area.

A faceplate screen correlative with the displayed alarm will pop up when this button is clicked.

The faceplate display button appears only for able-to-show-faceplate alarms/events.

The so-called able-to-show-faceplate alarm means the alarms other than system alarm.

The so-called able-to-show faceplate event means the event that tag data of message tag has a confirmation check.

For details of warnings and events, refer to Section 7.3.1 and Section 7.4.1.

(c) Displaying alarm/event list

The Alarm list screen/Event list screen is displayed by double-clicking any space other than the Faceplate screen display button in the alarm/event display area while alarm/event is displayed on the monitor toolbar. *

1

The Alarm list screen/Event list screen shows relevant alarm/event selected.

*

2

Event list example displayed by double-clicking the alarm/event display area

*1: List screen is not displayed in the following cases:

• When the maximum number of screens to be monitored

( Section 6.1) is opened

• When the setting window is displayed

• When the change mode screen is displayed

• When the message box, which appears when the "Exit" button or

"Print" button is clicked, is displayed

In the Alarm list screen, all alarms are displayed.

*2: When dialog boxes or message boxes are displayed from the list screen, relevant alarm/event will not be selected.

6-7 6-7


MELSOFT

It is the upper right area of the monitor toolbar displaying the current date and time according to the personal computer's settings.

(5) Display button of help menu

It is the button in the top right corner of monitor toolbar. Click this button to display help menu.

Display help menu

Click button to display help menu.

[Connect Server] is displayed for a secondary server or a client in the non-redundant server system

PLC Error

Operating

Manual

Item Description

PLC Communication Status

Server/Client Communication Status

Switch Server/Connect Server

Acquire Server Setting Data

Monitor Tool

GOT Screen Generator

About PX Developer

Display the PLC communication status screen ( Section 8.5).

This menu cannot be selected when the setting window ( Section 9.1.1) is in display or when the monitor tool execution type is "Client" ( Section 9.5).

Display the server/client communication status screen (

This menu cannot be selected when the setting window (

Section 8.6.7).

Section 9.1.1) is in

( display or when the monitor tool execution type is "Standalone" or "Client"

Section 9.5).

Switch the server to be connecting manually with clients in the redundant server monitoring system ( Section 8.6.3).

For a secondary server this menu connects it to a primary server manually, and for a client this menu connects it to a server manually ( Section 8.6.4).

This menu cannot be selected when the setting window ( Section 9.1.1) is in display or when the monitor tool execution type is "Standalone" or "Server"

(“Primary Server” for Connect Server) ( Section 9.5).

(

A client acquires the setting data from a server when it is changed in the server

Section 8.6.5).

This menu cannot be selected when a server error is occurring, when the setting window ( Section 9.1.1) is in display or when the setting data has already been acquired.

Display the help screen related to the PLC CPU error codes of the installed GX application. *

1

Start Acrobat

*

2

R

Start Acrobat

Generator). *

2

R

Reader to display PX Developer Operating Manual (Monitor Tool).

Reader to display PX Developer Operating Manual (GOT Screen

Display product information such as version.

*1: If GX application has not been installed, the PLC error help screen will not appear.

*2: If Acrobat

R

Reader has not been installed, the manual will not appear.

6-8 6-8


MELSOFT

POINT

When starting up HELP with a project whose GX project type is GX Developer project, the "Windows Help and Support" screen shown below may appear, and the

Help screen is not displayed.

Perform the following procedure to install "WinHlp32.exe" which is needed to display the Help screen. (Note: The personal computer needs to be connected to the internet.)

(Example) Using Windows

R

7

(1) Click the "Help" button.

(2) The screen shown above opens. Click the link section.

(3) The Microsoft technical information page opens. http://support.microsoft.com/kb/917607 (AS of Jul., 2015)

Follow the instruction and download the Windows Help program

(WinHlp32.exe).

(4) Install the file that has been downloaded.

6-9 6-9


6.3.2 Screen display buttons

It displays all monitor window buttons of the monitoring function.

For details of the monitoring function, refer to Chapter 7.

MELSOFT

(1) Control panel screen display button ( )

PURPOSE

Display the control panel screen. ( Section 7.1 )

Although one control panel screen already exists, another one will be displayed again.

(2) Trend graph screen display button ( )

PURPOSE

Display the trend graph screen. ( Section 7.2)

Although one trend graph screen already exists, another one will be displayed again.

(3) Alarm list screen display button ( )

PURPOSE

Display Alarm list screen. ( Section 7.3)

If the alarm list screen is in display, the current screen can be activated without the need to reopen it.

(4) Event list screen display button ( )

PURPOSE

Display Event list screen. ( Section 7.4)

If the Event list screen is in display, the current screen can be activated without the need to reopen it.

POINT

When opening the setting window, no buttons can be clicked.

6-10 6-10


MELSOFT

The following functions are to display those screens that are not immediately set after installation.

Arbitrary screen structure can be specially customized depending on different demands.

(5) User-created screen display button (The button icon is subject to registered application programs.)

PURPOSE

Assign monitoring applications to user-created screen buttons on the monitor toolbar.

Programs created with GT SoftGOT (

Basic (

Section 11.1) or Microsoft

R

Section 11.2) can be assigned as applications.

Visual

POINT

When opening the setting window, no buttons can be clicked.

The applications registered to User-created Screen Setting or icons registered to detail setting of User-created Screen Setting is displayed on the user-created screen button 1 to 4.

Even though the monitoring screen opened by user-created screen button is not a monitoring screen, it will still be treated as a monitor window.

As for the limitation of screens to be open simultaneously, please calculate it as one screen of monitor window ( Section 6.4).

When the monitor tool is closed, all user-created screens ( started by it are also closed.

Section 7.5)

6-11 6-11


6.3.3 Stop buzzer button

MELSOFT

PURPOSE

Stop the buzzer beep.

(

No changes will occur if this button is clicked when the buzzer is not beeping.

Section 8.1)

POINT

A user who does not have the authority of operation for stopping the buzzer cannot click the button.

6.3.4 Print screen button

PURPOSE

Print the whole hard copy of the displayed desktop. ( Section 8.2)

POINT

A user who does not have the authority of operation for copying the screen cannot click the button.

6.3.5 Screen alignment button

6-12

PURPOSE

Rearrange the displayed windows. ( Section 8.3)

(1) Cascade display button

One window is slightly cascaded on another window for alignment.

(2) Title display button

Screens are evenly divided. Windows are aligned when they are not displayed in cascaded way.

POINT

Buttons will not be displayed in the single-window mode. Switching of the window mode can be accomplished with option setting (General). ( Section 9.17 (1))

6-12


6.3.6 Find button

PURPOSE

Search for tags, control panel and trend graphs. (

MELSOFT

Section 8.4)

POINT

Do not click the Find button when opening the setting window.

6.3.7 Change mode button

PURPOSE

Switching the Lock/Operator/Engineer mode. (

Chapter 4)

POINT

Do not click the change mode button when opening the setting window.

6.3.8 Setting window button

PURPOSE

Display the monitor tool setting window. ( Chapter 9)

6.3.9 Exit button

POINT

Only executable in engineer mode.

This button will not be displayed in lock mode or operator mode.

PURPOSE

Exit the monitor tool. ( Section 5.2)

6-13

POINT

This button will not be displayed with a user who does not have the authority for exiting the monitor tool operation.

All screens displayed from the monitor toolbar are closed.

Do not click the Exit button during the opening of the setting window.

6-13


6.4 Monitor Window

Monitor windows are screens to display monitor results.

6.4.1 Types of monitor window

Monitor windows can be classified as following types:

MELSOFT

Control panel

Trend graph

Alarm list

Display tag faceplates taking group as a unit.

Display time sequence change of the values of trend items by curves.

Display a recorded alarm list

Event list Display a recorded event list

User-created screen

Display a created screen.

The monitor screen of the desired configuration can be created.

6.4.2 Display form of monitor window

Section 7.1

Section 7.2

Section 7.3

Section 7.4

Section 7.5

Monitor windows display in the normal window style. Display styles vary with the window modes, arranging form of the screen and maximize/minimize of the screen.

Window Mode

Multi-window

Single-window

In monitor tool, the display mode can be selected from two types of display forms of monitor window according to different uses.

Window modes can be set through option setting (General).

Description

Maximum display screens

It remembers screen size of each window when they are closed, and still displays at the remembered sizes next time. If sizes are not remembered when installation is finished, it displays the basic sizes.

4 screens

It is always displayed at the maximum status. (It cannot be set as the normal window size.)

1 screen

(2) Alignment of the screens

Under the multi-window mode, buttons on the monitor toolbar can be used to set.

Cascade display One window is slightly cascaded on another window for alignment.

Tile display


6-14 6-14


MELSOFT

(3) Maximize/minimize

Under the multi-window mode, windows can be set separately.

Under the single-window mode, only one screen can be displayed and it is always displayed in maximum size.

Maximize Windows are displayed in full screens.

Minimize Windows are changed to buttons on the taskbar.

For the operation method, refer to "Section 6.2 General Operation of Screen".

Switch method of window mode is as follows.

1. Click the "Change Mode" button in the monitor toolbar to change to engineer mode.

2. Click the "Setting Window" button in the monitor toolbar.

3. The monitor tool setting window is displayed.

4. Select [Option Setting] from items on the left of the screen, and perform setting in the option setting screen displayed in the right of the screen.

5. Select Multi-window/Single-window from the [Window Mode] of [General].

6. Click the "Apply" button.

7. Execute the instruction in the menu:

[File] [Save the setting data] (even without this operation, the setting result will be automatically saved into the setting data file when the monitor tool finishes its task).

8. Close setting window.

6-15 6-15


6.5 Pop-up Window

A pop-up window is a window that displays monitor results of each tag.

6.5.1 Types of pop-up window

Pop-up windows are classified as follows.

MELSOFT

Pop-up faceplate

Pop-up tuning

6.5.2 Display form of pop-up window

A faceplate to display the adjusting instrument for simulating the process control device.

A screen to display a tuning screen of control.

(Faceplate + tuning trend graph + tag monitor)

Section 7.6

Section 7.7

Up to four pop-up windows can be displayed.

If a new pop-up window is opened when four pop-up windows have already been displayed, the earliest opened (displayed in the bottom) one among the four on-screen windows is automatically closed.

However, if it cannot be closed as displaying a dialog box for example, one next to the bottom is closed.

The window size can be changed as desired. (However, the aspect ratio of the faceplate is not variable.)

Maximize/minimize is not allowed.

REMARK

When a window is closed, its position and size will be stored. Thus it will be displayed at the same size next time. When other windows have been displayed, a new window is displayed in the slightly bottom-right position of the top window.

However, it will be displayed at a specific size after installation, as its size has not been stored.

If a new pop-up window is opened when four pop-up windows have already been displayed, the bottom of the on-screen pop-up windows is forcibly closed.

To keep the desired pop-up window open, close the unnecessary pop-up window before opening a new one.

In the server/client monitoring system, up to 72 windows among all OPSs (up to

4 windows in each OPS) can be displayed.

6-16 6-16


6.6 Task Tray Icon

MELSOFT

When the monitor tool starts, a monitor tool icon is displayed on the task tray depending on the execution type.

The connecting status can be confirmed with the tooltip.

(1) Icon

Icons displayed on the task tray are as follows.

Monitor tool execution type Icon

Standalone

Server

Client

(2) Tooltip

A tooltip is displayed by hovering the mouse pointer.

The monitor tool execution type is displayed in the tooltip. The status of connection to the server is also displayed.

POINT

To display a monitor tool icon and tooltip on the task tray, set the following setting.

<Windows

R

XP, Windows Vista

R

>

1) Right-click anywhere on a free space on the taskbar and select [Properties].

2) The [Taskbar and Start Menu Properties] dialog box is displayed.

Click the <<Taskbar>> tab (the <<Notification Area>> tab for Windows Vista

R

).

Uncheck "Hide inactive icons".

Or, keep "Hide inactive icons" checked and click the "Customize…" button to display the [Customize Notification] dialog box, and select "Always show" from the

"Behavior" of "PX Dev. Monitor Tool*

1

".

Uncheck "Hide inactive icons".

Select "Always show" for "PX Dev. Monitor Tool*

1

".

("Show" for Windows Vista

R

).

6-17

*1: The execution type is displayed after "PX Dev. Monitor Tool".

6-17


MELSOFT

POINT

<Windows

R

7 or later>

1) Right-click anywhere on a free space on the taskbar and select [Properties].

2) The [Taskbar and Start Menu Properties] dialog box is displayed.

Click the <<Taskbar>> tab and then the "Customize…" button.

The window is displayed. Check "Always show all icons and notifications on taskbar" on the displayed customize dialog box, or uncheck it and then select

"Show icon and notifications" from the "Behavior" list box of "PX Dev. Monitor

Tool*

1

".

Check "Always show all icons and notifications on taskbar"

Select "Show icon and notifications" for "PX Dev. Monitor Tool*

1

".

*1: The execution type is displayed after "PX Dev. Monitor Tool".

6-18 6-18


MEMO

6-19

MELSOFT

6-19

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

7.1 Control Panel

Faceplate

Group selection tab

PURPOSE

Implement grouping administration to the screen called faceplate with the simulating adjusting meter, and every group is displayed in a parallel way.

On the faceplate, the current PID control status can be monitored with histogram and be executed ON/OFF control.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Click the "Control Panel" button (

2. The control panel screen is displayed.

) on the monitor toolbar.


8 faceplates/group, 500 groups at most

At most 500 groups can be registered.

Maximum 8 (the number of tags) faceplates can be displayed in one group.

(

On the control panel, total 500 8 = 4000 tags can be registered at most.

Section 9.7)

Sheet scroll button

7

7-1 7-1

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.1.1 Faceplate display

Every piece of assigned tag information is displayed on the faceplate.

In control panel, the tag faceplates of the chosen groups are displayed together on one graphic screen.

The group, number and tag allocation of the faceplate can be set with control panel setting ( Section 9.7).

For details of the faceplate, refer to "Chapter 10 FACEPLATE".

7.1.2 Switching groups to be displayed

7

(1) Choose the display group from the tabs displayed on the graphic screen

(

By means of clicking group selection tab, the faceplate group on the screen can be switched. The group names set with control panel setting configuration

Section 9.7) are displayed in the group selection tab.

At the time of starting, monitor tool will memorize the chosen group, and display it with the "chosen" status next time.

(2) To see unseen tab with the sheet scroll button.

With the sheet scroll button at the right side of group selection tab, the unseen group selection tab can be displayed on the current screen.

1) Scroll one tab to the left with one click.

Scroll to the left if pressing the button continuously.

1) 2)

2) Scroll one tab to the right with one click Scroll to the right if pressing the button continuously.

7.1.3 Displaying the pop-up tuning screen

On the control panel, the following operation with displayed faceplate enables this tuning screen in the pop-up window.

For details of pop-up tuning screen, refer to "Section 7.7 Pop-up Tuning Screen".

1. Click the "Details" button.

2. The pop-up tuning screen of the selected faceplate is displayed.

7-2 7-2

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

7.2 Trend Graph

MELSOFT

PURPOSE

Display the time series process of the trend item value with curve graph.

Trend item is a generic term for tag data items and monitor variables (global variable/device variable).

The curve graph is managed in groups, and every group is displayed respectively.

The display can be switched between trend data being collected and trend data saved by the automatic trend CSV file export function.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Click the "Trend Graph" button (

2. The trend graph screen is displayed.



1) 2) 4)

9)

3)

8)

5)

Group selection tab

10)

7-3

7)

11)

Sheet scrolliang button

Maximum 125 groups

6)

For 1) to 11), refer to "Section 7.2.1 Displaying a trend graph".

Maximum 125 groups can be registered.

Maximum 8(the number of trend items) trend graphs can be displayed in one group.

At most total 125 8 = 1000 trend items.

( Section 9.8)

In the 1 second or 10 seconds sampling period, collectable trend item number is

100 at most.

7-3

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.2.1 Displaying a trend graph

The trend graph displays the trend item value in chosen group. The group and number of trend graph, trend item allocation and trend item can be set with trend setting

( Section 9.8).

The displayed contents on the trend graph are as follows.

No. Item

1)

Cursor position date and time

Description

Display the date and time at the cursor position.

2)

Cursor position data display grid

Display every trend item value at the cursor position

Display the status name (TRUE or FALSE) if it is the bit item.

The item column and comment column can be selected whether to display or not with the popup menu which is displayed by right-clicking on a column title.

3)

6)

7)

9)

Trend cursor position

Trend graph scroll bar

Gridline time display

Trend Graph Display check box

Designate any position in the trend graph.

Display the data of that time through moving cursor.

Display the sampling period of the trend data.

Sampling period is set by trend setting ( Section 9.8).

The background color, gridline and the graph color are set by choice setting (trend graph) ( Section 9.17 (4)).

In the screen, the newest value is at the right end, and the oldest value at the left end.

The trend graph can be scrolled without cursor position change; therefore the cursor position data will change after scrolling.

Display the date and time indicated by grid line.

Display the top and bottom limit of the scale ruler in every trend graph. Automatically calculate and display the result according to the top and bottom limit of the scale simultaneously.

Top and bottom limit can be set by trend setting (

Nothing displays in BOOL type.

Section 9.8).

WORD type fixes within the range of 0 to HFFFF.

Double-click on 5) Trend graph to switch to display/hide Y-axis scale and zoom in/zoom out the graph area.

Checked ……… Display trend graph.

Unchecked ….. Not display trend graph.

Display the type of data being displayed.

When displaying data being collected

Display "The trend data that is being collected is displayed".

When displaying data of an automatic trend CSV file

Display the specified period in "The trend data during Start date - End date is displayed" format.*

1

Displayed only when data of automatic trend CSV files are displayed.

The previous/next 10000 points worth of data are displayed by a click.

*1: The format of the displayed date and time depends on the setting of Microsoft

R

Windows

R

Operating System.

7-4 7-4

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

POINT

Collect data from PLCs with the communication functions shown in the chart below in accordance with the type of trend items and sampling cycles (For details of communication type, refer to Appendix 1.3, Appendix 1.6.)

Type of trend item

Tag data item

Sampling period: 1second Sampling period: 10 seconds or more

High-speed current value collection Low-speed current value collection

Monitor variable High-speed process data collection Low-speed process data collection

The sampling period of current value collection can be specified in the PLC communication status screen ( Section 8.5).

When registering a trend item whose sampling period is set to 1 second, confirm the following current values displayed on <<High-speed Collection Period>> tab of the PLC Communication Status screen ( second.

Section 8.5) are within 1

The current value of Current Value Collection (unit: second)

The current value of Tag Data Collection (unit: second)

The current value of Process Data Collection (unit: second)

If either of the value exceeds 1 second, the data cannot be collected in 1-second period. Therefore, the last collected data is recorded as the current value of trend items, the same data may be displayed for some sampling periods on the trend graph.

When registering a trend item whose sampling period is set to 10 seconds or more, confirm the following current value displayed on the <<Low-speed

Collection Period>> tab of the PLC Communication Status screen are within the setting value for sampling period.

The current value of Current Value (unit: second)

The current value of Process Data Collection (unit: second)

When the current value of Low-speed Current Value Collection exceeds, the data cannot be collected in set sampling period. Therefore, the last collected data is recorded as the current value of trend items, the same data may be displayed for some sampling periods on the trend graph.

The column display status of cursor position data display grid in displaying the trend graph screen is depending on "Item Name Display" specified in the option setting (trend graph).

If the Snap function of Windows

R

7 or later is applied to the trend graph screen, the area of the pen information and graph display becomes smaller, therefore, the content may not be checked.

In this case, resize the trend graph screen to restore a window size and check the content.

7-5 7-5

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

(1) Trend graph (except BOOL type) display

For the types except BOOL (such as REAL), the trend graph is drawn in the drawing zone according to the Y-axis scale without considering the sequence of the graph number.

Graph No.4

Graph No.2

Graph No.5

7-6

(2) BOOL type trend graph display

For BOOL type, the trend graph drawing zone is fixed by the Graph No.

In the order of No.1, No.2, display 8 levels other than Y-axis scale from the lowest gridline.

Graph No.8

level 8

Graph No.7

level 7

Graph No.6

level 6

Graph No.5

level 5

Graph No.4

level 4

Graph No.3

level 3

Graph No.2

level 2

Graph No.1

level 1

7-6

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

(3) Mixed display of BOOL type and except BOOL type

Graph No.1, 3, 8 (namely level 1, 3, 8 displayed in the diagram) belong to BOOL type.

Graph No.8

Graph No.4

Level 8

Graph No.2

Graph No.5

Graph No.3

Level 3

7-7

Graph No.1

Level 1

REMARK

The time interval of trend graph gridline row is fixed, and the collected data is saved into files according to trend item. Therefore the graph will be neither displayed nor collected, when monitor tools stop result in data-collecting termination and the timedifference graph of allocation trend item (When collection begins) is displayed.

Graph 1

Graph 2

1) 2)

1) The termination time of monitor tool (Graph 1 is disconnected halfway).

2) The allocation time of trend items (Graph 2 is displayed from the allocation time).

7-7

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.2.2 Collecting trend data

The collected data is saved to files with binary system

Item Description

Collection target

Sampling period

Collected data quantity

Tag data item and monitor variable

Select and designate from 1 s, 10 s, 1 min, 5 min and 10 min.

Maximum 10000 points of collected data can be stored in files. The older data will be overwritten when the maximum points are exceeded.

Recordable time

Sampling period 1 s 10 s 1 min 5 min 10 min

Recordable time 2.77 hours 27.7 hours 6.9 days 34.7 days 69.4 days

Folders for storage

Folders for storage are installation destination.

Melsec\Fbdq\Trenddata.

File name is as follows

Tag data item: "Project name_ tag name_ tag data item name_ sampling period"

+ extension (.DAT).

Monitor variable: "Project name_ monitor variable name_ sampling period" + extension (.DAT).

< An example when the installation destination is drive C>

C:\Melsec\Fbdq\Trenddata\PROJECT1_TAG001_MV_10S.DAT

Make one file for one trend item.

(

The folders for storage can be modified with option setting (trend graph).

Section 9.17 (4))

When trends are collected, the relation between group and trend binary data file is as following diagram:

[Group]

The sampling period is set by each group.

[Trend binary data file]

Save respectively with the order of "project name_ tag name_ tag data item name_ sampling period".

Group 1(period:10 s)

PROJECT1::TIC0001.PV



Data in 10 s period

PROJECT1_TIC0001_PV_10S.DAT





Group 2(period:10 s)




Group 3(period:1 min)




Data in 1 min period

PROJECT1_TIC0001_PV_1M.DAT



7-8 7-8

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.2.3 Switching groups to be displayed

(1) Choose the group from displayed tabs in the graphic screen.

Switch to the group displaying trend line by clicking group selection tab. The group names set by trend setting ( Section 9.7) are displayed in groupselection tabs.

When monitor tool starts, the chosen group will be memorized and displayed in

"chosen" status next time.

When re-switching to the previous group after switching groups from one to another, contents of data are the same as before. Once the trend graph screen is closed, data being collected are displayed in all trend groups next time.

(2) Display the unseen tabs with sheet scroll button in the graphic screen.

Use the sheet scroll button at the right end of group selection tab to display the unseen group selection tab in current screen.

1) 2)

1) Scroll one tab to the left with one click.

Scroll to the left if pressing the button continuously.

2) Scroll one tab to the right with one click.

Scroll to the right if pressing the button continuously.

7.2.4 Displaying the latest value

Click the "Latest Value Display" button to display the latest value of trend graph.

1. Click the "Latest Value Display" button on the top of the graphic screen.

2. Trend cursor position and graph-scrolling bar move to the right to display the latest value of the trend graph with data being collected.

7-9

POINT

Click the "Latest Value Display" button. When the scroll bar is at the right end, the trend graph automatically scrolls from the right to the left during the collection. If the bar is not at the right end, display the time trend graph designated by diagram scroll bar. At that time, the trend graph will not scroll automatically even if the collection is in execution.

7-9

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.2.5 Changing the display magnification

The display magnification of trend graph can be modified by time gridline interval in the diagram and the Y-axis scale setting determined by top and bottom limit of data display.

Memorizes changed scale for every group during trend graph display.

Once the trend graph screen is closed, the initial scale ruler will appear next time when the trend graph is opened.

Description interval

Select the time interval separated by gridline.

(30 s, 1 min, 5 min, 10 min, 30 min, 1 h, 2 h, 6 h, 12 h, 24 h, 48 h).

Y-axis Y-axis scale Designate the value of display top and bottom limit for every trend item.

(1) The change of horizontal axis magnification

Transverse magnification can be changed by selecting the time interval for displaying trend graph.

1. Click the "Gridline Interval" button.

2. The "Gridline Interval" dialog box is displayed.

3. Select the time interval separated by gridline.

4. Click the "OK" button.

5. Change the X-axis display magnification of the trend graph.

Gridline interval

Unit of display

1 s

10 s

Sampling period

1 min

5 min

10 min

30 s

1 s

After the change of gridline intervals, the minimum unit of displayable data by moving the trend cursor changes too. The value appears once every 1 second when the interval is 30 seconds, while once every 2 hours when the interval is 48 hours.

Because the interval value shorter than sampling period cannot be displayed, the designated gridline interval is limited by the length of sampling period.

Sampling period change is executed by trend setting. ( Section 9.8)

The relation between the display unit of every gridline interval and sampling period with designation availability is as follows:

1 min 5 min 10 min 30 min

2 s 10 s 20 s 1 min

1 h

2 min

2 h 6 h 12 h

5 min 10 min 30 min

24 h

1 h

48 h

2 h

: Available for setting : Unavailable for setting

7-10 7-10

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

POINT

Ctrl + mouse wheel scroll enables the gridline interval to be wider/narrower on the trend graph screen.

Ctrl + turn mouse wheel forward : wider the gridline Interval

Ctrl + turn mouse wheel backward : narrower the gridline Interval

(2) The change of Y-axis magnification

Longitudinal magnification can be changed by the top and bottom limit of the data displayed in the designated trend graph.

1. Click the "Y-axis Scale" button on the top of the screen.

2. The "Y-axis scale" dialog box is displayed.

3. Designate the top and bottom limit of the data in trend graph.


5. Change the Y-axis display magnification in the trend graph.

The top and bottom limit of WORD type:

H0000-HFFFF fixed

The top and bottom limit of BOOL type:

0-1 fixed

POINT

In the Item field on the Y-axis Scale dialog box, item names or comments are displayed in accordance with the display format of Cursor position data display grid.

(An item name is displayed when comment is blank.)

7-11 7-11

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.2.6 Exporting to CSV file

Click the "Export to CSV File" button in trend graphic screen to save the trend data to files in CSV form after appointing storage folder and file name.

Output form is as follows:

The first line is the title indicating all data contents. Under it, the collecting data is output in the original order of date and time.

Data, TAG001.MLL, TAG001.MV, TAG001.SV, TAG00.MODE,,,,

7/30/2002 6:05:52 PM, 0, 65.2, 450.0, H0010,,,,

7/30/2002 6:05:53 PM, 0, 66.9, 450.0, H0010,,,,

The format of the outputted date and time depends on the setting of Microsoft

R

Windows

R

Operating System.

For example, in the case of Windows

Settings within Control panel.

R

2000, it can be changed using Regional

Data type of item

REAL type

INT, DINT type

WORD type

BOOL type

Output form

Tag data item

Output in accordance with decimal point digit.

Monitor variable

Output in accordance with digits after decimal point registered in the Monitor variable setting.

Output after the character string conversion as the original example.

Output after attaching "H" to the head of the value.

Output 0 or 1.

POINT

Trend data can be output to CSV files automatically. ( Section 8.7)

Only a user who has the authority for CSV file export can execute the operation.

The title of CSV file is displayed in tag name even though it is displayed in tag comment on the trend graphic screen.

7-12 7-12

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.2.7 Displaying CSV file

The period of trend data of an automatic trend CSV file to be displayed can be specified by clicking the "Display CSV File" button on the trend graph screen.

1. Click the "Display CSV File" button on the top of the screen.

2. The "Display CSV File" dialog box is displayed.

3. Specify the period and folder of data to display.


5. The specified trend graph is displayed.

The format of the outputted date and time depends on the setting of Microsoft

R

Windows

R

Operating System.

See as below for the specified contents on the "Display CSV File" dialog box.

Item Description

Specify period

Select ‘Start Date’ or ‘End Date’ from the list box, and enter the date and time.

For the method for specifying date and time, refer to POINT in this section.

Period : 10,000 points The period of date and time specified in [Specify period] is displayed.

Specify folder

Specify a folder in which an automatic trend CSV file to be displayed is stored.

This item cannot be selected when the monitor tool is running as Client.


An automatic trend CSV file saved in the folder set to "Automatic trend CSV file export target folder" in Option setting (Trend graph) is to be referred.

Specifying a folder

Specify a folder in "Path". An automatic trend CSV files saved in the folder is to be referred.

7-13 7-13

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

POINT

When the pen assignment of the group is changed in the trend setting, automatic trend CSV files which are output before the change cannot be displayed.

When the monitor tool is running as Client, only trend data of automatic trend

CSV files saved in the automatic trend CSV file export target folder in the server side can be displayed.

When the date and time format on OS is changed, trend data of automatic trend

CSV files may not be displayed.

For example, when day of week is included in the date format, when an unusual symbol or delimiter is used in the date and time format or when the display order of date and time is changed, automatic trend CSV files saved in the previous date and time format may not be displayed.

When automatic trend CSV files saved with different language OS are displayed, incorrect date may be displayed or trend data may not be displayed.

The following explain the method for specifying date and time.

Date input area Time input area

Date selection calendar

7-14

1) Input method of date

Enter a date in the date input area in suitable format for the setting of OS.

It can be input with the keyboard.

The date selection calendar is displayed immediately below by clicking the button in the date input area.

2) Input method of time

Enter a time in the time input area in suitable format for the setting of OS.

It can be input with the keyboard.

Value of the hour, minute and second at the cursor position can be increased and decreased by clicking the button in the time input area.

3) Input method using the date selection calendar

The date selection calendar is displayed by clicking the button in the date input area.

The date is set to the date input area by clicking the desired date.

The button is displayed and the year can be changed by clicking the year displayed above. Also, the popup menus from January to December are displayed and the month can be selected.

The button displays the previous month’s calendar and the button displays the next month’s calendar.

Also, today’s date can be specified by clicking today’s date displayed in the lower part of the screen.

When automatic trend CSV files are saved including group names in accordance with the setting of "Automatic trend CSV file export target folder" in the option setting ( Section 9.17 (4)), if the trend group name is changed, CSV files that were output before the change cannot be displayed on the trend graph.

7-14

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

7.3 Alarm List

PURPOSE

Display a list of alarm record

BASIC OPERATION

1. Click the "Alarm List" button (

2. The alarm list screen is displayed.



MELSOFT

The current row is selected for display.

7-15

1) 2)

3) 4) 5)

Maximum 2000 alarms can be displayed.

*For 1) to 7), refer to "Section 7.3.1 Displaying alarm list".

6) 7) 8)

POINT

Double-clicking the alarm line displays the alarm-related faceplate (if any) or the system alarm details dialog box (in the case of the system alarm (

7.3.1) line).

Section

The dates and times of the PLC CPU stopping errors and PLC CPU errors displayed in the system alarm details dialog box are those when the errors occurred in the CPU module (dates and times according to the internal clock of the CPU module).

The dates and times of the PLC CPU stopping errors and PLC CPU errors displayed in the alarm list are those when the monitor tool recognized the errors.

Hence, the dates and times displayed in the alarm list may not match those displayed in the system alarm details dialog box.

7-15

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.3.1 Displaying alarm list

The alarm records are displayed in descending order of the alarm occurrence date and time. Contents of each field are shown as follows.

No. Item Description

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

Confirm field

Tag field

Tag comment field

Alarm contents field *

1

Occurrence date field

Recovered date field

Display the check box for confirmation only when the alarm occurs.

The tag name that displays the alarm occurrence/recovered.

Displays a tag comment.

Display the alarm name.

Display the date and time of alarm occurrence. *

2

Display the date and time of alarm recovered. *

2

Display Major/Minor alarm.

If the alarm level (ALM for alarm tag, ALML_W1 to ALML_W4 for 64-points alarm tag) bit of tag data is ON, display Major error. If the alarm level (ALM) bit of tag data is OFF, display Minor error. Display major error when system alarm occurs.

Display related measured value. 8) Measured Value field

*1: The display format as to the tag data items is according to "Tag Data Item Display of Alarm" of Option

Setting (Alarm/Event).


System.

R

Windows

R

Operating

7-16 7-16

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

An alarm will be displayed when the status of related tag data items changes or a system error occurs.

It is displayed on the alarm list screen and in the alarm/event display area of the monitor toolbar ( Section 6.3.1).

The following table shows alarm types that are listed.

Type Description

Measured value exists

Measured value not exist

To add the related measured value and keep the records for the 6 items of MLA, MHA, PLA, PHA,

LLA, HHA involved in item of ALM of the loop tag.

If the tag type is 2PIDH, PFC_SF, PFC_SS, PFC_INT or PVAL an alarm is displayed for SVLA and

SVHA in item of ALM2.

MLA, MHA : Display MV value when measured value alarm occurs.

PLA, PHA, LLA, HHA : Display PV value when measured value alarm occurs.

SVLA, SVHA : Display SV value when measured value alarm occurs.

To use the changing bit of the item of ALM included in the loop tag and the status tag (TIMER1,

TIMER2, COUNT1, COUNT2) as the occurrence and recovered of the alarm, and then keep the record.

If the tag type is 2PIDH, PFC_SF, PFC_SS, PFC_INT or PVAL, an alarm is displayed for ALM2 items.

Faceplate display pattern

Alarm tag

System alarm

To use the changing bit of the item of ALM included in the loop tag (PVAL) and the status tag (NREV,

REV, MVAL1, MVAL2, PB) as the occurrence and recovered of the alarm, and then keep the record.

Alarm contents are to display character string, which is set and registered by faceplate display pattern setting. ( Section 9.13)

The referred number of display mode is got from the display name mode number of tag data (FPNO).

The settings is not registered, it will be displayed as blank. ( Section 10.6)

Alarm tag

To use the changing bit of the item of ALM as the occurrence and recovered the alarm and then keep the record. The alarm contents are to display the character string which is registered to the alarm setting. ( Section 9.9)

The referred alarm number is the alarm name number of tag data (the value stored to ALM1NO to

ALM8NO). The settings is not registered, it will be displayed as blank. ( Section 10.7)

64-points alarm tag

To use the changing bit of the item of ALM_W1 to ALM_W4 as the occurrence and recovered the alarm and then keep the record. The alarm contents are to display connected character string of group name and alarm content which are registered to the alarm setting ( Section 9.9).

The referred alarm number is the alarm group name number of tag data (the value stored to

ALMG1NO to ALMG8NO) and the alarm name number of tag data (the value stored to ALM1NO to ALM64NO). The settings is not registered, it will be displayed as blank. ( Section 10.7)

To keep the record of the occurrence and recovered of monitor tool system alarm.

The displayed alarm contents are determined by alarm types. (refer to the table in next page)

7-17 7-17

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

"Communication open error" + project name *

1,

*

5,

*

6

"Communication reading error" + project name *

1,

*

5,

*

6

"Communication writing error" project name *

1,

*

5,

*

6

"Communication close error" + project name *

1,

*

5,

*

6

"Disk free space error" + drive name *

7

"File error" + File type *

2,

*

7

"Memory error" *

2,

*

7

Alarm content

"Exception error" *

2,

*

7

"PLC CPU stopping error" + project name *

3,

*

4,

*

5

"PLC CPU error" + project name *

3,

*

4,

*

5

"Project ID code inconsistency" + project name *

4

"Incorrect PLC type" + project name *

4

"Redundant System: PLC Parameter Read Error"

+ project name *

5

"Redundant System: System A/B Identification Error"

+ project name *

1,

*

4,

*

5

"Redundant System: Control/Standby System Status

Error" + project name *

3,

*

4,

*

5

"Event notification source error" *

2

"Event notification data receiving error" *

2

"SCADA Interaction Function Error" *

2,

*

7

"Event notification execution error" + project name *

8

"Server Initialization Error"

"Server Communication Error" *

9

"Invalid Simulator Version" *

10

The following table is the system alarm list

"Client Communication Error" + client name

Content

Alarm occurs when network communication open error is detected.

Alarm occurs when network communication reading error is detected.

Alarm occurs when network communication writing is detected.

Alarm occurs when network communication close error is detected.

Alarm occurs when the free space of the PX Developer installation destination, trend binary data, CSV files created by automatic CSV file export memory driver is under "Disk free space check size" of option setting (general).

It will be detected once per 10 minutes.

Alarm occurs when file exceptional error is detected.

A file error occurs for each of trend binary data, automatic trend

CSV, automatic alarm CSV and automatic event CSV files.

Alarm occurs when memory exceptional error is detected.

Alarm occurs when exception error (not including file exception and memory exception) is detected.

Alarm occurs when a stop error occurs in the CPU module.

Alarm occurs when an operation continue error occurs in the CPU module.

Alarm occurs if the monitor target project set with the monitor tool does not match the project in the CPU module.

Alarm occurs when the monitor target project and connected PLC are inconsistent in the PLC type.

Alarm occurs when the connection target is Redundant CPU and read of PLC parameter has failed.

Alarm occurs when the connection target is Redundant CPU and the system cannot be identified (system A or system B).

Alarm occurs when the connection target is Redundant CPU and the control/standby system status is invalid.

Alarm occurs when the event notification source cannot be specified.

Alarm occurs when the size of data received through event notification is out of the range, or the tag block No. is invalid.

Alarm occurs when an error arises during SCADA interaction function processing.

Alarm occurs when the event notification function cannot be used.

Alarm occurs when the communication between a server and client is failed in the server/client monitoring system.

Alarm occurs when the initialization of communication is failed at startup as Server.

Alarm occurs when the communication between a primary server and a secondary server is failed.

Alarm occurs when the simulator to be connected has not installed or the version installed is not applicable to the process control instruction when connecting to the simulator.

7-18 7-18

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

*1: Only when the connection target is Redundant CPU, either of "Specified connection target" (specification in "Transfer Setup" screen), "System A" or "System B" (connection target for system monitor) is added.

(Alarm example) Communication Open Error: Project1 System A

*2: With regard to this error, the condition where the system is recovered from the error cannot be recognized.

When the confirm field is checked in the alarm list, the system is recovered from the error. When unchecked, the error occurs. "…" always appears in the recovery date.

If the same name alarm (alarm content) has occurred, the alarm is not recorded. If not occurred, the alarm is recorded.

*3: Only when the connection target is Redundant CPU, either of "System A" or "System B" (connection target for system monitor) is added.

(Alarm content example) Communication Open Error: Project1 System A

*4: The alarm is issued/deactivated when checking the PLC status. For details of the relevant processing, refer to Appendix 1.9.

*5: In the case of Redundant CPU only, the alarm is deactivated once when the operation mode is switched

(backup mode/separate mode/debug mode)

*6: When communication board errors are detected, communication board name is displayed instead of project name.

(For example: It will be displayed as "Communication open error MELSECNET_BOARD_51" when selfinterface access error of MELSECNET/10 is detected.)

*7: An OPS name is appended only in the server/client monitoring system.

(Alarm example) Memory Error: [Client1]

*8: This error is caused by either of the following conditions. Once the error occurs due to either of the conditions, another alarm does not occur even the other condition is satisfied.

The version of the driver for CC-Link IE Controller Network board (SW1DNC-MNETG-B) is earlier than

1.08J.

The network type set in the <<Event Notification>> tab of the project parameter setting and that set in the transfer setup are different.

*9: This error is recovered when a secondary server connects to a primary server.

*10: Recovers by the following operation

Clear all the connection settings with simulator in the monitor target project setting, and click the "Apply" button. ( Section 9.4 (3))

Exit the monitor tool and restart the monitor tool after installation of Simulator whose version is applicable to the process control instruction.

POINT

If a system alarm has occurred, double-click the system alarm line in the alarm list to display the corresponding system alarm details dialog box.

Take corrective action, referring to the dialog box.

For details of the other troubleshooting, refer to Section 12.1.

7-19 7-19

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

Measured value exists

Measured value not exists


Alarm tag

Display check box

(2) Display items based on alarm types

The description of display items based on alarm types is as follows.

Occurrence date *

1

Recovered date *

1

Level

Display tag name

Name of bit item that has been changed. *

2

Registered character string in


Registered character string in alarm setting

System alarm contents

Display date and time of alarm occurrence

Display date and time of alarm recovered *

3

Major/minor

Measured value

MV/PV/

SV(Current)

None

System alarm

#SYSTEM Major

*1: When monitor tool is started or "Apply" button or "Reload" button of monitor target project setting

( Section 9.4) is clicked, alarms in occurrence status will transit into recovered status.

If alarm is occurring when it is transiting into recovered date, new alarm will be displayed.

Date and time of the operations mentioned above is displayed in the recovered date field.



*3: Recovered date and time of file error, memory error and exception error is not displayed in the recovered date field.

POINT

For the communication open, read, write and close errors, only one of them is displayed for each connection target of the project.

Only the first error is displayed. Recovery from the above error is made as soon as communication succeeds.

7-20 7-20

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

(3) Display example of alarm

The display examples of alarm types are as follows.

With measured value

Confirm Tag Tag comment Alarm contents *

1

Occurrence Date *

2

Recovered Date *

2

Level

Measured value

TIC001

TIC001

Room temperature adjustment valve 1


MLA

MLA

1/30/2002 11:43:20 AM Major 4.8%

1/30/2002 11:43:20 AM 1/30/2002 11:43:50 AM Major 4.8%

Without measured value

Confirm Tag Tag comment Alarm contents *

1

Occurrence Date *

2

Recovered Date *

2

Level

Measured value

TIC001

TIC001



DVLA

DVLA

1/30/2002 11:43:20 AM Minor

1/30/2002 11:43:20 AM 1/30/2002 11:43:50 AM Minor


Confirm Tag Tag comment Alarm contents Occurrence Date *

2

Recovered Date *

2

Level

Measured value

VALV001

VALV001

Water level adjustment valve 1

Water level adjustment valve 1

Time-out

Time-out

1/30/2002 11:43:20 AM Minor

1/30/2002 11:43:20 AM 1/30/2002 11:43:50 AM Minor

Alarm tag

Confirm Tag Tag comment Alarm contents Occurrence Date *

2

Recovered Date *

2

Level

Measured value

ALM001

ALM001

Operation start alarm 1

Operation start alarm 1

Processing A abnormal

Processing A abnormal

1/30/2002 11:43:20 AM

Minor

1/30/2002 11:43:20 AM 1/30/2002 11:43:50 AM Minor

System alarm

Confirm*

4

Tag Tag comment Alarm contents Occurrence Date *

2

Recovered Date *

2

*

3

Level

Measured value

#SYSTEM

#SYSTEM

Communication open error: PROJECT1

Communication open error: PROJECT1

1/30/2002 11:43:20 AM

Major

1/30/2002 11:43:20 AM 1/30/2002 11:43:50 AM Major



*2: When monitor tool is started or "Apply" button or "Reload" button of monitor target project setting

( Section 9.4) is clicked, alarms in occurrence status will transit to recovered status. (Except the file error, memory error and exception error of system alarm)

If the alarm is occurring when it is transiting to recovered status, the new alarm will be displayed. The date and time displayed by recovered date and time is the date and time of the above operation.

*3: For file error, memory error and exception error, recovered date will not be displayed in recovered date field.

*4: For file error, memory error and exception error, make a check mark in the confirm field to set alarm to recovered status.

If the check is cancelled in the check box, it will be changed to the occurrence status.

The alarm will not be recovered until checking the checkbox in the confirm field.

7-21 7-21

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

POINT

If new alarms occur when there have been 2000 registered alarms, the latest alarm is registered by deleting the already registered alarm.

The alarm to be deleted is selected in accordance with “Unconfirmed Alarms

Deletion at Delete Recovered Alarms” of Option Setting (Alarm/Event) in the following order.

The setting is "Yes" : 1) an alarm whose date of occurrence is the oldest in the list and the status is the recovery status.

The setting is "No" : 1) a checked alarm whose date of occurrence is the oldest in the list and the status is the recovery status

2) an alarm whose date of occurrence is the oldest in the list and the status is the recovery status

When no alarms that can be deleted from the list exist, the latest alarm is not recorded on the alarm list.

However, the latest alarm is recorded to the automatic alarm CSV file even though it cannot be recorded on the alarm list.


Available

None

(4) The display color of alarm

Display color can be set as changing color in terms of the alarm level and status in the alarm list.

Color setting in terms of alarm level can use option setting (General).

If [Highlighted display while alarms occur] is set as <Available> in the option setting (Alarm/Event), the occurring alarm which is not confirmed flashes.

For details, refer to "Section 9.17 Option Setting".

Not confirmed in occurrence status After confirmation check In recovered

Background color flicks in alarm level color in 1-second period.

Background color flicks in alarm level color.

Background: white

No matter what the status is, display characters of alarm content in alarm level color.

POINT

Character size will not change in changing the window size timely.

7-22 7-22

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.3.2 Confirm check

Click to check the checkbox.

In the server/client monitoring system, when the confirmation check status is changed on the alarm list screen of one OPS, the alarm list screens of all OPSs are synchronized.

For details of confirming all alarms on the list, refer to "Section 7.3.5 Confirming all alarms".

POINT

A user who has the authority of operation for checking the alarm can check the check box.

The file error, memory error and exception error of system alarm are treated as alarm recovered at confirming and checking step.

If cancel the check, it will be treated as alarm occurrence.

7.3.3 Displaying selected alarms

Click list box ( ) on the alarm list screen, and select the displayed alarm.

Information about the contents of list box is listed in the following table:

All

Occurring

Recovered

Item Description

Display all the alarms.

Display the alarms in occurrence.

Display the recovered alarms.

7-23 7-23

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.3.4 Deleting recovered alarms

Click the "Delete Recovered Alarms" button on the alarm list screen to delete the alarms in the recovered status.

In the server/client monitoring system, when the "Delete Recovered Alarms" button is clicked on the alarm list screen of one OPS, the alarm list screens of all OPSs are synchronized.

The setting for "Unconfirmed Alarms Deletion at Delete Recovered Alarms" of Option Setting

(Alarm/Event)

"Yes" : delete all the alarms in the recovered status

"No" : delete the checked alarms in the recovered status

POINT

A user who has the authority for deleting the alarms can execute the operation.

"Delete Recovered Alarms" cannot be executed if "Occurring" is selected in selected display of alarm ( Section 7.3.3).

7.3.5 Confirming all alarms

Click the "Confirm All" button on the alarm list screen to confirm the unconfirmed alarms that are displayed.

In the server/client monitoring system, when the "Confirm All" button is clicked on the alarm list screen of one OPS, the alarm list screens of all OPSs are synchronized.

7-24

Unconfirmed alarms are all confirmed.

POINT

A user who has the authority for checking the alarms can execute the operation.

If "Occurring" and "Recovered" are selected in displayed of alarm (

7.3.3), it indicates that the displayed data are confirmed.

Section

7-24

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.3.6 Printing an alarm list

Click the "Print" button on the alarm list screen to print the alarm list.

It will be printed on the printer that is set in the print setting of option setting (General).

If the printer name is not specified, the default printer specified in the personal computer will be applied.

Following dialog box will be displayed after printing is started. The dialog box will be closed after printing. Click the "Cancel" button to cancel printing during execution.

Display the selected alarm

Print titles

(with fixed position)

The alarms selected for display is displayed to the right of titles.

Following are the print image.

Alarm List (All) 2/1 3/2007 1:56:00 PM

Print date and time of printing


Only the lines with data are printed.

Print the messages displayed on the alarm list screen.

Use narrow printing if the width of the print paper is less than the width of the grid.

50 lines can be filled in 1 page at most.

7-25

1

Print page

(position, fonts fixed)

POINT

A user who has the authority for printing the alarms can execute the operation.

Print in the status that is displayed on alarm list screen.

7-25

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT


Click the "Export to CSV File" button on the alarm list screen to save all the alarms selected for displaying on the alarm list in CSV file format. When saving a file, specify the saving folder and file name.

It indicates the selection status of alarms that are saved in CSV file.

7-26

The output form is as follows.

The first row indicates the title of the data contents and the following rows are output the collected data in chronological order.

Tag,Tag Comment,Alarm Contents,Detailed Name of Alarm Contents,Occurrence Date,Recovered

Date,Level,Measured Value

LIC002,Tank 2 water level,PLA,Input low limit,9/5/2011 2:14:10 PM,9/5/2011 2:44:08 PM,Minor,0.0

LIC002,Tank 2 water level,LLA, Input low low limit,9/5/2011 2:14:10 PM,9/5/2011 2:44:08 PM,Minor,0.0

#SYSTEM,,Project ID Code Inconsistency : PROJECT,,9/5/2011 2:43:58 PM,9/5/2011 2:44:16 PM,Major,

#SYSTEM,,PLC CPU Error : PROJECT System A,,9/5/2011 2:44:17 PM,,Major,

LIC002,Tank 2 water level,PLA, Input low limit,9/5/2011 2:44:18 PM,,Minor,0.0

LIC002,Tank 2 water level,LLA, Input low low limit,9/5/2011 2:44:18 PM,,Minor,0.0

POINT

Alarm data can be output to CSV files automatically. ( Section 8.7)

(However, its output form differs from that of the alarm list.)

A user who has the authority for exporting data of the alarms to CSV file can execute the operation.

In CSV file, output as the status selected in the alarm list screen.

The items of "Detailed Name of Alarm Contents" are output regardless of "Tag

Data Item Display of Alarm" display format of Option Setting (Alarm/Event).

7-26

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

7.4 Event List

PURPOSE

Display a list of event record.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Click the "Event List" button (

2. The event list screen is displayed.



MELSOFT

The current row is selected for display.

1) 2)

3) 4) 5) 6)

Maximum 2000 events can be displayed.

* For 1) to 8), refer to "Section 7.4.1 Displaying event list".

7) 8)

POINT

Double-clicking the event line displays the event-related faceplate (if any).

9)

7-27 7-27

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.4.1 Displaying event list

The event records are displayed in descending order of the event occurrence date and time. Contents of each field are shown as follows.

7)

8)

9)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

No. Item

Tag field

Tag comment field

Event Message field *

1

Occurrence Date field

Status field *

1

Set Value field *

1

Previous Value field

User field

Description

Display a check box, which attaches a confirm label, when there needs confirm check in information label event, display this check box.

Display the tag name of an object.


Display event name (the name is different as the type of event is different).

Display the date and times of an event occur. *

2

Display information related to status.

Display information related to setting value.

Display when a value before the change exists.

Display the user name that operates the machine when an event occurs.

*1: The display format as for items of tag data is in accordance with "Tag Data Item Display of Event" of Option



System.

R

Windows

R

Operating

7-28 7-28

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

The history of events is the general output of the tag data and the status change of the tag data determined by the system. The event contents can generally be classified into the following four types: operation history, status change history, message history and system event. The types of events are as the following table.

Operation history

*

1

(An output history of tag data)

Type Description

Word write

Bit write

Bit write in radio button format

Faceplate display pattern write

The history of loop tag and status tag when there is a word write operation.

Display the value written to setting value field

When item nature is WORD, DWORD; display in hexadecimal.

When item nature is INT, DINT; attach item unit.

When item nature is REAL, display using decimal point of item and attach item unit.

When item is CTNO (lockout tag), display lockout tag name.

The history of loop tag and status tag when there is a kind of bit write operation

(ON/OFF). The setting value (FALSE or TRUE) will be displayed in setting value field.

The history of loop tag and status tag, when there is a radio button (when one is on, all others are changed to off) bit write operation. Display selected bit item name in setting field.

The history when there is a bit write operation that can be registered using the faceplate display pattern setting ( Section 9.13).

In the setting value field, a string is displayed using faceplate display pattern setting ( Section 9.13) to register.

If the setting is unregistered or the display pattern number is out of the range, the display is empty ( Section 10.6).

For loop tag (PVAL) and status tag (NREV, REV, MVAL1 or MVAL2)

The history when there is a bit write operation in radio button format.

The number of display pattern is from display name pattern number of tag data (FPNO).

In the case of Time-out reset, it will be Time-out setting name + "RESET".

For status tag (PB)

The history when there is a bit write operation.

The number of display pattern is from display name pattern number of tag data (FPNO1 to FPNO5).

A string is displayed as follows in accordance with the ON/OFF history type registered in the faceplate display pattern setting. ( Section 9.13)

ON/OFF history type Description

Only ON

Both ON and OFF

The ON name of the operated button is displayed.

The ON name is displayed when the status answer (DIM_ON1 to DIM_ON5) of the tag data corresponding to the button is OFF, and the OFF name is displayed when the status answer is ON.

*1: The record is saved on a personal computer with which tag data was operated.

When the server/client monitoring system has been configured, the operation histories can be checked with any OPS in the system.

7-29 7-29

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

Status change history

(Specific tag data status change history)

Type Description

Control mode

I/O mode

DIM

Loop tag

(BC, PSUM)

Loop tag

(PVAL, HTCL)

Status tag

(NREV, REV,

MVAL1, MVAL2, PB)

The history of an item, when register bit of mode item of loop tag and status tag is changed to "ON".

Display bit item name in the status field.

The history when the bit status for TAG STOP (TSTP), OVERRIDE

(OVR) and SIMULATION (SIM) in the DIM of loop tag and status tag transferred.

Display the mode of changing in status field.

The history when the bit registered in DIM item is changed to "ON".

Display bit item name in a status field.

The history when the bit registered in DIM item is changed to "ON".

Display a button name registered in the faceplate display pattern setting

( Section 9.13) set in a status field. The number of display pattern is from display name pattern number of FPNO of tag data. If not registered, display is empty. ( Section 10.6)

When the tag type is PB

The ON/OFF history type is "Both ON and OFF", the history of OFF triggers is also stored.

When the tag type is PVAL

The performance differs depending on the open/close status history.

Always : store the history at all times.

Only MAN Mode : store the history only in the MAN mode.

(Store when MAN mode bit is ON.)

Status tag

(TIMER1, TIMER2,

COUNT1, COUNT2)

The history when a bit registered in DIM item is changed to "ON".

Display A bit item name in status field.

Lockout tag

Motion type

The history when CTNO of loop tag status tag is changing. Display the name related to number in status field. If not registered, display is empty.

The history of motion type change when loop tag and tag type are PGS or PGS2. Display the motion type in status field.

7-30 7-30

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

Message history

System event

Type Description



Mode change history

Redundant system: control system switching history

Redundant system: operation mode change history

Message tag

The history of MSG item, when its bit is changed to "ON". Display a confirm check box when there is a specific confirm in tag data. Event message comes from event setting ( Section 9.10). Event number is the message number of tag data (the value stored to

MSG1NO to MSG8NO). The settings is not registered, it will be displayed as blank ( Section 10.8).

64-points message tag

The history of MSG_W1 to MSG_W4 item, when its bit is changed to

"ON". Display a confirm check box when there is a specific confirm in tag data. The event message is to display connected character string of group name and message content which are registered to event setting ( Section 9.10). Event number is the message group name number of tag data (the value stored to MSGG1NO to

MSGG8NO) and the message number of tag data (the value stored to

MSG1NO to MSG64NO). The settings is not registered, it will be displayed as blank ( Section 10.8).

The history of monitor target projects read by the monitor tool.

Checking this record allows judgment of whether tag data has been newly added or changed.

The history of starting and stopping the monitor tool.

Checking this record allows confirmation of whether or not the monitor tool started in the time zone where no alarms occurred in the alarm list.

The history when the mode is changed.

The history when standby system is switched to control system.

(connection target is Redundant CPU)

The history when the operation mode is changed. (connection target is

Redundant CPU)

7-31 7-31

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

(2) Display items based on event types

The description of display items based on event types is as follows.

Event type

Word write

Bit write

Operation history

Bit write in radio button format

Faceplate display pattern write

Control mode

I/O mode

Confirm

No display

Tag

Tag comment Event message

Displays operation item name. *

1

Occurrence date

Displays the tag name of operation objects.


No display

Displays date and time of operation.

Setting value

Previous

Value

Bit item name *

1

No display

Bit item name *

1

Mode in changing *

1

(NOR/SIM/

OVR/TSTP)

Bit item name *

1

Displays the character string set in display pattern setting.

No display

Status changing history

Loop tag

(BC, PSUM)

Loop tag

(PVAL, HTCL)

Status tag

(NREV, REV,

MVAL1, MVAL2,

PB)

Status tag

(TIMER1,

TIMER2,

COUNT1,

COUNT2)

No display

Displays the tag name of changing object.


No display

Displays date and time of changing.

Lockout tag

Motion type

(PGS)

Motion type

(PGS2)

Display bit item name "CTNO"s

*

1

Display bit item name "TYP"s *

No display

1

Message history



(standalone)


(server/client)

According to tag data

Displays tag name.


Set character string in event setting

Monitor target project was loaded



Monitor Tool was started/ stopped

Monitor Tool was started:+OPS name/ stopped:+OPS name

Displays date and time of start/end.

System event

Mode change history

(standalone)

Mode change history

(server/client)

No display

#SYSTEM

No display

Change mode Displays

Change mode

+OPS name date and time of changing.

Displays character string set in display pattern setting.

Bit item name *

Lockout tag

Motion type

Bit item name *

No display

No display

Mode after change

(Engineer mode/

Operator mode/

Lock mode)

1

1

No display

No display

No display

User

Displays user name (input user name at mode change).

No display

No display

No display

(display a user name when exiting Monitor

Tool)

Display a user name after change (no user name is displayed when changed to the lock mode)

Redundant system: control system switching history

Redundant system: operation mode change history

Redundant system control switching:

+ Project name Displays

Redundant system operation mode change:

+ Project name date and time of changing.

System A/B

Separate mode

/Backup mode

/Debug mode

No display

No display

*1: The display format as for items of tag data is in accordance with "Tag Data Item Display of Event" of Option Setting (Alarm/Event).

7-32 7-32

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

POINT

Even if the size of window is changed, the font size displayed is not changed.

When a new event occurs while 2000 events have been registered, the latest event is registered by deleting the already registered event.

The event to be deleted is selected in accordance with "Unconfirmed Events

Deletion at Delete All" of Option Setting (Alarm/Event) in the following order.

The setting is "Yes" : an event whose date of occurrence is the oldest in the list

The setting is "No" : a checked event or an event without the confirmation check box display whose date of occurrence is the oldest in the list

When no events that can be deleted on the list exist, the latest event is not recorded on the event list.

However, the latest event is recorded to the automatic event CSV file even though it cannot be recorded on the event list.

7-33 7-33

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

(3) Display example of event

The display example of event types are as follows.

Operation record (Word write)

Confirm Tag Tag comment Event Message *

1

Set value

User

1/30/2002 11:43:20 AM TYP_RETURN 23.5 19.5 UserABC

1/30/2002 11:43:50 AM Checking UserABC

Operation log (Bit write)


1

1/30/2002 11:43:40 AM

Set value

TRUE

User

FALSE UserABC

Operation log (Bit write in radio button format)

Confirm Tag Tag comment Event Message Occurrence Date

1/30/2002 11:43:40 AM

Status

Set value

*

1

Previous value

MAN A

User

UT UserABC

Operation record (Faceplate display pattern write)


1/30/2002 11:43:40 AM

1/30/2002 11:43:45 AM

Status change record (Control mode)

Confirm Tag Tag comment Event Message

Status User

ON

Time-out

RESET

UserABC

UserABC

Occurrence Date Status *

1/30/2002 11:43:40 AM MAN

1

Set User

Status change record (I/O mode)

Confirm Tag Tag comment Event Message Occurrence Date Status *

1/30/2002 11:43:40 AM SIM

1

Set

Status change record (Loop tag BC, PSUM)

Confirm Tag

BC001

Tag comment

Batch counter 1

Event Message Occurrence Date Status *

1/30/2002 11:43:40 AM DIM_RUN

1

Set

Status change record (Loop tag PVAL, HTCL, Status tag NREV, REV, MVAL1, MVAL2, PB)

Confirm Tag Tag comment Event Message Occurrence Date Status

1/30/2002 11:43:40 AM ON

User

User

User

Status change record (Status tag TIMER1, TIMER2, COUNT1, COUNT2)

Confirm Tag Tag comment

TIMER001 Timer 1

Event Message Occurrence Date Status *

1/30/2002 11:43:40 AM DIM_RUN

1

Set

Status change record (Lockout tag)


1

1/30/2002 11:43:40 AM Checking

Set value

User

User

Status change record (Motion type PGS)


PGS001 Program setter 1 TYP

Event Message *

1

1/30/2002 11:43:40 AM 1

Set value

User


7-34 7-34

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

Status change record (Motion type PGS2)


PGS2001 Program setter 2

Event Message



#SYSTEM

Event Message

Monitor target project was loaded

Occurrence Date Status *

1

Set

3/11/2006 11:43:40 AM TYP_RETURN

Message record


MSG001 Alarm message 1 Please turn to administrator 1/30/2002 11:43:40 AM message 1

Start A process 1/30/2002 11:43:45 AM

Occurrence Date

1/30/2002 11:43:40 AM

Status

Status


Confirm Tag

#SYSTEM

#SYSTEM

Tag comment Event Message Occurrence Date

Monitor tool was started 1/30/2002 11:43:40 AM

Monitor tool was stopped 1/30/2002 11:43:50 AM

Status

Monitor tool start/stop history (standalone)

Confirm Tag

#SYSTEM

#SYSTEM

Tag comment Event Message Occurrence Date

Monitor tool was started 8/05/2008 1:43:40 PM

Monitor tool was stopped 8/05/2008 1:43:50 PM

Monitor tool start/stop history (server/client)


#SYSTEM

#SYSTEM

Event Message

Monitor tool was started:[Server 1]

Monitor tool was stopped:[Server 1]

Occurrence Date

8/05/2008 1:43:40 PM

8/05/2008 1:43:50 PM

Status

Status

User

User

User

User

User

User admin

Mode change history (standalone)


#SYSTEM

Event Message

Mode change history (server/client)

Confirm Tag

#SYSTEM

Tag comment Event Message

Change mode:[Server 1]

Occurrence Date Status User

9/05/2011 2:13:32 PM admin

Occurrence Date Status User

9/05/2011 2:13:32 PM admin

Redundant system control switching history


#SYSTEM

#SYSTEM

Event Message

Redundant System:

Control System switching:

PROJECT1

Redundant System:

Control System switching:

PROJECT1

Occurrence Date Status

4/01/2004 12:14:28 AM System A

4/01/2004 12:14:28 AM System B

User

Redundant system operation mode change history

Confirm Tag Tag comment Event Message Occurrence Date Status User

#SYSTEM

#SYSTEM

#SYSTEM

Redundant System:

Operation Mode Change:

PROJECT1

Redundant System:


PROJECT1

Redundant System:


PROJECT1

4/01/2004 11:43:40 AM Backup mode

4/01/2004 11:43:50 AM Debug mode


7-35 7-35

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.4.2 Confirm check

The check box displays in the message record when tag data of message tag has a confirm tag. Click to check the checkbox.

In the server/client monitoring system, when the confirmation check status is changed on the event list screen of one OPS, the event list screens of all OPSs are synchronized.

For details of confirming all events on the list, refer to "Section 7.4.4 Confirming all events".

POINT

A user who has the authority of operation for checking the event can check the check box.

7.4.3 Deleting all events

Click the "Delete All" button on the event list screen, the events are deleted.

In the server/client monitoring system, when the "Delete All" button is clicked on the event list screen of one OPS, the event list screens of all OPSs are synchronized.

The setting for "Unconfirmed Events Deletion at Delete All" of Option Setting (Alarm/Event)

"Yes"

: delete all the events in the recovered status

"No"

: delete the checked events and events without the confirmation check box display

POINT

A user who has the authority for deleting the events can execute the operation.

7-36 7-36

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.4.4 Confirming all events

Click the "Confirm All" button on the event list screen to confirm all confirmed events.

In the server/client monitoring system, when the "Confirm All" button is clicked on the event list screen of one OPS, the event list screens of all OPSs are synchronized.

Unconfirmed events are all confirmed.

POINT

A user who has the authority for checking the events can execute the operation.

7-37 7-37

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.4.5 Printing an event list

Click the "Print" button on the event list screen to print the event list. It will be printed on the printer that is set in the print setting of option setting (General). If the printer name is not specified, the default printer specified in the personal computer will be applied.

Following dialog box will be displayed after printing is started. The dialog box will be closed after printing.

Click the "Cancel" button to cancel printing execution.

Header position print characters fixed.

Following are the print image:

Alarm List (All) 2/1 3/2007 1:56:00 PM

Print date and time of printing


Only the rows with data are printed.

Print the displayed image on the event list screen.

Use narrow printing if the width of the print paper is less than the width of the grid.

50 rows can be filled in

1 page at most.

7-38

Print page

(position, fonts fixed)

POINT

A user who has the authority for printing the events can execute the operation.

7-38

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT


Click the "Export to CSV File" button on the event list screen to save all events in CSV file format. When saving a file, specify the saving folder and file name.

7-39

The output format is as follows.

The first row indicates the title of the data contents and the following rows are output the collected data in chronological order.

Tag,Tag Comment,Event Message,Detailed Name of Event Message,Occurrence Date,

Status,Detailed Name of Status,Set Value,Detailed Name of Set Value,Previous Value,

Detailed Name of Previous Value,User

CON001,Batch counter1,,,9/5/2011 5:46:40 PM,DIM_COMP,Complete external output,,,,,

TIM001,Timer 1,,,9/5/2011 5:46:48 PM,DIM_STOP,Stop,,,,,

TIM001,Timer 1,,,9/5/2011 5:46:48 PM,DIM_PRE_COMP,Pre-complete external output,,,,,

TIM001,Timer 1,,,9/5/2011 5:46:48 PM,DIM_COMP,Complete external output,,,,,

#SYSTEM,,Monitor Target Project was loaded.,,9/5/2011 5:46:53 PM,,,,,,,

PGS2001,1st step program setter,T,,9/5/2011 5:49:02 PM,,,5s,,,,admin

POINT

Event data can be output to CSV files automatically. (

Section 8.7)

A user who has the authority for exporting data of the events to CSV file can execute the operation.

The items of "Detailed Name of Event Message", "Detailed Name of Status",

"Detailed Name of Set Value" are output regardless of "Tag Data Item Display of Event" display format of Option Setting (Alarm/Event).

7-39

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.5 User-created Screen

PURPOSE



Basic (

Section 11.1) or Microsoft Visual


BASIC OPERATION

1. Click the "Setting window" button on the monitor toolbar, using [User-created

Screen Setting] to pre-register application program of screen necessary for display ( Section 9.11). Once an application is registered, as long as the setting is not changed, even if restart after monitor tool is exited, the application program can still display on the monitor toolbar.

2. Click the "User-created screen display" button on the monitor toolbar (Button icon is determined by the registered application).

3. Start the registered application program, display user-created screen.

User-created Screen Button 1 to 4

Maximum 4 application programs can be registered optionally and can be started up by the buttons assigned on the monitor toolbar.

Screen of application program assigned to a button can only display 1 screen (even if click user-created screen button1 twice, it can only activate the registered screen of application program but cannot open two screens). To open multiple screens of the same application program, it needs to register other buttons separately.

POINT

When monitor screen (such as control panel) is opened or another user-created application is started up in single-window mode during the execution of the application started up by the user-created screen button, the application being executed will be closed.

When "Do not close when switching Monitor Window." is set in the Detail setting of the user-created screen ( Section 9.11) in single-window mode, the application being executed will not be closed.

Note, however, that the application being executed closes regardless of settings when the setting window is displayed or the Monitor tool is exited.

7-40 7-40

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

The example of user-created screen is as follows:

MELSOFT

POINT

The button cannot be clicked during setting window opening.

The applications registered to User-created Screen Setting or icons registered to detail setting of User-created Screen Setting are displayed on the usercreated screen button 1 to 4.

Even if the window opened by using "User-created screen" button is not used for monitor screen, it is still treated as a monitor window about the limit for maximum open screens. ( Section 6.4)

When close monitor tool, all application programs started by "User-created screen" button must be closed.

Tag data access control ( Appendix 5.1.1) can be used to acquire or set the value of tag data and display it on screen. Using a button in a user-created screen, the same faceplate can be opened as the one displayed in other screens of monitor tool. (As for sample data, refer to sample VB folder of CD-

ROM).

Through faceplate control ( on the screen.

Appendix 5.1.2), faceplate can be displayed

When "Privilege Level" of the application is specified to "Run this program as an administrator", "Privilege Level" of the monitor tool also needs to be specified to

"Run this program as an administrator."

For the method to execute programs as an administrator, refer to Section 5.1.

7-41 7-41

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.6 Pop-up Faceplate

PURPOSE

To display a screen called faceplate in the form of a pop-up window. This screen displays tag data contents in the forms of simulation adjusting meter and so on.

BASIC OPERATION

Any of the following methods can be used to display pop-up faceplate.

Find with tag names

1. Click the "Find" button ( ) on the monitor toolbar.

2. Specify and search tag names with the find dialog box (

3. The pop-up faceplate screen is displayed.

Section 8.4).

Display the related faceplate with alarm display bar.

1. Click the faceplate display button at the alarm display bar. This bar is at the top left corner of the monitor toolbar ( Section 6.3.1).

2. The pop-up faceplate screen related to alarm is displayed.

Display the related faceplate with alarm display bar

1. Click the "Alarm List" button ( ) on the monitor toolbar.

2. Double click the alarm display bar on the alarm list screen

( Section 7.3).

3. The pop-up faceplate screen related to the alarm is displayed.

Display from pop-up tuning screen.

1. Click the ">>" button on the pop-up tuning screen.

2. The pop-up tuning screen replaces the displayed pop-up faceplate screen.


Display button for switching to turning screen

Faceplate

7-42 7-42

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

POINT

Up to four pop-up windows can be displayed.

If a new pop-up window is opened when four pop-up windows have already been displayed, the earliest opened (displayed in the bottom) one among the four on-screen windows is automatically closed.

However, if it cannot be closed as displaying a dialog box for example, one next to the bottom is closed.

If a new pop-up window is opened when four pop-up windows have already been displayed, the bottom one of the on-screen pop-up windows is forcibly closed.

To keep the desired pop-up window open, close the unnecessary pop-up window before opening a new one.

In the server/client monitoring system, up to 72 windows among all OPSs (up to four windows in each OPS) can be displayed.

Applying Windows

R

7 or later Snap function to the pop-up faceplate screen may hinder the normal aspect ratio.

In this case, resize the pop-up faceplate screen to restore to the normal aspect ratio.

7-43 7-43

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.6.1 Displaying a faceplate

The information of distributed tag is displayed on the faceplate.

Tags are set by control panel setting ( Section 9.7).

For details of each faceplate, refer to "Chapter 10 FACEPLATE".

7.6.2 Displaying a pop-up tuning screen

Click the "<<" button on the pop-up faceplate, the tuning screen replaces the displayed faceplate screen. For details of the tuning screen, refer to "Section 7.7 Pop-up Tuning

Screen".

POINT

Click the button at the bottom of the faceplate to change the window of the display faceplate as shown below.

<Pop-up tuning>

<Control panel>

Open a new pop-up tuning screen

Change display

<Pop-up faceplate>

7-44 7-44

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.7 Pop-up Tuning Screen

PURPOSE

Screens for tuning display in the form of pop-up windows.

BASIC OPERATION

Any of the following methods can be used to display pop-up tuning screens.

Display from the control panel

1. Click the "Control Panel" button ( ) on the monitor toolbar.

2. Click the "Details" button of the faceplate on the control panel.

3. The pop-up faceplate screen is displayed.

Display from the pop-up faceplate screen

1. Click the "<<" button on the pop-up faceplate screen.

2. The pop-up tuning screen replaces the pop-up faceplate screen.


MV Pointer line SV Pointer line

10)

11)

5)

6)

3)

4)

12)

7)

8)

9)

1)Tag monitor 2)Tuning trend graph

<Under the loop tag condition

(except for tag type PGS, PGS2)>

Faceplate

13)

14)

1) Tag monitor 15) Program pattern graph

< Loop tag (PGS tag type)>

Faceplate

7-45

1) Tag monitor 16) Program pattern graph 2 Faceplate

< Loop tag (PGS2 tag type) >

7-45

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

1) Tag monitor Faceplate

< Status tag, Alarm tag (ALM tag type),

Message tag (MSG tag type) >

1) Tag monitor

17) Message display area Faceplate

< Alarm tag (ALM_64PT tag type),

Message tag (MSG_64PT tag type)

7-46 7-46

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.7.1 Displaying a pop-up tuning screen

The following table is the displayed contents of all bars on the pop-up tuning screen.


1) Tag monitor *

1

2) Tuning trend graph *

1

It displays values of the tag data items.

For the word item that can be displayed for each bit item, a mark is displayed on the left of the item for level indication.

The display of tag data items can be switched in the display switching tab of 8).

Values are input to the grid, which can change the values of tag data items.

Judgment between changeable tag data items and unchangeable tag data items can be made by the text color displayed in the "Data" field.

Changeable data :Black

Unchangeable data :Gray

A user who has authority of operation for changing tag data items can change the data.

For details of operation authority, refer to Appendix 4.

Note that data cannot be changed when lockout tag is set.

Each value of PV, SV, and MV is displayed in graphs.

By setting option setting, background color of the screen, color of the gridlines and each graph can be specified ( Section 9.17).

With check………Display the graphs.

Without check......Cannot display the graphs.

4) Cursor position data It can only display but cannot change the cursor position data of the tuning trend graph

7) Graph scroll bar

By moving the cursor position, data at any time on the tuning trend graph can be displayed on 4) bar.

When moved on the split bar, the mouse pointer turns to a mark.

Drag the split bar in this status to change the horizontal width of Tag monitor.

The tuning trend graph can be rolled.

The cursor position on the screen does not change, but the cursor position data changes after rolling. When rolling to the left of the oldest value, it returns to the oldest data position automatically.

8) Display switching tab

Switches the display items in tag monitor.

Tab name

Basic

All

Display item

Displays only the tag data items (such as PV/MV/SV value, PID constant and high/low limit alarm value) often monitored/set.

Displays all tag data items.

As for status, alarm and message tag, only the All tab is displayed.

It displays items' detailed names of the lines selected with tag monitor.

Displays only tag types available for auto tuning.

Auto tuning executing status

In executing

Not in executing

Alarm

Display

Not occurred Auto Tuning…

Not occurred Auto Tuning…

Occurred Auto Tuning…

Display format

Light blue

White

Red

Black

Gray

Gray

11)

Tuning trend collection instructions button and status display

It sets tuning trend collection instructions and displays status.

For details, refer to "Section 7.7.3 Tuning trend collection instruction".

12) Y-axis scale

13) Gridline time display

At the bottom is the scale of MV, at the top section is the scale of PV, SV.

In the middle are the values automatically calculated and displayed according to top and bottom limits of the scale.

The scale of MV displayed at the bottom is -10 to 110, and only the PFC_INT is -110 to 110.

For other than tags of PGS type, PGS2 type, double-click on the 2) Tuning trend graph to switch to display/hide Y-axis scale and zoom in/zoom out the graph area.

It displays the gridline time in hour and minute.

When the display trend data does not reach the gridline, the time will not be displayed.

Used to close the pop-up window.

14) "Close" button

*1: The displayed data are collected through high-speed tag data collection and high-speed current value collection (

Appendix 1.1).

The high-speed current value collection period is confirmed in the PLC communication status screen ( Section 8.5).

During collection of the tuning trend data, confirm the following current values displayed on the Collection Period for

Each Communication type tab of the PLC Communication Status screen (

 The current value of High-speed Current Value Collection (unit: second)

Section 8.5) are within 1 second.

 The current value of High-speed Tag Data Collection (unit: second)

If either of the value exceeds 1 second, the data cannot be collected in 1-second period.

7-47 7-47

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

No. Item

15) Program pattern graph

17) Message display area

Description

(

SV and MV against elapsed time are displayed by graphs.

Background color, gridline and color for each graph can be specified in the option setting.

Section 9.17)

(

Displays SV of the time set in advance for each step as graphs.

Background color, gridline and color for each graph can be specified in the option setting.

Section 9.17)

Displays alarm/message group name and alarm/message name of 64-point alarm tag or 64point message tag.

64-points alarm tag

The background color (“Major/Minor alarm color” in the option setting) of the alarm name cell will be changed depending on the alarm level during the corresponding error occur.

64-points message tag

The background color of the message name cell will be changed to green during the corresponding message occur.

When the corresponding alarm is not registered to the alarm setting, or the corresponding message is not registered to the event setting, the cell will be blank.

(1) Loop tag (except for tag type PGS, PGS2)

On the tuning trend graph, the 3 graphs of PV (process variable), SV (setting value) and MV (manipulated variable) are displayed one after another in the passing time sequence. The lines of the graphs are displayed in the colors set as the graph 1 to 3 display colors (PV: Graph 1 Color, SV: Graph 2 Color: MV:

Graph 3 Color) in option setting (trend graph). ( Section 9.17 (4))


Cursor position data

Tuning trend cursor

7-48

The pop-up tuning screen is composed of the tag monitor bar, tuning trend graph and faceplate.

<Tuning trend graph>

Gridline time display column

Graph scroll bar


Item Description

Cursor position data

Tuning trend cursor

Gridline time display column

Graph scroll bar

The values at the time selected with the tuning trend cursor are displayed.

Used to select a time point of the graph: the values corresponding to the selected point are displayed in the cursor position data field.

The time is displayed for each gridline.

Used to scroll the graph that cannot be displayed within a single screen.

REMARK

In the presence of displayed trend data, if the window size is changed or the gridline interval is changed on the pop-up tuning screen, the tuning trend cursor and graph scroll bar move to the right end.

7-48

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

(2) Loop tag (PGS tag type)

On the program pattern graph, values of SV (set time: second) and MV (set output: %) are displayed in graphs. These values are set with the tag item of

PGS.

When the MV output value is out of the high and low limit value range (this range is set through tag data items MH and ML), the graph in this section is displayed in a different color. It is displayed as the double graphs by gaining an integer from the high and low limit values of MV.


SV pointer line

SV pointer line

MV pointer line

MV low limit value

(ML)

The pop-up tuning screen consists of the tag monitor bar, program pattern graph and faceplate.

Graph within range

(PV value bar positive direction color)

Graph outside range

(PV high/low limit value bar color)

<Program pattern graph>


SV pointer line

MV pointer line

Item Description

MV low limit value (ML) The MV low limit value set in the tag data item ML is displayed.

The current value of the SV is displayed.

The SV pointer line is displayed in white.

The current value of the MV is displayed.

The MV pointer line is displayed in white.

Graph within range


Graph outside range


A graph whose MV output value is within the range of the MV high limit value and low limit value set in the tag data items MH, ML.

The line of the graph is displayed in the "PV value bar positive direction color" of the option setting (faceplate). ( Section 9.17 (3))

A graph whose MV output value is outside the range of the MV high limit value and low limit value set in the tag data items MH, ML.

The line of the graph is displayed in the "PV high/low limit value bar color" of the option setting (faceplate). ( Section 9.17 (3))

7-49 7-49

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

(3) Loop tag (PGS2 tag type)

On the program pattern graph2, the SV output value of the time set in advance for each step are displayed as graphs. For the Y-axis scale of the graph, RH and

RL set with the tag data item of PGS2 are used.

When the SV output value is out of the SV high and low limit value range set at the tag data item SH and SL, the corresponding section of the graph is displayed overlapping with the graph, which the values are clipped in the SV high and low limit value range, in a different color.


Crosshair cursor line (vertical)

Graph within range


Crosshair cursor line

(horizontal)

Graph outside range


<Pop-up tuning screen>

The screen consists of the tag monitor field, tuning trend graph, and faceplate.

PV point, PV line

<program pattern graph2>


Item Description

Crosshair cursor line (vertical)

Crosshair cursor line (horizontal)

PV point, PV line

Graph within range


Graph outside range


Displays the current time in the step.

The crosshair cursor line (vertical) is displayed in white.

Displays current setting value.

The crosshair cursor line (horizontal) is displayed in white.

Displays the current value of PV.

(PV point is displayed on the crosshair cursor line (vertical).)

PV point and PV line are both displayed in magenta.

A graph displayed when the SV output value is within the SV high and low limit value range set at the tag data item SH and SL.

The graph is displayed in color set for “PV bar positive direction color” in option setting. ( Section 9.17 (3))

A graph displayed when the SV output value is outside of the SV high and low limit value range set at the tag data item SH and SL.

The graph is displayed in color set for “PV high/low limit value bar color” in option setting. ( Section 9.17 (3))

7-50 7-50

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

(4) Status tag, alarm tag (ALM tag type), and message tag (MSG tag type)

The pop-up tuning screen is composed of the tag monitor bar and faceplate only.

(5) Alarm tag (ALM_64PT tag type), and message tag (MSG_64PT tag type)

The pop-up tuning screen is composed of the tag monitor bar, message display area, and faceplate.

7.7.2 Collecting tuning trend data

The tuned data is not saved in the files, but in the memory.

Data saved in the memory can be export to the CSV files. (

Section 7.7.8)

Item Description

Collection target

Sampling period

Collected data quantity

Recordable time

Simultaneous execution

Storing destination

Loop tag: 3 values of PV, SV and MV

1 second

Maximum number of 20000 points collected data can be stored in the memory each time of tuning. Even if the screen is closed, the collected data will not be cleared, and when collecting, it still continues to collect under the same condition.

If the buffer memory is full, it automatically stops collecting.

5.5 hours

16 tuning

Memory

7-51 7-51

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.7.3 Tuning trend collection instruction

On the pop-up tuning screen, click the button of tuning trend collection instructions to start/stop collecting tuning trend data.

1) Start

2) Stop

3) Automatic stop

4) Clear (Stopped) 5) Clear (Collecting)

1) Start

2) Stop

3) Automatic stop

4) Clear (Stopped)

5) Clear (Collecting)

Click the button to start collecting the tuning trend data.

When the points are recorded to 20000 and the buffer memory is full, tuning trend collection will start after deleting the current turning trend data.

Click the button to stop collecting the tuning trend data.

When the points are recorded to 20000 and the buffer memory is full, it will automatically stop.

Click the button to clear the tuning trend data. The tuning trend graph returns to the initial display status.

Click the button to clear the tuning trend data and automatically start collecting tuning trend.

Collecting

(Light Blue)

Stopped

(Yellow)

Stopped

(Yellow)

Stopped

(Yellow)

Collecting

(Light Blue)

POINT

A user who has the authority of operation for tuning trend data collecting instructions can execute the operation.

The collected data is cleared when the monitor tool is finished. When it is restarted, the data should be collected again, and the maximum number of 16 tags is 16.

The maximum number of tags tuned simultaneously (retainable tuning trend data) is 16.

If the total number of tag retaining tuning trend data is 16, any one of the existing data must be cleared to start collecting of new tags.

Clear any one of the tags displayed in collected tag list ( after the collection stops.

Section 7.7.7)

If restarting collection without clearing the data after the collection stop, the graph display in before stop and after restart are separated with dotted line.

The following shows the example when the collection is stopped/restarted.

Displays restarting line

(gridline color) with dotted line.

7-52

When stops collection at 15:21:45 and restarts 15:29:48:

Skips the time during stop and starts displaying the time when collection restarts.

In the server/client monitoring system, the maximum number of tags collected simultaneously among all OPSs is 288.

7-52

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.7.4 Changing a current value

The tag monitor bar can be used to change current values of the tag data on the popup tuning screen. Changed values can be set through a dialog box. This box is displayed from the [Data] quadrille of the tag monitor.

1. On the tag monitor, select the [Data] quadrille of the tag data items to be changed.

2. Click the displayed button.

3. The "Change Current Value" dialog box is displayed. (When the dialog box is displayed, the current value is displayed inside the setting value field).

4. Input the setting value.

WORD, DWORD type: Input with H added on the

INT, DINT type:

REAL type: head in the Hex system.

Input in the decimal system.

Input in the form of floating decimal points.

Select TRUE or FALSE by BOOL type: toggle button.

5. Click the "Set" button, and the current value is changed.

POINT

A user who has the authority of operation for changing the corresponding tag data items can change a current value.


Judgment between changeable tag data and unchangeable tag data can be made by the text color displayed in the "Data" field.

Changeable data : Black

Unchangeable data : Gray

Before clicking the "Close" button, the "Change Current Value" dialog box will not be closed. Therefore, the setting value can be continuously changed (repeat the operations of step 4 and 5 mentioned above).

7-53

REMARK

The current value should be set within the high and low limit range that is specified by each tag data item.

(If the setting value is out of the limit range, "Error" information will be displayed.)

For the setting range of each tag item, refer to "PX Developer Programming

Manual".

Before setting values of PV, SV, and high high/low/low low limit (PV, SV, PH, PL,

HH, LL, SH, SL), the right high/low values (RL, RH) of the engineering value should be set. If the tag data is R, when setting the SV value and its high/low values (SV, SH, SL), the right ratio high/low values (RMAX, MIN) should be set beforehand.

7-53

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.7.5 Auto tuning

When tuning on the pop-up tuning screens of the tag of types PID, 2PID and 2PIDH, it can be auto tuning before accurate adjustment. Thus, the value can be automatically adjusted to the approximate value.

With the auto tuning function, the following operations/displays are performed in the dialog boxes displayed when the "Auto Tuning" button located at the top center of the screen is clicked.

(1) An execution of auto tuning by the Step Response method

(2) An execution of auto tuning by the Limit Cycle method (only for the 2PIDH type)

(3) Auto tuning status display

POINT

When the lockout tag is set, or a user who does not have the authority of operation for changing a tuning parameter value cannot execute the following auto tuning operations.

(a) Start

(b) Stop/Reset alarm

(c) Restore PID parameters

When an alarm occurs, auto tuning will stop automatically.

The Limit Cycle method is available with PX Developer Version 1.14Q or later.

The Step Response method can be executed when the control mode is in

MANUAL mode or COMPUTER MV mode.

The Step Response method and the Limit Cycle method share the time-out period (AT1TOUT1). When changing the auto tuning method, please check whether the time-out period is appropriate.

7-54 7-54

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

7-55

MELSOFT

(1) An execution of auto tuning by the Step Response method

BASIC OPERATION

1. Click the "Auto Tuning" button.

2. The "Select Auto Tuning Operations" dialog box is displayed.

3. Select the radio button that says "Executes Auto Tuning by the Step Response method".

4. Click the "Next" button.

5. The "Execute Auto Tuning (Step Response method)" dialog box is displayed.

6. Set the following items.

•

Step Manipulated Variable

•

Sampling Period

•

Time-out Period

•

Time-out Period After Maximum Slope

7. By clicking the "Start" button, auto tuning starts

8. The "Status of Auto Tuning" dialog box is displayed.

9. Execution status of auto tuning can be checked in the auto tuning status display field located above the tuning trend graph even after the "Auto Tuning" dialog box is closed.

7-55

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

Normal End

Monitor tool command

The following shows the timing chart for auto tuning by the Step Response method.

The PLC CPU turns OFF.

CPU module response

Command type *

Start

OFF

ON

Stop/Reset alarm

Status

Alarm

OFF

Start

Stop

Occurred

Not occurred

OFF

ON

(AT in execution)

End with a halt by the Stop command


CPU module response

Command type *

OFF

Start

Stop/Reset alarm

Status

Alarm

OFF

Start

Stop

Occurred

Not occurred

OFF

ON


ON (AT in execution)

ON

OFF (Halt)

Abnormal end due to alarm occurrence


CPU module response

Command type *

Start

OFF

ON

Stop/Reset alarm

Status

Alarm

Start

Stop

Occurred

Not occurred

OFF

ON

(AT in execution)

OFF (Halt)

ON

(Alarm occurrence)

Reset alarm after abnormal end


CPU module response

Command type *

Start

Stop/Reset alarm

Status

Alarm

Start

Stop

Occurred

Not occurred

OFF

ON


ON

(AT in execution)

ON

(Alarm occurrence)

ON

OFF

(Alarm reset)

* Command type is used only when auto tuning by the Limit Cycle method by the tag type 2PIDH is executed.

7-56 7-56

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

(2) An execution of auto tuning by the Limit Cycle method (only for the

2PIDH model)

To the next page

BASIC OPERATION



3. Select the radio button that says "Executes Auto Tuning by the Limit Cycle method". (Only the 2PIDH type can select this method.)


5. The "Execute Auto Tuning (Limit Cycle method)" dialog box is displayed.

6. Set the following items.

•

Improves the disturbance response

• Suppresses the overshoot when the setting value is changed

• Using the Derivative Action (rapid response)

7. Click the "Details" button if needed.

8. Set the following tag data items.

• Output High Limit Value (AT2MVH)

• Output Low Limit Value (AT2MVL)

• Hysterisis (AT2HS)

• Time-out Period (AT1TOUT1)

9. Close the "Detail Setting of Limit Cycle method" dialog box by clicking the "OK" button.

7-57 7-57

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

10. Click the "Start" button to start auto tuning.


12. Execution status of auto tuning can be checked in the auto tuning status display field located above the tuning trend graph even after the "Auto Tuning" dialog box is closed.

7-58 7-58

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

The following shows the timing chart for auto tuning by the Limit Cycle method.

Normal End


CPU module response

Command type *

Start

ON

ON

Stop/Reset alarm

Status

Alarm

OFF

Start

Stop

Occurred

Not occurred

OFF

ON

(AT in execution)


End with a halt by the Stop command


CPU module response

Command type *

Start

Stop/Reset alarm

Status

Alarm

Start

Stop

Occurred

Not occurred

OFF

ON

ON


ON (AT in execution)

ON

OFF (Halt)

Abnormal end due to alarm occurrence


CPU module response

Command type *

Start

ON

ON

Stop/Reset alarm

Status

Alarm

Start

Stop

Occurred

Not occurred

OFF

ON

(AT in execution)

OFF (Halt)

ON

(Alarm occurrence)

Reset alarm after abnormal end


CPU module response

Command type *

Start

ON

ON


Stop/Reset alarm

Status

Alarm

Start

Stop

Occurred

Not occurred

OFF

ON

(AT in execution)

ON

(Alarm occurrence)

ON

OFF

(Alarm reset)

* When the command type turns ON, the system ladder refers to ATTYPE value to determine auto tuning type.

7-59 7-59

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

(3) Auto tuning status display

PURPOSE

Displays an execution status or alarm status of auto tuning.

BASIC OPERATION



3. Select the radio button that says "Displays the status of

Auto Tuning".



7-60

POINT

During execution of auto tuning, the "Select Auto Tuning Operations" dialog box is not displayed. Instead, the "Status of Auto Tuning" dialog box is displayed.

7-60

7 MONITOR FUNCTION


1)

2)

3)

4)

MELSOFT

6)

5)

7)

8) 9)


The Status of Auto Tuning can be checked on the pop-up tuning screen or Auto

Tuning dialog box.

No. Item

1) Title bar Displays the tag name of auto tuning target.

Displays auto tuning method.

Description

2) Method

Display

Step Response method

Operating method of auto tuning

Status that auto tuning is executed by the Step Response method

Limit Cycle method Status that auto tuning is executed by the Limit Cycle method

------ Status that the method is not decided

Displays the following depending on the status of auto tuning.

Status

Auto tuning in execution

Auto tuning not in execution

Display

Executing

Executing

Display format

Background color

Light blue

White

Text color

Black

Gray

7-61 7-61

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT


Displays the status of each alarm in different background color text color.

4) Alarm

Alarm status

Occurred

Background color

Red

Text color

Black

White

The following shows the alarms to be displayed in the alarm display field.

Gray

Alarm

Input High

Limit Alarm

Input Low

Limit Alarm

Output High

Limit Alarm

Output Low

Limit Alarm

Time-out

Operation

Mode

Alarm occurrence condition

Step Response method Limit Cycle method

When either of the bit for input high limit alarm (PHA) or input high high limit alarm (HHA) is ON in the alarm (ALM) items of the loop tag data

When either of the bit for input low limit alarm (PLA) or input low low limit alarm (LLA) is ON in the alarm (ALM) items of the loop tag data

T1 > MV High Limit Value (MH) in Step

Manipulated Variable (AT1STEPMV) for T1

= MV + AT1

T1 < MV Low Limit Value (ML) in Step

Manipulated Variable (AT1STEPMV) for T1

= MV + AT1

Alarms do not occur. *

1

(Output value (MV) is controlled below MV High Limit Value (MH).)

Alarms do not occur. *

1

(Output value (MV) is controlled above MV

Low Limit Value (ML).)

When the time from the start of auto tuning exceeds the time-out period (AT1TOUT1)

When the control mode (MODE) is other than MANUAL mode

• When the control mode (MODE) is switched during auto tuning

• When auto tuning is executed in CASDR mode

• ATTYPE < 0 or ATTYPE > 4

• AT2MVH AT2MVL

Response speed for calculation

R’ = Maximum slope value (%)/

Sampling period for AT1

R = |R’|/100(s-1)

When calculation result of above formulas is R 0

When PID parameters cannot be calculated

• Xc=AT2HS

• Calculation result PID parameters are

Gain > 999 and Integral Time/Derivative

Time > 9999

*1: With auto tuning by the Limit Cycle method, MHA, MLA, and DMLA of ALM tag are cancelled.

5)

6)

Stop/Reset

Alarm

PID parameters display

Stops auto tuning and resets an alarm.

Displays current PID parameters and PID parameters before auto tuning execution.

7)

8)

9)

Restore PID parameters

Back

Close

Writes the original PID parameters to the PLC.

This button cannot be used in the following cases: (Invalid)

•

In lock mode

• when the lockout tag is set

• auto tuning in execution

• when no PID parameters exist before auto tuning execution ("------" display)

Displays the previously displayed dialog box.

Closes a dialog box.

7-62 7-62

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.7.6 Changing the display magnification

The display magnification of the tuning trend graph can be changed through the time gridline intervals displayed on the screen and the Y-axis scale setting. The Y-axis scale can display the high and low limits of the data. When closing the window, the change will not be remembered, when restarting, the initial scale is displayed.

Description

Y-axis Y-axis scale Specify the display high and low values of each tag data item.

(1) Change the magnification of the X-axis

Selecting time intervals of the trend graph display can change the multiplying power of the horizontal direction.

1. Click the "Gridline Interval" button on the top of the screen.

2. The "Gridline Interval" dialog box is displayed.

3. Select the time intervals for splitting the gridline.


5. Change the X-axis display magnification of the trend graph.

Gridline interval

Display units

After the gridline intervals are changed, when moving the trend cursor, the minimum unit of the data that can be displayed is also changed. When the gridline interval is 30 seconds, the values per 1 second are displayed. But when the interval is 60 minutes, only the values per 2 minutes can be displayed.

The following table is the display units of each gridline interval.

30 seconds

1 second

1 minute

2 seconds

2 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 20 minutes 60 minutes

4 seconds 10 seconds 20 seconds 40 seconds 2 minutes

POINT

Ctrl + mouse wheel scroll enables the gridline interval to be wider/narrower on the tuning trend graph screen.

Ctrl + turn mouse wheel forward: wider the gridline Interval

Ctrl + turn mouse wheel backward: narrower the gridline Interval

7-63 7-63

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

(2) Change the magnification of the Y-axis

1. Click the "Y-axis Scale" button on the top of the screen.

2. The "Y-axis Scale" dialog box is displayed.

3. Specify the high and low limits of the displayed data on the screen.


5. Change the Y-axis display magnification of the tuning trend graph.

7.7.7 Collected tag list

Click the "Collected Tag List" button on the pop-up tuning screen, the collecting and stopping tag lists are displayed on the dialog box.

Select the tag on the "Collected Tag List" dialog box. Click the "Change Display" button and the specified tag is displayed on the pop-up tuning screen.

Now, on the "Collected Tag List" dialog box on the pop-up tuning screen, tags are displayed at the option status.

POINT

The display status of the "Collected Tag List" dialog box is refreshed at the period of

1 second.

7-64 7-64

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT


Click the "Export to CSV File" button on the pop-up tuning screen, and the trend data can be saved in the form of CSV in the files. When saving the data, the saving folder and file name should be specified.

The following table is the output forms.

In the first line are titles that can show contents of the data. In the rest of the lines, the collected data are output at the previous sequence of the date and time.

If restarting collection without clearing the data after collection stop, data indicating invalid (row only commas) is inserted for 1 row between the stop and the restart.

POINT

A user who has the authority of operation for exporting data of pop-up tuning to

CSV file can save the trend data to the files.

7-65 7-65

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MELSOFT

7.7.9 AT reflection target

A reflection target for parameters of the auto tuning result executed by upper loop of

HTCL tag can be selected.

1. Click the "Reflect of AT" button on the top of the screen.

2. The "Reflect of AT" dialog box is displayed.

3. Select a reflection target.


5. The value of selected radio button is written to the tag data item (PRM_SEL).

The following are the values written to the tag data items (PRM_SEL).

Reflection target Value to be written to PRM_SEL

None

Heat

Cool

Both

0

1

2

3

7-66 7-66

7 MONITOR FUNCTION

MEMO

7-67

MELSOFT

7-67

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

8

8 OTHER FUNTION

8.1 Starting/Stopping Buzzer

PURPOSE

When there is an alarm or event, it makes the buzzer beep then stop it after confirmation.

In the server/client monitoring system, when the buzzer beep is stopped on one

OPS, the buzzer beep on monitor tools

*1

of all OPSs in the system can be stopped. In this case, the buzzer beep can be stopped even on an OPS which is in the lock mode.

*1: Including a secondary server in the redundant server system configuration.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Click the "Setting Window" button on the monitor toolbar. Through operating

[Option Setting] [Alarm/Event] on the displayed setting window, the situation whether the buzzer beeps and types of the beeping sound can be set beforehand when there is an alarm and event. As long as it is not changed, the registered buzzer sound setting is still valid even after the monitor tool is restarted. For details, refer to "Chapter 9 SETTING".

2. When the buzzer is beeping, click the button "Stop Buzzer" on the monitor toolbar to stop it after confirming the cause.


Stop buzzer button

On occasion of alarm and event in monitoring, the monitor tool can make the buzzer beep to notify administrator the errors.

There are 3 different settings for the buzzer according to the degree of the alarm

(Major alarm/Minor alarm/Event).

After the installation, if the setting is not changed, the buzzer will not beep.

Clicking the button on the monitor toolbar can stop the beeping buzzer.

Besides, the buzzer can automatically stop after a certain time. Beeping time can be set with second as unit (the maximum setting: 99999 seconds = 27 hours

46 minutes and 39 seconds).

The buzzer starts to beep on occasion of an alarm or event.

When the specified time is over, the buzzer automatically stops beeping.

Click the "Stop buzzer" button to stop the buzzer beeping.

8-1

POINT

A user who does not have the authority of operation for stopping the buzzer cannot click the button.

When the buzzer is not beeping, nothing will change even if the "Stop Buzzer" button is clicked.

Besides the normal beep sound, the sound files (with WAV file as their extension character) can be set as the buzzer sound as well.

( Section 9.17 (2))

8-1

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

8.2 Print Screen

PURPOSE

Print the hard copy of the entire displayed desktop.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Click the button "Setting Window" on the monitor toolbar. Then on the displayed screen, set the printer as the printing beforehand through operating

[Option Setting] [General] [Printer], if the printer is preset and normally used, it needs not to be reset. For details, refer to "Chapter 9 SETTING".

2. Click the "Print Screen" button on the monitor toolbar to display the print screen dialog box. Select the print color from Normal/Gray Scale/Invert/Invert black and white, and click the "OK" button to print.


Print Screen button

<Print Screen dialog box>

It will be printed on the printer that is set in the print setting of Option Setting

(General) ( Section 9.17 (1)). If the printer name is not specified, then the default printer specified in the personal computer will be applied.

POINT

A user who does not have the authority of operation for copying the screen cannot click the button.

Print Screen function prints not only the section related to the monitor tool, but also the entire screen like its original appearance.

8

8-2 8-2

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

8.3 Screen Alignment

PURPOSE

Display the displayed windows after align them.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Click the "Setting Window" button on the monitor toolbar. Through operating

[Option Setting] [General] [Window mode] on the displayed setting window, the window is changed to multi-window. As long as the setting is not changed after registration, it is still valid even after the monitor tool is restarted. If it is not changed after installation, it is the multi-window setting.

For details, refer to "Chapter 9 SETTING".

2. Click the button "Cascade" or "Tile" on the monitor toolbar to print.


Screen alignment buttons

There are two kinds of screen alignment buttons.

Cascade button

Tile button

Cascade display One window is slightly cascaded on another window for alignment.

Tile display


8-3

<Cascaded screens> <Tiled screens>

Other application windows can also be aligned even if they are not opened with the monitor tool. The pop-up windows of the monitor tool cannot be aligned.

POINT

At the single-window mode, screens cannot be aligned (Buttons are not displayed).

8-3

8 OTHER FUNCTION

8.4 Find

MELSOFT

PURPOSE

Find tags, control panel and trend graph.

When finding the target, display it after opening the window.

BASIC OPERATION

Click the "Find" button on the monitor toolbar to display the Find Dialog Box. It is always displayed at the front position. After finding, the dialog box will not be closed as long as the close button is not clicked. Therefore, the finding can be continuously done.


Find button

<Find dialog box>

POINT

When the setting window is opened, the find button cannot be clicked.

The finding cannot be done through wildcards.

8-4 8-4

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

(1) Find with tag names

Select the radio button of the tags, then input the tag names, click the find button.

When the searching target is found, it becomes the following.

(a) If the pop-up faceplate is not opened

Open the pop-up faceplate on which the tag data is displayed as the target.

(b) If the target pop-up faceplate has already been opened

This faceplate becomes active.

(c) If 4 pop-up faceplate screens have already been opened

The earliest opened (displayed in the bottom) one among them is automatically closed and the pop-up faceplate that displays the target tag data opens.

However, if it cannot be closed as displaying a dialog box, for example, one next to the bottom is closed.

When finding only with the tag names, if there are any duplicated tags, the find will be done in the priority sequence of the projects; If simply finding with the tag names, the finding can be done with "project name: : tag name".

(2) Find with group names of the control panel

Select the control panel group by checking the radio button of the control panel.

Or input to the Combo box directly, and then click the find button.

When the target is found,

(a) In the case of multi-window mode

Newly open a control panel to display the corresponding group.

However, if 4 monitor windows (maximum) are already opened, a control panel cannot be newly opened. Close the monitor window, and start the operation.

(b) In the case of single-window mode

If no monitor window is opened, newly open a control panel to display the corresponding groups.

If a monitor window has been opened, the window is automatically closed and a control panel is newly opened to display the corresponding group.

8-5 8-5

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

(3) Find with group names of the trend graph

Select the radio button of the trend graph, select the trend graph group, or directly input to the Combo box, then click the find button.

When finding the target,

(a) In the case of multi-window mode

Newly open a trend graph to display the corresponding group.

However, if 4 monitor windows (maximum) are already opened, a trend graph cannot be newly opened. Close the monitor window, and start the operation.

(b) In the case of single-window mode

If no monitor window is opened, newly open a trend graph to display the corresponding groups.

If a monitor window has been opened, the window is automatically closed and a trend graph is newly opened to display the corresponding group.

For details of window modes, refer to "Section 6.4.2 Display form of monitor window".

8-6 8-6

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

8.5 Displaying the PLC Communication Status

8.5.1 Displaying the communication status

PURPOSE

To check the communication between monitor tool and CPU module for each project.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Click the "Help Menu" button ( ) on the monitor toolbar.

2. Select "PLC Communication Status" on the displayed Help Menu.

3. Click the << Status >> tab.


2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)

1)

8)



" PLC Communication Status" is displayed when connecting with CPU module,

" PLC Communication Status: [Simulation]" is displayed when a project in which the settings to be connected to simulator exists. ( Section 9.4)

Display the target name of monitor target.

(

Execute the setting of monitoring target project through monitor target project setting

Section 9.4).

9)

8-7 8-7

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT


Display the communication condition between monitor tool and the CPU module specified in "Transfer Setup" screen.

3) Status

Normal

Abnormal

--------

Data communication is normal

Data communication is abnormal or "Invalid Simulator Version" system alarm occurs when connecting with Simulator.

• The PLC connection target is not set. ( Section 9.4)

• The assignment information database file which is not supported is specified in a monitor target project

• Improper file is specified in a assignment information database file of the monitor target project

• The project which is set not to be connected to simulator during simulation*

1

of monitor tool

Black

Red

Black

4)

Response

Time [S]

Current

Value

Display the time from read request of low-speed tag data collecting *

2

to data receiving.

However, " " is displayed for the following situations.

The system alarm "Incorrect PLC type" occurs

The communication status is error or "

Display maximum response time of 3) above.

However, "

" is displayed

" is displayed for the following situations.

5)

Maximum

Value *

2


The communication status " " is displayed

Communication error occurred in initial communication with PLC (when starting monitor tool, re-reading with the monitor target project setting), has not restore the communication error yet.

Display the times of event notification *

3

received by CPU module.

Display range is 0 to 999999.

6)

Number of event notification received

*

2

If it exceeds 999999, it returns to 0.

If a communication error occurs during communication condition display, the previous value of the number of event notification received is kept displayed. In any of the following cases, however, " " is displayed for the following situations.


The PLC connection target is not set. ( Section 9.4)

The PLC connection target is Serial, USB, CC-Link, or GOT transparent (

Section 9.4)

The following two set network types are different.

1) PLC connection target of monitor tool

2) Event notification destination set on the <<Event Notification>> tab in the project parameter setting of the programming tool.

A communication error occurred (cable break, etc.)

When performing a monitor tool in a PC CPU, the monitor tool is connected to PLC

CPU with MELSECNET/10(H).

The transfer setup is set to "CC-Link IE Controller Network" and the version of the driver (SW1DNC-MNETG-B) is earlier than 1.08J.

The project which is set not to be connected to simulator during simulation

*1

of monitor tool

*1: The monitor tool will be in simulation when more than one project is set to perform simulator connection in the monitor target project setting. ( Section 9.4)

*2: It will be reset after starting monitor tool or executing monitor target project setting (

*3: For details, refer to Appendix 1.2.

Section 9.4).

8-8 8-8

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT


7)

Number of readings retried

Display the number of retry times of device data read processing from CPU module.

Display range is 0 to 999999.

If it exceeds 999999, it returns to 0.




The assignment information database file which is not supported is specified in a monitor target project

Improper file is specified in a assignment information database file of the monitor target project

Communication error occurs straight after starting the monitor tool or re-reading a monitor target project

The project which is set not to be connected to simulator during simulation*

1

of monitor tool

Click the button to reset the following items.

Response Time[s] (Maximum Value)

Number of event notification received

Number of readings retried

A user who has the authority of operation for resetting the maximum value/number of times can reset.

Change the mode to the engineer mode or operator mode.

9) "Close" button Click the button to close communication condition screen.

*1: The monitor tool will be in simulation when more than one project is set to perform simulator connection in the monitor target project setting. ( Section 9.4)

POINT

If the Setting Window button of monitor toolbar is clicked when displaying communication condition screen, communication condition screen will be closed automatically.

Additionally, if Setting Window has been displayed, the communication condition screen cannot be opened.

If all of the status, response time and number of event notification are displayed as " ", check the assignment information database file set in monitor target project setting. (

Section 9.4)

8-9 8-9

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

8.5.2 Displaying the redundant system status

PURPOSE

To check the redundant system status for each project.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Click the "Help Menu" button ( ) on the monitor toolbar.


3. Click the << Redundant System Status >> tab.


2) 3)

4)

5)

1)





Display the project name of monitor target.

(


Section 9.4).

6)

8-10 8-10

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT


3) Status

Display the communication conditions of system A and system B, and control/standby system status.

Process CPU

Nothing is displayed in the gray background.

Redundant CPU

Debug mode Backup mode/Separate mode

Normal

Message:

• When SM1516 is OFF

"Normal (Control System) "

• When SM1516 is ON

"Normal (Standby System) "

• When both SM1515 and SM1516 are OFF or ON

"Normal (Unknown) "

Message color: Black

Error Message: "Abnormal" Message color: Red

For system A, the same as described in left section.

For system B,

"-----" is displayed in black.

When the redundant system PLC parameter read error occurs, both system A/B) are displayed as "Abnormal".






When the system (system A/ B) cannot be specified


1

of monitor tool

Displays the redundant PLC specify in "Connection Setup".


The PLC connection target is not set. (

Section 9.4)




1

of monitor tool

When Process CPU is specified, nothing is displayed in the gray background.

"Not Specified" is displayed for the project which is set to be connected to simulator.

Displays the operation mode (Separate mode/Backup mode/Debug mode).

If a communication error occurs, the previous value is displayed.

However, " " is displayed as communication status.

When Process CPU is specified, nothing is displayed in the gray background.

"Debug Mode" is displayed for the project which is set to be connected to simulator.

6) "Close" button Click the button to close the communication condition screen.

*1: The monitor tool will be in simulation when more than one project is set to perform simulator connection in the monitor target project setting ( Section 9.4).

POINT

If "Setting window" button of monitor toolbar is clicked when the communication condition screen is displayed, the screen will be automatically closed.

In addition, if the setting screen has been already opened, the communication condition screen cannot be opened.

8-11 8-11

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

1)

8.5.3 Collection period for each communication type

2)

3)

PURPOSE

To specify the collection period of each communication type of monitor tool and

CPU module.

<<High-speed Collection Period>> tab and <<Low-speed Collection Period>> tab are displayed depending on the collection period.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Click "Help Menu" button ( ) on the monitor toolbar.


3. Click << High-speed Collection Period>> tab or <<Low-speed Collection

Period>> tab.


4)

5)

<<High-speed Collection Period>> tab <<Low-speed Collection Period>> tab





Display the target name of monitor target.

(


Section 9.4).

8-12 8-12

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT



3)

Current Value and Maximum

Value of

Collection

Period for Each

Communication

Type *

2

Current Value

Maximum Value

Display the current value of the collection period of each communication type. (unit: second)






Communication status error


1

of monitor tool

Display the maximum value of the collection period of each communication type. (unit: second)







1

of monitor tool

Click the button to reset the maximum value of collection period.

A user who has the authority of operation for resetting the maximum value/number of times can reset.

Also, reset cannot be done during change mode dialog box.

5) "Close" button Click the button to close the communication status screen.

*1: The monitor tool will be in simulation when more than one project is set to perform simulator connection in the monitor target project setting (

*2: For details, refer to Appendix 1.1.

Section 9.4).

POINT

If collection is performed behind the set period, take the measure by referring to

Appendix 1.10.

If "Setting window" button of monitor toolbar is clicked when the communication condition screen is displayed, the screen will be automatically closed.

If the setting screen has been already opened, the communication condition screen cannot be opened.

8-13 8-13

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

8.6 Server/Client Monitoring System

8.6.1 Setting data in the secondary server/clients

Secondary server

(1) Setting data in a secondary server

A secondary server starts up reading the setting data from a primary server so that when the primary server fails and clients connect to the secondary server, the clients can display the monitor screen having the same configuration as when clients connect to the primary server previously.

[When a secondary server is started up]

1) A secondary server is started up.

2) The setting data is copied from the primary server to the secondary server.

Ethernet

Setting data

Primary server

Setting data item

Setting items customizable in a secondary server

(Items described as

(changeable) in "Change in a secondary server" in

Section 3.2)

Common setting items

(Items not mentioned above)

Data description to be copied

Data contents to be copied are different depending on the "detail setting of overwriting the setting data" in the monitor tool execution type setting

( Section 9.5).

 Overwrite all

The setting data in a server is copied to the setting data in a secondary server. However, the setting data in the monitor tool execution type setting is not copied.

 Leave settings inherent in this OPS

Items set to leave the setting inherent in a secondary server are not changed.

The setting data in a primary server is always copied to the setting data in a secondary server.

Secondary server

Setting data

[When the setting data in a secondary server is changed]

1) The setting data in a secondary server is changed.

Setting data item

Setting items customizable in a secondary server

(Items described as

(changeable) in "Change in a secondary server" in Section

3.2)




The setting data which has been copied to a secondary server is changed.

The setting data cannot be changed in a secondary server.

8-14

Secondary server

Ethernet

[When the setting data in a primary server is changed]

1) The setting data in a primary server is changed.

2) The setting data change is notified from the primary server to a secondary server.

3) A message is displayed in the secondary server and the setting data is automatically copied (refer to 2) in [When a secondary server is started up] of this section) from the primary server to the secondary server.

Primary server

Setting data

POINT

If neither setting screen nor monitor screen is opened on a secondary server when the setting data is changed on a primary server, the secondary server copies the setting data from the primary server automatically.

8-14

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

(2) Setting data in clients

In a client, starting up with loading the setting data configured in a server enables to display monitor screens with the same configuration as the server.

Customizable settings (the monitor tool execution type setting, settings to customize displays, and settings depending on environment of a personal computer (client)) can be changed in a client.

Clients

Server

Setting data

[When a client is started up]

Setting data Setting data Setting data

Ethernet

1) A client is started up.

2) The setting data is automatically copied from the server to the client.

Setting data item

Setting items customizable in clients

(Items described as

(changeable) in "Change in clients" in Section 3.2)


Data contents to be copied are different depending on the "detail setting of overwriting the setting data" in the monitor tool execution type setting

( Section 9.5).

 Overwrite all

The setting data in a server is copied to the setting data in a client. However, the setting data in the monitor tool execution type setting is not copied.

 Leave settings inherent in this OPS

Items set to leave the setting inherent in a client are not changed.



The setting data in a server is always copied to the setting data in a client.

[When the setting data in a client is changed]

Clients

Setting data

1) The setting data in a client is changed.

Setting data item Data description to be copied

Setting items customizable in clients

(Items described as

(changeable) in "Change in clients" in Section 3.2)



The setting data which has been copied to a client is changed.

The setting data cannot be changed in a client.

Clients

Ethernet

[When the setting data in a server is changed]

1) The setting data in a server is changed.

2) The setting data change is notified from the server to a client.

3) A message is displayed in the client and the setting data is automatically copied (refer to 2) in [When a client is started up] of this section) from the server to the client.

8-15

Server

Setting data

POINT

If neither setting screen nor monitor screen is opened on a client when the setting data is changed on a server, the client copies the setting data from the server automatically.

8-15

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

8.6.2 Procedure for copying the setting data

Load the setting data automatically/manually from a server when the setting data is changed in the server during the secondary server/client execution.

Start

The setting data is changed in a server during the client execution.

Click the "No" button.

The setting data is automatically loaded.

Click the "Yes" button.

If the following message is displayed in the client, load the setting data manually.

(

Execute "Acquire Server Setting Data" from the help menu.

Section 8.6.5)

8-16

Finish

Click the "Yes" button.

The processing dialog box is displayed and the message

"Receiving the setting data..." and "Reading the setting data..." is displayed depending on progress.

8-16

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

8.6.3 Switching server

PURPOSE

The server to be connecting can be switched with clients when [Details]-

(

"Redundant Server" is activated in the monitor tool execution type setting

Section 9.5).

BASIC OPERATION


2. Select "Switch Server" on the displayed Help Menu to display the Switch

Server dialog box.

3. Select the server to switch to, and click the "OK" button.


1)

2) 3)


No. Item

1) Server to switch

2) "OK" button

3) "Cancel" button

Description

Select the server to switch to, either Primary Server or Secondary Server.

Click the button to close the dialog box and start the switch server process.

Click the button to close the dialog box and cancel the switch server process.

POINT

When the current user does not exist or the current user has been modified in the data acquired from a new server after switching server, the monitor tool mode switches to the lock mode automatically.

8-17 8-17

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

8.6.4 Connecting to server

PURPOSE

When a secondary server is not connected to a primary server or when a client is not connected to a server in a non-redundant server system, they can be connected to the servers manually.

BASIC OPERATION


2. A secondary server connects to a primary server and a client connects to a server by selecting “Connect Server” on the displayed Help Menu.

POINT

When the current user does not exist or the current user has been modified in the data acquired from a new server after connecting to server, the monitor tool mode switches to the lock mode automatically.

8.6.5 Acquiring the server setting data

PURPOSE

In the server/client monitoring system, clients and a secondary server read the setting data from a server*

1

being connected in the following cases.

The setting data are changed on a server being connected while the client is running.

The setting data are changed on a primary server being connected while the secondary server is running.

*1: A secondary server connects to a primary server.

In addition, the setting data can manually be acquired when the message box

( Section 8.6.2), which is displayed on a secondary server/client when the setting data are changed on a server, is closed by clicking the “No” or “Cancel” button.

BASIC OPERATION


2. Select "Acquire Server Setting Data" on the displayed Help Menu.

8-18 8-18

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

8.6.6 Time adjustment among OPSs

In the server/client monitoring system, client time is synchronized with the server time.

In the redundant server system, time of the secondary server is synchronized with one of the primary server. The time adjustment among OPSs is executed when "Time

Adjustment among OPSs" on Option Setting of client/secondary server is "Yes".

Time adjustment is automatically made at the following timing.

 Secondary server start up (in the redundant server configuration)

 Client start up

 Once every hour (5 minutes 0 second past the hour)

 Server time adjustment

POINT

Setting "Time Adjustment among OPSs" to “Yes” on Option Setting is recommended. Set to "No" only when another time adjustment system such as

SNTP is applied.

Use the following combination of settings to avoid the time adjustment among

OPSs in client/secondary server.

Set the Time Adjustment among OPSs setting to “Enable” in setting data acquisition on Detail setting of overwriting the setting data of Monitor Tool

Execution Type Setting.

Set to "No" on "Time Adjustment among OPSs" of Option Setting.

Log on to a personal computer using an account belonging to Administrators group with all rights to control whole the computer, and execute the monitor tool.

When executing a secondary server or client, select "Run this program as an administrator" under "Privilege Level" of the monitor tool and execute it.

The time data is sent from a server (primary) to a secondary server and clients, and delays of less than 1 second may occur due to network loads.

8-19 8-19

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

8.6.7 Displaying the server/client communication status

PURPOSE

In the server/client monitoring system, to check the communication status between a server and clients in the monitor tool server.

BASIC OPERATION


2. Select "Server/Client Communication Status" on the displayed Help Menu.


1) 2) 3) 4)

In a secondary server, the same contents as in a primary server are displayed.

<Running as Primary Server>

5)

<Running as Server (non-redundant)>



Display the secondary server name when the monitor tool is executed as Primary

Server or display the primary server name when it is executed as Secondary Server, followed by the OPS names registered in the OPS setting ( in order from Client 1 to Client 16.

Section 9.5) in a server

Lines not registered in the OPS setting remain blank.

Display the communication status between a server and clients.


2)

3)

4)

5)

8-20

Communication

Status

Response Time [s]

Number of bytes sent

"Close" button

Not connected Not connected to the client.

Connecting Connecting to the client.

Connection from the client is not acceptable due to the following reasons.

Conversion from a host name to an IP address is failed.

As a result of conversion from a host name to an IP address, the IP address overlaps with an IP address of another

OPS.

Red

Black

Black

Display the response time of the communication with clients. (unit: second)


However, this is not displayed when the communication status is "Not connected".

(" " is displayed.)

Display the data volume per second sent to clients. (unit: byte)


However, this is not displayed when the communication status is "Not connected".

(" " is displayed.)

Click the button to close the communication status screen.

8-20

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

8.7 Automatic CSV File Export

PURPOSE

To output trend, alarm and event data to CSV files automatically.

Used when it is desired to save trend, alarm and event data in CSV files automatically as histories.

(1) Functions related to automatic CSV file export

(a) Automatic trend CSV file export ( Section 8.7.1)

Trend data are output to CSV files automatically.

(b) Automatic alarm CSV file export ( Section 8.7.2)

Alarm data are output to CSV files automatically.

(c) Automatic event CSV file export ( Section 8.7.3)

Event data are output to CSV files automatically.

(d) Automatic CSV file deletion ( Section 8.7.4)

CSV files output automatically are deleted automatically when the storage period has passed.

(e) Disk free space check ( Section 8.7.5)

When the free space of the disk drive that stores the PX Developer installation destination, trend binary data file, and CSV files output automatically has decreased to or below the preset value, the alarm indicates a shortage of the free space of the disk drive.

(2) Setting items related to automatic CSV file export

The following table indicates the setting items related to automatic trend CSV file export, automatic alarm CSV file export and automatic event CSV file export.

Setting item

Trend setting

Option setting (General)

Option setting (Alarm/Event)

Option setting (Trend graph)

Setting position














Automatic trend CSV file export time (0 to 23)



Reference

Section 9.8

Section 9.17 (1)

Section 9.17 (2)

Section 9.17 (4)

8-21 8-21

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

(3) Automatic CSV file export setting procedure

BASIC OPERATION

1. The monitor tool can be set in the engineer mode only.

When the mode is not the engineer mode, change mode ( to the engineer mode.

2. Click the "Setting Window" button on the monitor toolbar.

Section 4.5)

The setting window is displayed.

3. Set the automatic CSV file export target folder, whether to include a group name in an export file name, automatic CSV file deletion (Enable/Disable), automatic CSV file export time (automatic trend CSV file export only), and storage period (CSV file storage period when automatic CSV file deletion is executed).

The setting positions are as indicated below.

After setting, click the "Apply" button.

Used function Setting item




Option setting

(Trend graph)

Option setting

(Alarm/Event)

Setting position












4. When Automatic CSV file deletion is set to "Enable" in above 3., set the time for deleting CSV files automatically.

In Option setting (general), set the "Automatic CSV file deletion time (0 to

23)".

Click the "Apply" button.

5. In Option setting (general), set the "Disk free space check size (MB)."


6. Set Automatic CSV file export to "Enable".

The setting positions are as indicated below.


Automatic CSV file export starts.

Used function




Setting item Setting position

Trend setting Automatic CSV file export (set to each group)

Option setting

(Alarm/Event)



8-22 8-22

8 OTHER FUNCTION


Trend Setting

Option Setting (General)

Option Setting (Alarm/Event)

MELSOFT

Option Setting (Trend Graph)

8-23

POINT

Set the automatic trend CSV file export time and automatic CSV file deletion time to the time when the monitor tool is running.

If the monitor tool has not yet started at the automatic trend CSV file export time,

CSV files not yet exported are output at the next monitor tool start.

8-23

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

8.7.1 Automatic trend CSV file export

This section explains the timing, storage destination, output form, precautions, etc. of automatic trend CSV file export.

(1) Timing and data range of automatic trend CSV file export

The timing of automatic trend CSV file export is as indicated below depending on the sampling period ( Section 9.8) of trend data.

CSV Files Export timing Range of Data Output to 1 File Sampling Period

1s

10s

1min

5min

10min

Output per hour (0 min every hour).

Output per day.

The CSV files export time is as set to "Automatic trend CSV file export time (0 to 23)" in Option setting (Trend graph).

Trend data of past one hour

Trend data of past one day *

1

*1: The automatic trend CSV file output per day is the data between 0:00:00 to

23:59:59 of the previous day.

<Output CSV file>

Date, TAG001.MLL, TAG001.MV, TAG001.SV, TAG001.MODE,,,,

6/1/2003 0:00:00 AM, 0, 66.9, 450.0, H0010,,,,

6/1/2003 0:01:00 AM, 0, 66.9, 450.0, H0010,,,,

6/1/2003 23:58:00 PM, 0, 53.9, 450.0, H0010,,,,

6/1/2003 23:59:00 PM, 0, 53.9, 450.0, H0010,,,,

The output data are those between 0:00:00 to 23:59:59 of the previous day, regardless of the automatic trend CSV file export time (0 to 23).

8-24 8-24

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

POINT

If the monitor tool has not yet started at the time of automatic CSV file export, the automatic trend CSV file is output at the next start of the monitor tool.

Automatic trend CSV file export at a monitor tool start outputs the data of the preceding file.

Automatic trend CSV file 1)

(Data between 0:00:00 to 23:59:59)

Automatic trend CSV file 2)

Monitor tool already started

Monitor tool not started

Monitor tool already started

Time

Automatic CSV file export time

(CSV file cannot be output since monitor tool has not yet started.)

Automatic trend CSV file 1) is output at start of monitor tool, as it could not be output at the previous export time.

When the "Automatic trend CSV file export time (0 to 23)" setting in Option setting (Trend Graph) is changed to before the current time, the timing of trend

CSV file export changes as described below.

(a) When the output of the data for this day's output is completed

The automatic trend CSV file is output at the new automatic trend CSV file export time, starting with the data for the next output (next day).

(b) When the output of the data for this day's output is not completed

The automatic trend CSV file for this day's output is output immediately after the setting is changed.

For example, when the current time is 10:30:00, July 10 and the "Automatic trend CSV file export time (0 to 23)" setting is changed to 8 o'clock, the data at 00:00:00 to 23:59:59, July 9 is output.

8-25 8-25

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

8-26

Sampling Period

(2) Output destination and file name of automatic trend CSV file

(a) Output destination of automatic trend CSV file

An automatic trend CSV file is output to the folder set to "Automatic trend

CSV file export target folder" in Option setting (Trend graph).

When the above setting has not been made, however, the file is output to the "TrendCSV" folder indicated in Section 2.3.

(b) File name of trend CSV file to be output automatically

One automatic trend CSV file is created for one group.

The file name of the CSV file to be output automatically changes as shown below depending on the sampling period of trend data ( and "Automatic Trend CSV File Export File Name" ( in the option setting (trend graph).

Section 9.8)

Section 9.17 (4))

1s

10s

1min

5min

10min

File Name

When "Do not include Group Name" is selected

TrendGroup(trend group No.)_(storage date)_(time).CSV

The format of the file name is as shown below.

TrendGroup003_20030601_09.CSV

Time (2 digits)

Storage date

Format is "YYYYMMDD".

(YYYY: Year in 4 digits, MM: Month in 2 digits, DD: Day in 2 digits)

Trend group No. (3 digits)

"TrendGroup" (Fixed to character string)

When "Include Group Name" is selected

(Group name)_(trend group No.)_(storage date)_(time).CSV

The "storage date" and "time" are those of the data output to the automatic trend CSV file.

(Example) When the trend group No. is 3, the group name is Device A, and the range of the data output to the automatic trend CSV file is 9:00:00 to 9:59:59 on June 1,

2003

"Do not include Group Name" : "TrendGroup003_20030601_09.CSV"

"Include Group Name" : "Device A_003_20030601_09.CSV"

When "Do not include Group Name" is selected

TrendGroup(trend group No.)_(storage date).CSV

The format of the file name is as shown below.

TrendGroup005_20030603.CSV

Storage date



Trend group No. (3 digits)

"TrendGroup" (Fixed to character string)

When "Include Group Name" is selected

(Group name)_(trend group No.)_(storage date).CSV

The "storage date" is that of the data output to the automatic trend CSV file.

(Example) When the trend group No. is 5, the group name is Device A, and the range of the data output to the automatic trend CSV file is 0:00:00 to 23:59:59 on June 3,

2003

"Do not include Group Name" : "TrendGroup005_20030603.CSV"

"Include Group Name" : "Device A_005_20030603.CSV

8-26

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

POINT

When the automatic trend CSV file export target folder is changed during automatic CSV file export, the setting change is reflected on the automatic export processing in the next period.

The free space of the disk drive that includes the PX Developer installation destination, trend binary data storage folder and automatic CSV file export target folder is monitored according to the "Disk free space check size (MB)" in Option setting (general).

When automatic trend CSV files are saved including group names, if the trend group name is changed, CSV files that were output before the change cannot be displayed on the trend graph.

(3) Output form of automatic trend CSV file

The output form of an automatic trend CSV file is the same as that of the CSV output of a trend graph.

For details of the CSV output of a trend graph, refer to Section 7.2.6.

POINT

When no trend data exist, no characters are output to the value of item.

Collection of trend data started at 9:46:49

Trend data collection start

9:00:00 9:46:49 9:59:59

<Output CSV file>

Date, TAG001.MLL, TAG001.MV, TAG001.SV, TAG001.MODE,,,,

6/1/2003 9:00:00 AM,,,,,,,,

6/1/2003 9:00:01 AM,,,,,,,,

Trend data do not exist in this area.

(Only dates and times are output.)

6/1/2003 9:46:47 AM,,,,,,,,

6/1/2003 9:46:48 AM,,,,,,,,

6/1/2003 9:46:49 AM, 0, 66.9, 450.0, H0010,,,,

6/1/2003 9:46:50 AM, 0, 66.9, 450.0, H0010,,,,

Trend data collection start

6/1/2003 9:59:58 AM, 0, 53.9, 450.0, H0010,,,,

6/1/2003 9:59:59 AM, 0, 53.9, 450.0, H0010,,,,

8-27 8-27

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

An error may occur during file processing due to the insufficient disk free space at the time of CSV files export.

In this case, the system alarm "file error" ( Section 7.3.1) occurs.

When the file error occurs, the CSV file is not output.

The CSV file that could not be output will be output at either of the following timings.

Output timing of automatic trend CSV file after recovery from file error

File error occurrence

File error occurring

Recovery from file error

Output timing of automatic CSV file

Output at output timing of automatic CSV file after recovery from file error

When monitor tool is started next time

The output timing is the same as when the monitor tool has not started at the time set for exporting CSV file automatically.

For details, refer to POINT in (1) in this section.

POINT

If automatic trend CSV file export could not be performed due to a file error, etc., the file that could not be output will also be output together at the next export time.

Only the data of the preceding file is output as the data that could not be output by automatic trend CSV export.

In the case of the trend data whose sampling period is 1 s

(When automatic trend CSV file export is performed at 0 minutes every hour)

File error occurrence

File error occurring

Recovery from file error

Output timing of automatic CSV file

9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14 :00

Data output at 13:00 and 14:00 are output together.

Only the data of the preceding file is output as the data that could not be output by trend CSV file export.

(In this example, only the data output at 13:00)

8-28 8-28

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

8.7.2 Automatic alarm CSV file export

This section explains the timing, storage destination, output form, precautions, etc. of automatic alarm CSV file export.

(1) Timing and data range of automatic alarm CSV file export

The alarm data is output to a CSV file at alarm occurrence/recovery.

The data of one day are output to one alarm CSV file.

Hence, when the date changes, the output destination file of the automatic alarm

CSV file data changes.

POINT

If the alarm is cleared, i.e., alarm recovery is made by taking either of the following actions, the alarm recovery date will not be output to the automatic alarm CSV file, while the date will be stored and displayed in the alarm list.

Restart the monitor tool, or click the "Apply" or "Reload" button in the monitor target project setting ( Section 9.4) to clear all the alarms.

(Except the following system alarm errors: file error, memory error and exception error.)

Check the check box within the Confirm field to clear the alarm.

(Except the following system alarm errors: file error, memory error and exception error.)

(2) Output destination and file name of automatic alarm CSV file

(a) Output destination of automatic alarm CSV file

An automatic alarm CSV file is output to the folder set to "Automatic alarm

CSV file export target folder" in Option setting (alarm/event).

When the above setting has not been made, however, the file is output to the "AlarmCSV" folder indicated in Section 2.3.

(b) File name of alarm CSV file to be output automatically

One automatic alarm CSV file is created a day.

Hence, naming of the CSV file to be output automatically is as described below.

File name

Alarm_(Storage date).CSV

The file name format is as indicated below.

Alarm_20030601.CSV

Storage date



"Alarm" (Fixed to character string)

The "storage date" indicates the data when the data are generated and output to the automatic alarm CSV file.

(Example) When the data output to the automatic alarm CSV file is the data of June 1, 2003

"Alarm_20030601.CSV"

8-29 8-29

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

POINT

When the automatic alarm CSV file export target folder is changed during automatic CSV file export, the setting change is reflected from the next automatic alarm CSV file export processing.

The free space of the disk drive that includes: the PX Developer installation destination, trend binary data storage folder and automatic CSV file export target folder is monitored according to the "Disk free space check size (MB)" in Option setting (general).

<CSV export of alarm list>

(3) Output form of automatic alarm CSV file

Unlike the CSV export of the alarm list ( Section 7.3.7), the alarm occurrence and recovery in automatic alarm CSV file export are output to different lines.

Alarm occurrence and recovery are output to one line.

<Automatic alarm CSV file export>

Alarm occurrence and recovery are output to different lines.

Recovery date and time are not output to alarm occurrence line.

Occurrence date and time are not output to alarm recovery line.



When the file error occurs, the alarm definition is not output to the CSV file.

The alarm is displayed in the alarm list ( display area (

Section 7.3) or in the alarm/event

Section 6.3.1) of the monitor toolbar.

8-30 8-30

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

8.7.3 Automatic event CSV file export

This section explains the timing, storage destination, output form, precautions, etc. of automatic event CSV file export.

(1) Timing and data range of automatic event CSV file export

The event data is output to a CSV file at event occurrence.

The data of one day are output to a one event CSV file.

Hence, when the date changes, the output destination file of the automatic event

CSV file data changes.

(2) Output destination and file name of automatic event CSV file

(a) Output destination of automatic event CSV file

An automatic event CSV file is output to the folder set to "Automatic event

CSV file export target folder" in Option setting (alarm/event).

When the above setting has not been made, however, the file is output to the "EventCSV" folder indicated in Section 2.3.

(b) File name of event CSV file to be export automatically

One automatic event CSV file is created a day.

Hence, naming of the CSV file to be export automatically is as described below.

File name

Event_(Storage date).CSV

The file name format is as indicated below.

Event_20030601.CSV

Storage date



"Event" (Fixed to character string)

The "storage date" indicates the data when the data are generated and output to the automatic event CSV file.

(Example) When the data output to the automatic event CSV file is the data of June 1, 2003

"Event_20030601.CSV"

POINT

When the automatic event CSV file export target folder is changed during automatic CSV file export, the setting change is reflected from the next automatic event CSV file export processing.

The free space of the disk drive that includes the PX Developer installation destination, trend binary data storage folder and automatic CSV file export target folder is monitored according to the "Disk free space check size (MB)" in Option setting (general).

8-31 8-31

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

(3) Output form of automatic event CSV file

The output form of an automatic event CSV file is the same as in the CSV export of the event list.

For details of the CSV export of the event list, refer to Section 7.4.6. processing



When the file error occurs, the alarm definition is not output to the CSV file.

The event is displayed in the event list (

Section 7.4) or in the alarm/event display area ( Section 6.3.1) of the monitor toolbar.

8-32 8-32

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

8.7.4 Automatic CSV file deletion

PURPOSE

Use of automatic CSV file export stores CSV file automatically. Hence, the disk drive may be short of free space if automatic CSV file storage is continued.

Set automatic CSV file deletion in order to prevent the disk drive from being short of free space.

BASIC OPERATION

The following table shows the setting item related to the automatic CSV file deletion.

Setting item

Option setting (General)

Option setting (Alarm/Event)

Option setting (Trend graph)

Setting position Reference

Automatic CSV file deletion time (0 to 23) Section 9.17 (1)





Section 9.17 (2)



Section 9.17 (4)

By setting "Automatic CSV file deletion" to "Enable", CSV files are automatically deleted after the time set to "CSV file storage period (days)" has passed (The execution time (hour and minute) setting is available). This function is applied to the files stored in the corresponding automatic CSV file export target folder.

For automatic CSV file deletion, automatic detection execution time can also be set.

For details of setting procedure of the automatic CSV file deletion, refer to Section

8.7 (3).

POINT

When the automatic CSV file export target folder is changed during CSV files delete, the previous folder is excluded from the deletion target at the time of next deletion.

[Before change]

C:\Melsec\Fbdq\Userdata\Csvdata1

[After change]

C:\Melsec\Fbdq\Userdata\Csvdata2

Automatic CSV file export target folder is ch anged.

Automatic CSV file export target folder

Automatic CSV file export target folder

8-33

Previous folder is excluded from the target of automatic

CSV file deletion.

Even though trend group names can be included in automatic trend CSV file names in accordance with the setting of "Automatic trend CSV file export target folder" in the option setting (trend graph) ( Section 9.17 (4)), this function deletes files of both formats: ‘Include Group Name’ format and ‘Do not include

Group Name’ format.

However, a file whose name includes trend group name is deleted only when a combination of a group name and a group number in the file name matches the contents of the trend setting.

8-33

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

8.7.5 Disk free space check

PURPOSE

Set the low limit value of the disk free space, in order that an alarm will occur when the disk drive runs short of space due to automatic CSV file export.

BASIC OPERATION

The following table shows the setting item related to the disk free space check.

Setting item

Option setting (general)

Setting position


Reference

Section 9.17 (1)

For details of setting procedure of the disk free space check size, refer to Section

8.7.

(1) When disk is short of free space

When the free space of the disk drive decreases to or below the "Disk free space check size (MB)" in the option setting (general), the alarm for the disk free space error occurs.

For details of the alarm, refer to Section 7.3.1.

(2) Target disk drive of disk free space check

This function checks the disk drives that include the storage folders of PX

Developer installation destination, trend binary data files, automatic trend CSV file, automatic alarm CSV file and automatic event CSV file. (for each partition)

The alarm is occurrence and recovery for each disk drive.

When storage folders of data exist in two disk drives, Drive C and Drive D

Folder of PX

Developer installation destination

Storage folder of trend binary data

Automatic trend

CSV file export target folder

Automatic alarm


Automatic event


Drive C Drive D

Drive C and Drive D are the target of disk free space check!

8-34 8-34

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MELSOFT

POINT

If the folders within the disk drive become unused after storage folder setting is changed, errors in the disk drive will be cleared.

At the same time, the disk drive will be excluded from the target of the disk free space check.

Folder of PX


Automatic alarm


Drive C


Automatic trend


Automatic event


Drive D

Storage folders are changed.

Folder of PX



Automatic trend


Automatic alarm


Automatic event


Drive C

The disk free space error within Drive D is cleared.

Drive D is excluded from the target of disk free space check.

(3) Disk free space check period

A disk free space check is performed at intervals of 10 minutes.

8-35 8-35

8 OTHER FUNCTION

MEMO

8-36

MELSOFT

8-36

9

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9 SETTING

Various functions of the monitor tool are executed according to the settings specified previously.

These settings can only change the users who have been licensed by the user with engineer authority. In order to avoid any change by common operators, the setting window can only be displayed in the engineer mode.

For details, refer to "Chapter 4 MODE ADMINISTRATION".

9.1 Common

This part explains the common operation on the setting window.

9.1.1 Displaying and operating the setting window

PURPOSE

Display the windows and conduct basic operations

BASIC OPERATION

Open the setting window with the following methods:

1. Click the "Change Mode" button on the monitor toolbar.

2. On the displayed Change Mode dialog box, input the user name and password with engineer authority to change the mode to the engineer mode.

(If it is the engineer mode already, the operations mentioned above are unnecessary.)


4. Close the other windows to display the setting window.

1) Menu


7) 8)

2) Title bar

4) Setting items selection area

3) Status bar

5) Setting contents display area

6) Data setting grid

9-1 9-1

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

See the following table for the display contents of each bar.

No. Item

1)

2)

3)

4)

Menu

Title bar

Status bar

Setting items selection area

5)

6)

7)

Setting contents display area

Data setting grid

"Apply" button

Description

Select various common functions and execute them.

Display the icon, title bar character string, and title bar buttons.

Display supplement.

Switch various setting items.

Display the contents of the specified items in the "Setting items selection area"

Input the setting data to each lattice-like input to cell.

Make the set contents valid and displayed them on the monitor.

Cancel the setting data on the screen, and return to the former applied setting data.

File

Edit

(1) Menu

See the following table for functions that can be executed from the menu.

Reference Menu item

Cut Ctrl + X

Copy Ctrl + C

Paste Ctrl + V

Delete Del

Delete Row Shift + Del

Function

Save the setting data

Save the monitor setting information in the setting data file.

Export Setting Data to CSV File ... Export the monitor setting information to the CSV files.

Generate GOT Screen ...

Close

Generate a GOT screen project for monitoring and tuning tags.

Close the monitor setting window.

Cut the selected character string to the clipboard.

Copy the selected character string to the clipboard.

Paste the character string of the clipboard in the input cell position.

Delete the selected character string.

Delete the selected line.

Section 9.1.3 (3)

Section 9.1.3 (4)

Section 9.1.3 (5)

----

----

----

----

----

----

Shortcut menu displayed when right-clicking the data setting grid, the same functions can be executed as the [Edit] on the menu.

Data setting grid

Shortcut menu

(Displayed while right-clicked)

POINT

Targets of the copy and paste on the data setting grid are the basically-displayed character string (things such as the user setting password and the color setting of the lockout tag names displayed when setting lockout tag are not the copy targets).

(2) Title

The display style of the title bar is in accordance with the normal windows.

What the title character string displays is the item name character string of the final setting target.

After opening the monitor setting window, if the setting items have not been selected, the setting item names will not be displayed.

9

Display the names of the

setting items

9-2 9-2

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

(3) Setting Items Selection Area

In this area, various setting items can be switched.

This can be done by clicking the corresponding positions in the selection area.

The following are selectable setting items.

Option Item


User setting


OPS setting

Monitor variable setting


Trend setting

Alarm setting

Event setting

User–created screen setting

Unit setting


Faceplate display scale setting

Faceplate MV characters setting

Lockout tag setting

Option setting

Reference

Section 9.2

Section 9.3

Section 9.4

Section 9.5

Section 9.6

Section 9.7

Section 9.8

Section 9.9

Section 9.10

Section 9.11

Section 9.12

Section 9.13

Section 9.14

Section 9.15

Section 9.16

Section 9.17

(4) Setting Contents Display Area

In this area, the contents of the specified items on "Setting items selection area" are displayed.

Data setting of the contents can be done by inputting the data to the cell of the data setting grid.

When the monitor setting window is just open (the initial status) and the setting items have not been selected, the background is gray and no content is displayed.

9-3

Display the selected setting contents from the left list.

Setting items selection area

Setting contents display area

9-3

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.1.2 Inputting to data setting grid

Input method

Text box

(1) Input data to the cells

See the methods of inputting data to the cells of the data setting grid as below.

Display Description

Select the cells directly input the setting data with the keyboard.

The following are 2 methods to change the character string of the cell to the selection status.

Move the cursor to the target cell, then press Ctrl + Enter key.

Move the mouse cursor to the target cell, and then double click.

List box

Button

Click the button on the right of the cell, list the list box, select from the list.

Click the button on the right of the cell, display the dialog box, then execute setting on the dialog box.

The same method with the one mentioned above in the text box can be used to input directly for setting the items of names, file names, and folder names.

POINT

With the various functions in [Edit] of the menu, several operations can be done: change the cell contents to the general file-creating software or paste the contents to the form calculation software, or input in groups the creating contents such as form calculation software to the cells.

The copy and paste targets of the data setting grid are the basically-displayed character string (things such as the user-setting password and the color setting of the lockout tag names displayed when setting lockout tag are not the copy targets).

(2) Delete the data of the cells

There are 2 methods to delete data from the cells of the data setting grid:

Press the key Delete.

Select [Delete] under [Edit] of the menu or on the short-cut menu.

(3) Delete the Row data of the grid

There are 2 methods to delete a whole line of cells

Press the key Shift + Delete key.

Select [Delete Row] under the [Edit] of the menu or on the short-cut menu

Select "YES" on the confirm dialog box to delete the entire contents of one line.

When option setting, delete row cannot be used.

(4) Grid hierarchical display

Hierarchical lines according to groups are displayed with a + mark beside the items.

Click the +, unbind the hierarchical lines.

Click the –, close the hierarchy.

9-4 9-4

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

(5) Set with the dialog box

The following part explains the common operations of various functions in the dialog box for the setting displayed when clicking buttons.

(a) File selection dialog box

It is the dialog box used to set the folders or file names of the targets to be specified.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Select the target folder by using the list box on the [Look in] bar or the "Up" button( ).

2. Display the file type selected by the list box of [Files of type] and the list of the next folders, and then clicks to select the target files/folders on it.

3. Input the file name to the [File name] if a new file is created.

4. Click the "Open" button.


(b) Color selection dialog box

It is a dialog box used to set the specified display color.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Click the selected color display bar from [Basic colors].

2. Click the "Define Custom Colors" button to specify a color that does not exist in the [Basic colors]. On the displayed color samples, click the position of their favorite colors, or specify the [Hue], [Sat], [Lum] and the values of [Red],

[Green], [Blue] to determinate the created colors. If the "Add to Custom

Colors" button is clicked, the created color will be displayed in the bar under

[Basic colors].

3. When the specified color is selected, click the "OK" button.


9-5 9-5

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.1.3 Registering and saving the settings

If only the contents of the data setting grid are changed, the monitor tool setting will not change in the actual operation. It is necessary to click the "Apply" button to make the change valid.

The applied setting is saved in the setting data file when closing the setting screen or switching from the monitor target project setting to another setting item. It is still valid when the monitor tool is restarted.

The saving to the setting data file can also be done by operating "[Files] [Save the setting data]" on the menu.

(1) Apply

Make the setting data valid.

When executing, the edited setting data will be checked.

If the setting data is not correct, the message box will be displayed.

1. Click the "Apply" button of the setting window.

2. Click the "OK" button in the confirmation dialog box.

(2) Cancel

Cancel the setting data on the screens to undo the previously applicable data.

1. Click the "Cancel" button on the setting window.


(3) Save the setting data

Write the present applicable setting data to the setting data file.

The setting data cannot be saved during the process of changing.

The changed setting can be applied or be saved again after being cancelled.

1. Execute "[File] [Save the setting data]" on the menu.


9-6 9-6

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

(4) Export Setting Data to CSV File

Write the present applicable setting data in the CSV form to the specified files.

The setting data cannot be saved during the process of changing. The changed setting can be made to be applicable or be saved again after being cancelled.

1. Execute "[File] [Export Setting

Data to CSV File…]" on the menu.

2. Specify the saving destination in the

Files Saving Destination

Confirmation Dialog Box.

3. Click the "OK" button

9-7

Files are saved in the CSV form to each setting item of the specified folder.

Files are automatically named in the form of "(Setting Item Name). csv".

The following are the examples of the Export forms.

(User Setting. csv)

No., User Name, Password, Authority

1,admin,*****, Enginner

2,user001,********, Operator1

(5) Generate GOT Screen

Start up the GOT screen generator function (Wizard style) and generate a GOT screen project.

The GOT screen generator does not start while the setting data is being changed.

For details, refer to "PX Developer Operating Manual (GOT Screen Generator)".

1. Execute "[File] [Generate GOT Screen…]" on the menu.

2. GOT screen generator wizard is displayed.

9-7

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.1.4 Copying monitoring environment of monitor tool to other computers

To copy the monitoring environment of monitor tool that is constructed in one personal computer to other ones, follow the procedures below.

However, the following operations are not necessary in the server/client system configuration because the monitoring environment set in a server (primary server) is automatically copied to clients (secondary server).

Copy and overwrite the Prjdata folder from the copy source personal computer to the copy target folder.

Copy and overwrite M_SET.mdb and M_USER.mdb in the Setdata folder from the copy source personal computer to the copy target folder.

1. Close the monitor tool in the copy target personal computers. Close the setting screen of the monitor tool in the copy source personal computer when it is opened.

2. Overwrite the data to the applicable folder in the

PX Developer installation destination folder in the copy target personal computer. For the folder configuration of monitor tool, refer to Section 2.3.

3. Start up the monitor tool in the copy target personal computer.

4. When connecting to the PLC via Ethernet, call the

"Transfer Setup" dialog box from the monitor target project setting and set a different station number for copy source and copy target personal computers in the PC side I/F Ethernet board setting.

5. Start up the monitor tool in the copy source personal computer.

9-8

6. When using the event notification function with

CC-Link IE Controller Network or

MELSECNET/10(H) connection, specify a group number of the event notified personal computer in the event notification setting of the programming tool. Subsequently, compile again and execute download so that both copy source and copy target personal computers are enabled to receive the event notification from the PLC. (Compilation and download need to be executed using the programming tool.)

For the event notification setting, refer to "PX

Developer Operating Manual (Programming

Tool)".

7. To change the transfer setup of the monitor target project setting in the monitor tool and perform "Apply"/"Reload", place the assignment information database file of the project to the path specified in the monitor target project setting.

9-8

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

POINT

Communication performance

When the number of personal computers connecting to the PLC increases, the communication performance between the PLC and the personal computers decreases. The following shows how to check the communication performance.

Display four control panel screens for each different group. Current value can be checked in the collection period of high-speed current value collection on the <<Collection Period for Each Communication Type>> tab of the PLC communication status screen ( Section 8.5). It is recommended that this value should be less than one second.

Display two pop-up faceplate screens. Current value can be checked in the collection period of high-speed tag data collection on the <<Collection Period for Each Communication Type>> tab of the communication status screen. It is recommended that this value should be less than one second.

If the collection period mentioned above is longer than one second, it is recommended to configure the server/client monitoring system.

Path for printers, folders and files

Monitor tool setting relating to the path for the following printers, folders and files may have different configurations in each personal computer. Therefore, adjust the configuration of the copy target personal computer to match with the configuration of the copy source personal computer. Or, overwrite the setting into the copy target personal computer and then set it again to match with the configuration of the copy target personal computer.

Application of User-created screen setting

Printer of option setting (General)

Automatic alarm/event CSV file export of option setting (Alarm/Event general)

Major alarm, minor alarm and event sound file of option setting (Alarm/Event)

Trend binary data storage folder of option setting (trend graph)

Automatic trend CSV file export target folder of option setting (trend graph)

9-9 9-9

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.2 User Authority Setting

(

PURPOSE

Set the operation authority range for users to be specified on User Setting

Section 9.3).

BASIC OPERATION

Check the operations authority for Operator1 to 4.


2)

1)


1) Operation authority setting area

Setting item

General

Description

Input method

Initial setting

Operator1 Operator2 Operator3 Operator4 Engineer

Stop buzzer

Print screen

Exit monitor tool

Set the authority of operation for stopping the buzzer.

Set the authority of operation for printing the whole hard copy of the displayed desktop.

Set the authority of operation for exiting the monitor tool.

Check box

*

1

*

*

1

1

(To the next page)

9-10 9-10

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

Setting item Description

Input method

Initial setting

Operator1 Operator2 Operator3 Operator4 Engineer


Trend graph

Pop-up tuning

Alarm/

Event

PLC communication status

Reset

Setting/

Removing lockout tag

Operator1

Level

Operator2

Level

Operator3

Level

Operator4

Level

Engineer

Level


Set the authority of operation for changing tag data items which are to be process instruction values/mode such as SV, MV, and MODE.



Set the authority of operation for changing tag data item values which are to be alarm threshold values such as PH, HH, and SH.

Set the authority of operation for changing tag data item values which are to be tuning parameters such as P, I, D, and GG.


Export to

CSV file

Export to

CSV file

Set the authority of operation for changing tag data item values which are to be process design values such as INH, CT, and RH.

Set the authority of operation for exporting trend data to CSV file.

Set the authority of operation for exporting tuning trend data to CSV file.


Export to

CSV file

Set the authority of operation for starting/stopping/clearing tuning trend data collection.

Set the authority of operation for exporting data of alarm list/event list to CSV file.

Print

Confirm

Delete

Set the authority of operation for printing the alarm list/event list.

Set the authority of operation for checking the alarm list/event list.

Set the authority of operation for deleting the alarm list/event list.

Set the authority of operation for resetting the maximum value/number of times.

Set the authority of operation for setting/ removing lockout tag for Operator1 level tag.




Set the authority of operation for setting/ removing lockout tag for engineer level tag.

Check box

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

*

1

Checked: Permitted, Uncheck: Prohibited

*1: Items for read-only.

2) "Restore default" button

Return setting content to the initial setting.

POINT

For details of operation authority for changing tag data items, refer to Appendix 4.

9-11 9-11

9 SETTING

Setting

MELSOFT

PURPOSE

To register the users who use the monitor tools, to set the passwords and engineer/operator1 to 4 authority for each user.

The operation authority range is set on User Authority Setting ( Section 9.2).

Monitor tools execute the mode administration according to the user's authority.

For details of the mode administration, refer to Chapter 4.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Input the user's (operator) name in the [User Name] cell.

2. Input the password that is only known by the user to the [Password] cell.

3. Select the user's authority in the list box of the [Authority] cell.


Setting item


Description Input method Input restriction

User Name Set the user name

Password

Set user's password

On the screen, characters of the password are displayed as "*".

Authority

Text box

Password dialog box

8 characters

8 characters

User's authority is selected to be engineer/operator1 to 4. List box

Engineer/Operator4/

Operator3/Operator2/

Operator1

Maximum 50 users can be registered.

The current user authority cannot be changed, and the current user cannot be deleted, either.

In the server/client monitoring system, users being used currently in clients cannot be changed. However, when clients connect to a secondary server in a redundant server system, users being used in the clients can be changed from a primary server. In this case, the setting data of the primary server are copied to the clients via the secondary server.

The same user name cannot be duplicated. Click the "apply" button to check whether user names are duplicated.

POINT

If the user name is not registered, the password and authority cannot be set.

First, make user setting.

When starting the monitor tool in the mode that matches the authority of the specified user ( Appendix 3.3), do not use a "/" (slash) or "-" (hyphen) in the first character of the user name and password.

9-12 9-12

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.4 Monitor Target Project Setting

4)

PURPOSE

Set project (Assignment information database file) as monitor targets on the monitor tool.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Click the [Assignment information database file] button to open the project, and display the dialog box.

If setting the assignment information database file that needs to be opened, click the "Open" button, the assignment information database file name and the path will be displayed in the grid.

2. Click the button in the transfer setup field to display "Transfer Setup" dialog box according to the PLC type.

Specify the PLC transfer setup, click the "OK" button, close the dialog box, thus, connection path types are displayed on PLC transfer setup.

3. If there are any tags with the same name in different setting assignment information database file, when "Apply" or "Reload" button is clicked, the duplicated tag name will be displayed.

3)


1)

Maximum of 16 projects can be referred to

<For standalone, server (non-redundant server system) and client (non-redundant server system)>

2)

<For primary/secondary server and client (redundant server system)>

9-13 9-13

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

Setting item

Project Name

Assignment

Information Database

File

PLC type

Transfer Setup

Primary Server

Transfer Setup

Secondary Server

Transfer Setup

Simulator Connection


1) Data setting area

Specify the connection method between PX Developer project as the monitor target on the monitor tool and CPU module which is written to the program.

See below for the setting items.

Description

Display the project name of the file set to the assignment information database file.

Display the dialog box and the selection assignment information database file item of the opened assignment information database file.

Display the PLC type stored in the above assignment information database file.

Specify the PLC transfer setup in the PLC

Transfer Setup dialog box.

When more than one simulator connection is selected, a line will be drawn on the connection transfer.

In the redundant server system, specify the transfer setup with a primary server.

In the redundant server system, specify the transfer setup of a secondary server with a primary server.

When executing the connection test, do it with a secondary server.

Select when connecting to simulator.

When GX project type is GX Works2 project, the monitor tool will be connected to GX Simulator2.

For GX Developer, the monitor tool will be connected to GX Simulator. For GX Simulator2, the maximum of 4 projects can be connected.

For GX Simulator, only one project can be connected.

Input method

Non-editable

File selection dialog box

(1) in this section

Transfer Setup dialog box

(2) in this section

Check box

Input restriction

Files with mdb as extension name

Non-editable

Can be selected when standalone, server (nonredundant server system), or primary server is set.

POINT

When the transfer setup is specified with a primary server, the transfer setup of the other server can automatically be set by setting the transfer setup of either a primary or secondary server. In this case, when the PC side I/F is ‘Ethernet board’, the PC side station numbers of both a primary server and secondary server are automatically set avoiding the duplication.

When connecting to a simulator, perform the simulation following the procedure shown below.

1) Start the programming tool.

2) Select [Project] [Open Project] under the Menu to open a project (file with fpj extension) which connects to Simulator.

3) Select [Debug] [Start Simulation] on the menu to start Simulator.

9-14 9-14

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

POINT

When connecting to simulator which is not started up, the communication error will occur.

Do not connect a simulator using monitor tool which is operating as a monitoring system. When more than one project to be connected to simulator is set, the data will not be sampled from PLC CPU.

Clearing all the settings to be connected to simulator and clicking “Apply” button restart data sampling from PLC CPU. In order to not restart, clear the transfer setup and click the “Apply” button.

For the project connected to simulator, change of operation mode and notification of warning/event occurrence will be delayed because event notification is not received.

Setting item

Duplicated Tag Name

Duplicated Project

Name

2) Duplicated tags display area

Check the tag information of each item when displaying the screen or clicking the "Apply" button or "Reload" button. If there are any duplicated tag names, they will be displayed.

See as below for the setting items.

Input method Content

If there are any tags with the same name on the different project the tag name will be displayed.

The projects names with duplicated tag names will be displayed.

Non-editable

Non-editable

Input restriction

3) Apply button, Reload button

Read the setting tag data assignment information to the assignment information database file.

POINT

All data collection operations (including tuning trend collection) are stopped during registration of assignment information database file.

Reading all tag data may take time until start is completed.

Use the "Reload" button to re-register the assignment information database file that was recompiled by the programming tool and then written to the PLC.

Also make the following checks.

 Check that the same project does not exist.

 Check that there is no contradiction between the PLC type of the assignment information database and that of the Transfer Setup.

Be sure to re-register Assignment information database files when changing the start of file register (ZR) in the <<System Resource>> tab in the project parameter setting of the programming tool and performing PLC download.

9-15 9-15

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

4) Supportability icon

Indicates whether the assignment information database file specified in "1)

Data setting area" can be used with the monitor tool.

This icon is displayed when the assignment information database is ensured.

The display definition is as described below.

Icon Definition

The specified assignment information database can be used.

Tag data can be monitored/controlled with the monitor tool.

The specified assignment information database cannot be used.

Confirm the displayed error message before taking the action.

An error message is displayed in the message box or the status bar (when the relevant cell (s) is (are) selected).

POINT

If the support possibility icon displays "Transfer Setup" dialog box will not appear by clicking "Transfer Setup" button.

REMARK

When searching with the find function through the specified tag names, if there are any same tag names on different project, the project tags with a higher priority will be found. When setting the monitor target project, the smaller of the [No.] is, the higher its priority is. If there are several duplicated project tag names, the tag name should be specified in the form of (project name):: (tag name) when searching and displaying the only tag by the tag of the monitor tool.

9-16 9-16

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

(1) Set assignment information database file

Specify the PX Developer project selected as monitor target on the monitor tool.

The current specified assignment information database file refers to the files with mdb as extension name. These files were made beforehand when being compiled by the programming tool.

The files can be set by 2 methods. One is to directly input the character string to the cell of [Assignment Information Database File], the other one is to click the cell button to select in the displayed file selection dialog box.

For details, refer to "Section 9.1.2 Inputting to data setting grid".

POINT

The assignment information database indicates the "*.mdb" file created by compile of the programming tool.

This file stores the variable assignment information, which stores tag data, etc., and the device information of the CPU module.

The monitor tool performs monitoring, etc. of tag data on the basis of this assignment information database.

Do not specify the same project name.

Even if they have different path names of the assignment information database file, the projects will be recognized as the same project, when the same name has been assigned to them.

When changing a project name, save the project as different name using the programming tool, and then re-set the project name using monitor tool.

When the project has been re-compiled with the programming tool and downloaded to the PLC, it is necessary to click the "Reload" button to re-register the assignment information database file.

9-17 9-17

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

(2) Set transfer setup

Specify the connecting to methods CPU module of the writing program.

By clicking the cell button of [Transfer setup], the connection methods can be set on the displayed transfer setup specified window.

Please refer to the "PX Developer Operating Manual (Programming Tool)" for details.

< Process CPU > < Redundant CPU>

PLC Transfer

Setup

Serial *

1

USB *

1

CC IE Cont

MNET/10

MNET/H

Ethernet

CC-Link *

1

PC side I/F

Serial

USB

CC IE Cont

NET/10(H) board

Ethernet board

CC-Link board

See as below for the transfer setup that can be set by the monitor tool and the specified contents on the "Transfer Setup" dialog box.

(a) Connecting to Process CPU

PLC side I/F Other station

Network route

Co-existence network route

No specification *

2

PLC module

C24

MNET/10(H) remote

G4 module

CC IE Cont

NET/10(H) module

Other station (Single network)

Other station (Co-existence network)


C24

CC-Link

NET/10(H)

Ethernet

C24

CC-Link

NET/10(H)

Ethernet

CC-Link

Other station (Co-existence network) CC-Link



CC IE Cont

NET/10(H)

NET/10(H)

Ethernet

C24

CC-Link

NET/10(H)

Ethernet

C24

CC-Link

Ethernet module



Ethernet

C24

CC-Link


CC-Link module


CC-Link

NET/10(H)

Ethernet

*1: Serial, USB and CC-Link connection are allowed for adjusting the CPU.

*2: Cannot select when PLC side I/F is MNET/10 (H) remote.

9-18 9-18

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

(b) Connecting to Redundant CPU

PLC Transfer

Setup

Serial *

1

USB *

1

CC IE Cont

MNET/10

MNET/H

Ethernet

CC-Link *

1

PC side I/F PLC side I/F

Serial

USB

CC IE Cont

NET/10(H) board *

3

Ethernet board

CC-Link board

Other station

Network route

Co-existence network route

Target system *

4

No specification *

2

PLC module

C24

MNET/10(H) remote

G4 module

CC IE Cont

NET/10(H) module

Ethernet module

Other station

(Single network)

Other station

(Co-existence network)

Other station

(Single network)

Other station


Other station

(Single network)

Other station


Other station

(Single network)

Other station


Other station

(Single network)

Other station


C24

CC-Link

NET/10(H)

Ethernet

C24

CC-Link

NET/10(H)

Ethernet

CC-Link

CC-Link

CC IE Cont

NET/10(H)

Ethernet

NET/10(H)

Ethernet

C24

CC-Link

NET/10(H)

Ethernet

C24

CC-Link

C24

CC-Link

Control System

Standby System

System A

System B

Not specified

CC-Link module

CC-Link

NET/10(H)

Ethernet

*1: Serial, USB and CC-Link connection are allowed for adjusting the CPU.

*2: Cannot select when PLC side I/F is MNET/10 (H) remote.

*3: The MELSECNET/10 board is inapplicable, as the driver (SW DNF-

MNET10) is incompatible with Redundant CPU. Use the

MELSECNET/H board compatible with Redundant CPU.

*4: The connection target specified in Target system is as shown in the following table.

Not specified

Control System

Standby System

System A

System B

CPU direction connection:

The CPU module directly connected to personal computer

Via a module mounted to the main base unit:

The CPU module of station in which the network module corresponding to the station No. specified in Network communication path is mounted.

Via a module mounted to the redundant type extension base unit:

The CPU module in the control system

The CPU module in the control system

The CPU module in the standby system

The CPU module to which the A side connector of tracking cable is connected.

The CPU module to which the B side connector of tracking cable is connected.

In the initial setting, "Control system" is set. If this setting causes an error when the system is switched in Redundant CPU, the control system is always monitored.

9-19 9-19

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

POINT

If the assignment information database file is not registered, PLC connection target cannot be set.

For communication route, refer to Section 2.1.2.

If connecting through the network, the network parameter must be set through transfer setup.

For a method for setting the network parameter, refer to the following manuals:

GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)

GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual

When connecting to the Redundant CPU in the debug mode, make sure to specify it as "Not Specified", "System A" or "Control system".

Otherwise, a communication error may occur, or monitoring may not be performed properly.

Set the number of retry times on the Host station Detailed setting /Other station

Detailed setting dialog box selected in Other station to retry (reopen + read) for the number of times being set when the processing which reads device data from CPU module fails. The communication read error does not occur when the read processing succeeds during retry.

"CC-Link IE Field Network board" cannot be specified as PC side I/F. In addition, it cannot be specified to network communication route.

9-20 9-20

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

Setting

PURPOSE

To display the monitor tool execution type setting dialog box and set a monitor tool to be executed as either of Standalone/Server/Client.

Additionally in a server, to manage the communication information and OPS names for communicating to all clients.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Start up a monitor tool and display this setting screen.

2. Click the "Setting..." button to display the monitor tool execution type setting dialog box. Select the execution type and click the "OK" button.

3. In a server, select the address type from the list box and enter IP addresses or host names*

1

of clients at [Communication Setting] cells of the OPS setting screen.

4. Enter desired OPS names at the [OPS Name] cells.

*1: The network setting of personal computers must be done in advance.

(1) Standalone


<OPS Setting screen>

<Monitor Tool Execution Type Setting dialog box>

Setting item

Execution type


Input method Description

Select the execution type of a monitor tool from Standalone/Server/Client.

List box

Input restriction

Standalone/

Server/Client

Initial setting

Standalone

9-21 9-21

9 SETTING

(2) Server


MELSOFT




Setting item

Execution type

Address

Type

Description


Select IP Address or Host Name with which specifying a server address to be started.

Input method

List box

List box

Input restriction

Standalone/

Server/Client

IP Address/

Host Name

Address

Port No.

Server

Address

Specify an IP address*

1

or Host name, depending on the choice at the list box.

Redundant Server

Text box

Specify a port number used by a server as the server/client communication.

Select whether to configure the redundant server system.

Checked .......Redundant

Unchecked ...Non-redundant

Text box

Check box

IP Address:

15 characters

Host Name:

63 characters

IP address of own personal computer

(Depending on the

OS specification if multiple network cards are mounted.)

It remains blank if the network setting is not done.

1024 to 65535 5113

----

Initial setting

Standalone

IP Address

Unchecked

Execution type in the redundant server system

In the redundant system, select whether to start as Primary Server or Secondary

Server.

List box

Start as

Primary

Server/Start as Secondary

Server

Start as Primary

Server

Acquiring setting data from Secondary Server next start time

In a primary server, select whether to acquire the setting data from a secondary server at the next startup.

Checked .......Acquire the setting data from a secondary server at the next startup.

This option is reset at the next start up.

Unchecked ...Not acquire the setting data.

Check box ---- Unchecked

(To the next page)

9-22 9-22

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

Overwriting of setting data

Setting item

Another

Server

Address

Type

Another

Server

Address

"Test" button

Attempt to Reconnect

Description Input method

Input restriction

Initial setting

For the redundant server system configuration, select IP Address or Host

Name with which specifying another server address to be installed.

List box

IP Address/

Host Name

IP Address

Specify an IP address

*1


Text box

IP Address:

15 characters

Host Name:

63 characters

----

Test to connect to another server using the specified server address and port.

The Detail setting of overwriting the setting data dialog box is displayed by clicking the button.

Contents set in the dialog box are displayed.

In a secondary server, select whether to try to reconnect to a primary server when a communication error occurs with the primary server.

Never: Not try to reconnect.

Once to Three times:

Try to reconnect for the specified number of times until it succeeds to connect.

List box

Never/

Once/

Twice/

Three times

Once

----

*1: Enter an IP address in dotted-decimal format - 4 sets of numbers from 0 to 255 separated by periods.

The following shows the OPS setting screen when the execution type is Server.

Not displayed when the execution type is not Server.

<OPS Setting screen (Server (non-redundant server system))> <OPS Setting screen (Server (redundant server system))>

Setting item

Execution Type

"Setting…" button

Address

Type

Communication setting

OPS

Address

OPS Name

Description

Display the execution type specified in the monitor tool execution type setting dialog box.

Input method Input restriction

Display the monitor tool execution type setting dialog box.

Select IP Address or Host Name with which specifying the communication setting of each OPS. *

1

List box

IP Address/

Host Name

Specify an IP address* choice at the list box.*

1

Specify an OPS name.

2

or host name, depending on the

Text box

Text box

IP Address:

15 characters

Host Name:

63 characters

32 characters

*1: In the line of Server, settings specified in "Server" of the monitor tool execution type setting are displayed and cannot be changed.


9-23 9-23

9 SETTING

(3) Client


MELSOFT




Setting item

Execution type

Server

Address

Type

Server

Address

"Test" button

Port No.

Redundant Server

Address

Type

Secondary

Server

Secondary

Server

Address

"Test" button

Description


Select IP Address or Host Name with which specifying a server address to be connected.


1


When connecting to the redundant server system, specify an IP address of a primary server.

Test to connect to a server using the specified server address and port.

Specify a port number used by a client as the server/client communication.

Select whether to connect to the redundant server system and switch servers automatically when a server error occurs.

When connecting to the redundant server system, select IP Address or Host Name with which specifying a secondary server address to be connected.

Input method

List box

List box

Text box

Text box

Check box

List box

Input restriction

Standalone/

Server/Client

IP Address/

Host Name

IP Address:

15 characters

Host Name:

63 characters

IP Address/

Host Name

Initial setting

Standalone

IP Address

1024 to 65535 5113

----

----

----

Unchecked

IP Address

Specify an IP address

*1


Text box

IP Address:

15 characters

Host Name:

63 characters

----

Test to connect to secondary server using the specified server address and port.

----

(To the next page)


9-24 9-24

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

Setting item

Address

Type

Description

Select IP Address or Host Name with which specifying a client address.

Input method

List box

Input restriction

IP Address/

Host Name

Initial setting

IP Address

Client

Client

Address


1

or host name, depending on the choice at the list box.

Text box

IP Address:

15 characters

Host Name:

63 characters

IP address of own personal computer

(Depending on the

OS specification if multiple network cards are mounted.)

It remains blank if the network setting is not done.

Overwriting of setting data

Attempt to Reconnect

The Detail setting of overwriting the setting data dialog box is displayed by clicking the

button.

Contents set in the dialog box are displayed.

In a secondary server, select whether to try to reconnect to a primary server when a communication error occurs with the primary server.

Never: Not try to reconnect.

Once to Three times:

Try to reconnect for the specified number of times until it succeeds to connect.

List box

Never/

Once/

Twice/

Three times

Once


POINT

When being started as Primary server, the OPS can be started using the setting data of a secondary server.

In the redundant server system, even after a primary server is replaced due to its failure, it can be started up using the same setting data as before the failure by acquiring the setting data from a secondary server. To enable this function, select "Start as Primary Server" in the monitor tool execution type setting and check "Acquiring setting data from Secondary Server next start time".

Specify the same port number for one used by a server and ones used by clients.

Make the port number setting not to overlap on well-known port numbers and port numbers used by software other than the monitor tool.

In a monitor tool running as Client, if ‘Overwrite all’ is selected in "Overwriting of setting data", customizable settings changed in a client are overlapped with the setting data of a server when the client is started up or the setting data are acquired from the server. ( Section 8.6.1)

The settings changed in the monitor tool execution type setting become valid at the next start up of the monitor tool.

In a monitor tool running as Secondary Server in the server redundant system, if

‘Overwrite all’ is selected in "Overwriting of setting data", customizable settings changed in the secondary server are overlapped with the setting data of a primary server when the secondary server is started up or the setting data are acquired from the primary server.

In addition, the same thing happens when a primary server is started up using the setting data of a secondary server.

Even though the communication with a server temporarily fails due to reasons such as bad cable connection and heavy network load, it may be reconnected to the server automatically by setting the number of times of retry in "Attempt to

Reconnect".

9-25 9-25

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

(4) Detail setting of overwriting the setting data dialog box

PURPOSE

To specify whether to leave the setting inherent in the OPS when the setting data are acquired from a primary server to a secondary server or a server to a client.



Leave settings inherent in this

OPS

Setting item

Overwrite all

Description

Select this to overwrite all settings in the OPS when acquiring the setting data.

However, even if the

"overwrite all" setting is enabled, the data is not overwritten if monitor tool execution type setting is done.

Select this not to overwrite the setting items in the OPS selected in the following check boxes when acquiring the setting data.

Input method Initial setting

Radio button ON

Radio button OFF

User-created Screen Setting

Printer

Disk and Folder path Select this not to overwrite each setting. Check box Checked

Related Buzzer

Related Display

Time Adjustment among

OPSs*

1

Switch/Reconnect server during screens are displayed*

2

Select this not to overwrite setting.

Select this not to overwrite setting.

Check box

Check box

Unchecked

Checked

*1: When the "Time Adjustment among OPSs" setting is disabled in setting data acquisition,

"Time Adjustment among OPSs" on Option Setting is switched to "Yes" when acquiring setting data from a server.

*2: When the "Switch/Reconnect server during screens are displayed" setting is disabled in setting data acquisition, "Switch/Reconnect server during screens are displayed" on Option

Setting is switched to "No" when acquiring setting data from a server.

9-26 9-26

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.6 Monitor Variable Setting

PURPOSE

Register global variables and devices as monitor variable beforehand when monitoring process data other than tag variable.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Input the global variable or device name in the content cell of [Variable

Name/Device].

2. When specifying device name directly, select data type from the list box.

3. Set upper/lower limit as monitor variable, select digits after decimal point and unit from the list box.

4. Setting on [Variable Name/Device] verifies project variables which are registered on the monitor target project setting (global variables) with setting data being input, and displays existence or nonexistence of global variables, valid/invalid device name automatically.

5. When clicking the "Apply" button, checks whether [Variable Name/Device] are duplicated or not, Low Limit < High Limit or not. When an error is found, error message will be displayed.


The icon indicates that the variable is unusable.

Error message display area


Setting item

Variable

Name/Device

Description

Set the global variables of which elementary data type

(except ADR_REAL, STRING) are declared in programming tool or device name

*1

(Example: D100).

Input method Input restriction Initial setting

Text box 213 characters ----

(To the next page)

9-27 9-27

9 SETTING

MELSOFT


Input method

Input restriction Initial setting

Data Type

Select data type for direct specification of device name.

List box

Editable only for direct specification of device name.

• Global variable

Display the description set on the Global

Variable Declaration window in programming tool

• Device

Bit device: BOOL

(Ex: M1000, D1000.1)

Word device: INT

Variable Type

Low Limit

High Limit

Digits after

Decimal Point

Unit

Comment


Display a variable type (global variable/device variable) of monitor variable.

Set the low limit as monitor variable.

Set the high limit as monitor variable.

Set the digits after decimal point of monitor variable.

Select a unit for monitor variable.

Text box

Text box

REAL (Single precision floating decimal fraction)

Editable only for the data type is

INT/DINT/REAL.

List box

Selectable from 0 to 4 only when the data type is

REAL.

List box

Items set in the unit setting (

Section 9.12)

Text box 64 characters Set a comment of monitor variable.

When clicking the "Apply" button, check the following description, and if an error is found in the setting, the error message will be displayed.

• Whether [Variable Name/Device] are duplicated or not.

• Whether upper/lower limit value is proper or not

Double-click an error line to display the corresponding line of data setting grid.

*1: Device range that can be specified is as follows.

Category Device type Device name

----

Data type Low limit High limit

INT/DINT/

REAL

0 100

BOOL ---- ----

WORD H0000 HFFFF

DWORD H00000000 HFFFFFFFF

When data type is REAL : 1

Other than the above : ---

----

----

Input range

9-28

Bit device

Internal relay

Latch relay

M0 to M32767

L0 to L32767

Internal user device

Word device*

Annunciator

Link relay

Data register

Link register

Special relay

F0 to F32767

B0 to B7FFF

D0 to D25983

W0 to W657F

SM0 to SM2047

Internal system device

Bit device

Word device*

Link special relay

Special register

Link special register

Direct input

SB0 to SB7FF

SD0 to SD2047

SW0 to SW7FF

DX0 to DXFFF

Direct device

File register

Bit device

Word device*

Direct output

File register

DY0 to DYFFF

ZR0 to ZR1042431

* Bit specification for word devices (After inputting period (.), specify a bit position in hexadecimal digit with 0 to F following word device.)

The following cannot be specified.

Digit specification for bit devices (Example: K4M0)

Indirectly specified devices (@)

Index setting

9-28

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

POINT

Only registering a monitor variable will not be a communication target with PLC for monitor tool. Registering a monitor variable in the trend setting becomes a communication target.

For device range which can be specified, set global variable/device to monitor variable within the number of device points*

1

range registered in monitoring target PLC.

*1: To specify, [PLC Parameter] [Device] in GX application.

If icon is displayed, confirm the error message to be displayed before taking the action.

When the relevant cell (s) is (are) selected, an error message is displayed in the status bar.

REMARK

When the variable name (global variable/direct specification of device) is specified, if the same variable name exists in different projects, the project variable with higher priority level will be found.

As project is concerned, the smaller [No.] is, the higher the priority will be in the monitor target project setting. If the variable name is duplicated in duplicated project, the form of (project name): : (variable name) should be specified to indicate the exclusive variable.

9-29 9-29

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.7 Control Panel Setting

PURPOSE

To distribute the tag displayed on the control panel screen.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Input optional group name in the content cell of [Group Name].

2. Input the tag name that is assigned to the faceplate which belongs to the group in the content cell of [Faceplate].

3. When setting the tag name, compare the device data with the tag Information of the projects registered by monitor target project setting, and then the icon that indicates tag existence/inexistence will be displayed automatically.

Click the "Delete" key under the condition that there is the input cell on the group name line (multiple lines can be selected), and then all the tag including the group-affiliated tag name will be deleted.


The icon indicates that the tag is unusable.

At most 500 groups can be registered

Maximum 8 tags can be registered in each group (total 8 500 = 4000 tags)

Setting item

Group name


Description

Set the name of each group.

Faceplate 1 to 8 Set the tag name distributed to each group affiliated faceplate.


Text box 32 characters


9-30 9-30

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

POINT

The tag name of the corresponding group cannot be set without the group name registration.

When the settings beyond the group name without the group name registration, error message will be displayed and the input cell will be moved to the position of group name.



REMARK

When the tag name is specified, if the same tag name exists in different projects, the project tag with higher priority level will be found.

As project is concerned, the smaller [No.] is, the higher the priority will be in the monitor target project setting. If the tag name is duplicated in duplicated project, the form of (project name): (tag name) should be specified to indicate the exclusive tag.

9-31 9-31

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

Setting

PURPOSE

To set the process data item and the sampling period that are displayed on the trend graph screen.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Input any group name in the content cell of [Group Name].

2. Select the period from the List box in the content cell of [Sampling Period].

3. Select whether the CSV files export of trend data will be executed automatically or not. ( Section 8.7)

4. Input the assigned trend items distributed to the affiliated trend graph in the form of (tag name). (tag data item name) for tag data item, (monitor variable name) for monitor variable in the content cell of [Trend Graph No. *].

5. When setting the data item, compare the input set data with the tag information of item that is registered by the monitor target project setting and monitor variable that is validated in monitor variable setting. The icon that indicates the existent/inexistent data item will be displayed automatically.

6. When clicking the "Apply" button, check whether the bottom limit of the Yaxis scale is lower than the top limit or not. Error message will be displayed when error occurs. (Except for the condition that bottom limit=top limit=0)

Click the "Delete" button under the condition that there is the input cell on the group name line (multiple lines can be selected), and then the group-affiliated sampling period, automatic CSV files export, together with item will be deleted.


9-32

The maximum group number to be registered is 125

At most 8 items can be registered in each group

(All together 8 125 = 1000 items)

Within the sampling period of 1s or 10s, at most 100 items can be collected.

The icon indicates that the item is unusable.

9-32

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

Setting item

Group Name

Sampling Period

Automatic CSV File

Export

Graph No.1 to 8

Y-axis Scale Bottom

Limit *

1

Y-axis Scale Top

Limit *

1


Description

Input method

Input restriction

Initial setting

Set the name of each group. Text box

32 characters

Invalid characters: /,:;*?\"<>|

----

Set the sampling period of the trend data.

Set whether the CSV file export of trend data will be executed automatically or not.

Set the item which is assigned to the trend graph.

Set the bottom limit of the Y-axis scale which is displayed on the trend graph.

Set the top limit of the Y-axis scale which is displayed on the trend graph.

List box 1s/10s/1min/5min/10min

List box Disable/Enable


Text box

Text box



1s

Disable

----

0

0

*1 When the bottom limit of the Y-axis scale=0, the top limit of the Y-axis scale=0, the bottom/top limit which is defined by the tag data item or monitor variable settings should be used.

POINT

Make the "automatic CSV file export" setting after setting the items related to other automatic CSV file export. ( Section 8.7 (3))

The tag data item of the corresponding group cannot be set without the group name registration.

When the settings beyond the group name without the group name registration, the error message will be displayed and the input cell will be moved to group name.

For registering global variables and devices on the trend, register them on the monitor variable setting beforehand. ( Section 9.6)

The Y-axis scale of the corresponding item cannot be set without the item registration.

When setting the Y-axis scale without the item registration, the error message will be displayed and the input cell will be moved to the item name.



REMARK

9-33

When the tag name is specified, if the same tag name exists in different project, the project tag of higher priority will be found.

As project is concerned, the smaller [No.] is, the higher the priority will be in the monitor target project setting .If the tag name is duplicated in multiple projects, the form of (project name): :(tag name). (tag data item name) should be specified to indicate the exclusive tag.

9-33

9 SETTING

Setting

PURPOSE

To set the alarm content assigned to the alarm tag.

To display the set character string on the alarm list screen.

BASIC OPERATION

Input optional character string in the cell of [Alarm Contents].


MELSOFT

No.

Setting item

Alarm Contents

Maximum 10000 pieces of alarm content can be set.


Description

It equals to the alarm name number corresponding to

( the tag data (the value saved in ALM1NO to ALM8NO).

Section 10.7)

Set the character string that displays the alarm contents on the alarm tag faceplate.

Input method

Input not allowed

Text box

Input restriction

64 characters

9-34 9-34

9 SETTING

9.10 Event Setting

PURPOSE

To set the message content that is assigned to the message tag.

To display the set character string on the event list screen.

BASIC OPERATION

Input optional character string in the cell of [Message Contents].


MELSOFT

Maximum 10000 pieces of message content can be set.

No.

Setting item

Message Contents


Description

(

It equals to the message name number corresponding to the tag data (the value saved in MSG1NO to MSG8NO).

Section 10.8)

Set the displayed message content on the message tag faceplate.

Input method

Input not allowed

Text box

Input restriction

64 characters

9-35 9-35

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.11 User-created Screen Setting

PURPOSE



Basic

R

(

Section 11.1) or Microsoft

R


Visual

BASIC OPERATION

1. Click the button of [Application] cell and the file selection dialog box will be displayed.

2. Select "Application" on the file of file selection dialog box. Click the "Open" button and then the application program path will be input in the cell.

3. Set the starting argument in the cell of [Argument] according to the need of the application program.



There are 4 execution application programs that can be registered.

They are assigned to the display button 1 to 4 of the user application which is affiliated to the monitor toolbar in turn. The assignment starts from No.1.

9-36 9-36

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

No.

Setting item

Application

Argument

Detail



Description Input method Input restriction

It equals to the number 1 to 4 of the user-created screen button.

Set the path of the application program that is assigned to the user-created screen display button of the monitor toolbar.

Set the argument number given to the application. *

1

Input not allowed

File Selection

Dialog Box

Text box

The maximum character number of the path is 255

255 characters

(

Displays the Detail setting of the user-created screen dialog box by clicking the "Setting…" button. *

2

(1), (2) in this Section)

When clicking the "Apply" button, check the following description, and if an error is found in the setting, the error message will be displayed.

• Whether the settings of "Changes the security level" are different when GT SoftGOT1000 where the same module number is specified is registered to multiple rows.

• Whether the settings of "Changes the security level" are different when GT SoftGOT2000 where the same module number is specified is registered to multiple rows.

• Whether the content of Detail setting of the security level is different when GT SoftGOT1000 where the same module number is specified is registered to multiple rows.

• Whether the content of Detail setting of the security level is different when GT SoftGOT2000 where the same module number is specified is registered to multiple rows.

Double-click an error line to display the corresponding line of user-created screen setting grid.

Dialog Box ----

*1: When the file path of GT SoftGOT is set to Application, specifies the module number of GT SoftGOT to be started.

Default of the argument is "-SGT1".

For details, refer to the following manuals.

• GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual

• GT SoftGOT1000 Version 3 Operating Manual for GT Works3

• GT SoftGOT1000 Version 2 Operating Manual

*2: When the file path of GT SoftGOT is set to Application, the <<GT SoftGOT>> tab is added in the detail setting dialog box of the user-created screen.

9-37 9-37

9 SETTING

(1) Detail setting for GT SoftGOT

The following shows the Detail setting dialog box for GT SoftGOT.

(a) Setting in the <<General>> tab

MELSOFT

Does not close when switching

Monitor Window.

Time-out Setting

(Seconds)

Initial setting

Does not close GT SoftGOT assigned to the user-created screen button when switching the monitor screen in single-window mode.

Note, however, that GT SoftGOT1000 closes regardless of this setting when the setting window is displayed or the monitor tool is exited.

Set the time that the Monitor tool waits for GT SoftGOT to be closed when closing GT SoftGOT. *

1

---- Checked

1 to 99 30 seconds

*1: GT SoftGOT is closed automatically in the following cases:

• when the monitor screen is switched in single-window mode

• when the setting window is displayed

• when the Monitor tool is exited

9-38 9-38

9 SETTING

(b) Setting in the <<Display>> tab

MELSOFT

Item

Icon file

Description

Set the path of icon file for the user-created screen display button of the monitor toolbar.

The following are the format of graphics file that can be used as an icon.

File format Extension

Bitmap .bmp

Icon *

1

.ico

When the file path is blank or incorrect, the icon of application registered to the user-created screen is displayed as a user-created screen button.

Set the character strings of tooltip displayed when placing the mouse on the user-created screen button.

The following character strings are displayed when a text box is blank.


File Selection

Dialog Box

The maximum character number of the path is 255

Tooltip

Button Tooltip

User-created screen button1 User-created Screen1

Text box

User-created screen button2 User-created Screen2

User-created screen button3

User-created screen button4

User-created Screen3

User-created Screen4

64 characters

*1: For Microsoft

R

Windows NT

R

Workstation 4.0 Operating System, only

2-color (black and white), 16-color and 256-color icon files are supported.

POINT

The icon size is enlarged/reduced in accordance with range of resolution (pixel) of display as shown in the table below.

Range of resolution Icon size (pixel)

1280 pixel or more

Less than 1280 pixel

48 48

32 32

9-39 9-39

9 SETTING

(c) Setting in the <<GT SoftGOT>> tab

MELSOFT

Item Description

Switches the base screen

Base screen No.

Set whether to switch the base screen to the specified one when GT

SoftGOT is started or activated.

Set the base screen number to be displayed when GT SoftGOT is started or activated.

Changes the security level

Select whether to change the security level of GT SoftGOT in accordance with user authority of the monitor tool operation.

"Detail setting" button Displays the Detail Setting of the security level dialog box.


(d) Detail Setting of the security level dialog box

---- Checked

1 to 32767 1

---- Unchecked

"Restore default" button Return setting content to the initial setting.

9-40

Item Description

GT SoftGOT security level

Set the security levels of GT SoftGOT that correspond user authority.


Engineer 15

0 to 15

The following user authority is read-only items.

• Engineer

• Lock

Operator4 12

Operator3

Operator2

Operator1

9

6

3

Lock 0

9-40

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

(2) Detail setting for other than GT SoftGOT

The following shows the Detail setting dialog box for applications other than GT

SoftGOT.

Does not close when switching

Monitor Window.

Time-out Setting

(Seconds)

Initial setting

Does not close an application assigned to the user-created screen button when switching the monitor screen in single-window mode.

Note, however, that GT SoftGOT closes regardless of this setting when the setting window is displayed or the monitor tool is exited.

Set the time that the Monitor tool waits for an application to be closed when closing the application. *

1

---- Unchecked

1 to 99 5 seconds

*1: An application is closed automatically in the following cases:

• when the monitor screen is switched in single-window mode


• when the Monitor tool is exited

POINT

The argument cannot be set without the application registration.

When setting argument without the application registration, error message will be displayed and the input cell will be moved to the application program.

In the exe form, the application program sold in the market can be registered even if the user does not user-created screen. But the maximum number restriction limitation displayed on the screen will not change even if the registered application is not related to the monitor. ( Section 6.4.2)

When the application is changed or deleted, the argument and initial setting are initialized.

When "Privilege Level" of the application is specified to "Run this program as an administrator", "Privilege Level" of the monitor tool also needs to be specified to

"Run this program as an administrator".

For the method to execute programs as an administrator, refer to Section 5.1.

The following are the range of module number that can be specified for argument of GT SoftGOT.

GT SoftGOT1000 Version 2.47X to 3.18U earlier : 1 to 99

GT SoftGOT1000 Version 3.19V or later : 1 to 32767

GT SoftGOT2000 Version 1.105K or later : 1 to 32767

9-41 9-41

9 SETTING

9.12 Unit Setting

PURPOSE

Set the unit name that indicates the tag data item.

BASIC OPERATION

Input optional unit character string in the cell of [Unit].


MELSOFT

No.

Unit

Setting item

127 units can be set.


Description Input method

It equals to the unit number specified by the tag data. Input not allowed

Set the unit used. Text box

Input restriction

8 characters

9-42 9-42

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.13 Faceplate Display Pattern Setting

1)

2)

PURPOSE

To set the status button, as well as the character string and background color pattern of the status display (indicator), which are displayed on the loop tag faceplate and status tag faceplate.

To set the pattern number for the display name pattern (FPNO, FPNO1 to

FPNO5) which is affiliated to the tag data item by using the FB property of the programming tool. The pattern of the displayed character string and background color corresponding to the set pattern number can be displayed on the status tag faceplate.

Furthermore, the character string is recorded as the operation record character string on the event list ( Section 7.4).

BASIC OPERATION

1. Select the tag type in the list box 1) and then the bit map corresponding to the tag type will be displayed on the tag type faceplate image 2).

The item displayed in the grid is switched according to the tag type.

2. Input the character string that is assigned to the status button and indicator of the faceplate in each cell.

3. Click the button to the right of the cell and then the "Change Background

Color/Text Color" dialog box will be displayed. If the color is selected, click the "OK" button and then the background color and text color of the set cell will be displayed. (Trip display and time-out display are displayed by the faceplate alarm graph color, so they cannot be set)


Click the button and then the color dialog box will be displayed

<The Change Backgroud Color

/Text Color dialog box>

9-43 9-43

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

1) The list box of the tag type selection

Select the tag type of the set name pattern (PVAL, HTCL, NREV, REV,

MVAL1, MVAL2, PB).

For the details of relating display content, refer to the following.

Display content

Status operation

Command button operation

Reference

Section 10.3.13

Section 10.3.14

NREV, REV, MVAL1, MVAL2 Section 10.6.1

2) Tag type faceplate image

Display the screen display image of the tag type that is affiliated to the set name pattern.

Each tag type can set maximum 50 pieces of name patterns.

The tag type PB can be set maximum 10000 pieces of button patterns.

Tag type

PVAL

HTCL


The set item and initial set of each tag type are shown as the following chart.

Setting item

Open Button

Close Button

Stop Button

Remote Display

Local Display

Description

Set the Button name and status display color.



Set the indicator name and status display color.


Character

Open

Initial setting

Text color

Black

Background color

Red

Close

Stop

Remote

Local

Black

Black

Black

Black

Red

Green

Green

Input method

Input restriction

Character:

Text box

Color: the Change

Background

Color/Text Color dialog box (color dialog box)

8 characters

Trip Display Set the indicator name.

Time-out Display Set the indicator name.

Open/Close

Status History

Using the PID

Cooling

Using the PID

Heating

Cooling Close

Direction

Cooling Open

Direction

Heating Close

Direction

Heating Open

Direction

Trip Black

Time-out Black

Select whether to always leave the open/close status history or leave it only in the MAN mode.



Set the character string for cooling close direction.

Set the character string for cooling open direction.

Set the character string for heating close direction

Set the character string for heating open direction

Always

COOL

HEAT

Blank

Blank

Blank

Blank

Always/

Only MAN

Mode blue

Character:

Black Red

Text box

Color: the Change

Background


8 characters

2 characters

9-44 9-44

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

Tag type

NREV

REV

MVAL1

MVAL2

PB

Initial setting


Character Text color

Background color

Input method

Operation Button Set the Button name and status display color.

Stop Button

Remote Display

Local Display

Trip Display

Start


Stop


Remote


Local

Set the indicator name.

Trip


Time-out

Black Red

Black Red

Black Green

Black Green

Black

Black

Forward Run

Button

Stop Button

Semi-open

Display




FWD Run

Stop

Reverse Run

Button


REV Run

Remote Display

Local Display

Trip Display

Time-out Display


Remote


Local


Trip


Time-out

Open Button Set the Button name and status display color.

Open

Close Button Set the Button name and status display color.

Close

Semiopen

Black Red

Black Red

Black Red

Black Green

Black Green

Black

Black

Black Red

Black Red

Black Red

Remote Display

Local Display

Trip Display

Time-out Display

Open Button

Close Button








Remote

Black Green

Local

Open

Black Green

Trip

Black

Time-out

Black

Black Red

Close

Black Red

Stop

Black Stop Button

Semi-open

Display


Semiopen

Black Red

Remote Display

Local Display



Remote

Local

Black Green

Black Green

Trip Display Set the indicator name.

Trip

Black


Time-out

Black

Character:

Text box

Color: the Change

Background


ON Name Set the ON status name and display color.

ON

Black Red

OFF Name

ON

Black Gray

ON/OFF History

Type

Set the OFF status name and display color.

Select whether to store only ON history or both

ON and OFF history at time of button operation and status change of the status answer (DIM), against each button.

Only ON

Input restriction

8 characters

Only ON/

OFF

Trip display and time-out display are displayed with the alarm color of the faceplate, so the color does not need to be set. According to the alarm level of trip and time-out, major alarm color is displayed when major alarm occurs and minor alarm color is displayed when minor alarm occurs.

For details of setting of alarm display color, refer to "Section 9.17 Option Setting".

POINT

The background color/text color which equals to those of the first line (No.1) will all be set automatically if new character string is input in certain line.

Only character string can be cut/copied/pasted.

(The color setting is excluded)

9-45 9-45

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.14 Faceplate Display Scale Setting

PURPOSE

To set the display scale, division number, display direction and both direction base point of the PV graph that are displayed on the faceplate.

To set when the initial set content changed.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Set optional tag name in [Tag Name].

2. When setting the tag name, the tag information of the item that is registered by the monitor target project setting will be compared with the input set data.

And then the mark that indicates tag existent/inexistent will be displayed automatically.

3. Input the display scale top/bottom limit, division number, display direction and base point when both direction is set of the set tag.

4. Click the "Apply" Button and check whether the bottom limit of the display scale is less than the top limit. The error message will be displayed when error occurs.

When the tag name is deleted, the display scale top/bottom limit, division number, display direction and base point when both direction is set are also deleted simultaneously.



Maximum 3840 pieces of tag can be registered

Display on faceplate

Setting !

9-46

When display direction is set to "Positive direction"

Display scale

When display direction is set to "Negative direction"

Base point when both direction is set

When display direction is set to "Both direction"

9-46

9 SETTING

MELSOFT



Tag Name

Display Scale Bottom

Limit

Display Scale Top Limit

Division Number

Set the tag name of the display scale.

Set the display scale bottom limit of the PV graph which is displayed on the faceplate.

Set the display scale top limit of the PV graph which is displayed on the faceplate.

Set the division number of the PV graph which is displayed on the faceplate.

Display Direction

Base Point when Both

Direction is set

Input method

Text box

Text box

Text box

Input restriction

180 characters

REAL (Single precision floating decimal)


Set the display direction of the PV graph bar to be displayed on the faceplate.

Text box 1 to 10

List box

When setting "Both direction" as the display direction, set the base point of the PV graph bar to be displayed on the faceplate.

This setting is available only when "Both direction" is set as the display direction.

Text box

Positive direction/

Negative direction/

Both direction


Initial setting

----

0

100

10

Positive direction

0

POINT

The display scale top/bottom limit, division number, display direction and "base point when both direction is set" cannot be set without registering the tag name.

When "Both direction" is set as the display direction, set the both direction base point within the range indicated below.

Display scale bottom limit ≤ base point when both direction is set ≤ display scale top limit



9-47 9-47

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.15 Faceplate MV Characters Setting

PURPOSE

To set the MV characters of the MV graph which is displayed on the faceplate.

BASIC OPERATION

1. Set optional tag name in the cell of [Tag Name].

2. When setting the tag name, the tag information of the project that is registered by the monitor target project setting will be compared with the input setting data. And then the mark that indicates tag existence/inexistence will be displayed automatically.

3. Input the displayed character string of the set tag.

The displayed character string will be deleted when the tag name is deleted.



Maximum 3840 pieces of tag can be registered

Setting item

Tag name

Displayed character string (0%)

Displayed character string (100%)

<MV graph>

Display character string


Description

Set the tag name of the open/close direction display character.

Set the display character on the 0% position of the MV graph which is displayed on the faceplate.

Set the display character on the 100% position of the MV graph which is displayed on the faceplate.



Text box

Text box

2 characters

2 characters

POINT

The displayed character strings cannot be set without the tag name registration.

When doing setting beyond the tag name without tag name registration, error message will be displayed and the input cell will be moved to the position of tag name.



9-48 9-48

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.16 Lockout Tag Setting

PURPOSE

Set the lockout tag types which are used on the faceplate of the monitor window.

Lockout tag is used when operation limit is put on the control device. As the monitor tool is concerned, operation limit is added by the operation of lockout tag on the faceplate.

Lockout tag has levels of engineer and operator1 to 4.

The lockout tag where the operation of setting/removing is authorized can be operated.

The authority of operation for setting/removing lockout tag can be set on User

Authority Setting ( Section 9.2).

BASIC OPERATION

1. Input the character string that indicates the lockout tag name in the cell of

[Lockout Tag Name].

2. Click the Button right to the cell and then the "Change Background Color/Text

Color" dialog box will be displayed. Select the color and click the "OK" Button, then the background color and text color of the cell will be displayed as the set color.

3. Set the authority of user who can operate the lockout tag on the list box of the [Level] cell.

Graph color, background color and level will be deleted when the Lockout tag name is deleted.


The color dialog box will be displayed after clicking the button

9-49

Maximum 32 kinds of tags can be set

Lockout Tag

<The Change Background Color

/Text Color dialog box>

The lockout tag is displayed in the lockout tag area at the top of the faceplate.

POINT

When inputting the new character string to the lockout tag name, the background color which is the same as that of the first line (No. 1) will be set automatically.

9-49

9-50

9 SETTING

MELSOFT


Setting items of each lockout tag is shown as the following chart.

Lockout

Tag

Name

Setting item Description Input method

Set the character string that is displayed on the lockout tag.

Text box

Text color Set the displayed text color of the lockout tag.

Change Background

Color/Text Color

Background color Set the background color of the lockout tag. dialog box

Input restriction

8 characters

—

Level

Set the authority of user who can operate the lockout tag.

(User authority is defined by the user setting)

List box

Engineer/

Operator4/

Operator3/

Operator2/

Operator1

POINT

Text color, background color and level cannot be set without the lockout tag name registration.

When doing setting beyond lockout tag name without the lockout tag name registration, error message will be displayed and the input cell will be moved to the position of lockout tag name.

REMARK

The lockout tag setting can be operated on the faceplate.

Click the display area of lockout tag on the faceplate without the lockout tag setting; the "Select Lockout Tag" dialog box and the set ticket list will be displayed.

The lockout tag that can be set/removed with the current user authority is displayed.

9-50

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.17 Option Setting

9-51

PURPOSE

Option setting refers to all the setting of the displayed text font, the buzzer sound of alarm, the graph color of faceplate and other items that can be set on the monitor tool.

Items that can be set by the option setting function are shown in the following chart.

Classification item

General

Server/Client

Alarm/Event

General

Setting item

Setting window font

Monitor window font

Printer

Window mode

Minor alarm color

Major alarm color

Return check interval (S)

Return check time-out (S)

PLC status check interval(s)

Write tag data (even if the PC's and PLC's project ID codes are different)




Time Adjustment among OPSs

Alarm/Event display on 2nd line of monitor toolbar

Alarm/Event display format of monitor toolbar


Event notification UDP port No.(HEX)





Tag Data Item Display of Alarm

Unconfirmed Alarms Deletion at Delete Recovered Alarms


Minor alarm




Tag Data Item Display of Event

Unconfirmed Events Deletion at Delete All

Buzzer type



Sound file

Major alarm (The items same as those of the minor alarm)

Event (The items same as those of the minor alarm)

(To the next page)

9-51

9 SETTING

Classification item

Faceplate

Trend Graph

Setting item

SV limit excess setting

Background color

Text color


Button text color


PV bar positive direction color

PV bar negative direction color

PV bar both direction color (Positive)

PV bar both direction color (Negative)

PV High/Low limit value bar color

PV High High/ Low Low limit value bar color


SV/MV pointer color

SV (target) pointer color

MV status color

Frame color (No lockout tag)

Item name display

Gridline

Gridline color

Background color

Graph 1 to 8 colors

Trend binary data storage folder






MELSOFT

9-52 9-52

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

(1) General

Set the common items of the monitor tool general function and set the items that cannot be particularly classified by monitor tool general function.


Setting item

Setting Window

Font*

1

Monitor Window

Font*

1

Printer*

1


Description

Set the font used on the monitor setting window.

Set the font used on the monitor window.

Set the printer used in printing.

Input method

List box

List box

List box

Window Mode Select window mode. List box

Minor Alarm Color Set the graph color of Minor alarm.

Color dialog box

Major Alarm Color Set the graph color of Major alarm.

Color dialog box

Return Check

Interval (s)

Return Check time-out (s)

PLC Status Check

Interval (s)

When communication open error occurs, set the interval seconds return check communication return check of the CPU module with error. ( Appendix 1.8)

(

Set the time-out seconds of communication return check.

Appendix 1.8)

Set the interval (s) for making PLC status check, such as PLC CPU error. ( Appendix 1.9)

Text box

Text box

Text box

Write tag data

(even if the PC's and PLC's project

ID codes are different)

Set whether tag data write will be made valid or not at occurrence of the alarm for project ID code inconsistency. ( Section 7.3)

List box

Input limit

The font list of the personal computer

The font list of the personal computer

The printer list of the personal computer

Multi-window/Single window

—

—

Initial setting

Arial

Arial

(Default Printer)

Multi-window

Green

Red

10 to 3600

1 to 60

1 to 10

Invalid/Valid

60

2

2

Valid

(To the next page)

9-53 9-53

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

Setting item

Automatic CSV File

Deletion Time

(0 to 23)

Disk Free Space

Check Size (MB)


Description

Input method

Input limit Initial setting

Set the time when the CSV files output by automatic CSV file export will be deleted (0 minutes every hour). ( Section 8.7)

Set the disk free space check size of the disk drive that stores CSV files output by the PX Developer installation destination, trend data and automatic

CSV file export.

When the free space of the disk drive decreases to or below the setting, the alarm for disk free space error occurs. ( Section 7.3)

Text box 0 to 23

Text box 50 to 1024

0

50

For the end operation of monitor tool when logging off or shutting down Windows R , set whether to operate according to the user authorization of the current user.

List box

Follow the user authority setting/

Not follow the user authority setting

Follow the user authority setting

*1: The content set in the personal computer is displayed in the font list and the printer list. The detailed setting of the printer is set on the setting window of personal computer. (Except the tag monitor display area of pop-up tuning)

The font size will be selected automatically according to the window size.

The character string of the button, the tab title and the list is change by the monitor window font. The displayed character string on the faceplate cannot change the font.

The font name of 33 characters or more cannot be selected.

POINT

(


Appendix 1.9) is "Enable" (write enabled status) in the initial setting.

If tag data write is performed when the project ID code inconsistency, the system may malfunction.

Change this setting of write tag data (even if the PC's and PLC's project ID codes are different) to "Disable" (write disabled status) when operation has been started after completion of system adjustment.

9-54 9-54

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

(2) Server/Client


Setting item

Time Adjustment among OPSs

Switch/Reconnect server during screens are displayed


Content

Set whether to adjust the time of client/secondary server to that of connecting server (primary server) in the server/client configuration.*

1

Input method

List box

Input limit Initial setting

No/Yes Yes

In the server/client configuration, set whether to switch/reconnect the server if the monitor screen or the setting screen is being displayed.*

1

List box No/Yes No

*1:When Monitor Tool Execution Type Setting is standalone/server (primary server),

"------" is displayed, and cannot be edited.

POINT

Setting "Time Adjustment among OPSs" to "Yes" on Option Setting is recommended. Set to "No" only when another time adjustment system such as

SNTP is applied. Note when setting to "No" on "Time Adjustment among OPSs" of Option Setting, setting to enable on Detail setting of overwriting the setting data of Monitor Tool Execution Type Setting is required.

When setting to "Yes" on "Switch/Reconnect server during screens are displayed" of Option Setting, setting to enable on Detail setting of overwriting the setting data of Monitor Tool Execution Type Setting is required.

9-55 9-55

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

(3) Alarm/Event

Set the items that is related to display or beep sound when alarm or event occurs.

The setting of "Event Notification UDP Port No.(HEX)" must be confirmed.



General


Input method

Input restriction

Initial setting

Alarm/Event Display on 2nd Line of

Monitor Toolbar Bar

Alarm/Event Display

Format of Monitor

Toolbar Bar

Set the display of alarm or event on the second line of alarm/event display area in the monitor toolbar.

Set the display format of the alarm/event display area of the monitor toolbar.


Set whether the tag name of alarm list is displayed in a highlighted way or not while alarm occurs.

List box Alarm/event

List box

List box

Tag Name/Tag

Comment/Tag Name +

Tag Comment

None/

Available

Alarm

Tag Name

None

(To the next page)

9-56 9-56

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

Setting item

Event Notification

UDP Port No.(HEX)

*

1

Automatic Alarm

CSV File Export

Automatic Alarm

CSV File Deletion

Alarm CSV File

Storage Period

(days)

Description

Input method

Set the UDP port number of Change notification on the CPU module which is connected with Ethernet.

Set whether automatic alarm CSV file export will be executed or not.

Set whether alarm CSV file will be deleted automatically or not.

Set the storage period of CSV files output by automatic alarm CSV file export.

When "Automatic alarm CSV file deletion" is

"Enable", files that have passed the storage period are automatically deleted.

Text box

List box

List box

Text box

Input restriction

H0401 to

HFFFF

No/Yes

No/Yes

1 to 2000

Initial setting

H1000

No

No

2000

Automatic Alarm

CSV File Export

Target Folder *

2

General

(Continued)

Tag Data Item

Display of Alarm

Set the destination folder to which the CSV files will be output by automatic alarm CSV file export.

Set the display format of tag data items displayed on the alarm contents field of the

Alarm List screen and the alarm/event display area of the monitor toolbar.

Folder selection dialog box

List box

200 characters*

3

Invalid characters:

/,:;*?\"<>|

Item Name/

Detailed

Name/

Item Name

(Detailed

Name)

(No setting)

Item

Name

Unconfirmed Alarms

Deletion at Delete

Recovered Alarms

Automatic Event

CSV File Export

Automatic Event

CSV File Deletion

Event CSV File

Storage Period

(days).

Set whether to delete the unchecked rows when deleting the alarm data.

Set whether automatic event CSV file export will be executed or not.

Set whether event CSV file will be deleted automatically or not.

Set the storage period of CSV files output by automatic event CSV file export.

When "Automatic event CSV file deletion" is

"Enable", files stored longer than the set period are automatically deleted.

List box

List box

List box

Text box

No/Yes

No/Yes

No/Yes

1 to 2000

Yes

No

No

2000

Automatic Event

CSV File Export

Target Folder *

2

Set the destination folder to which the CSV files will be output by automatic event CSV file export.


200 characters*

3

Invalid characters:

/,:;*?\"<>|

(No setting)

*1: "Open Setting" of Ethernet by the network parameter of GX application, "Event

Notification UDP Port No.(HEX) " becomes the setting value of "Destination Port

No.".

If Microsoft

R

Windows

R

XP cannot receive event notification, it may be caused by the setting of Windows

R firewall.

For details, refer to the POINT in Appendix 1.2.2.

*2: When no folder is set to this item, CSV files are export to the "AlarmCSV" or

"EventCSV" folder given in Section 2.3.

*3: Up to 255 characters with the monitor tool of PX Developer Version 1.04E or earlier and up to 225 characters with the monitor tool of PX Developer Version

1.06G to 1.20W. Data can be read with PX Developer Version 1.23Z or later even if the number of input characters exceed the limit.

(To the next page)

9-57 9-57

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

Setting item

General

(Continued)

Tag Data Item

Display of Event

Description

Set the display format of tag data items displayed on the event message, status, set value field of the Event List screen.

Input method

List box

Input restriction

Item Name/

Detailed

Name/

Item Name

(Detailed

Name)

Initial setting

Item

Name

Unconfirmed

Events Deletion at Delete All

Set whether to delete the unchecked rows when deleting the event data.

Buzzer Type

Beep Sound

Time Interval

Set whether the buzzer buzzes or not when alarm occurs. (Beep/Sound)

Set the beep sound timer interval. In the case of "sound", repeat play the content of specified sound file in the set time.

Minor alarm*

4

Beep Sound

Frequency

Set the beep sound frequency when alarm occurs. (Unit: Hz)

Set when the buzzer type is <Beep>.

Sound File

Set the sound file to be played when alarm occurs.

Set when the buzzer type is <sound>.

Major alarm*

4

(The items same as those of the minor alarm)

Event*

4

(The items same as those of the minor alarm)

List box

List box

Text box

Text box

File selection dialog box

No/Yes

None/Beep/

Sound

1 to 99999

50 to 10000

The file whose extension is

WAV

Yes

None

10

2000

(No setting)

*4: The buzzer alarm sound is set according to minor alarm, major alarm and event.

Types of the buzzer sound can be selected from the beep sound and sound file.

If the "Beep" sound is selected, [Beep Sound Timer Interval] and [Beep Sound

Frequency] should be specified. If the sound file is selected, [Beep Sound Timer

Interval] and [Sound File] should be specified.

Item which needs to be set (classified in terms of buzzer type)

Setting item

Buzzer type

None Beep Sound

Beep Sound Timer Interval


Sound file

( : Need to be set, : Cannot be set)

POINT

Make the "Event notification UDP Port No.(HEX)" setting not to overlap on wellknown port numbers and any port numbers used by software other than the monitor tool.

Make the "automatic CSV file export" setting after setting the items related to other automatic CSV file export. ( Section 8.7 (3))

9-58 9-58

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

(4) Faceplate

Set the graph color of the faceplate. The initial setting of it can be usual as it was.


9-59

Text

PV High High/Low

Low limit value Bar

PV High/Low limit value Bar

PV value bar

Button text

Button background

MV status text

MV pointer

No alarm

Background

SV (target) pointer

SV pointer

SV limit value bar

MV limit value bar

Background color : black

Text color : gray

(Initial setting)

Background color : gray

Text color : black

9-59

9 SETTING

MELSOFT



Input method

Input restriction

Initial setting

SV Limit Excess Setting

When SV value is set in a faceplate, set input availability (Enable/Disable) of the value exceeding

SL and SH.

List box

Background Color

Text Color

Alarm Area Color

(No Alarm)

Button Text Color

Button Background Color

PV Bar Positive Direction

Color

PV Bar Negative Direction

Color

PV Bar Both Direction

Color (Positive)

PV Bar Both Direction

Color (Negative)

PV High/Low Limit Value

Bar Color

PV High High/Low Low

Limit Value Bar Color

SV/MV Limit Value Bar

Color

SV/MV Pointer Color

SV (Target) Pointer Color

MV Status Color

Frame Color

(No Lockout Tag)

Set the whole background color of the faceplate.

Set the text color of the faceplate.

Set the text color of the alarm display area when no alarm occurs.

Set the text color of the button.

Set the background color of the button.

Color dialog box

Color dialog box

Color dialog box

Color dialog box

Color dialog box

Set the PV bar display color when the display direction of the faceplate display scale setting is

"positive direction".


"negative direction".


"both direction". (Display color when the PV is equal to or greater than the "Base point when both direction is set".)


"both direction". (Display color when the PV is less than the "Base point when both direction is set".)

Set the graph color of PV high/low limit value display bar range.

Set the graph color of PV high high/low low limit value display bar range.

Color dialog box

Color dialog box

Color dialog box

Color dialog box

Set the display color of SV/MV limit value range.

Set the graph color of pointer the SV/MV graph.

Set the display color for SV (target) pointer of a faceplate (used only for the tag type 2PIDH).

Set the background color for MV status display of a faceplate.

Set the frame color of the faceplate.

Color dialog box

Color dialog box

Color dialog box

Color dialog box

Color dialog box

Color dialog box

Color dialog box

Valid/Invalid Valid

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Black

White

Dark gray

Black

Gray

Green

Green

Green

Green

Yellow

Red

Dark green

Yellow

Light blue

Light blue

Gray

9-60 9-60

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

REMARK

When the I/O mode display area of the faceplate is NOR, the graph color is the same as that of normal button. When the area is SIM/OVR/TSTP, the different specified color will be displayed.

Text color

Background color

Button text color White

Button background color Blue

Black

Light blue

Black

White

The graph color of the alarm display area is shown as the following chart according to whether alarm occurs or not.

Minor alarm color and major alarm color are set by the Option Setting (General).

Text color

Background color

No alarm

No alarm color

Background color

Minor alarm

Black

Minor alarm color

Major alarm

Black

Major alarm color

I/O display area

Alarm display area

9-61 9-61

9 SETTING

Set the graph color of the trend graph or use the initial set color.


MELSOFT


Description Setting item

Item Name Display

When the trend graph is displayed, select the column to be displayed on the Cursor position data display grid.

Gridline

Set whether the gridline is added to the trend graph.

Gridline Color Set the color of the gridline.

Background Color Set the background color of the graph.

Graph 1 to 8 Color Set the line color of the graph.

Input method

List box

List box

Color dialog box

Color dialog box

Input limit

Item Column/

Comment

Column/

Item +

Comment

Column

Initial setting

Item Column

Available/None Available

—

—

Dark gray

Black

1 Green

2 Red

3 Yellow

Color dialog box

—

5 Blue

6 Magenta

7 White

8 Orange

(To the next page)

9-62 9-62

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

Setting item

Trend Binary Data

Storage Folder

Automatic Trend CSV

File Export Target

Folder

Automatic Trend CSV

File Export File Name

Automatic Trend CSV

File Export Time

(0 to 23)

Automatic Trend CSV

File Deletion

Trend CSV File

Storage Period (days)

Description

Set the folder path that saves the trend binary data collection file.

Set the destination folder to which the

CSV files will be output by automatic trend CSV file export.

Set whether the group name will be included in the name of the automatic export file.

Input method



List box

Input limit

200 characters*

2

,*

3

Invalid characters:

/,:;*?\"<>|

200 characters*

2

Invalid characters:

/,:;*?\"<>|

Do not include

Group Name/

Include Group

Name

Initial setting

(No setting) *

1

(No setting) *

1

Do not include

Group Name

Set the time when the CSV files output by automatic trend CSV file export will be stored (0 minute every hour).

Set whether trend CSV file will be deleted automatically or not.

Set the storage period of CSV file output by automatic trend CSV file export.

When "Automatic trend CSV file deletion" is "Enable", files stored longer than the set period are automatically deleted.

Text box

List box

Text box

0 to 23

No/Yes No

1 to 2000

0

2000

*1: If the output destination folder is not set to the output folder, the file is output to the "Trenddata" or "TrendCSV" folder given in Section 2.3.

*2: Up to 255 characters with the monitor tool of PX Developer Version 1.04E or earlier and up to 225 characters with the monitor tool of PX Developer Version

1.06G to 1.20W. Data can be read with PX Developer Version 1.23Z or later even if the number of input characters exceed the limit.

*3: The total number of characters of both trend binary data storage folder name and trend binary file name must be within 259.

POINT

With the setting to include a group name in a name of an automatic export file, invalid characters (/,:;*?\"<>|) are restricted in a trend group name.

When automatic trend CSV files are saved including group names, if the trend group name is changed, CSV files that were output before the change cannot be displayed on the trend graph.

9-63 9-63

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.18 Setting under This Condition

The set items and operating procedure that are necessary for the following conditions are explained here.

For details of setting window and operation method, refer to the following sections.

Section Title

Section 9.18.1

Section 9.18.2

Section 9.18.3

Section 9.18.4

Section 9.18.5

Section 9.18.6

Section 9.18.7

Section 9.18.8

Section 9.18.9

Section 9.18.10

Section 9.18.11

Section 9.18.12

Section 9.18.13

Section 9.18.14

Section 9.18.15

Changing the mode

Displaying the control panel

Displaying a trend graph

Displaying an alarm

Displaying an event

Setting character string displayed on faceplate

Design lockout tag

Specifying a font

Specifying a display color

Specifying a beep sound

Changing the transfer setup

Connecting to Simulator

Specifying a printer

Changing the window mode

Using automatic CSV file export

9.18.1 Changing the mode

The user authority that is corresponding to the user name and password must be specified by user setting for changing at first.

Related setting items

User Authority Setting

User Setting

Setting Item Reference

Section 9.2

Section 9.3

BASIC OPERATION


The "Change Mode" screen is displayed.

2. Input the user name and password with engineer authority to change to the engineer mode.

(In the default status, enter user name: admin, password: admin.)



4. Select [User Authority Setting].

Set the operation authority range for users to be specified.


5. Select [User Setting].

Set at optional on the user setting window.


6. Close the setting window.



8. Input the user name and password.

It will be changed to the setting authority mode.

(When setting the lock mode, the "Lock" button can be clicked)

(Section 4.5)

(Section 4.7)

(Section 6.3.8)

(Section 9.2)

(Section 9.3)

(Section 4.5)

9-64 9-64

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.18.2 Displaying the control panel

In order to display the faceplate of optional tag data on the control panel, the projects of monitor target and the writing method of connecting monitor target must be specified.

Meanwhile the tags to be displayed should be set by groups.

Related setting item

Setting Item

Monitor Target Project Setting

Control Panel Setting

Reference

Section 9.4

Section 9.7

For details of the setting that is related to the display content of the faceplate on the control panel, refer to Section 9.18.6.

BASIC OPERATION






4. Select [Monitor Target Project Setting].

Set the assignment information database file on the screen of the monitor target project.


5. Select [Control Panel Setting].

Specify the display tag on the screen of control panel setting window.



7. Click the "Control Panel" button on the monitor toolbar and then the control panel will be displayed.

(Section 4.5)

(Section 6.3.8)

(Section 9.4)

(Section 9.7)

(Section 6.3.2)

(Section 7.1)


9-65 9-65

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.18.3 Displaying a trend graph

In order to display the value of optional process data on the trend graph, the monitor target projects and the connection method to the monitor target must be specified.

Meanwhile, the tags to be displayed need to be set by groups. In addition, the existence of the gridline and the graph color can be changed by the option setting.


Setting Item


Monitor Variable Setting

Trend Setting


Reference

Section 9.4

Section 9.6

Section 9.8

Section 9.17 (4)

BASIC OPERATION









5. Select [Trend Setting].

When displaying global variables or devices on the trend graph, register monitor variables on the monitor variable setting.

6. Specify the display tag data item and monitor variable on the trend setting window.


7. Select [Option Setting].

Set [Trend Graph] on the option setting screen.



9. Click the "Trend Graph" button on the monitor toolbar and then the trend graph will be displayed.

(Section 4.5)

(Section 6.3.8)

(Section 9.4)

(Section 9.6)

(Section 9.8)

(Section 9.17)

(Section 6.3.2)

(Section 7.2)


9-66 9-66

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.18.4 Displaying an alarm

Two methods can be used to display the events of alarm occurrence on the screen:

One is to display one line or two lines of the latest alarm on the monitor toolbar and the other is to display the alarm records on the alarm list screen.

With regard to the alarms of alarm tags or some of status tags (NREV, REV, MVAL1,

MVAL2, PB), preset the character string which displays the alarm content is required.

The option setting can change the graph color and display method of the alarm.

Set the UDP port number that is used for monitor tool to receive communication from

CPU module by the option setting when connecting Ethernet.


Setting Item


Alarm Setting

Faceplate Display Pattern Setting

Option Setting (General): minor alarm color, major alarm color


Reference

Section 9.4

Section 9.9

Section 9.13

Section 9.17 (1)

Section 9.17 (2)

BASIC OPERATION

(1) Two lines of alarm are displayed on the monitor toolbar







Set the assignment information database file on the monitor target project screen.


5. Select [Alarm Setting].

Specify the alarm content which is assigned to the alarm tag on the alarm setting window.


(It does not need to be set if the alarm tag has not been set)

6. Select [Faceplate Display Pattern Setting].

Set the content which is assigned to the status tag (NREV,

REV, MVAL1, MVAL2, PB) on the setting window of the faceplate display pattern.


(It does not need to be set if the status tag has not been set)

[Option

Set [Event Notification UDP Port No.(HEX)] of

[Alarm/Event]-[General] on the option setting screen.

8. If necessary, [Minor Alarm Color] and [Major Alarm Color] of [General] can be changed to optional color on the option setting screen.

9. [Alarm/Event Display on 2nd Line of Monitor Tool Bar] of

[Alarm/Event]-[General] is set to [Alarm] on the option setting screen.



(Section 4.5)

(Section 6.3.8)

(Section 9.4)

(Section 9.9)

(Section 9.13)

(Section 9.17)

9-67 9-67

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

(2) Display Alarm List

1 to 8. Operating steps are the same as those of (1)

9. If necessary, the setting of [Highlighted Display while alarms Occur] of [Alarm/Event]-[General] can be changed on the option setting screen.



11. Click the "Alarm List" button of the monitor toolbar.

The alarm list is displayed.


<Alarm/event display area on the monitor toolbar>

(Section 9.17)

(Section 6.3.2)

(Section 7.3)

<Alarm list screen>

9-68 9-68

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.18.5 Displaying an event

Two methods are used to display the event on the screen.

One is to display one line of the latest event on the monitor toolbar and the other is to display the list of event record on the event list screen.

With regard to the event of the message tag or status tag (NREV, REV, MVAL1,

MVAL2, PB), preset the character string of the event content that is displayed is required.

Set the UDP port number that is used for monitor tool to receive communication from

CPU module by the option setting when connecting Ethernet.


Setting item


Event Setting


Option Setting (Alarm/Event): General

Reference

Section 9.4

Section 9.10

Section 9.13

Section 9.17 (2)

BASIC OPERATION

(1) Display the latest event on the monitor toolbar


The change mode screen is displayed.







5. Select [Event Setting].

Specify the alarm content which is assigned to the alarm tag on the event setting window.

Click the "Apply" button. (It does not need to be set if the alarm tag has not been set)

6. Select [Faceplate Display Pattern Setting].

Set the content which is assigned to the status tag (NREV,

REV, MVAL1, MVAL2, PB) on the setting screen of the faceplate display pattern.

Click the "Apply" button. (It does not need to be set if the status tag has not been set)


Set [Event Notification UDP Port No.(HEX)] of

[Alarm/Event]-[General] on the option setting screen.

8. [Alarm/Event Display on 2nd Line of Monitor Tool Bar] of

[Alarm/Event] - [General] is set to [Event] on the option setting screen.


9. Close the setting screen.

(Section 4.5)

(Section 6.3.8)

(Section 9.4)

(Section 9.10)

(Section 9.13)

(Section 9.17)

9-69 9-69

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

(2) Display Event List

1. to 7. Operating steps are the same as those of (1)



9. Click the "Event List" button on the monitor toolbar.

The event list is displayed.


<Alarm/event display area on the monitor toolbar>

(Section 6.3.2)

(Section 7.4)

<Event list screen>

9-70 9-70

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.18.6 Setting character string displayed on faceplate

Among the character strings displayed on the faceplate, the character string which is assigned to the operation button and indicator is set by the faceplate display pattern setting. The character string which is assigned to the alarm tag and message tag is set by the alarm setting and event setting.

In addition, the character string that can be defined by the monitor tool includes unit,

MV characters of MV graph and lockout tag name. The display high/low limit of PV graph can be set by setting the faceplate display scale. The character string (set by the alarm setting, event setting and faceplate display pattern setting) is also displayed on the alarm list screen or event list screen.


Setting item


Alarm Setting

Event Setting

Unit Setting


Faceplate Display Scale Setting

Faceplate MV Characters Setting

Reference

Section 9.4

Section 9.9

Section 9.10

Section 9.12

Section 9.13

Section 9.14

Section 9.15

For details of setting method as for displaying content of lockout tag which is displayed on the faceplate, refer to "Section 9.18.7 Design lockout tag".

For details of setting method as for graph color setting of the faceplate, refer to

"Section 9.18.9 Specifying a display color".

BASIC OPERATION









5. Select the item to be set.

Set the character string that is assigned to the tag on the setting window.


(It does not need to be set if the corresponding tag has not been set on the project)


Click the "Find" button of the monitor toolbar and search by tag name.

The pop-up faceplate is displayed.

(Section 4.5)

(Section 6.3.8)

(Section 9.4)

(Section 9.9,

Section 9.10,

Section 9.12 to

Section 9.15)

(Section 6.3.6)

(Section 7.6)

9-71 9-71

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.18.7 Design lockout tag

The user authority needs to be set for the lockout tag to restrict the operation. The name and color of lockout tag can be set freely.


Setting item

User Authority Setting

User Setting

Lockout Tag Setting

Reference

Section 9.2

Section 9.3

Section 9.16

BASIC OPERATION






4. Select [User Authority Setting].

Set the operation authority range for users to be specified.


Set optionally on the user setting window.


6. Select [Lockout Tag Setting].

Set optionally on the Lockout Tag setting window.



8. Click the "Find" button of the monitor toolbar and search by tag name.

The pop-up faceplate is displayed.

9. Click the lockout tag display area on the faceplate.

The "Select Lockout Tag" dialog box is displayed.

10. Select the lockout tag and click the "OK" button.

The lockout tag is displayed in the "Lockout Tag Display

Area".

(Section 4.5)

(Section 6.3.8)

(Section 9.2)

(Section 9.3)

(Section 9.16)

(Section 6.3.6)

(Section 7.6)

(Section 10.2)


Lockout tag

9-72 9-72

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.18.8 Specifying a font

The display character font of the setting window and the monitor screen can be changed.


Setting item Reference

Option Setting (General): Setting Window Font and Monitor Window Font Section 9.17 (1)

BASIC OPERATION







Change [Setting Window Font] and [Monitor Window Font] of [General] optionally on the option setting screen.



(Section 4.5)

(Section 6.3.8)

(Section 9.17)

REMARK

The font can be selected from the font set in the personal computer.

The size of the font is automatically selected by the screen size. (Except the tag monitor display area of pop-up tuning.)

The change of the monitor window font is to change the button, tab title and character string of the list. The font of the displayed character string of on the faceplate cannot be changed.

9-73 9-73

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.18.9 Specifying a display color

9-74

The display color of the faceplate, lockout tag, alarm display and trend graph can be changed.


Setting item


Lockout Tag Setting: Text Color and Background Color

Option Setting (General): Minor Alarm Color and Major Alarm Color

Option Setting (Faceplate)

Option Setting (Trend Graph): Gridline Color, Background Color and

Graph 1 to 8 Color

Reference

Section 9.13

Section 9.16

Section 9.17 (1)

Section 9.17 (3)

Section 9.17 (4)

BASIC OPERATION






4. Select the item to be set.

Select the display color in the color dialog box.

Click the "OK" button.

5. Confirm that the color displayed in the cell is the selected color.



(Section 4.5)

(Section 6.3.8)

(Section 9.1.2)

The items whose color can be set and their initial color settings are listed in the follow table.

Faceplate

Display

Pattern

Setting

Setting item

PVAL

HTCL

Open Button

Close Button

Stop Button

Remote Display

Local Display

Open

Close

Stop

Remote

Local

Trip Display

Time-out Display

Trip

Time-out

Open/Close Status History Always

Using the PID cooling COOL

Using the PID Heating HEAT

Cooling Close Direction

Cooling Open Direction

Heating Close Direction

Heating Open Direction

Blank

Blank

Blank

Blank

Initial setting

Background color color

Black

Black

Red

Red

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Green

Green

Light blue

Red

9-74

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

Faceplate

Display

Pattern

Setting

(continued)

Setting item

NREV

REV

MVAL1

MVAL2

PB

Operation Button

Stop Button

Start

Stop

Remote Display

Local Display

Trip Display

Time-out Display

Remote

Local

Trip

Time-out

Forward Run Button FWD Run

Stop Button Stop

Reverse Run Button REV Run

Remote Display Remote

Local Display

Trip Display

Time-out Display

Local

Trip

Time-out

Open Button

Close Button

Semi-open Display

Remote Display

Local Display

Trip Display

Time-out Display

Open Button

Open

Close

Semiopen

Remote

Local

Trip

Time-out

Open

Close Button

Stop Button

Semi-open Display

Remote Display

Local Display

Close

Stop

Semiopen

Remote

Local

Trip Display

Time-out Display

ON Name

OFF Name

Trip

Time-out

ON

ON

ON/OFF History Type Only ON

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Initial setting

Background color color

Black

Black

Red

Red

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Green

Green

Red

Red

Red

Green

Red

Red

Red

Green

Green

Green

Red

Red

Red

Green

Green

Red

Gray

9-75 9-75

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

Lockout Tag setting

Option Setting

Setting item Initial setting

Text color

Background color

General

Faceplate

Minor alarm color

Major alarm color

Background color

Text color


Button text color


PV Bar positive direction color

PV Bar negative direction color

Green

Red

Black

White

Dark-gray

Black

Gray

Green

Green

PV Bar both direction color (Positive)

PV Bar both direction color (Negative)

Green

Green

PV High/ Low Limit Value Bar color Yellow

PV High High/Low Low Limit Value Bar Color Red

SV/MV Limit Value Bar Color Dark-green

SV/MV pointer color

SV (target) pointer color for 2PIDH

MV status color

Frame color

Gridline color

Background color

Graph 1 color

Graph 2 color

Yellow

Light blue

Light blue

Gray

Gray

Black

Green

Red

Trend Graph

Graph 3 color

Graph 4 color

Graph 5 color

Graph 6 color

Graph 7 color

Graph 8 color

Yellow

Light blue

Blue

Magenta

White

Orange

9-76 9-76

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.18.10 Specifying a beep sound

In order to beep when alarm or event occurs, it is necessary to set buzzer in option setting. Buzzer type and beep time can be specified.



Option Setting (Alarm/Event) Section 9.17 (2)

BASIC OPERATION







Set the buzzer-related projects as [Alarm/Event] on the option setting screen.



(Section 4.5)

(Section 6.3.8)

(Section 9.17)

The beep sound is set according to Minor alarm/Major alarm/event when alarm occurs.

There are two types of beep sound: Beep sound or sound in the sound file.

Minor alarm

Major alarm

Event

Setting item

Buzzer Type

Beep Sound Time Interval

Beep Sound Frequency

Sound File

(The same as that of minor alarm)

(The same as that of minor alarm)

Initial setting

None

(10)

(2000)

(No setting)

When beep sound occurs, [Beep Sound Time Interval] and [Beep Sound

Frequency] should be specified. When file sound happens, [Beep Sound Time

Interval] and [Sound File] should be specified.

Items to be set (according to the buzzer type)

Setting item

Buzzer type

None Beep Sound



Sound file

( : Need to be set, : Setting not allowed)

REMARK

The beep sound can be stopped by clicking the "Stop Buzzer" button of the monitor toolbar. ( Section 8.1)

9-77 9-77

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.18.11 Changing the transfer setup

The screen that is the same as that of GX Developer will be displayed by selecting

[Transfer Setup] of [Monitor Target Project Setting] on the monitor toolbar. In order to change transfer setup of PLC, it should be set on the specified screen of the connected target.

For details of basic operation method of transfer setup screen, refer to "GX Developer

Version 8 Operating Manual". But the connection of the monitor tool cannot be the relay station's connection of the network with the different network number. (It cannot be connected by blend network of MELSECNET/10(H) and Ethernet which are permitted in GX application)


Setting item



Reference

Section 9.3

Section 9.17 (2)

BASIC OPERATION







Set assignment information database file to the target on monitor target project screen.

5. Click [Transfer Setup] on the monitor target project screen to display the transfer setup screen.

6. Select [PC Side I/F], [PLC Side I/F] and [Network route] in turn on the specified screen of the connected target.

7. Click the "Connection Test" button to confirm the normal communication.

8. Click the "OK" button to activate transfer setup and close the window.

9. Specify the path and the transfer setup of projects.


When setting the connection of <Ethernet>:


Confirm that the value of [Alarm/Event]-[General]-[Event

Notification UDP Port No.(HEX)] is in accordance with the

[Destination Port Number] value of the destination network parameter setting (set by GX application which started from programming tool) on the option setting screen.



(Section 4.5)

(Section 6.3.8)

(Section 9.4)

(Section 9.17)

9-78 9-78

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.18.12 Connecting to Simulator

Start Simulator in the programming tool, execute the simulation of monitoring screen of monitor tool.


Setting item


Reference

Section 9.4

BASIC OPERATION

1. Start the programming tool. project which executes the simulation.

Simulator.







Set assignment information database file to the target on the monitor target project screen.

8. Select [Simulator Connection] of the project to be connected to simulator on the monitor target project screen.



PX Developer

Operating

Manual

(Programming

Tool)

(Section 4.5)

(Section 6.3.8)

(Section 9.4)

9-79 9-79

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.18.13 Specifying a printer

When clicking the "Print Screen" button on the monitor toolbar or the "Print" button on the alarm/event list, the output printer will be selected among the printers that have been registered in the printer setting of the personal computer. The printer cannot be set in detail (such as print paper setting) by the monitor tool. It is printed by the setting that is specified by the printer setting of the personal computer. When specifying the printer without the monitor tool setting, the printer that is set as the "Default printer" will be output.


Setting item

Option Setting (General): Printer

Reference

Section 9.17 (1)

BASIC OPERATION







Select [Printer] of [General] on the option setting screen.

Select the printer name from the list.



(Section 4.5)

(Section 6.3.8)

(Section 9.17)

9-80 9-80

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.18.14 Changing the window mode

(

Window mode is to select multi-screen or maximum display mode of single screen

Section 6.4.2). Set the mode in option setting.


Setting Item Reference

Option Setting (General): Window Mode Section 9.17 (1)

BASIC OPERATION

1. Click the "Change Mode" button of the monitor toolbar.






Set the [Window Mode] of [General] by selecting Multiwindow or Single window in option setting screen.



(Section 4.5)

(Section 6.3.8)

(Section 9.17)

9-81 9-81

9 SETTING

MELSOFT

9.18.15 Using automatic CSV file export

9-82

Automatic CSV file export is a function that saves trend, alarm and event data in CSV files automatically as histories.

To use automatic CSV file export, set whether automatic CSV file export will be executed or not for each data (trend, alarm, event).



Trend Setting

Option Setting (General)



Section 9.8

Section 9.17 (1)

Section 9.17 (2)

Section 9.17 (4)

BASIC OPERATION




3. Click the "Setting" button on the monitor toolbar

The setting screen is displayed.

4. Set the automatic CSV file export target folder, whether to include a group name in an export file name, automatic

CSV file deletion (Enable/Disable), automatic CSV file export time (automatic trend CSV file export only) and storage period (only when automatic deletion is made).

The setting positions are as follows.


Setting item

Option Setting

(Trend Graph)

Option Setting

(Alarm/Event)

Setting position










Option Setting


(Alarm/Event)


5. When automatic CSV file deletion is set to "Enable" in above 4., set the time for automatically deleting CSV files.

In the option setting (general), set the "Automatic CSV file deletion time (0 to 23).


6. In the option setting (general), set the "Disk free space check size (MB)".


(Section 4.5)

(Section 6.3.8)

(Section 9.17 (4))

(Section 9.17 (2))

(Section 9.17 (2))

(Section 9.17 (1))

(Section 9.17 (1))

9-82

9 SETTING

7. Set automatic CSV file export to "Enable".

The setting positions are as follows.


Automatic CSV file export starts.

Setting item Setting position

Trend Setting


(set for each group)

Option Setting

(Alarm/Event)

Option Setting

(Alarm/Event)



MELSOFT

(Section 9.8)

(Section 9.17 (2))

(Section 9.17 (2))

9-83 9-83

9 SETTING

MEMO

9-84

MELSOFT

9-84

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

10

10 FACEPLATE

The so-called faceplate is the graphic screen displaying tag data content to simulate controller.

Accessing to the tag data, execute corresponding process status observation and condition setting. For details of tag types, refer to Section 10.4.

Tag data value cannot only be displayed but also be changed on the faceplate.

Tag

Term Description

Tag data

Originally, it indicates certain measurement for process control or JIS definition identifier on hardware; as for the computer control system, it indicates the identifier of various DDC processing.

A generic name of the data (process condition data/process status data) from DDC processing indicating tag.

Tag data item Items for value setting in tag data.

10.1 Faceplate Display

PURPOSE

To display the graphic screen the simulating controller.

To monitor the current PID control status as well as to execute ON/OFF control with the bar graph in each faceplate.

BASIC OPERATION

The faceplate can be displayed in the following monitor screen.

For details of each screen and its displaying method, refer to Section 6.3.2 and

Chapter 7.

Control panel (

Pop-up faceplate (

Pop-up tuning (

Section 7.1)

Section 7.6)

Section 7.7)

<Control panel> <Pop-up faceplate> <Pop-up tuning >

10-1 10-1

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT


The basic display contents of the faceplate are as follows:

1)Lockout tag

display area

2)I/O mode display area

3)Tag name display area

4)Tag comment display area

5)Alarm display area

6)

Tag type display area

7)

Details button

No.

1)

Item

Lockout tag name display area

2)

I/O mode display area

3)

Tag name display area

4)

Tag comment display area

5)

Alarm display area

6)

Tag type display area

7)

Details button


Description Text color Background color

Number of characters

Display Lockout tag name.

(For details, refer to Section

10.2)

Display I/O mode.

Click the button to change the I/O mode. (For details, refer to Section 10.3.2)

Display tag names. (For details, refer to (1) in this section)

Without lockout tag:

Button text color

With tag: Setting color

NOR : Button text color

TSTP : Black

Generally: Text color

When tag data cannot be written: Black

In setting operation: White

Without lockout tag:


With lockout tag: Setting color

NOR: Button background color

SIM: Blue

OVR: Light blue

TSTP: White

Normal connection:

Background color

Abnormal communication: Red

When tag data cannot be written: Light blue

In setting operation: Blue

8 characters

4 characters

12 characters

(depends on the width of faceplate)

Display tag comment in two lines.

Set the tag comment in the tag FB declaration window of the programming tool.

Display tag alarm. (For details, refer to (2) in this section)

Display the tag type of the tag.

Click the "Details" button to display the pop-up tuning screen. (For details, refer to

Section 7.7)

Text color

Without alarm: No alarm color

With alarm: Black

Text color

Button text color

Background color

No alarm: Background color

Minor alarm: Minor alarm color

Major alarm: Major alarm color

Background color


28 characters

(depends on the width of faceplate)

3 characters

8 characters

Details/<</>>

Employ the ellipsis ".." at the end of a long character string in the tag name display area or tag comment display area.

10

10-2 10-2

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

POINT

Click the button at the bottom of the faceplate to change the window of the display faceplate as shown below.

<Control panel>

Open new pop-up tuning screen

<Pop-up tuning>

Change display

<Pop-up faceplate>

10-3 10-3

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

(1) Display data of tag name display area

Status Description

Faceplate operation

When the SV/MV setting dialog box, etc. is opened from the faceplate, the background color turns blue.

When tag data cannot be read/written

When tag data cannot be written

When the tag data cannot be read/written, the background color turns red.

The tag data cannot be read/written in the following cases.

• A communication error with a PLC has occurred.

• "Incorrect PLC type" error has occurred.

• A communication error with a server has occurred in a client.

In either of the above cases, the displayed value will not be updated.

In the case of redundant system, the status is relevant to the Redundant CPU that has been selected in the "Transfer Setup" dialog box.

When tag data cannot be written, the background color turns light blue.

The tag data cannot be read/written in the following cases.

• The project ID code inconsistent error has occurred, and "Write tag data

(even if the PC’s and PLC’s project ID codes are different)" has been set as "Enable" in the Option setting (General).

• The redundant system A/B identification error has occurred.

• The redundant control/standby system status error has occurred.

As the data can be read from the PLC CPU, the displayed value will be updated.

In the case of redundant system, the status is relevant to the Redundant CPU that has been selected in the "Transfer Setup" dialog box.

POINT

When tag data cannot be read/written, check the following points.

Connection status of the communication cable.

PLC connection target in the monitor target project setting (

In the alarm list (

Section 9.4).

Section 7.3), double-click the corresponding alarm item to display the system alarm details dialog box.

Confirm the displayed error definition and take corrective action.

When tag data cannot be written, observe the following instructions.

Reload the monitor target instructions.

When PLC download has not been performed after execution of compile with the programming tool, perform PLC download and then reload the monitor target project with the monitor tool.

10-4 10-4

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

(2) The displayed contents of the alarm display are as follows:

(a) PVA, DVA, MVA display area

Tag type

Displayed characters *

1

Description

Loop tag

Status tag

AL2 Trip-related Current and overloaded trip over

Other tags (Nothing displayed)

*1: The alarm that has not occurred in the corresponding tag type is not displayed.

(b) SPA, SEA (or HBOA), OOA display area

Tag type

Loop tag

Other tag

Displayed characters

Description

SPA

SEA or

HBO *

1

OOA

Stop alarm

When SPA turns ON, the "SPA" part changes to a button.

Clicking this button resets SPA.

However, a user who has the authority of operation for changing tag data of process design values can reset SPA.

SPA status Operation display type *

2

Indication

ON PB-C

OFF PL

Sensor error (SEA)

SEA turns ON when the sensor is abnormal.

Heater failure (HBOA)

HBOA turns ON in heater failure.

Output open alarm

Turns ON when the output disconnection is detected in the user program.

(No indication)

*1: HBOA is displayed as "HBO".

*2: For details, refer to Section 10.3.1.

For details of tag types, refer to Section 10.4.

10-5 10-5

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

(3) Display on modeless dialog box

The dialog boxes to operate the tag data can be displayed simultaneously from the multiple faceplates on the control panel.

When the dialog box which is started up from faceplate is displayed, other dialog boxes can be opened without closing the displayed dialog box.

The following shows the modeless dialog boxes which can be displayed by clicking the parts on the faceplate.

Lockout tag display area

I/O mode display button

Control mode display button

Motion type setting button

PV value setting button

SV value setting button

MV value setting button

Count value setting button

Executing step No. setting button

Time in the step setting button

Select Lockout Tag dialog box

Change I/O Mode dialog box

Change Control Mode dialog box

Change Motion Type dialog button box

PV value setting dialog box

SV value setting dialog box

MV value setting dialog box

Count value setting dialog box

Executing step No. setting dialog box

Time in the step setting dialog box

10-6 10-6

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

10.2 Lockout Tag

PURPOSE

Limit the tag data operation on the faceplate by the authority-specified lockout tag.

BASIC OPERATION

(Setting Lockout tag)

1. Click the lockout tag display area of the faceplate without lockout tag.

2. The "Select Lockout Tag" dialog box is displayed.

3. Select the lockout tag in the "Select Lockout Tag" dialog box then click the "OK" button.

4. The Confirmation dialog box is displayed and the lockout tag is set on the faceplate.

(Removing lockout tag)

1. Click the lockout tag display area of the faceplate with lockout tag.

2. If the set tag can be removed within the authority of current mode, a confirmation dialog box for removing the tag is displayed and the Lockout

Tag can be removed.

3. If the lockout tag cannot be removed within the authority of current mode, the Corresponding message is displayed: The tag cannot be removed.

Execute again after changing mode ( Section 4.5).


Lockout tag display area

The display color of the frame is the same with the background color of lockout tags display area.

Current mode

Engineer Mode

Operator Mode

Lock Mode

10-7

<Select Lockout Tag dialog box>

The lockout tag list available in current mode is displayed "Select Lockout Tag" dialog box. In the lockout tag list display the tags set according to "Section 9.16

Lockout Tag Setting". The corresponding lockout tag classes available in the mode are as follows:

Available lockout tag level

Operator1 to 4, engineer

(

Operator1 to 4 who have the authority of operation for setting/removing lockout tag on User Authority Setting

Section 9.2)

Example (initial setting): when the current user authority is operator3, lockout tag of operator1 to 3 level can be used.

Lockout tag operation cannot be executed.

10-7

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

10.3 Displaying Parts on Faceplate

Display parts simulated to display lamp and push button according to the display tag data contents on the faceplate.

10.3.1 Operation display types

Push

Button

Name Abbreviation

Push button

Push button with confirmation

Button with display

Push button with confirmation and display

Push button with ON/OFF history






PB

PB-C

PB-L

PB-LC

PB-ONF

PB-SIM

PB-MODE

PB-TYPE

PB-PV

PB-SV





Value display

Character display

Bar display

Pointer display

PB-MV

PB-CNT

PB-STC

PB-T

NUM

STR

BAR

IND

PGS

Graph display

Pattern graph display

PGS2

Status, alarm display

The following list shows the parts names and abbreviations displayed on the faceplate:

For operating the buttons, the user authority in accordance with the tag data items is required.

For details of operation authority for tag data items, refer to Appendix 4.

Split graph display SPLT

PL

Description

Display the general push buttons

Display the confirmed message before execution

Flick display in 1 second interval in execution

Displaying the confirmed information before execution

Flick display every 1 second in execution

Display the confirmed message before execution

Display change I/O Mode dialog box

Display change Control Mode dialog box

Display change Motion Type dialog button box

Display PV value setting dialog box

Display SV value setting dialog box

Display MV value setting dialog box

Display count value setting dialog box

Displays the executing step No. setting dialog box

Displays the time in the step setting dialog box

Display value data with character and decimal point

Display ASCII character string

Display the value in bar pattern

Display the current value on the bar With the pointer

Display SV and MV pattern by graph

Displays the SV output values of the time set in advance for each step as graphs

Display a heating/cooling graph.

Display at the time of status change and alarm occurrence

10-8 10-8

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

Item

I/O mode change

Control mode change

Motion type change

Executing step No. setting

Time in the step setting

PV value setting

SV value setting

MV value setting

Count value setting

Batch Count operation

Count/timer operation

Status operation

The faceplate display consists of the above parts.

The common display composition of the faceplate is introduced through the usage samples of the components in following content. In every description, the operation display types are stated in abbreviation.

Component mainly used






PV value setting button and bar display

SV value setting button, bar display and pointer display

MV value setting button, bar display and pointer display


Button with confirmation and display

Button with confirmation and display

Button with confirmation and display and status/alarm display

Reference

Section 10.3.2

Section 10.3.3

Section 10.3.4

Section 10.3.5

Section 10.3.6

Section 10.3.7

Section 10.3.8

Section 10.3.9

Section 10.3.10

Section 10.3.11

Section 10.3.12

Section 10.3.13

REMARK

The background color of the displayed button changes with the change of the status of the equipment.

Before operation, the button color is its background color. After operation, the set color and button background color flicks (with the interval of 1 second).

During the flicking time, the flick status will not be kept when redisplayed owing to page change. If time-out or trip alarm occurs, flicking will stop.

10-9 10-9

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

10.3.2 Changing the I/O mode

I/O mode

NORMAL

Abbreviation

NOR

SIMULATION SIM

OVERRIDE OVR

TAG STOP TSTP

PURPOSE

To change the connection status of the sequence I/O module during the operation.

I/O mode can be classified as follows:

Description

Mode for input/output module connection normal status.

Mode for input/output module disconnection and executing simulation operation.

An operation mode only to cut off the signal from input module and hold output when sensor fails. PV value can be input from the screen configuration.

Mode for not performing the processing regarding a tag.

Stops input processing and loop control operation.

Set to the predefined tags and the currently stopped tags for future use.

Unnecessary alarm is not occurred as all the alarms to tags are recovered.



<Change I/O Mode dialog box >


Item


Operation display type

PB-SIM


Display current I/O mode.

Click button to display the change I/O mode dialog box for changing I/O mode.

NOR: Button text color

SIM: White

OVR: Black

NOR: Button background color

SIM: Blue

OVR: Light blue

POINT

For tags without I/O mode (When the tag type PGS, MOUT, SEL, BC, PSUM, PB,

TIMER1, TIMER2, COUNT1 and COUNT2) the I/O mode display button will not be displayed (button display area is covered by the background color).

The selectable I/O modes depend on the tag types.

In addition, some switches from one mode into another are limited because of the tag types. For details of tag types, refer to Section 10.4.

10-10 10-10

10 FACEPLATE

10-11

MELSOFT

(1) Loop tag (PID, PIDP, SPI, IPD, BPI, R, 2PID) and status tag

(NREV, REV, MVAL1, MVAL2).

The following shows mode transition is possible.

OVERRIDE

NORMAL

*1

SIMULATION

*1: Can be switched only when the user authority ( mode.

Section 4.3) is engineer

(2) Loop tag (2PIDH, PFC_SF, PFC_SS, PFC_INT, PVAL)


OVERRIDE

*1

NORMAL TAG STOP

*1

SIMULATION


(5) Loop tag (PGS2, HTCL)

The following mode transition is possible.

*1

NORMAL TAG STOP


(6) Loop tag (SWM)


OVERRIDE


(3) Loop tag (ONF2, ONF3, MONI, MWM)

NORMAL and OVERRIDE modes can be set.

(4) Loop tag (PGS, MOUT, SEL, BC, PSUM) and status tag (TIMER1,

TIMER2, COUNT1, COUNT2)

I/0 mode display button is not displayed. (NORMAL mode always)


*1

NORMAL TAG STOP



POINT

PV value can be changed when the I/O mode is OVERRIDE.

I/O mode can be changed only when the control mode (

MANUAL.

Section 10.3.3) is

Note that switching the mode from NORMAL to TAG STOP is possible even if the control mode is not MANUAL.

If MDIH (Disable mode change) setting is executed by memory item

( Section 10.5) of tag data, the disable mode cannot be selected.

10-11

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

REMARK

(

If the improper value is set on DOM of the memory item for the tag data

Section 10.5), the button displayed will be blank. At this time, I/O mode should be set again by "Change I/O Mode" dialog box. (The improper value will not be set on DOM, if the user takes the normal operation with the monitor tool.)

10.3.3 Changing the Control mode

PURPOSE

Switch SV and MV value control method for PID control.

The types of control mode (Operation mode) are as follows.

Control mode Abbreviation Description

MANUAL MAN

The mode performs manual operation.

Output MV setting value.

CASCADE CAS

COMPUTER MV

COMPUTER SV

CASCADE DIRECT

CMV

CSV

CASDR

The mode performs cascade operation. Perform control by using output value

(MV) of upper loop as setting value (SV).

The mode performs manual operation from upper computer.

Output MV setting value from upper computer.

The mode performs automatic operation from upper computer.

Based on SV setting value, Control MV value from upper computer.

Directly outputs the output value of primary loop as the output value of secondary loop in cascade connection.



< Change Control Mode dialog box >

Item




PB-MODE

Display current control mode.

Click button to display "Change Control Mode" dialog box thus control mode can be changed

Button text color

Button background

Color

POINT

Control mode cannot be displayed when control mode does not exist (when tag type is MONI, BC, PSUM, TIMER1, TIMER2, COUNT1 or COUNT2).

MIDH (disable mode change) setting is made to COMPUTER MV and

COMPUTER SV in initial setting by memory item ( Section 10.5) of tag data.

10-12 10-12

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

Following table indicates whether mode is enabled/disabled for SV and MV operation.

Mode

Operation from faceplate

SV operation*

1

MV operation*

2

Operation from upper computer

SV operation MV operation

10-13

CASCADE

COMPUTER MV

Disable Disable Disable Disable

Disable Disable Enable Enable

Disable Disable Disable Disable

*1: Indicates the operations of executing step number (STC) and time in the step (T) for PGS2 when the tag type is PGS2.

*2: Indicates the operation of PGS2 setting value (SV) when the tag type is PGS2.

Control modes are different according to different tag types.

Besides, mode switching is restricted according to tag types. For details of tag types, refer to Section 10.4

(1) Loop tag (PID, PIDP, SPI, IPD, BPI, R, ONF2, ONF3, SEL, 2 PID

PGS, PFC_SF, PFC_SS and PFC_INT, HTCL)

All modes except for CASCADE DIRECT can be set and no restrictions regarding mode transition.

(2) Loop tag (2PIDH)

All modes can be set.

Switching to CASCADE DIRECT mode is only possible from CASCADE mode.

No restrictions regarding other modes.

MANUAL

AUTO

COMPUTER MV

COMPUTER SV

CASCADE CASCADE DIRECT

(3) Loop tag (MOUT and MWM)

MANUAL and COMPUTER MV modes can be set for them. No restrictions regarding other modes.

(4) Loop tag (PGS2) and Status tag (NREV, REV, MVAL1, MVAL2 and

PB)

MANUAL and AUTO modes can be set for them. No restrictions regarding other modes.

(5) Loop tag (MONI, BC and PSUM) and status tag (TIMER1, TIMER2,

COUNT1 and COUNT2)

Control mode display button is not displayed.

(6) Loop tag (SWM, PVAL)

All modes except for COMPUTER MV and CASCADE DIRECT can be set and no restrictions regarding mode transition.

10-13

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

POINT

If the I/O mode ( Section 10.3.2) is either OVERRIDE or TAG STOP, the control mode cannot be switched from MANUAL.

If MDIH (Disable mode change) setting is executed by memory item

( Section 10.5) of tag data, the disable mode cannot be selected.

REMARK

(

If the improper value is set on MODE of the memory item for the tag data

Section 10.5), the button displayed will be blank. At this time, control mode should be set again by "Change Control Mode" dialog box. (The improper value will not be set on MODE, if the user takes the normal operation with the monitor tool.)

10-14 10-14

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

10.3.4 Changing the PGS motion type

Motion type

HOLD

RETURN

CYCLIC

Tag type

PGS

PGS2

PGS

PGS2

PGS

PGS2

PURPOSE

Display and set motion type by loop tag (PGS, PGS2).

The motion types are as follows:

Description

After processing SV1 to SVn, the SVn and MVn values are held by SV and MV respectively and the program is stopped.

After processing T1 to Tn, the SVn value is held by SV and the program is stopped.

After processing SV1 to SVn, the SV value is set to 0 and MVn value is held by MV and the program is stopped.

After processing T1 to Tn, the STC and T values are set to 0 and SVn value is held by

SV and the program is stopped.

Repeats the processing from SV1 to SVn.

Repeats the processing from T1 to Tn.


1) Motion type setting button

2) Motion type display

PGS PGS2

<Change Motion Type dialog box>


Operation

No. Item display type

1)

2)


Motion type display *

1

PB-TYPE

STR

Click the button to display

"Change Motion Type" dialog box.

Display motion type.

Invalid: White

White

Valid: Button background color

Invalid: Black

Black

*1: Left blank if the motion type is invalid.

The relation between control mode ( following table.

Section 10.3.3) and motion type is as

10-15 10-15

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

(1) PGS

Control mode Motion type setting button

MAN

AUT

CAS

CMV

CSV

Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

Enabled

Disabled

Motion type display

HOLD/RETURN

HOLD/RETURN

CYCLIC

HOLD/RETURN

CYCLIC

Motion status

Stop the motion by SV and MV value.

Operate the selection motion type.

Operate by CYCLIC motion type.

Stop the motion by current SV and MV value.

Operate by CYCLIC motion.

POINT

When it stops in HOLD/RETURN mode, change the control mode

( Section 10.3.3) to MANUAL mode.

When the control mode (

Section 10.3.3) is set as CAS/CSV mode, operate by CYCLIC type no matter what motion type is selected in the "Change Motion

Type" dialog box.

(2) PGS2

Control mode Motion type setting button

MAN

AUT

Enabled

Enabled

Motion type display Motion status

HOLD/RETURN/CYCLIC Operates with the current SV value.

HOLD/RETURN/CYCLIC Operates with the selected motion type.

POINT

(

When the motion is stopped at HOLD/RETURN mode, the control mode

Section 10.3.3) is switched to MANUAL mode.

10-16 10-16

10 FACEPLATE

10.3.5 Executing step No. setting

PURPOSE

Displays/sets an executing step No. with loop tag (PGS2).


1) Executing step No. setting button

2) Executing step No. display

MELSOFT

3) Command type radio button

4) Edit box

5) Set button

6) Close button

<Executing step No. setting dialog box>


No. Item


1)

2)

3)


Executing step No. display

Command type radio button

PB-STC

NUM

Description

Displays the executing step No. setting dialog box.

Displays the executing step No.

Select the command type.

6) Close button

Enables to enter a jump destination step

No. when step jump is selected.

Step jump is selected:

Sets the value in the edit box to the executing step No. (Can be set within the range of 0 to 32).

Advance is selected:

Turns ON the advance command bit only when the control mode is AUTO.

Closes the dialog box.

Display color Background color

Button text color

White


Black

(Follows the display color setting of the dialog box.)

10-17 10-17

10 FACEPLATE

10.3.6 Time in the step setting

PURPOSE

Displays/sets the time in the step with loop tag (PGS2).


2) Time in the step display

1) Time in the step setting button

3) Time unit display

MELSOFT

4) Edit box

5) Set button

<Time in the step setting dialog box>


No. Item


1)

2)


Time in the step display

PB-T

NUM

Description

Displays the Time in the step setting dialog box.

Displays the time in the step.

3)

4)

5)

6)

Time unit display

Edit box

Set button

Close button

STR

Displays the unit of the time in the step

("s" or "min").

Enter the time in the step.

Sets the time in the step.

Closes the dialog box.

6) Close button


Button text color

White


Black

White Black

(Follows the display color setting of the dialog box.)

10-18 10-18

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

10.3.7 PV value setting

PURPOSE

Display and set PV value with high high/high/low/low low limit by bar graph.


(1) When the PV value bar is displayed in the positive direction

(2) When the PV value bar is displayed in the negative direction

1) Scale high/low

limit

4) PV value high high

limit (HH) alarm bar

5) PV value high limit

(PH) alarm bar

8)

8) PV value bar

6) PV value low limit

(PL) alarm bar

7) PV value low low

limit (LL) alarm bar

10) PV value

setting button

2) PV value

engineering unit

3) PV value

11) Edit box

12) Set button

< PV value setting dialog box>

13) Close button

(3) When the PV value bar is displayed both positive and negative direction from the base point

8)

9) PV value bar

base point

9)

8)

10-19

When the PV value bar is greater than the base point

When the PV value bar is equal to the base point

When the PV value bar is less than the base point

When the PV value is equal to the value of "Base Point when Both Direction is set" ( Section 9.14), PV value bar is overlapped over the PV value bar base point and is displayed.

10-19

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

No. Item



Description Display color

1)

2)

4)

5)

6)

7)

Scale high/low limit

PV value engineering unit

PV value high high limit (HH) alarm bar

PV value high limit (PH) alarm bar

PV value low limit (PL) alarm bar

PV value low low limit (LL) alarm bar

BAR

BAR

BAR

BAR

PV value bar base point


NUM

STR

NUM

8) PV value bar BAR

9)

10)

BAR

PB-PV

Background color

Display scale high/low limit.

Text color

High limit

Low limit

PV RH:

Background color

PV>RH:

PV high high/low low

Limit value bar color

PV RL:

Background color

PV<RL:

PV high high/low low

Limit value bar color

Display engineering unit of PV value.

(8 characters)

Display the PV value.

(A total number of 8 bits including symbols and decimal point)

Display PV value high high limit (HH) alarm range by bar.

Display PV value high limit (PH) alarm range by bar.

Display PV value low limit (PL) alarm range by bar.

Display PV value low/low limit (LL) alarm range by bar.

Text color

White Black





Display the PV value as a bar.

The PV value bar can be displayed in the positive direction, negative direction or both direction.

The input high high, high, low and low low limit alarms occur according to the alarm bit status.

<Normal>

When the display direction is the positive direction, the display color is the PV value bar positive direction color.

When the display direction is the negative direction, the display color is the PV bar negative direction color.

When the display direction is both directions, the display color is the PV bar both direction color (positive) if the PV value is equal to or greater than the PV bar base point.

The display color is the PV bar both direction color (negative) if the PV value is less than the PV bar base point.

< When input high high limit/low low limit alarm occurs >


< When input high low limit alarm occurs >

PV value high limit value/low limit value bar color

When the PV value bar is displayed in both directions, the base point of the PV value is displayed.

Click the button to display the PV value setting dialog box.

Changes to the button display when the I/O mode is OVERRIDE.

Valid: Button text color

Invalid: Text color

Background color

Black

Black

Black

Black

Black

Valid:


Invalid:

Background color

10-20 10-20

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

No. Item


12) Set

13) Close button

Description Display color

Key in the PV value to be set directly.

Click the "Enter" key or set button, Input value is displayed in device.

Set PV value of edit box.

Close dialog box.

Change with the display color set of dialog box.

The display color can be set in the faceplate of option setting (

Background color

Section 9.17 (3)).

10-21 10-21

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

10.3.8 SV value setting

PURPOSE

Display and set SV value.


(1) When the tag type is other than 2PIDH, PGS2, SWM, PFC_SF,

PFC_SS, PFC_INT, PVAL, HTCL

(2) When the tag type is 2PIDH, SWM,

PFC_SF, PFC_SS, PFC_INT, PVAL

3) SV limit display

4) SV pointer

5) SV (target) pointer

6) SV (current) pointer

1) SV value setting

button

2) SV value

display

7) SV value (current) display

(3) When the tag is PGS2, HTCL

9) Edit box

8) Up/Down

button

10) Set button

11) Close button

< SV value setting dialog box (when the tag type is other than HTCL) >

< SV value setting dialog box (when the tag type is HTCL) >

10-22 10-22

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT


Operation

No. Item display type

1)


PB-SV

Click the button to display SV value setting dialog box.

Valid:

Button text color

Invalid:

Text color

Valid:


Invalid:

Background color value NUM

Display and set SV value display a string of 8 bits including characters and decimal point.

White Black

3) SV limit display BAR

IND

5) SV (target) pointer IND

6) SV (current) pointer IND

Display the limit of SV value.

Indicate the position of SV value in display bar.

Indicate the position of SV value

(target) in display bar.

Indicate the position of SV value

(current) in display bar.


SV/MV pointer color

SV (target) pointer color

SV/MV pointer color

Black

Background color

Background color

Background color

7)

SV value (current) display

NUM Display the SV value (current). White Black

8) Up/Down

10) Set button

11) Close button

Click the button; SV value is changed in a fixed amount each time.

Key in the SV value to be set directly.

Click the "Enter" key or set button,

Input value is displayed in device.

Set SV value of edit box.

Close dialog box.

Change with the display color set of dialog box.

The display color can be set in the [Faceplate] of option setting ( Section 9.17

(3)).

SV value is changed when the up/down button is released. Operations in clicking the up/down button are as follows.

Low speed Up/Down button

High speed Up/Down button

Increase/decrease SV value by using the lowest unit.

Increase/decrease SV value by using the bigger value between 10 times of minimum value and 1% of display scale.

Increase/decrease SV value by using 10 times of minimum value.

POINT

When setting the SV Limit Excess Setting ( Section 9.17) of the Option setting

(faceplate) to "Valid", the SV value can be set exceeding the SV high/low limit value.

10-23 10-23

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

10.3.9 MV value setting

PURPOSE

Display and set the value of MV.


(1) When the tag type is other than ONF2, ONF3, HTCL

(2) When the tag type is HTCL

No. Item



1)

2)

3)

5)

6)


MV value display

MV limit display

ON/OFF direction display character

Up/Down button

8) Set button

9) Close button

PB-MV

NUM

BAR

IND

STR

Click the button, display MV value setting dialog box.

Display and set MV value. (Display a string of 6 bits at most including symbols and decimal point.)

Other than PFC_INT tag: -10.0 to 110.0

PFC_INT tag: -110.0 to 110.0

Click the button to change MV value in a constant amount.

Key in the tag item value to be set directly. Click the "Enter" key or set button Input value is displayed in device.

Set the tag item value within edit box.

Close dialog box.

Valid: Button text color

Invalid: Text color

Valid: Button background color

Invalid: Background color

White Black

Display the limit of MV value.


Black

Indicate the position of SV value background in display bar.

(

Display the MV value character.

Section 9.15)

(

For MV_HT, MV_CL of HTCL tag, display the content registered on Faceplate

Display Pattern Setting.

Section 9.13)

SV/MV pointer color

Text color

Background color

Background color

(Change with the display color setting of dialog box.)

10-24 10-24

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

The display color can be set in the [Faceplate] of option setting (

9.17 (3)).

The tag item value is changed when the up/down button is released.

Section

Operations in clicking the up/down button are as follows.

Low speed

Up/Down button

Increase/decrease the tag item value by using minimum value.

High speed

Up/Down button

Increase/decrease the tag item value by using 10 times of minimum value.

(3) When tag type is ONF2, ONF3

MV can only be set as two values (100%, 0%) or three values (100%, 50%, 0%) when loop tags are ONF2 and ONF3, so MV value setting button is designed as a button with display. The value is set as a constant value; other values cannot be set in setting dialog box.


2) MV value

display

1) MV value

Setting button

<ONF2>

<ONF3>


No. Item


Description

1)

2)


MV value display

PB-CL

NUM


Click MV button to change MV value to the value within ( ).

For the ONF2 tag, a setting of 0% or 100% is available.

MV<50% : 0% switch lights up.

MV 50%: 100% switch lights up.

For the ONF3 tag, a setting of 0%,

50% or 100% is available.

MV<25% : 0% switch lights up.

25% MV<75% : 50% switch lights up.

MV 75% : 100% switch lights up.

Display and set MV value.

The displayed characters shall be no more than 5 bits including symbols and decimal points.

Button text color

Lit: green

Not lit: Button background color

White Black

10-25 10-25

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

10.3.10 Count value setting

PURPOSE

Display and set the count value by using loop tag (BC) and status tag (TIMER1,

TIMER2, COUNT1 and COUNT2).


1)


2)

Count value

display

3) Pre-complete

display

4) Complete

display < TIMER, COUNTER >

<BC>

5) Edit box

6) Set button

7) Close button

<Count value setting dialog box>


No. Item


Description

1)

2)

3)

4)


Count value display

Pre-complete display

Complete display

6) Set

7) Close button

PB-CNT

NUM

PL

PL


Click the button to, display count value setting dialog box.

Graph a count value with

8 bits.

Graph color is changed when count reaches SV1,

2 or PSV value.

White Black

Pre-complete: Black

Others: No alarm color

Pre-complete: Green

Others: Background color

Display color is changed when count up reaches

SV value.

Key in the count value to be set directly. Click the

"Enter" key or set button

Input value is displayed in device.

Button text color

Complete: Black

Others: No alarm color


Complete: Green

Others: Background color

(Change with the graph color setting dialog box.)

Set count value of edit box.

Close dialog box.

The graph color can be set in [Faceplate] of option setting ( Section 9.17 (3)).

10-26 10-26

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

10.3.11 Batch count operation

PURPOSE

Start/Stop count and reset value by using loop tag (BC, PSUM)


1) Run button

2) Hold button

3) STOP/RESET

button

4) RESET/START

button


No Item


Description

1) RUN button PB-CL

2) HOLD button

3)

4)

STOP/RESET button

RESET/START button

PB-CL

PB-CL

PB-C

Text color Background color

Start the operation.

Hold the value and stop operation.

Button text color

Button text color

Invalid : Button background color

Valid : Green


Stop operation and, reset value. Button text color

Invalid : Button Background color

Start operation after resetting value. Button text color Button Background color


9.17 (3)).

The status change caused by clicking the button is as follows:

RUN state

("RUN" button displays green)

Section

HOLD state

("HOLD" button displays green)

STOP/RESET state

("STOP/RESET" button displays green)

Reset process count value 0

The RUN state with a click on "RESET/START" button is the same as the state of performing "RUN" after a click on "STOP/RESET" button.

10-27 10-27

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

10.3.12 Count/Timer operation

PURPOSE

Start/Stop counter/Timer and reset value by using status tag (TIMER1, TIMER2,

COUNT1 and COUNT2).


1) RUN button

2) STOP button

3) RESET button

4) RESET/START

button


No. Item


Description

1) RUN button PB-CL Start operation

2) STOP button

3) RESET button

4)

RESET/START button

PB-CL

PB-C

PB-C


Stop operation

Reset value

Button text color


Button text color


Button text color Button background color

Start operation after resetting value Button text color Button background color


9.17 (3)).


RUN status

Display "RUN"

Button in green

Section

HOLD state

"HOLD" button displays green

RESET processing

(Count value 0)

Clicking "RESET/START" button is equal to executing "RUN" after "RESET"button.

10-28 10-28

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

10.3.13 Status operation

PURPOSE

Display the control status of device operation by loop tag (PVAL), status tag

(NREV, REV, MVAL1 and MVAL2).


1)

Status

button

2)

Status display

2)

Status display

10-29

PB-LC

PB-C

PL

PL

PB-C

3) Time-out reset

button


Description Display Background

Change the status of device.

Display the change of color between status of set.

(Open/Close/Start/FWD Run/

REV Run)

Change device status.

Display color does not change

(MVAL2 STOP)

Display device status

(Semiopen (not displayed for

PVAL.)/Remote/Local)

Invalid: Button text color

Button text color


Display abnormal status of device. (Trip/Time-out)

Occurring: Black

Recovered: No alarm color

Invalid: Button background color



Occurring: Alarm color

Recovered: Background color

8 characters

8 characters

8 characters

8 characters

Reset the time-out status Button text color Button background color

The display color (set color) and displayed string of status button and status display can be set by faceplate display pattern setting ( Section 9.13).

Alarm color can be set by [General] ( Section 9.17 (1)) in option setting. No alarm color, button text color and button background color can be set by

[Faceplate] ( Section 9.17 (3)) in option setting

10-29

10 FACEPLATE

10.3.14 Command button operation

PURPOSE

To change the status of the device on the status tag (PB).


1) Command button

MELSOFT

No. Item



1)

Command button

PB-ONF

Change the status of the device.

The display color and background color change in accordance with the status being set.

Valid: ON set color

Invalid: OFF set color

Valid: ON set color

Invalid: OFF set color

8 characters

The ON/OFF history type, display color (set color) and display string can be set in the faceplate display pattern setting ( Section 9.13) against each button.

10-30 10-30

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

10.4 Tag Types

Loop tag

Status tag

Alarm tag

Message tag

PID

PIDP

SPI

IPD

BPI

R

ONF2

ONF3

PFC_SF

PFC_SS

The types of tag that can be displayed in a faceplate are listed in the following table.

As for the contents displayed in the faceplate of each tag, please refer to the sections in "Reference".

Name

PGS

PGS2

MOUT

MONI

SWM

MWM

SEL

BC

PSUM

PVAL

HTCL

NREV

REV

MVAL1

MVAL2

PB

TIMER1

TIMER2

COUNT1

COUNT2

ALM

ALM_64PT

MSG

MSG_64PT

PID control

Position type PID control

Sample PI control

I-PD control

Blend PI control

Ratio control

2 position ON/OFF control

3 position ON/OFF control

Predictive functional control (simple first order lag)

Predictive functional control (simple second order lag) functional (integral process)

Program setter

Multi-point program setter

Manual output

Monitor

Manual setter with monitor

Manual output with monitor

Loop selector

Batch counter

Pulse integrator

Position-proportional output

Heating and cooling output

Motor Irreversible Control

Motor reversible Control

ON/OFF control 1 (without intermediate value)

ON/OFF control 2 (with intermediate value)

Push button operation

Timer1 (Timer stops when COMPLETE flag is on.)

Timer2 (Timer continues when COMPLETE flag is on.)

Count1 (Counter stops when COMPLETE flag is on.)

Count2 (Counter continues when COMPLETE flag is on.)

Alarm

64-points alarm

Message

64-points message

Reference

Section 10.5.1

Section 10.5.1

Section 10.5.2

Section 10.5.1

Section 10.5.1

Section 10.5.1

Section 10.5.1

Section 10.5.1

Section 10.5.3

Section 10.5.3

Section 10.5.12

Section 10.5.12

Section 10.5.12

Section 10.5.4

Section 10.5.5

Section 10.5.6

Section 10.5.7

Section 10.5.8

Section 10.5.9

Section 10.5.10

Section 10.5.11

Section 10.5.11

Section 10.5.13

Section 10.5.14

Section 10.6.1

Section 10.6.1

Section 10.6.1

Section 10.6.1

Section 10.6.3

Section 10.6.2

Section 10.6.2

Section 10.6.2

Section 10.6.2

Section 10.7.1

Section 10.7.2

Section 10.8.1

Section 10.8.2

10-31 10-31

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

These items in the following table are the example items of "Section 10.3 Displaying

Parts on Faceplate" displayed in the faceplate of each tag type. As for the display contents and operations of the corresponding item in the following explanations of each faceplate display, refer to sections in "Reference".

Part

Reference

Loop

PID

2PID

2PIDH

PIDP

SPI

IPD

BPI

R

ONF2

ONF3

PFC_SF

PFC_SS

PFC_INT

PGS

PGS2

I/O

Mode

Control mode

Motion type

STC setting

Section

10.3.2

Section

10.3.3

Section

10.3.4

Section

10.3.5


Section

10.3.6

PV value setting

Section

10.3.7

SV value setting

MV value setting

Section

10.3.8

Section

10.3.9

Count setting

BC operation

C/T operation

Section

10.3.10

Section

10.3.11

Section

10.3.12

STATUS operation

Command button operation

Section

10.3.13

Section

10.3.14

----

---- ---- ----

---- ---- ----

---- ---- ----

---- ---- ----

---- ---- ----

---- ---- ----

---- ---- ----

---- ---- ----

---- ---- ----

---- ---- ----

( )

---- ---- ----

---- ---- ----

---- ---- ----

---- ---- ----

( )

( )

( )

---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----

Tag type

Status

MOUT

MONI

SWM

MWM

SEL

BC

PSUM

PVAL

HTCL

NREV

REV

MVAL1

MVAL2

PB

TIMER1

---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ( )

---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ( )

---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ( )

---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ----

---- ---- ----

---- ---- ----

---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----

----

---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----

----

----

---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ( ) ---- ---- ---- ---- ----

TIMER2

---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ( ) ---- ---- ---- ---- ----

Alarm

COUNT1

---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ( ) ---- ---- ---- ---- ----

COUNT2

ALM

---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ( ) ---- ---- ---- ---- ----

---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----

ALM_64PT

---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----

Mess-

MSG

---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- age MSG_64PT ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----

: Display corresponding to faceplate, ( ): Only display a part of common pattern, : No display

REMARK

In SV value of R, bar is display by ratio to PV value.

In MV value setting of ONF2 and ONF3, bar is not displayed and the MV value setting button can only be set as 2 position (0%, 100%) or 3 position (0%, 50%,

100%)

In SV value setting of PGS, bar is not displayed, display SV pointer on the pattern graph ( Section 10.3.1).

10-32 10-32

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

10.5 Loop Tag Faceplate

Offset

+ 0

+ 1

+ 2

+ 3

+ 4

+ 5

+ 6

+ 7

+ 8

+ 9

+ 10 to 93

ALM

INH

ALML

CTNO

CTFN

UNIT

N

+ 94

+ 95

FUNC

MODE

MDIH

DOM

DIM

Loop tag is a tag used for loop control processing.

The types in the loop tag and reference section are as follows:

Tag type

PID, PIDP, SPI, IPD, BPI, R, 2PID

2PIDH

ONF2, ONF3

PGS

PGS2

MOUT

MONI

SWM

MWM

SEL

BC, PSUM

PFC_SF, PFC_SS, PFC_INT

PVAL

HTCL

Reference

Section 10.5.1

Section 10.5.2

Section 10.5.3

Section 10.5.4

Section 10.5.5

Section 10.5.6

Section 10.5.7

Section 10.5.8

Section 10.5.9

Section 10.5.10

Section 10.5.11

Section 10.5.12

Section 10.5.13

Section 10.5.14

The memory configurations of tag data generally used in loop tag are as follows:

For details of each tag data, refer to "PX Developer Programming Manual".

Tag data item

Tag function code

Control mode

Description

A code represents tag type (System area * 1 )

Valid/invalid of each selection item of control mode

Disable Mode Change

Valid/invalid of each selection item of I/O mode control mode and auto tuning

Alarm

Disable Alarm Detection

Alarm level

Lockout tag No.

Lockout tag function

Unit

No. of digits after decimal point

The occur/recovery status of each alarm

The valid/invalid of each alarm

The level of each alarm (major/minor alarm)

0: no lockout tag, 1 to 32: lockout tag No in display

(System area *

1

)

The authority of using lockout tag (system area *

1

)

Industrial unit No. (0 to 127)

Display digits after decimal point (0 to 4)

(The contents are different according to different tag types)

Monitor output butter

Monitor input butter

The information downloaded from personal computer to

CPU module such as valid/invalid setting in each selection item of I/O mode. (System area *

1

)

Occur/recovery status of error read from CPU module to personal computer (system area *

1

)

*1: Please do not perform writing by user in system area.

Reference

Section 10.4

Section 10.3.3

Section 10.3.2

Section 10.3.3

Section 7.7.5

Section 7.3

Section 7.3

Section 7.3

Section 9.16

Section 10.2

Section 9.12

----

Section 10.3.2

Section 7.4.1

10-33 10-33

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

POINT

In setting MDIH (disable mode change), the disabled mode on the faceplate which displays tag data (or auto tuning function) cannot be selected.

In setting INH (disable alarm detection), the disabled alarm for tag data will not occur.

If tag types are PID, 2PID, 2PIDH, set contents related to tuning function in

DOM/DIM (Monitor Input/Output Buffer).

If tag types are BC, PSUM, set contents related to batch counter operation in

DOM/DIM (Monitor Input/Output Buffer).

10-34 10-34

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

10.5.1 PID, PIDP, SPI, IPD, BPI, R, 2PID

PURPOSE

Perform display and operation of PV, SV, MV values of loop tag in the faceplate of basic PID control, position type PID control, sample PI control, I-PD control (IPD), blend PI control (BPI), 2-degree-of-freedom PID control (2PID).

Set SV value using ratio (%) to PV value in the faceplate of ratio control.


1) I/O mode change

SV value display (Bar display)

Display the ratio corresponding to PV value

4)

PV value display

(Bar display)

6) SV value display

(Bar display)

3)

PV value setting

5) SV value setting

7)

MV value setting

8)

MV value display

(Bar display)

2) Control mode change

9) Ratio high/low limit.

<In PID,PIDP,SPI,IPD,BPI,2PID>

< R >


No. Item

1)

2)

I/O mode change

Control mode change

Description

Display and set I/O mode.

Display and set control mode.

3) 4)

5) 6)

7) 8)

9)

PV value setting

SV value setting

MV value setting

Ratio high/low limit

Display and set PV value.



Display ratio high/low limit (RMIN, RMAX) of SV value.

(Operation display type: NUM)

Reference

Section 10.3.2

Section 10.3.3

Section 10.3.7

Section 10.3.8

Section 10.3.9

10-35 10-35

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

(1) Selectable I/O mode


OVERRIDE

NORMAL

*1

SIMULATION


(2) Selectable control mode



Enabling/disabling SV, MV operations in different modes are as follow.

Mode SV operation MV operation

CASCADE, COMPUTER MV, COMPUTER SV Disable Disable

POINT

PV value can be changed when the I/O mode (

OVERRIDE.

Section 10.3.2) is


MANUAL.

Section 10.3.3) is

If the I/O mode ( Section 10.3.2) is OVERRIDE, the control mode cannot be switched from MANUAL.

If the setting of MDIH (disable mode change) is performed in the memory item

( Section 10.5) of tag data, disabled mode cannot be selected.

10-36 10-36

10 FACEPLATE

10.5.2 2PIDH

MELSOFT

PURPOSE

PV, SV and MV values of loop tag are displayed and operated in the faceplate of

2-degree-of-freedom Advanced PID control (2PIDH).

To avoid the sudden change of MV value in SV value change, SV value can gradually be changed in 2-degree-of-freedom Advanced PID control. *

1

Therefore, the following two values are displayed in the faceplate.

• SV value (target) : SV value set by an user in SV value change

• SV value (current) : SV value gradually changes from the value before the change to SV value (target)

Moreover, the processing status of MV output is displayed in a MV status.

*1: Set the SV value (current) variation in the SV variation rate high limit value

(DSVL) of tag data item.

If the SV variation rate high limit value is 100% (initial setting status), the SV value (current) will become the same value with the SV value (target) and the

SV value (current) cannot gradually be changed.


1) I/O mode change

4) PV value display

(Bar display)

6) SV value (target)

set ting

12) MV statu s text

7) SV value display

(Bar display)



3) PV value setting


10) MV value setting

11) MV value display

(Bar display)


10-37 10-37

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT


No. Item

1) I/O mode change

Description


2)

3) 4)

Control mode change

PV value setting

5) 6) 7) 8) 9) SV value setting

10) 11) MV value setting

12) MV status text



Reference

Section 10.3.2

Section 10.3.3

Section 10.3.7

Display and set SV value (target) and SV value (current). Section 10.3.8

Display and set MV value. Section 10.3.9

Display processing status for MV output. (Following table)

The following shows the display contents of MV status.

MV status is stored in an input monitor buffer (DIM) of tag data.

Display item

Preset MV output processing

MV hold processing

MV tracking processing

Display string Text color Background color displayed Background color Background color

Executing "PRESET" Black MV status color displayed Background color Background color

Executing "HOLD"

Executing "TRK"

Black MV status color displayed Background color Background color

Black MV status color


The following mode transition is possible .

OVERRIDE

*1

NORMAL

*1

SIMULATION

TAG STOP



10-38 10-38

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT


All modes can be set.

Switching to CASCADE DIRECT mode is only possible from CASCADE mode.

No restrictions regarding other modes.

MANUAL

AUTO

COMPUTER MV

COMPUTER SV

CASCADE CASCADE DIRECT

Following table indicates whether mode is enabled/disabled for SV and MV operation.

MANUAL

AUTO

CASCADE, CASCADE DIRECT,

COMPUTER MV, COMPUTER SV

Enable Enable

Enable Disable

Disable Disable

POINT


OVERRIDE.

Section 10.3.2) is


MANUAL.

Section 10.3.3) is





10-39 10-39

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

ONF3

PURPOSE

To set loop tag, perform display and operation of PV, SV, MV values in the faceplate of 2 position ON/OFF control (ONF2) and 3 position ON/OFF control

(ONF3).

MV value is set in two positions of 0%, 100%, (or three positions of 0%, 50%,

100%)


1) I/O mode change

10-40

4) PV value

display

(Bar display)

6) SV value display

(Bar display)

3) PV value setting

5) SV value setting

7) MV value

setting


<In ONE2> <In ONE3>


No. Item

1)

2)

3) 4)

5) 6)

7)

I/O mode change

Control mode change

PV value setting

SV value setting

MV value setting

Description Reference






Section 10.3.2

Section 10.3.3

Section 10.3.7

Section 10.3.8

Section 10.3.9

10-40

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT


It is possible set NORMAL and OVERRIDE mode.



Enable/Disable SV, MV operations in different modes are shown as follows.


CASCADE, COMPUTER MV,

COMPUTER SV

Disable Disable

POINT


OVERRIDE.

Section 10.3.2) is


MANUAL.

Section 10.3.3) is




10-41 10-41

10 FACEPLATE

10.5.4 PGS

MELSOFT

PURPOSE

To set loop tag, display the pattern of MV corresponding to SV (elapsed time) using graph in the faceplate of program setting device (PGS), set motion type.


6) Pattem graph

display

2) Motion type change

3) SV value setting

4)

MV value setting

5) MV value display

(Bar display)


6) Pattern graph display

No. Item

1)

2)


Description

Control mode changes Display and set control mode.

Motion type switch Display and set motion type.

3) SV value setting




Display the pattern of MV corresponding to SV using graph. (Operation display type: PGS)

Reference

Section 10.3.3

Section 10.3.4

Section 10.3.8

Section 10.3.9

The display contents are same as the one shown in

Section 7.7.1 (2)

10-42 10-42

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT


It is possible to set all modes, no restrictions for mode change.

Enabling/disabling SV, MV operations in different modes are as the following table.



COMPUTER SV

Disable Disable

POINT

(


Section 10.5) of tag data, disabled mode cannot be selected.

10-43 10-43

10 FACEPLATE

10.5.5 PGS2

MELSOFT

PURPOSE

Displays the setting values to the predetermined time in every step on a graph in the faceplate for Multi-point program setter (PGS2) of the loop tag.


1) I/O mode change

8) Wait status display

9) Pattern graph display

3) Motion type change

6) PV value display

4) Executing step No. setting

5) Time in the step setting

7) SV value setting



No. Item

6)

7)

8)

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

9)

I/O mode change

Control mode change

Motion type change

Executing step No. setting


PV value display

SV value setting

Wait status display

Pattern graph display

Description

Displays/sets the I/O mode.

Displays/sets the control mode.

Displays/sets the motion type.

Displays/sets the executing step No.

Displays/sets the time in the step.

Displays the PV value.

Displays/sets the SV value.

Displays the current wait status.

Displays the setting values to the predetermined time in every step on a graph. (Operation display type: PGS2)

Reference

Section 10.3.2

Section 10.3.3

Section 10.3.4

Section 10.3.5

Section 10.3.6

Section 10.3.7

Section 10.3.8

The next page

The display contents are same as the one shown in

Section 7.7.1 (3).

10-44 10-44

10-45

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

The display during wait status is as follows.

The wait status is stored at input monitor buffer (DIM) in the tag data.

Status

Normal

During WAIT

Display string

"WAIT"

"WAIT"

Text color

No alarm color

Black

Background color

Background color

Green

Multi-point program setter FB (PGS2) enables to set the optional points exceeding

32 to the program by connecting two or more FBs in multi-link.

For program examples, refer to "PX Developer Programming Manual".

The tag of Multi-point program setter FB (PGS2) in multi-link enables the following operations on the faceplate.

The SV value changed on the SV setting when the control mode is MANUAL is reflected to other faceplates of the multilinked FBs in multistage connection.

Only one FB can be switched to AUTO mode in the faceplates of the multi-linked

FBs in multistage connection.

If switched to AUTO mode on any of the faceplates, the AUTO modes set on other faceplates are automatically switched to MANUAL mode.

10-45

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT



*1

NORMAL TAG STOP



MANUAL and AUTO modes can be set.

Mode transition is not restricted.


POINT

Clicking on the graph enables to switch between "All step display" and

"Executing step display".

Click

<All step display> <Executing step display>

When a mouse cursor is on the graph, its shape varies depending on the display status as follows:

All step display:

Executing display:

SV value can be changed only when the control mode (

MANUAL.

Section 10.3.3) is



10-46 10-46

10 FACEPLATE

10.5.6 MOUT

MELSOFT

PURPOSE

The MV value of loop tag can be displayed and operated in the faceplate of manual output (MOUT).


10-47

2)

MV value setting

3) MV value display

(Bar display)

1)

Control mode

change


No. Item






Section 10.3.3

Section 10.3.9


MANUAL and COMPUTER MV modes can be set.

Enabling/disabling MV operations in different modes are as the following table.

MANUAL Enable

COMPUTER MV Disable

POINT

If the setting of MDIH (disable mode change) is performed in the memory item (


10-47

10 FACEPLATE

10.5.7 MONI

MELSOFT

PURPOSE

The PV value of loop tag can be displayed and operated in the faceplate monitor

(MONI).


1)

I/O mode change

3) PV value display

(Bar display)

2)

PV value

setting

10-48


No. Item

1)

2) 3)

I/O mode change

PV value setting




Section 10.3.2

Section 10.3.7


It is possible to set NORMAL and OVERRIDE mode.

POINT


OVERRIDE.

Section 10.3.2) is

If the setting of MDIH (Disable mode change) is performed in the memory item


10-48

10 FACEPLATE

10.5.8 SWM

MELSOFT

PURPOSE

PV and SV values of loop tag are displayed and operated in the faceplate of manual setter with monitor (SWM).

To avoid the sudden change of MV value in SV value change, SV value can gradually be changed in manual setter with monitor. *

1









1)

I/O mode change

3) PV value display

(Bar display)

5) SV value (target) setting

7) SV value display

(Bar display)



4)

PV value setting

6)

SV value (current) display

2)

Control mode change

10-49 10-49

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT


No. Item

1)

2)

I/O mode change

Control mode change

3) 4) PV value setting


Description



Reference

Section 10.3.2

Section 10.3.3

Display and set PV value. Section 10.3.7




OVERRIDE

*1

NORMAL TAG STOP





Enabling/Disabling SV operation in different modes is as following table.

MANUAL Enable

AUTO Enable

CASCADE, COMPUTER SV Disable

POINT


OVERRIDE.

Section 10.3.2) is

I/O mode can be changed only when the control mode ( Section 10.3.3) is

MANUAL.



10-50 10-50

10 FACEPLATE

10.5.9 MWM

MELSOFT

PURPOSE

PV and MV values of loop tag are displayed and operated in the faceplate of manual output with monitor (MWM).


1)

I/O mode change

4) PV value display

(Bar display)

3)

PV value

setting

5)

MV value setting

6) MV value display

(Bar display)

2)

Control mode change


No. Item

1)

2)

3) 4)

5) 6)

I/O mode change

Control mode change

PV value setting

MV value setting


Display and set I/O mode. Section 10.3.2

Display and set control mode. Section 10.3.3



Section 10.3.7

Section 10.3.9

10-51 10-51

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT


It is possible to set NORMAL and OVERRIDE mode.


MANUAL and COMPUTER MV modes can be set.

Enabling/Disabling MV operation in different modes is as following table.

MANUAL Enable

COMPUTER MV Disable

POINT


OVERRIDE.

Section 10.3.2) is


MANUAL.

Section 10.3.3) is


If the setting of MDIH (disabled mode change) is performed in the memory item


10-52 10-52

10 FACEPLATE

10.5.10 SEL

MELSOFT

PURPOSE

PV and MV values of loop tag are displayed and operated in the faceplate of loop selector (SEL). The selected No. can be displayed.


3)

PV value display

(Bar display)

6)

Display the selection number

2)

PV value

display

4) MV value

setting

5)

MV value display

(Bar display)

1)

Control mode

change



1) Control mode change Display and set control mode.

2) 3) PV value display Display PV value.


6)

Display the selected number


Display selected number of signal

(SLNO). (Operation display type: NUM)

Reference

Section 10.3.3

Section 10.3.7

Section 10.3.9

Section 10.3.1

10-53 10-53

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT



Enabling/disabling MV operations of different modes are as the following table.

MANUAL Enable

AUTO Disable

CASCADE, COMPUTER MV, COMPUTER SV Disable

POINT

(



10-54 10-54

10 FACEPLATE

10.5.11 BC, PSUM

MELSOFT

PURPOSE

To display PV value of loop tag and set count/timer, one can operate RUN button in the faceplate of batch counter (BC) and pulse integrator (PSUM).

Count value can be operated and displayed in the faceplate of batch counter (BC).

Display pre-complete and complete.


10-55

1)

PV value display

2) Count value setting

4) Batch count operation

(Button)

3)

Count value

setting

(Pre-complete & complete display)

< BC> < PSUM>


No. Item Description Reference

1) PV value display

2) 3) Count value setting

4)

Display PV value.

Display and set count value.

Section 10.3.7

Section 10.3.10

Batch count operation Perform such as start/stop operation count. Section 10.3.11

Pre-complete and complete is displayed in green when PV value reaches the SV value set.

The display of COMPLETE-1 is changed when PV value reaches SV1 value. The display of COMPLETE-2 is changed when PV value finally reaches SV2 value.

Then the display of COMPLETE is changed when PV value finally reaches SV value.

10-55

10 FACEPLATE


RUN status

("RUN" button displayed in green)

HOLD status

("HOLD" button displayed in green)

STOP/RESET status

("STOP/RESET" button displayed in green)

RESET process

(count value 0)

MELSOFT

The run status with a click on "RESET/START" button is the same as the status of performing "RUN" after a click on "STOP/RESET" button.

The three status of: RUN, HOLD, STOP/RESET can be changed in the faceplate of loop tag (BC, PSUM). The button corresponding to current status displays in green.

Count value reset to 0 in STOP/RESET status.

Count value cannot be reset to 0 by clicking button in RUN status.

<Button operation examples>

1. Click RUN button when STOP/RESET button is green.

2. Starts to count value when RUN button is displayed in green.

3. Click HOLD button when RUN button is green.

4. The count stops when HOLD button changes to green.

5. Click RESET/START button when HOLD button is green.

6. RUN button changes to green after count is reset to 0, and count value starts to count value.

7. Click STOP/RESET button when RUN button is green.

8. Count value stops and resets when STOP/RESET button is changed to green.

10-56 10-56

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

10.5.12 PFC_SF, PFC_SS, PFC_INT

PURPOSE

PV, SV and MV values of loop tag are displayed and operated in the faceplate of predictive functional control (PFC_SF, PFC_SS, PFC_INT).

To avoid the sudden change of MV value in SV value change, SV value can gradually be changed in predictive functional control. *

1









1) I/O mode change

3) PV value display

(Bar display)


7) SV value display

(Bar display)



4) PV value setting


7) MV value setting

8) MV value display

(Bar display)


10-57 10-57

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT


No. Item

1)

2)

I/O mode change

Control mode change

3) 4) PV value setting






Section 10.3.2

Section 10.3.3

Display and set PV value. Section 10.3.7


Display and set MV value. Section 10.3.9



OVERRIDE

*1

NORMAL

*1

SIMULATION

TAG STOP








COMPUTER SV

Disable Disable

POINT


OVERRIDE.

Section 10.3.2) is


MANUAL.

Section 10.3.3) is





10-58 10-58

10 FACEPLATE

10.5.13 PVAL

MELSOFT

PURPOSE

Display/operate the PV value, SV value and the open/close status of motor valve on the faceplate of position-proportional output (PVAL) in loop tag.

To avoid the sudden change of MV value in SV value change, SV value can gradually be changed in position-proportional output. *

1





(DSVL) of tag item.




1) I/O mode change

3) PV value display

(Bar display)


7) SV value display

(Bar display)



4) PV value setting


10) Status operation


10-59 10-59

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT


No. Item

1)

2)

3) 4)

I/O mode change

Control mode change

PV value setting


10) Status operation

Description




Reference

Section 10.3.2

Section 10.3.3

Section 10.3.7


Using Open/Close/Stop status button to operate device. Section 10.3.13

Status button

Open/Close/Stop

Description

Open/Close/Stop motor valve

Status display

Remote/Local

Trip

Time-out

Description

Light in set color in remote and local status

Light in alarm color in device trip status due to overloading

Light in alarm color when device time–out is exceeded



OVERRIDE

*1

NORMAL TAG STOP

*1

SIMULATION





Enabling/Disabling SV operation in different modes is as following table.

MANUAL Enable

AUTO Enable

CASCADE, COMPUTER SV Disable

POINT


OVERRIDE.

Section 10.3.2) is

I/O mode can be changed only when the control mode ( is MANUAL.

Section 10.3.3)





10-60 10-60

10 FACEPLATE

10.5.14 HTCL

MELSOFT

PURPOSE

SV, MV_HT and MV_CL values of loop tag are displayed and operated in the faceplate of heating and cooling output (HTCL).


1) I/O mode change

3) Split graph

4) PID parameter tracking display

5) SV value setting

6) SV value display

(Bar display)

7) MV_HT value setting

8) MV_HT value setting

(Bar display)

9) MV_CL value setting

10) MV_CL value setting

(Bar display)



No. Item

1)

2)

I/O mode change

Control mode change

Description



3)

4)

Split graph Display the graphs.

PID parameter tracking display Display the PID parameter that is tracking the upper tag.

5) 6) SV value setting

7) 8) MV_HT value setting

9) 10) MV_CL value setting


Display and set MV_HT value.

Display and set MV_CL value.

Reference

Section 10.3.2

Section 10.3.3

Section 10.3.8

Section 10.3.9

Section 10.3.9

10-61 10-61

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

[Display split graph]

X-axis : SV value from the primary loop

Line of heating side : Red (changeable depending on the background color of "Using the PID Heating" on Faceplate Display Pattern Setting

( Section 9.13))

Line for cooling side : Light blue (changeable depending on the background color of

(

"Using the PID Cooling" on Faceplate Display Pattern Setting

Section 9.13))

Intersection line of SV and MV_HT/MV_CL: White

Nothing is displayed when DBND value or SPLT value is out of range.

The intersection line of SV and MV_HT/MV_CL is not displayed when SV value is under 0 or over 100.

The horizontal line of MV_CL is displayed when DBND is negative value, or SV value is under SPLT value.

The horizontal line of MV_HT is displayed when DBND is negative value, or SV value is over SPLT value.

SPLT

DBND :

: 50%

0%

The graph is displayed starting from SPLT, DBND toward 100% of heating, cooling.

The intersection lines which indicate the current SV value and MV value of heating/cooling are displayed.

SPLT

DBND :

: 50%

10%

SPLT

DBND :

: 50%

-10%

Intersection point of heating

10-62

SPLT SV value SPLT SV value

DBND

[Display PID of heating /cooling]

Display which PID is used.

SPLT SV value

DBND

Intersection point of cooling

Display item Display string

Using the PID Heating HEAT *

Using the PID Cooling COOL *

1

1

Text color

Normal : No alarm color

Executing : Black *

1

Normal : No alarm color

Executing : Black *

1

Background color

Normal : Background color

Executing : Red *

1

Normal : Background color

Executing : Light Blue *

1

*1: It can be switched on Faceplate Display Pattern Setting ( Section 9.13).

10-62

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT



*1

NORMAL TAG STOP






Mode SV operation MV_HT/MV_CL operation


COMPUTER SV

Disable Disable

POINT


OVERRIDE.

Section 10.3.2) is

I/O mode can be changed only when the control mode ( Section 10.3.3) is MANUAL.




(


10-63 10-63

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

10.6 Status Tag Faceplate

Status tag is a tag used to monitor and control ON/OFF status.

The tag types in the status tag and reference sections are as follows.

Tag type Reference

NREV, REV, MVAL1, MVAL2

TIMER1, TIMER2, COUNT1, COUNT2

Section 10.6.1

Section 10.6.2

PB Section 10.6.3

The memory configurations of tag data generally used in status tag are as follows.


Offset

+ 0

+ 1

+ 2

+ 3

+ 4

+ 5

+ 6

+ 7

+ 8

*2

+ 9

+ 10

FUNC

MODE

MDIH

ALM

INH

ALML

CTNO

CTFN

FPNO

DOM

DIM

Tag data item

Tag function code

Control mode

Disable mode change mode and auto tuning

Description

A code represents tag type (System area *

1

)

Valid/invalid of each selection item of control mode

Valid/invalid of each selection item of I/O mode, control

Reference

Section 10.4

Section 10.3.3

Section 10.3.2

Section 10.3.3

Section 7.7.5

Alarm The Occur/Recovery status of each alarm

Disable alarm detection The Valid/Invalid of each alarm

Alarm level

Lockout tag No.

Lockout tag function

Display name pattern

The level of each alarm (Major/Minor alarm)

0: No lockout tag, 1 to 32: lockout tag No in display.

(System area *

1

)

The authority of using lockout tag (system area *

1

)

Display name pattern No. (1 to 50)

Monitor output buffer

Monitor input buffer

Section 7.3

Section 7.3

Section 7.3

Section 9.16

Section 10.2

Section 9.13

The information downloaded from personal computer to

CPU module such as valid/invalid setting in each selection item of I/O mode.

Section 10.3.2

Section 10.6.1

Section 10.6.2

Section 10.6.3

The information uploaded from CPU module to personal computer such as Executing/Unexecuted. (System area *

1

)

Section 10.6.1

Section 10.6.2

Section 10.6.3

Section 7.4.1

+ 11 to +18 (The tag types are different according to contents.)

+ 19

*2

FPNO1 Display name pattern 1

+ 20

*2

+ 21

*2

+ 22

*2

+ 23

*2

FPNO2

FPNO3

FPNO4

FPNO5

Display name pattern 2




Display name pattern No. (1 to 10,000)

Section 9.13


*2: +8 is only for tags other than PB tag, and +19 to +23 are only for PB tag.

POINT

In setting MDIH (disable mode change), the inhibited mode on the faceplate which displays tag data cannot be selected.

In setting INH (disable alarm detection), the inhibited alarm related to the tag data cannot occur.

DOM (Monitor output buffer) can be loaded from tag data access control

( Appendix 5.1).

Please do not load it from user program.

10-64 10-64

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

10.6.1 NREV, REV, MVAL1, MVAL2

PURPOSE

Open/Close/Start/Forward Run/Reverse Run status of motor and motor valve of status tag are displayed and operated in the faceplate of motor irreversible control

(NREV), motor reversible (REV), ON/OFF control (MVAL1, MVAL2).


1) I/O mode change

3) Status operation

10-65

2) Control mode

change

<In NREV> <In REV> <In MVAL1> <In MVAL2>


No. Item

1)

2)

I/O mode change

Control mode change

Description



Using Open/Close/Start/FWD Run/

REV Run status button to operate device.

Reference

Section 10.3.2

Section 10.3.3

Section 10.3.13

10-65

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

Status button

Start/Stop

FWD Run/REV Run/

Stop

Open/Close

Description

Start or stop the run of motor

Start or stop the forward or reverse run of motor

Open or close motor valve

Status display

Semiopen

Remote/Local

Trip

Time-out

Description

Light in set color in semi open status

Light in set color in remote and local status

Light in alarm color in device trip status due to overloading

Light in alarm color when device time–out is exceeded



OVERRIDE

NORMAL

*1

SIMULATION





Enable/disable status operations in different modes are as following table.

MANUAL Enable

AUTO Disable

POINT


MANUAL.

Section 10.3.3) is


If the setting of MDIH (disable change mode) is performed in the memory item


10-66 10-66

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

10.6.2 TIMER1, TIMER2, COUNT1, COUNT2

PURPOSE

Timer/Count value of status tag is displayed and operated in the faceplate of timer

(TIMER1, TIMER2), counter (COUNT1, COUNT2).


1)

PV value display


4) Count/Timer

operation


(Pre-complete & complete display)


No. Item

1)

2) 3)

4)

PV value display

Count value setting

Count/Timer operation

Description

Display PV value

Display and set count value

Perform Run/Stop operation of Count/Timer

Reference

Section 10.3.7

Section 10.3.10

Section 10.3.12

10-67 10-67

10 FACEPLATE


RUN state

("RUN" button displayed in green)

MELSOFT

STOP status

("STOP" button displayed in green)

RESET process count value 0

The RUN status with a click on "RESET/START" button is the same as the status of performing "RUN" after a click on "START/RESET" button.

The two status of RUN, STOP can be changed in the faceplate of status tag (TIMER1,

TIMER2, COUNT1, COUNT2).

The button corresponding to current status is displayed in green color.

Count value is reset to low limit when clicking "Reset" button.

Count value itself can be reset in RUN status.

<Button operation examples>

1. Click RUN button when STOP button is green.

2. Count value starts to count-up when RUN button changes to green.

3. Click STOP button when RUN button is green.

4. The count stops when STOP button changes to green.

5. Click RESET/START button when STOP button is green.

6. RUN button changes to green after count value is reset, count value starts to count-up.

7. Click RESET button when RUN button is green.

8. Count value is reset, RUN button keeps green, and count-up starts from the initial status.

10-68 10-68

10 FACEPLATE

10.6.3 PB

MELSOFT

PURPOSE

The reset button and radio button are displayed and operated, and the status of the process etc. is displayed in the faceplate of push button operation (PB).


2) Command button operation

1) Control mode

change


No. Item

1)

2)

Control mode change

Description

Display and set control mode

Reference

Section 10.3.3

Command button operation Operate the device with the command button. Section 10.3.14

10-69 10-69

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT



Enable/disable command button operations in different modes are as following table.

MANUAL Enable

AUTO Disable

POINT

(

The following show the restrictions for making the setting in the memory item

Section 10.6) of tag data.

If the setting of MDIH (disable mode change) is made, disabled modes cannot be selected.

If the setting of FPINH (disable display) is made, relevant buttons cannot be displayed.

If the setting of BTNINH (disable button control) is made, relevant buttons cannot be operated.

10-70 10-70

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

10.7 Alarm Tag Faceplate

Alarm tag is a tag that indicates displays alarm occurrence.

The tag type in the alarm tag and reference section are show in the following table.

ALM

Tag type Reference

Section 10.7.1

The memory structure of alarm tag is as follows.


Offset

+ 0

+ 1

+ 2

+ 4 to

+ 11

FUNC

ALM

ALML

ALM1NO to

ALM8NO

Tag data item

Tag function code

Alarm

Alarm level

Description

A code represents tag type(System area *

1

The occur/recovery status of alarm 1 to 8 (System area *

1

Alarm 1 to 8 level (Major/Minor alarm)

Alarm 1 Name No. to

Alarm 8 Name No.

The number to specify displayed string at alarm occurrence

(1 to 10000)


POINT

(

Set display string corresponding to each alarm (1 to 8) by alarm setting

Section 9.9).

Reference

Section 7.3

Section 9.9

Offset

+ 0

+ 1

+ 2

+ 3

+ 4

+ 5

FUNC

ALM_W1

ALM_W2

ALM_W3

ALM_W4

Tag data item

Tag function code

Alarm 1 to 16

Alarm 17 to 32

Alarm 33 to 48

Alarm 49 to 64

Description

A code represents tag type(System area *

1


1

)


1

)


1

)


ALML_W1 Alarm 1 to 16 level Alarm 1 to 16 level (Major/Minor alarm)

1

)

Reference

Section 7.3

+ 6

+ 7

+ 8

+ 9 to

+ 72

ALML_W2

ALML_W3

ALML_W4

ALM1NO to

ALM64NO

Alarm 17 to 32 level Alarm 17 to 32 level (Major/Minor alarm)



Alarm 1 Name No. to

Alarm 64 Name No.

+ 73 to

+ 80

ALMG1NO to

ALMG8NO

Alarm group 1 name

No. to Alarm group8 name No.

The number to specify displayed string at alarm occurrence

(1 to 10000)

The number to specify displayed group name at alarm occurrence (1 to 10000)

Section 7.3

Section 9.9

----


POINT

Set display string corresponding to each alarm (1 to 64) and each alarm group name by alarm setting ( Section 9.9).

10-71 10-71

10 FACEPLATE

10.7.1 ALM

MELSOFT

PURPOSE

Occurrence status of alarm is displayed in the faceplate of alarm tag for 8 points.


1) Alarm display


No. Item



Display occurred alarm.

Maximum display a string of 12 characters set by alarm setting ( Section 9.9).

Occurring: Black

Recovered:

No alarm color


Recovered:

Background color

10-72 10-72

10 FACEPLATE

10.7.2 ALM_64PT

MELSOFT

PURPOSE

Occurrence status of alarm is displayed in the faceplate of alarm tag for 64 points.


1) Alarm group name display

2) Alarm display


No. Item


1)

Alarm group name display

STR

Description

Display alarm group name.


White Black

Display occurred alarm.

Display the alarm separated in each alarm group. The alarms are displayed in ascending order from upper left in alarm group.

The alarm content is displayed not with alarm name, but with alarm number

(example: for ALM1, ‘1’). If the tag data item (ALM1NO to ALM64NO) of the corresponding alarm name No. is ‘0’, it will be blank.

Occurring: Black

Recovered:

No alarm color


Recovered:

Background color

10-73 10-73

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

10.8 Message Tag Faceplate

Message tag is a tag that displays occurred event.

The tag types of message tag and reference chapters are as follows.

MSG

Tag type Reference

Section 10.8.1

The memory structure of message tag are as follows.


Offset

+ 0

+ 1

+ 2

+ 4 to

+ 11

FUNC

MSG

MSGCHK

MSG1NO to

MSG8NO

Tag data item

Tag function code

Message

Description


1

)

The occurred/recovered status of event 1 to 8

(System area *

1

)

Reference

Section 10.4

Section 7.4

Message confirm check The confirmation check status of event 1 to 8 (Yes/No) Section 7.4

Message 1 Name No. to

Message 8 Name No.

The number to specify displayed string at event occurrence (1 to 10000)

Section 9.10


POINT

(

Set display string corresponding to each event (1 to 8) by event setting

Section 9.10).

10-74 10-74

10 FACEPLATE

MELSOFT

Offset

+ 0 FUNC

+ 1

+ 2

+ 3

+ 4

MSG_W1

MSG_W2

MSG_W3

MSG_W4

Tag data item

Tag function code

Message 1 to 16

Message 17 to 32

Message 33 to 48

Message 49 to 64

Description


1

)


(System area *

1

)


(System area *

1

)


(System area *

1

)


(System area *

1

)

Reference

Section 10.4

Section 7.4

+ 5

+ 6

+ 7

+ 8

MSGCHK_W1

Message confirm check

1 to 16

MSGCHK_W2


17 to 32

MSGCHK_W3


33 to 48

MSGCHK_W4


49 to 64

+ 9 to

+ 72

MSG1NO to

MSG64NO

+ 73 to MSGG1NO to

+ 80 MSGG8NO

Message 1 Name No. to

Message 64 Name No.

Message group 1 Name

No. to Message group 8

Name No.

The confirmation check status of event 1 to 16 (Yes/No)




The number to specify displayed string at event occurrence (1 to 10000)

The number to specify displayed group name at event occurrence (1 to 10000)


Section 7.4

Section 9.10

----

POINT

Set display string corresponding to each event (1 to 64) and each message group name by event setting ( Section 9.10).

10-75 10-75

10 FACEPLATE

10.8.1 MSG

MELSOFT

PURPOSE

Occurrence status of event is displayed in the faceplate of message tag for 8 points.


1)

Message display


Operation


Display occurred event.

Maximum display a string of 12 characters set by event setting ( Section 9.10).

Occurring: Black

Occurring: Green

Recovered:

No alarm color

Recovered:

Background color

10-76 10-76

10 FACEPLATE

10.8.2 MSG_64PT

MELSOFT

PURPOSE

Occurrence status of event is displayed in the faceplate of message tag for 64 points.


1) Message group name display

2) Message display


Operation

Description

1)

Message group name display

STR


Display event group name. White Black

Display occurred event.

Display the message separated in each message group. The messages are displayed in ascending order from upper left in message group.

The message content is displayed not with message name, but with message number

(example: for MSG1, ‘1’).

If the tag data item (MSG1NO to

MSG64NO) of the corresponding message name No. is ‘0’, it will be blank.

Occurring: Black

Recovered:

No alarm color

Occurring: Green

Recovered:

Background color

10-77 10-77

11 MONITORING WITH USER-CREATED SCREEN

MELSOFT


The Monitor tool has the interaction function for utilizing the applications created in GT

SoftGOT1000 or Microsoft

R

Visual Basic

R as the graphic screen.

(1) Utilizing GT SoftGOT

GT Designer2 or GT Designer3 enables to easily create the graphic screen. It also enables to utilize edit data of the GOT for field monitoring.

(2) Utilizing Microsoft

R

Visual Basic

R

The MonCtrl command and ActiveX control which controls the Monitor tool enable to create a graphic screen application with great flexibility.

11.1 Utilizing GT SoftGOT

GT SoftGOT can call the PX Developer monitor tool function.

GT SoftGOT can be started by specifying a base screen with PX Developer Monitor tool. The security level in accordance with the user authority can be specified when starting GT SoftGOT.

11

Make the "PX Developer Function

Call Setting" to the touch switch.

<GT Designer3>

11-1 11-1


MELSOFT

11

GT SoftGOT base screen

A graphic screen that is displayed full-screen on the desktop.

Monitor toolbar

Switches the GT SoftGOT base screen.

Faceplate screen

Monitors or operates tags and performs tuning.

GT SoftGOT touch switch

Pops up each screen for Monitor tool.

< Monitor tool and GT SoftGOT>

POINT

For compatible software package versions, refer to Section 2.2.

For using method of GT SoftGOT, GT Designer2 and GT Designer3, refer to the following manuals.


• GT SoftGOT1000 Version 3 Operating Manual for GT Works3


• GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

• GT Designer3 Version 1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

• GT Designer3 Version 1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

• GT Designer2 Version 2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series)

11-2 11-2


MELSOFT

11.1.1 Setting procedure to use the interaction function between the Monitor tool and

GT SoftGOT

The following flowchart shows the setting procedure to use the Monitor tool and interaction function in GT SoftGOT.

Start the setting.

(1) Make the setting in the Monitor tool for interaction with

GT SoftGOT.

(2) Edit the screen with GT Designer2 or GT Designer3

(Make PX Developer Function Call Setting to the touch switch).

(3) Set the security with GT Designer2 or GT Designer3

(4) Using GT SoftGOT, read the project data created on GT Designer2 or GT Designer3.

(5) Make setting for interaction using GT SoftGOT.

End

11-3 11-3


MELSOFT

(1) Making the setting in the Monitor tool for interacting with GT

SoftGOT

Make the following settings in the Monitor tool.

1) Setting the monitor target project ( Section 9.4)

2) Setting the user-created

(

Specify the module number of GT SoftGOT to be started to the argument

Section 9.11).

3) Setting the control panel ( Section 9.7)

Set the control panel to display it on GT SoftGOT.

4) Setting the trend graph ( Section 9.8)

Set the trend graph to display it from GT SoftGOT.

POINT

To set Ethernet on the Transfer Setup screen of Monitor Target Project Setting, specify TCP as the protocol.

(Since UDP is used for GT SoftGOT, avoid communications contention.)

11-4 11-4

11-5


MELSOFT

(2) Editing with GT Designer2 or GT Designer3 (Making PX Developer

Function Call Setting to the touch switch)

•

Positioning the base screen

Edit a screen for monitoring.

When displaying GT SoftGOT in full screen mode, make the margin by the following areas.

Screen resolution (width)

[pixel]

Less than 1280

1280 or more

Display area for the Monitor tool

(vertical length from the top of the screen) [pixel]

86

102

The monitor toolbar is displayed here.

11-5

11-6


MELSOFT

• Setting the touch switch

The following shows the method for the setting to start the faceplate with the touch switch.

1) Double-click the touch switch.

11-6


MELSOFT

2) Select "PX Developer Function Call" item in Switch Action, and click the

"Browse…" button.

3) Register the function to be called with "PX Developer Function Call Setting" dialog box for specifying it.

11-7 11-7


MELSOFT

(3) Setting the security with GT Designer2 or GT Designer3

The following shows the setting method for security level authentication with GT

Designer3.

For details of setting method with GT Designer2, refer to "GT Designer2 Version

2 Screen Design Manual".

1) Set the following on the Environmental Setting screen displayed with selecting

[Security…] under [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] on the menu.

Authentication Method : Password *

1

Security Level Device : desired device

Security Level Password : no setting *

2

*1: "Level" for GT Designer3 (GOT2000)

*2: When executing security interaction between PX Developer and GT SoftGOT, the security level of GT SoftGOT is changed to that of the corresponding user authority of the monitor tool. Therefore, do not set a password to avoid the security level change with GT SoftGOT.

11-8 11-8


MELSOFT

2) Set the security level (0 to 15) that is required to display or input on the screen properties or advanced setting of objects.

3) Select "PX Developer Function Call" from "Switch Action" displayed by double-clicking special function switch, and click the "Browse…" button.

11-9 11-9


MELSOFT

4) Register "Change Mode" on the "PX Developer Function Call Setting" dialog box being displayed.

(4) Using GT SoftGOT, read the project data created on GT Designer2 or GT Designer3.

(5) Making setting for interaction using GT SoftGOT.

1) Setting necessary items

The following table shows the required setting items for interaction with GT

SoftGOT.

Display dialog when closing GT SoftGOT1000

(2000).

Item Description

Display dialog when starting GT SoftGOT1000

(2000), specified with the module that has been activated.

Has to be unchecked.

The dialog box is not displayed at base screen switching by unchecking this item.

Has to be unchecked.

A time-out error when the monitor tool setting screen is displayed can be avoided by unchecking this item.

11-10 11-10


MELSOFT

Item Description

Startup in Online Mode

Has to be checked.

A monitor starts immediately after GT SoftGOT start-up by checking this item.

2) Setting optional items

The following table shows the optional setting items for interaction with GT

SoftGOT.

Item Description Remarks

Full Screen Mode

Back Screen Mode

Authentication

*1

Displays GT SoftGOT in full screen mode.

Always displays GT SoftGOT to the backmost.

Select a password.

Also selecting Back Screen Mode is recommended.

----

The authentication "Security Level" of

GT Designer2 and the authentic method "Password" of GT Designer3 are the same function, and both perform with the authentic method

"Password" of GTSoftGOT1000.

*1: GT SoftGOT1000 only.

11-11 11-11


MELSOFT

11.1.2 Monitoring procedure using the interaction function between the Monitor tool and

GT SoftGOT

The following flowchart shows the monitoring procedure using the interaction function between the PX Developer monitor tool and GT SoftGOT.

Start monitoring.

(1) Start the PX Developer Monitor tool and

GT SoftGOT.

(2) Call the monitor tool functions from

GT SoftGOT.

(3) Switch the base screen on GT SoftGOT from the monitor tool.

(4) Change the security level of GT SoftGOT when changing the mode from the monitor tool.

(5) Change the monitor tool mode from GT

SoftGOT.

Terminate monitoring?

Yes

(6) Exit the monitor tool and GT SoftGOT.

No

End

(1) Starting the PX Developer Monitor tool and GT SoftGOT

( Section 7.5)

1) Starting the Monitor tool

Start the Monitor tool from the Start menu.

2) Starting GT SoftGOT

Start GT SoftGOT with the user-created screen display button.

Click the user-created screen display button.

11-12 11-12


MELSOFT

(2) Calling the monitor tool function from GT SoftGOT

Click the touch switch to which "PX Developer Function Call" has been set to call the monitor tool function.

POINT

• A display position of the Monitor tool to be called can be adjusted as needed

(The position can be changed with PX Developer Function Call Setting).

11-13 11-13


MELSOFT

(3) Switching the base screen of GT SoftGOT from the Monitor tool

Clicking the user-created screen display button switches the base screen of GT SoftGOT to that of the specified number.

11-14

(4) Changing mode from the Monitor tool

When changing a mode of the monitor tool, the security level of GT SoftGOT is changed to that of corresponding user authority of PX Developer.

(5) Changing mode of the Monitor tool from GT SoftGOT

Display the "Change Mode" dialog box from a touch switch of PX Developer

Function Call, and input a user name and a password to change a mode.

For executing security interaction between the monitor tool and GT SoftGOT, change the user authority with the Change Mode function.

Note that changing the security level by password authentication of GT SoftGOT or changing security level device value cannot change a mode of the monitor tool.

(6) Exiting the Monitor tool and GT SoftGOT

Clicking the Exit button on the Monitor tool exits the Monitor tool and GT

SoftGOT started with the user-created screen display button on the Monitor tool.

Click the Exit button.

11-14


MELSOFT

11.2 Utilizing Microsoft

R

Visual Basic

R

Application

When using Microsoft

R

, MonCtrl command ( Appendix 5.2) and

ActiveX control (tag data access control and faceplate control) which externally control the Monitor tool allow to create graphic screen applications with great flexibility.

Visual Basic

R

Tag data acquisition/ setting

Can obtain and set a tag data item value.

Faceplate display

Can display a pop-up faceplate.

Can embed a faceplate on the screen of external application.

Calls each function of the Monitor tool. Monitor tool calling

Application created with Microsoft Visual Basic

ActiveX control

(tag data access control)

Appendix 5.1.1

ActiveX control

(faceplate control)

MonCtrl command

Appendix 5.1.2

Appendix 5.2

Tag data display Tag data change

Data acquisition

PX Developer

Requesting data acquisition

Requesting data setting

ActiveX control

Monitor tool window display

Display request Window display

MonCtrl command

11-15

Monitor tool

POINT

Further, the interaction function with the following SCADA software is available in

PX Developer.

• Wonderware InTouch Version 10.0

• JoyWatcherSuite Version 6.0

For details, refer to the following manuals.

• PX Developer Operating Manual (InTouch Interaction)

• PX Developer Operating Manual (JoyWatcherSuite Interaction)

Note that the operations are not guaranteed when using the mixture of the SCADA software other than mentioned above and ActiveX control provided by PX

Developer.

Check the system before the operations.

11-15


MELSOFT

11.2.1 Using procedure for ActiveX control

The operation steps in using tag data access control and faceplate control in Visual

Basic

R are as follows.

For detailed operation methods, refer to manuals and help of Visual Basic

R

.

(1) Setting method with Visual Basic

R

6.0

1. Click [Project] [Components...] on the menu.

(To the next page)

2. Click the <<Insertable Objects>> tab and select "MITSUBISHI

Faceplate Control" and

"MITSUBISHI Tag Access Control".


11-16 11-16



MELSOFT

4. "MITSUBISHI Tag Access Control" and "MITSUBISHI Faceplate

Control" are added to the tool box.

5. Deploy "MITSUBISHI Tag Access

Control" and "MITSUBISHI

Faceplate Control" as the usual command buttons on the form of the user-created screen.

6. Display the control property dialog box and specify tag name

(TagName).

Other programs related to screen display such as color and character display are executed in the case of


7. Create the exe format application that are created by compiling, which is displayed on user-created screen.

8. Start monitor tool and register the above application to user-created screen setting ( Section 9.11).

Display user-created screen.

11-17 11-17


MELSOFT

(2) Setting method with Visual Basic

R

.NET

1. Click [Tools] [Add/Remove Toolbox

Items...] on the menu.

*1

*1: The menu name differs depending on Visual

Basic R version being used. The menu names for versions are as follows.

Visual Basic R

2002

Visual Basic R

2003

.NET

.NET

Visual Studio 2005/

2008/2010

Visual Basic R

Customize Toolbox

Add/Remove Toolbox Items...

Choose Toolbox Items...

2. Click the <<COM Components>> tab and select "FBDQFP Control" and "FBDQTDA

Control".


(To the next page)

11-18 11-18

11-19



MELSOFT

4. "MITSUBISHI Tag Access Control" and "MITSUBISHI Faceplate

Control" are added to the tool box.

5. Deploy "MITSUBISHI Tag Access

Control" and "MITSUBISHI

Faceplate Control" as the usual command buttons on the form of the user-created screen.

6. Display the control property dialog box and specify tag name

(TagName).

Other programs related to screen display such as color and character display are executed in the case of


7. Create the exe format application that are created by compiling, which is displayed on user-created screen.

8. Start monitor tool and register the above application to user-created screen setting ( Section 9.11).

Display user-created screen.

11-19


MELSOFT

POINT

Please refer to contents in CD-ROM\SampleVB for sample data.

If a project created with a Visual Basic

R

6.0 is used in a Visual Basic the project must be upgraded for a Visual Basic

R

R

.NET,

.NET according to the "Visual

Basic Upgrade Wizard" that is opened and displayed in a Visual Basic

R

.NET.

Note that as for "tag data access control" offered by a monitor tool, the following corrections may be required after upgrading.

Property

Item

Case that the corrections are necessary

When acquiring or setting the Item property value, the following notation appears and the conversion is unsuccessful in upgrading, therefore a compile error occurs.

TagAccess1!PV

TagAccess1 ("PV")

BackColor property value of tag data access control remains default (&H8000000F) and turns black (&H00000000) after upgrading.

Correction method

Refer to Appendix

5.1.1 [1] (2) and correct the sentence structure for a Visual

Basic R .NET.

BackColor

Correct the

BackColor property to the default.

Note that if the Visual Basic

R project or SCADA application is edited and saved after uninstalling PX Developer, the original setting contents (Tag name etc.) of Active X (faceplate control, tag data access control) will be deleted when PX Developer is reinstalled

For details of ActiveX control, refer to Appendix 5.1.

Precautions for using Visual Studio 2010 Visual Basic

R

For a project where .NET Framework Version 4 of Visual Basic

R

project is used, building a project causes 2 alarm errors of BC40059 when a tag access control is set on a form of Visual Basic

R

.

This alarm is not occurred by such as application operation.

Method for avoiding occurrence of BC40059 alarm:

1) Select "Show All Files" from Solution Explorer.

2) Select "FBDQTDALib", "stdole" from the items of "References" on the displayed tree, and select "Properties" from the menu displayed by rightclicking.

3) Change "Embed Interop Types" from "True" to "False" on the displayed

Properties, and build.

11-20 11-20


MELSOFT

POINT

Using Visual Studio 2005 Visual Basic

R

Setting solution platform of Visual Basic

R

or later in 64-bit OS project to "x86" is required.

Method for setting solution platform of Visual Basic

R project to "x86":

1) Select [Configuration Manager] *

1 on the [Build] menu.

2) Select [<New…>] from the list box of [Platform] on the displayed

"Configuration Manager" dialog box.

3) Select "x86" from the list box of [New Platform] on the displayed "New

Project Platform" dialog box, and click the "OK" button.

4) Click the "Close" button on the "Configuration Manager" dialog box.

*1: When the [Configuration Manager] menu is not displayed, display the menu by the following operation.

1) Select [Options] on the [Tools] menu.

2) Select [General] under [Projects and Solutions] on a tree of displayed dialog box, check [Show advanced build configurations], and click the "OK" button.

The sample program of Visual Basic

R

is stored on the product (\SampleVB folder). Following are the sample programs corresponding to versions.

Visual Basic

Visual Basic

Visual Basic

R

R

R

6.0 VB6.0

.NET 2002

.NET 2003

VB.NET




R

R

R

VB2005

11-21 11-21

12 TROUBLE OCCURRENCE

MELSOFT

12


12.1 Troubleshooting

This section explains the possible troubles caused by monitor tool execution, the troubleshooting methods and reference section.

The monitor tool cannot be started

The monitor tool cannot be exited

The password is forgotten

Buttons do not appear on the monitor toolbar

The corresponding screen does not appear when a button is clicked on the monitor toolbar

The values are updated slowly in the monitor tool display

The faceplate does not appear in the control panel

GX Developer Version 7.20W or later has not been installed when using

PX Developer Version 1.04E or earlier.

Install the GX Developer and start the monitor tool again.

Insufficient memory.

Terminate other applications, and start the monitor tool again.

The operation for exiting the monitor tool cannot be executed by a user without the authority.

Ask a user who has the authority of operation for exiting the monitor tool to change the mode, and exit the monitor tool.



Ask the authorized personnel to register the password in the user setting screen again.

Section 5.1

-

Chapter 4

-

Section 9.3

If the user name and password for the registered engineer-authority user have been forgotten and the operation cannot be performed, set the

"product ID" in the "User Name" and "Password".

The mode can be changed using the first engineer-authority user registered in the user setting.

(The product ID is given in the "License certificate" or "Software registration card" packed with the product. Replace delimiters in the product ID with "-".)

The incorrect mode has been selected.

Change the mode into the correct one.

The number of displayed monitor screens has exceeded the maximum.

Close unnecessary screens and click the button again.

A setting screen is being displayed.

Close the screen and click the button again.



The FBD program may be too many or too large.

Set "Communicates with peripherals after program execution" in Program

Execution Setting of the Programming tool.

The displayed target has not been set. Set the target.

The PLC connection target settings are wrong.

Use the monitor tool to set the correct PLC connection target.

The communication with the monitor target cannot be done.

Check the communication status on the alarm list screen and PLC communication status screen.

The monitor target project and the CPU module that monitors it are different in the PLC type.

Check the PLC type and PLC connection target on the monitor target project setting screen.

Section 4.7

Section 9.3

Section 6.3.1

Section 6.4.2

Section 6.3.1

Section 9.1.1

-

Appendix 1.10

Programming tool*

1

Section 9.18.2

Section 9.4

Section 7.3

Section 8.5

Section 9.4

*1: Indicates the PX Developer Operating Manual (Programming Tool).

12-1 12-1


MELSOFT

The occurred event and alarm are not displayed

Or

The occurred event and alarm are not immediately displayed

In the case of PLC direct connection (RS-232, USB), CC-Link, Simulator,

GOT transparent, the event notification and alarm notification will not be performed, as the event notification function is not available.

The character string of the event or alarm has not been defined.

Set the character string of the event or alarm.

The PLC connection target settings are wrong.

Use the monitor tool to set the correct PLC connection target.

The communication with the monitor target cannot be done.

Check the communication status on the alarm list screen and PLC communication status screen.

The event notification target (event notification target within a CPU module) settings made by the programming tool are wrong.

Use the programming tool to set the correct event notification target.

Also, carry out the following check and setting operations relevant to event notification.

(Ethernet connection)

• Use GX application to check the "open setting" of network parameter and set the IP address and port number of the communication target for broadcasting.

• Use GX application to check the port number of communication target set in "open setting" of network parameter. Then, set the same value as the port number of communication target to the "Event Notification

UDP Port No.(HEX)" in the option setting of monitor tool.

(CC-Link IE Controller Network, MELSECNET/10(H) connection)

Set the same value to the network No. and station No./group No. for the following :

The personal computer of event notification target set in the event notification settings within the project parameter settings of the programming tool, and the CC-Link IE Controller Network board and

MELSECNET/10(H) board of the personal computer that is executing the monitor tool.

Due to the security enhancement function (Windows R firewall) loaded to

Microsoft R Windows R XP Service Pack2, event notification from the PLC

CPU in Ethernet connection is blocked.

Add the Monitor tool to the Exceptions setting of Windows R Firewall.

Appendix 1.2.1

Section 9.18.4 to

Section 9.18.5

Section 9.4

Section 7.3

Section 8.5

Appendix 1.2.2

Programming tool*

1

Appendix 1.2.2

The error message box of

"Failed in creating new window" is displayed

The error message box on the user-created screen is displayed



Refer to the error list.

The current value of tag data item cannot be changed from tag monitor

The error message dialog box of "Communication status is abnormal" during tag data write, etc. is displayed

The operation for changing the tag data items cannot be executed by a user without the authority.

Ask a user who has the authority of operation for changing the tag data items to change the mode, and change the current value.

Confirm that the communication cable has been correctly connected.

Check the PLC connection target set in the monitor target project setting.

Double-click the corresponding alarm item in the alarm list to display the

"System Alarm Details" dialog box.

Take the corrective action according the displayed error.


-

Appendix 5.1.1[4]

Appendix 5.1.2[2]

Chapter 4

Section 2.1.3

Section 7.3

Section 9.4

12

12-2 12-2


MELSOFT

The error message dialog box of "The Project ID

Code of the Monitor Target

Project is different from that in the PLC due to the following causes:" is displayed

The monitor target project set with the monitor tool and that within CPU module are different.

Reload the monitor target project.

Also when the download to PLC is performed with the programming tool, reload the monitor target project.

Reinstalling the tool initializes the user settings

Installing the monitor tool (Version 1.00A) initializes (i.e., makes it admin settings only) the user settings (user name, password, authorization).

Make the settings in the user setting screen again.

Assignment information database file of Version

1.01B or earlier cannot be set as the monitor target project.

This happens because the assignment information database file is the old version.

Convert the assignment information database file by switching to the monitor mode in the Programming tool of Version 1.02C or later.


Section 9.4

Programming tool*

1

Section 4.7

Section 9.3

Section 9.4

Appendix 8.2

Programming tool*

1

12-3 12-3


MELSOFT

The following flowcharts show the recovery procedures in case of server failure.

Non-redundant server system Redundant server system

The server fails.

The server fails.

Use a client personal computer as a server personal computer?

NO

YES

(

On one client personal computer, change its monitor tool execution type to Server and quit the monitor tool.

Section 9.5)

Mount a network card and install its driver on the personal computer which has been changed to Server.

Configure the same network settings as the failed server.

Set up a new server.

*1

Copy the monitoring environment to the server.

*2

Start the monitor tool on the new server.

On the server, change its monitor tool execution type to Server and quit the monitor tool.

( Section 9.5)

Copy the assignment information database file of the monitor target project to the personal computer which has been changed to Server.

Start the monitor tool on the personal computer which has been changed to Server.

Set the path to the copied assignment information database file in the monitor target project setting and set the transfer setup.

Confirm and change the settings on the server.

*3

Start the monitor tool on the server personal computer.

Set up a new server.

*1

Start the monitor tool on the new server.

Which server fails?

Primary server

On the primary server, change its monitor tool execution type to Primary Server and quit the monitor tool.

At this time, check

"Acquiring setting data from

Secondary Server next start time".

( Section 9.5)

Start the monitor tool on the primary server.

The setting data are copied from the secondary server at the startup of the primary server.

*4

Confirm and change the settings on the primary server.

*3

Secondary server

On the secondary server, change its monitor tool execution type to Secondary Server and quit the monitor tool.

( Section 9.5)

Start the monitor tool on the secondary server.

The setting data are copied from the primary server at the startup of the secondary server.

*5

Confirm and change the settings on the secondary server.

*3

Switch the connection to the primary server on all clients.

Connect all clients to the new server.

Completed

Completed

*1: Mount a network card and install its driver on the personal computer. Configure the same network settings as the failed server.

Install PX Developer, and as necessary, install user-created applications and sound files for alarm/event.

*2: Copy the backup copy of the setting data.

Files need to be backed up in advance are all files in the Prjdata folder and 'M_SET.mdb' and 'M_USER.mdb' in the

Setdata folder in the installation destination folder.

As necessary, make a backup copy of the assignment information database file of the monitor target project and copy it.

For the method for copying the setting data, refer to Section 9.1.4.

*3: Confirm that the path of each folder/file is appropriate for the environment of the new server.

*4: Confirm that the secondary server is running.

*5: Confirm that the primary server is running.

12-4 12-4


MELSOFT

12.2 Convenience Function

This section illustrates the functions that can be used in accordance with the "Such things desired to do" requirements of the monitor tool. It also indicates the reference chapters and sections about these functions.

Things desired to do Methods Reference

Use the "Print Screen" function to print a displayed screen

To make a file according to the monitoring result.

Use the "Print" function to print the result.

Use the "Export to CSV File" function and use the EXCEL

(Software to edit an output file.)

Section 8.2

Section 7.3.6

Section 7.4.5

Section 7.2.6

Section 7.3.7

Section 7.4.6

Section 7.7.7

To make a file according to the setting contents

Use the "Export to CSV File" function and use the EXCEL

Software to edit an output file.

Use the "Edit" function (Cut/Paste) to directly paste the contents of a grid into the Editor Software or the EXCEL Software.

Section 9.1.3

Section 9.1.1

To make a backup of the setting contents

Save the set contents to the folder: Melsec\Fbdq\set data

Change the sizes of the screens freely.

Section 2.3

Section 9.1.3

Section 6.2.2

Section 6.2.5

To zoom out a screen display

Always keep the window in maximum size if it is a Single-

Window mode monitoring screen

Section 9.18.14

Change the display scale of a Trend Graph.

Section 7.2.5

Section 7.7.5

To change the display colors

To find occurrence of warnings/events immediately

Set the display color of the faceplate freely.

Set the display colors of the title bar of the dialog box and the screen according to the color settings of the personal computer.

Display the latest alarm/event content specified in the monitor toolbar.

Section 9.18.9

Section 6.3.1

To display tag data in a special monitor screen

To use the entire computer screen without displaying the monitor toolbar

Make the beep sound when an alarm/event occurs.

Use "ActiveX control" to produce user-created screens by yourself

Hide the monitor toolbar to start.

Additionally, control application programs can be used for external control to change the monitor toolbar between Display and Hide.

Section 9.18.10

Section 8.1

Chapter 11

Section 7.5

Appendix 3.1

Appendix 3.2

To start the monitor tool by the mode that matches the authority of the specified user

Not to operate the "Exit" button but use the software control executed externally to close the monitor tool

To output the trend, alarm and event data to CSV files automatically

The mode that matches the authority of the specified user can start the monitor tool.

Exit the monitor tool via the external control application programs.

With the automatic CSV file export function, the trend, alarm and event data can be saved in CSV files automatically as histories.

Appendix 3.3

Appendix 5.1

Section 8.7

12-5 12-5


MEMO

12-6

MELSOFT

12-6

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

B

APPENDIX

Appendix 1 Communication of the Monitor Tool

For the monitor tool, multiple communication methods can be combined for monitoring so as to maintain the communication performance when the amount of the monitored targets increase. Here each communication method is targets respectively.

Appendix 1.1 Communication types

APP

Communications between the monitor tool and CPU module can be generally classified as follows.

Communication type

Event notification*

1

(alarm notification, event notification)

Description

The CPU module initiatively notifies the monitor tool after it detects changes of the alarm/event signal within each tag data.

Purpose

Monitor the occurrence of alarms and events.

Current value collection

High-speed current value collection *

1

Poll current value with given priorities and execute collection within each about 1second interval.

Refresh current value at a high frequency in control panel displaying, collection of tuning trend or trend graph displaying (only when the sampling period is set to 1 second).

Low-speed current value collection *

1

Collect current value of the tag data within each about 10-second interval

Collect data if the current value has been entered in trend setting (except 1-second sampling period).

High-speed tag data collection *

1

Tag data collection

Low-speed tag data collection *

1

Read all tags

Tag data write

Process data collection

Read one-shot tag

High-speed process data collection

Low-speed process data collection

Return check

PLC status check

Poll the displayed tag data with given priority and execute collection with each about 1second interval.

Read all tag data in turn registered in the monitor tool.

Batch read all tag data registered in the monitor tool.

Collect tag data displayed in the pop-up window at high frequency.

Periodically acquire tag data expect the current value.

Read all specified tag data at once.

Write the value of a tag data item

Full tag read during start-up or alteration of monitored target items so as to correctly display the faceplate.

Read one-shot tag when writing tag data so as to read reply data.

Execute write operation when altering the value of a tag data in the faceplate etc.

Collect monitor variables registered in monitor tool with the interval of 1 second or less.

Collect monitor variables registered in monitor tool with the interval of 10 seconds or less.

Check if the communication with CPU module is in normal operation

Collect data if the monitor variable has been entered in trend setting (1-second sampling period).

Collect data if the monitor variable has been entered in trend setting (except 1-second sampling period).

Check for CPU module error occurrence.

Execute this check when a communication open error occurs.

Whether a CPU module error has occurred or not can be checked on the monitor tool.

Check whether the monitor target project set with the monitor tool matches the project in the CPU module.

Monitors the Redundant CPU operation mode and system status when monitoring the

Redundant CPU.

Read the PLC CPU type name from the PLC

CPU of the system specified in "Transfer

Setup" to compare with the PLC type of the assignment information database file.

If there is a mismatch between the monitor target project and the project in the CPU module, write of illegal tag data is prevented.

Record the history of the operation mode change and control system switching in the Redundant CPU.

Issue the system alarm when the PLC type is incorrect.

*1: The current value and maximum value of collection period can be confirmed by PLC the communication status screen ( Section 8.5).

B-1 B-1

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

POINT

In order to communicate via the network, the network parameters of the GX application should be set. For details of the method of network parameter setting, refer to the following manuals:



Event notification adopts the communication among channels function over the CC-Link IE Controller Network and MELSECNET/10(H), and the broadcasting communication function over the Ethernet. In order to execute event notification, the path for change notification should be set in the event notification of the project parameter setting of the programming tool.

For details of the method of project parameter setting, refer to "PX Developer

Operating Manual (Programming Tool)".

APP

B-2 B-2

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

According to the display status of the screen, the communication methods adopted in the monitor tool can be categorized as following.

During start-up

Change of monitored target project

Normally

Control panel in display

Pop-up window in display

Tuning trend in execution

With screen display

Without screen display

Being using tag to access control collection values

Being collecting trend data in the trend graph

Occurrence of alarm or events

Setting lockout tag

Change of tag data

Occurrence of communication open error

Read the all tag

Read the all tag

Low-speed tag data collection, PLC status check *

1

Low-speed tag data collection, high-speed current value collection

High-speed tag data collection

High-speed tag data collection, high-speed current value collection



Low-speed tag data collection, low-speed current value collection, high-speed current value collection

Event notification

Event notification

Tag data write, one-shot tag read

Return check

*1: The PLC status check is executed at intervals set to "PLC status check interval(s)" in the option setting (general). ( Section 9.17)

At the time of start-up of the monitor tool or the alteration of the monitored target project, updating of tag data is fundamentally executed with low-speed tag data collection after batch reading all registered tag data.

Collection of current value or high-speed tag data collection will be executed in the case of faceplate display etc which requires as real time updating of latest values as possible.

The diagram shown below presents the time sequence of each communication method.

During startup (read the all tag)

During the change of the monitored object item (read the all tag)

Normally (low-speed tag data collection)

Control panel in display (high-speed current value collection)

Lockout tag (event notification)

The change of tag data (tag data write, one-shot tag read)

A pop-up window in display (high-speed tag data collection)

Lockout tag (event notification)

The change of tag data (tag data write, one-shot tag read)

Tuning trend in execution (high-speed current value collection)

B-3

Tag access control collection values in use(high-speed current value collection)

The collecting trends are being execated in the trend graph (low-speed current value collection, high-speed current value collection)

The occurrence of alarm or events (event notification)

The occurrence of communication open errors (returm check)

End

At the time of displaying control panel on changing tag data (A), tag data write is in execution at the high-speed current value collection, besides the normal low-speed tag data collection.

B-3

APPENDIX

Appendix 1.2 Event notification

MELSOFT

Monitor alarms and events with reduced network traffic.

The CPU module only emits a notice when an alarm or event occurs.

The CC-Link IE Controller Network and MELSECNET/10(H) apply the communication among channels function, but the Ethernet applies the broadcasting communication function.

Communication direction

Communication object

CPU module monitor tool

Altered tag data (96 words per tag)

The items for detecting change of tag data are shown in the table as below.

PVAL

MONI

Tag type

PID, 2PID, NREV, REV,

MVAL1, MVAL2, PGS2,

HTCL

2PIDH, SWM, PFC_SF,

PFC_SS, PFC_INT,

PIDP, SPI, IPD, BPI, R,

ONF2, ONF3, MWM,

SEL, MOUT, PGS

BC, PSUM, TIMER1,

TIMER2, COUNT1,

COUNT2

PB

ALM

ALM_64PT

MSG

MSG_64PT

MODE

ALM

CTNO

DIM

MODE

ALM

ALM2

CTNO

DIM

Tag data item

Mode

Alarm

Lookout tag No.


Mode

Alarm

Alarm 2

Lookout tag No.


Memo

Control each selection item of the mode to be valid/invalid

Occurrence/recovery status of each alarm

0: no lockout tags, 1 to 32: display lockout tag No.

Occurrence/recovery status of each error, in-execution/non-execution status of a operation






MODE

ALM

CTNO

ALM

CTNO

ALM

CTNO

DIM

Mode

Alarm

Lookout tag No.

Alarm

Lookout tag No.

Alarm

Lookout tag No.






0: no lockout tags, 1 to 32: displayed lockout tag No.




Control each selection item of the mode to be valid/invalid MODE

CTNO

DIM

Mode

Lookout tag No.


ALM Alarm

ALM_W1 Alarm 1 to 16

ALM_W2 Alarm 17 to 32

ALM_W3

ALM_W4

MSG

Alarm 33 to 48

Alarm 49 to 64

Message



Occurrence/recovery status of alarm 1 to 8





Occurrence/recovery status of event 1 to 8

MSG_W1 Message 1 to 16 Occurrence/recovery status of event 1 to16

MSG_W2 Message 17 to 32 Occurrence/recovery status of event 17 to 32



B-4 B-4

APPENDIX

Appendix 1.2.1 System configuration that can receive event notification

MELSOFT

(1) In case that transfer setup of a monitor tool is set to "CC IE Cont",

"MNET/10" or "MNET/H"

Station No. 1

Personal computer


MELSECNET/10(H)

(network No.1)

Station No. 2

Process CPU or Redundant CPU

Event notification from the PLC can be received via up to eight of relaying network systems, each of which is configured by the CC-Link IE Controller

Network, MELSECNET/10 (H) or Ethernet.

Station No. 1

Personal computer


MELSECNET/10(H)

(network No.1)

Station No. 2

Station No. 1

Relaying network is CC-Link IE Controller Network, MELSECNET/10(H) or Ethernet

(network No.2 to 7)

Station No. 2

In CC-Link IE Controller Network and

MELSECNET/10(H) connection, event notification is receivable up to the eighth network system.

Station No. 1


MELSECNET/10(H)

(network No.8)

Station No. 2


B-5 B-5

APPENDIX

B-6

MELSOFT

(2) In case that transfer setup of a monitor tool is set to "Ethernet"

In Ethernet connection, event notification is receivable from a PLC CPU in the same segment.

Station No.1

Personal computer

Ethernet

Station No.2

In Ethernet connection, event notification is receivable in the same segment.


(3) In case that performing a monitor tool in a PC CPU

When the transfer setup of a monitor tool is set to "Ethernet", event notification is receivable from a PLC CPU in the same segment.

Main base

QCPU PC CPU module

Ethernet

Station No.1

Ethernet

Station No.2

In Ethernet connection, event notification is receivable in the same segment.


POINT

The event notification does not work when using serial interface (RS-232),

USB, CC-Link, Simulator, GOT transparent, to directly connect with the CPU module.

To use the event notification function with the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, the driver (SW1DNC-MNETG-B) version 1.08J or later which supports the event notification function is required.

The event notification does not work when the monitor tool is connected to the

Redundant CPU via the Ethernet module mounted to a redundant type extension base unit.

The event notification does not work normally when using the project parameter setting of the programming tool to specify the setting of No Event

Notification.

Even the event notification does not work normally; the occurrence of alarms and events is also notified via low-speed tag data collection ( Appendix

1.4). During the low-speed tag data collection, the time consumed from the occurrence of alarms or events till the notice to the monitor tool is directly proportional to the numbers of registered tags.

Make sure to use PX Developer Version 1.06G or later monitor tool to monitor the CPU module that includes the projects compiled using the PX Developer

Version 1.06G or later programming tool.

The PX Developer Version 1.04E or earlier monitor tool cannot receive the event notification sent by the project compiled using the PX Developer Version

1.06G or later programming tool.

The Redundant CPU system receives the event notification when the control/standby system status or operation mode is changed.

When the incorrect PLC Type system alarm has occurred, the received event notification data is abandoned.

B-6

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

POINT

When connecting monitor tool to Redundant CPU using Ethernet connection with Windows Vista

R

or later, in case Ethernet modules of both system A and system B are on the same segment, the normal operation will be guaranteed because event notification can be received.

< Ethernet module of system A and system B are not on the same segment>

< Ethernet module of system A and system B are on the same segment>

Switching hub

System A

Switching hub

System B

Switching hub

System A System B

B-7 B-7

APPENDIX

Appendix 1.2.2 Settings for executing event notification

MELSOFT

(1) On the occasion of CC-Link IE Controller Network,

MELSECNET/10(H) connection

To execute notification by using the communication function among channels.

Set a channel number for sender side of CPU module on the programming tool.

POINT

Do not use the following channel number when using MELSEC data link library with user-created application.

• Channel used by the host station No. : 1

(fixed channel number for the monitor tool)

• Target station used by the host station No. : channel number set with the programming tool

For details of channel number, refer to "MELSEC Data Link Library Reference

Manual".

(2) On the occasion of Ethernet connection

The Ethernet uses the Broadcasting function to execute notification when it is connected.

The following settings are required in the network parameter setting of the GX application.

[Motion Setting]

[Communication Data Code Setting]: Binary code communication

[Initial timing]: Always waiting for OPEN (Communication possible at

STOP time)

[IP Address Setting]: (Assigned IP addresses)

[Transmission Frame Setting]: Ethernet (V2.0)

[Open Setting]

[Protocol]: UDP

[Fixed Buffer]: Send

[Fixed Buffer Communication]: No procedure

[Pairing Open]: No pairs

[Existence confirmation]: No pairs

[Local station port No.]: (The No. not used by other connection.)

[Destination IP Address]: Broadcasting ([IP Address] 255.255.255.255)

[Dest. Port No.]: (the same as [Event Notification UDP Port No.(HEX)] open setting of the monitor tool

*1

)

[Router Relay Parameter]

[Router relay function] : Use

[Sub-net mask pattern] : (Consult the network administrator before setting

*2

)

[Default router IP address]: (Consult the network administrator before setting

*3

)

*1: Set a port number not to overlap on well-known port numbers and port numbers used by software other than the monitor tool.

*2: Set the same setting configuration with the receiver side personal computer.

*3: If there is no router, set the IP address that is not used in the system for the address of router.

B-8 B-8

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

The open settings of the network parameter of the GX application have to be specified when using TCP to connect a single CPU module with multiple

MELSOFT products (monitor tool, programming tool and GX application). (Not particularly necessary when using UDP to connect)

When the number of connected personal computers increases, the following settings in the network parameter should be added.

[Open Setting]

[Protocol]: TCP

[Open System]: MELSOFT connection

For details of the method of network parameter setting, refer to the following manuals:



*1

*1

Set the settings in the connection number which is set in the <<Event

Notification>> tab of the project parameter setting in the programming tool.

<Network parameter settings of GX Works2 (open setting)>

*1: In monitor tool, the input format of "Event Notification UDP Port No.(HEX)" in Option

Setting (Alarm/Event) is “HEX”. The input format of GX application port number can be selected from “DEC” and “HEX”, but setting the same hexadecimal value as set to monitor tool is required.

B-9 B-9

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

POINT

When the setting for blocking the access to the monitor tool via a network is made with the security enhancement function (Windows R firewall) loaded to

Microsoft R Windows R XP or later the monitor tool cannot receive event notification from the PLC CPU in Ethernet connection.

In this case, allow communication with monitor tool via with either of the following methods.

1) Allow communication with monitor tool on the "Windows Security Alert" screen displayed when connecting to Ethernet for the first time.

<Windows R XP Service Pack2, Windows Vista R >

Allow communication with the

"Unblock" button

<Windows R 7 or later>

Check the network and allow communication with the "Allow access" button.

B-10 B-10

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

POINT

2) Allow exceptional program communication with monitor tool on the Windows Firewall window

*1

.

<Windows R XP Service Pack2, Windows Vista R

Add monitor tool (C\:Melsec\fbdq\FBDQMon.exe

*2

>

) to the exceptional program. Note even when the monitor tool is already added as the exceptional program, selecting the checkbox is required to enable the reception.

(Before adding an exceptional program)

B-11

(After adding an exceptional program)

Add an exceptional program with the "Add Program…" button.

The exceptional program has been added.

R

XP, the Windows

R

Firewall setting screen is displayed by selecting [Start]

[Control Panel] [Security Center] [Windows Firewall].

For Windows Vista

R

, it is displayed by selecting [Start] [Control Panel] [Security]

[Allow a program through Windows Firewall]

To change Windows Firewall setting, logon as a user in administrators group, having authority for controlling all operations of personal computer.

*2: When an installation destination path is changed during PX Developer installation,

FBDQMon.exe will be in the path after change.

B-11

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

POINT

<Windows R 7 or later>

Add monitor tool (C\:Melsec\fbdq\FBDQMon.exe*

2

) to a program or feature where the

Windows Firewall setting*

1 is allowed.

Note even when the monitor tool is already added to a program or feature, check the checkbox to validate and check the network.

(Before adding allowed programs and features)

(After adding allowed programs and features)

Add allowed programs and features with the "Allow another program..." button which is validated with the "Change settings" button.

"Monitor tool" is added.

R

Firewall setting screen is displayed by selecting [Start] [Control Panel]

[Security] [Allow a program through Windows Firewall]

(

When using Windows

R

8, right-click the left bottom corner of the screen, and select [Control

Panel].

)

To change Windows Firewall setting, logon as a user in administrators group, having authority for controlling all operations of personal computer.

*2: When an installation destination path is changed during PX Developer installation,

FBDQMon.exe will be in the path after change.

B-12 B-12

APPENDIX

Appendix 1.3 Collecting current value data

MELSOFT

For such data as PV, SV and MV among the tag data items that need to be updated at high frequency, they are generally collected as current value data in the buffer area at the PLC side.

The current value data collection reads the current value data from the buffer area. It can be categorized into two types as high-speed current value collection and lowspeed current value collection according to the length of read interval.


Communication target

CPU module Monitor tool

Current value data

The tag data items of collected current values are listed in the table shown below.

PID, 2PID, PIDP, SPI, IPD, BPI, R,

ONF2, ONF3

2PIDH, SWM, PFC_SF, PFC_SS,

PFC_INT

PGS

PGS2

MWM

SEL

BC

PVAL

HTCL

Tag type

SVC

SV

TYP

STC

T

SV0C

SLNO

SV1

SV2

NREV, REV, MVAL1, MVAL2, PB DIM

TIMER1, TIMER2, COUNT1,

COUNT2

PSV

DIM

Tag data item

Setting value (Current)

Setting value (Target)

Motion type

Executing step No.

Time in the step

Start point (Current)

Selection No.

Setting value1

Setting value2


Setting value (Preset)


VOUT Command signal output status

SVC Setting value (Current)

SV Setting value (Target)

DIM Monitor input buffer

MV_HT Manipulated variable of heating

MV_CL Manipulated variable of cooling

Remark

Motion type when control mode is AUT

Selected signal (0/1)

The 1st preset value when SV is reached

The 2nd preset value when SV is reached

The preset value when SV is reached

B-13 B-13

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

POINT

The current values and maximum values collected by this communication (highspeed current value collection, low-speed current value collection) can be confirmed on the PLC communication status screen ( Section 8.5).

When the collection period is long, refer to Appendix 1.10 and take corrective action.

(1) High-speed current value collection

It is the current value collection for use of control panel displaying, trend collecting of trend graph (only when the sampling period is 1 second) and tuning trend collection.

Read for the purpose of high frequency refreshing the current value monitoring display on the control panel.

Read the current value data of tag at about 1-second intervals.

POINT

Based on the number of tag data items that is being monitored and CPU module scanning execution conditions, the collection period may be longer than 1 second.

(2) Low-speed current value collection

Read the variance if the current value data has been entered to trend pen.

(However, read if the sampling period is set to 1 second, read via high-speed current value collection.)

Read the current value data at about 10-second intervals.

B-14 B-14

APPENDIX

Appendix 1.4 Collecting tag data

MELSOFT

The tag data collection reads tag data. It can be categorized into 4 types according to different read interval and targets.

(1) High-speed tag data collection

Read the tag data displayed in the pop-up window at about 1-second intervals.




Tag data (96 words per tag) in display

(2) Low-speed tag data collection

Read 1 tag data every 5 seconds from all the tags registered in the monitor tool.

If the amount of tags reaches the maximum, it will take 7680 (16X480) seconds to accomplish reading all the tags in one loop.




All the tag data (one time every 5 seconds, maximum 5 tags)

Read all the tag data of the registered tags in the monitor tool during start-up or change of object items.




All the tag data

(4) One-shot tag read

After Tag data are written, read the object tag data so as to confirm the written result.




Write-in tag data (96 words per tag)

POINT

The current values and maximum values collected by this communication (highspeed tag data collection, low-speed tag data collection) can be confirmed on the

PLC communication status screen ( Section 8.5).


B-15 B-15

APPENDIX

Appendix 1.5 Writing tag data

MELSOFT

The write tag data writes tag data. It can be categorized into 2 types according to different tag data write-in targets.

Directly write WORD, DWORD, INT, DINT, REAL type tag data items without any conversion of the setting values.



Monitor tool CPU module

Changed tag data items

Write the setting value in bit unit to BOOL type tag data items.



Monitoring tool

CPU module

Changed tag data items

(3) Bit write in radio button format

As for the tag data items in the radio button format where the other buttons turn

OFF when one of them is selected for ON, perform bit write that will turn ON the selected bit item and turn OFF the other bit items.



Monitor tool

CPU module

The changed tag data items

POINT

If the communication is abnormal, tag data cannot be written. (The

"Communication status is abnormal" error message dialog box is displayed.)

Check the connection status of the communication cable, the PLC connection target or other to return the communication condition to normal, and then write the tag data again.

In the initial setting, tag data can be written if the monitor target project set with the monitor tool differs from the project in the CPU module (project ID code inconsistency).

However, if tag data is written when the project ID code inconsistency, the system may malfunction. Change the "Write tag data (even if the PC's and

PLC's project ID codes are different)" setting of the option setting (general) to

"Disable" when operation has been started after completion of system adjustment.

If tag data cannot be written when the project ID code inconsistency, reload the monitor target project or perform PLC download after execution of compile with the programming tool, and then write the tag data again.

REMARK

If tag data write operation is executed, the event will be displayed in the operation history. ( Section 7.4.1)

B-16 B-16

APPENDIX

Appendix 1.6 Collecting process data

MELSOFT

Read the process data of CPU module registered in the monitor variable settings.

It can be categorized into two types as high-speed process data collection and lowspeed process data collection according to the length of read interval.




Process data

POINT

The current values and maximum values collected by this communication (highspeed process data collection, low-speed process data collection) can be confirmed on the PLC communication status screen ( Section 8.5).


(1) High-speed process data collection

When a monitor variable is registered to trend pen whose sampling period in the trend setting is 1 second, read the current value of monitor variable with the interval of approximately 1 second.

POINT

The collection period may be longer than 1 second due to the number of monitoring process data and scan execution of CPU module.

(2) Low-speed process data collection

When a monitor variable is registered to trend pen whose sampling period in the trend setting is 10 seconds or more, read the current value of monitor variable with the interval of approximately 10 seconds.

B-17 B-17

APPENDIX

Appendix 1.7 Communication error

MELSOFT

The errors of communication processing (open, read*

1

, write, close) occur in each connection destination, and are displayed on the alarm screen. The recover of the communication processing error is completed when the communication processing

(open, read*

1

, write, close) is succeeded after a return check ( Appendix 1.8) is completed successfully.

When the open processing succeeds, recover another communication error.

*1: When read processing from monitor tool to CPU module fails, retry (reopen + read) the number of times being set on the "Transfer Setup" dialog box.

When the read processing succeeds during the retry, the communication read error will not occur.

When the read processing fails for the number of retry times, the communication read error and communication open error will occur.

POINT

Operation differences in read error between different versions

<Version 1.23Z or earlier monitor tool>

When a read error occurred, the system alarm of communication read error occurs without retry.

If the communication error is not recovered, the system alarm of communication open error will occur.

<Version 1.28E or later monitor tool>

The number of retry times when a read error occurs can be set.

(When the number of retry times is set to 0)

When a read error occurs, communication read error will occur without retry.

(When the number of retry times is set to 1 or larger)

When succeeded in reading by retry, the system alarm of communication read error will not occur. If failed in reading by retry, a communication read error and communication open error will occur.

The relation between the number of retry times and the system alarm which occurs in communication error is as follows.

Monitor tool version Number of reading retried Occurrence of system alarm

Communication reading error occurs

1.02C to 1.23Z

1. 28E or later

0 time (default)

1 to 5 times

Communication open error occurs



*1

Communication open error occurs

*1: Alarm will not occur when succeeded by retry.

B-18 B-18

APPENDIX

Appendix 1.8 Return check

MELSOFT

PX Developer checks if the communication has returned to its normal operation when a communication open error, communication reading error, or communication writing error occurs because of malfunctions of CPU module etc.

This function is "Return check".

Return check will be executed repeatedly before normal communication is confirmed.

After the return check is normally finished and normal communication is confirmed, a return processing operation will be executed for system reconnection.

The interval (*1) of the return check and the timeout (*2) of the return check itself can be arbitrarily varied by unit of seconds. Please use the option setting (general) to set

[Return Check Interval (s)] and [Return Check Time-out (s)] ( Section 9.17).

Please use [Other stations] in the "Transfer Setup" dialog box of the monitored target project setting to set [Check at communication time] of the timeout of the recovery processing (*3) operation.

B-19

The diagram shown below illustrates the situation when the normal communication has been confirmed during the 2nd return check.

Communication error occurs

Return check (*2)

The check is normally completed

Restart communication

Return check interval (*1)

The communication with other communication targets

(Interruption)

Return process (*3)

(Interruption)

POINT

When Return check is working for the system including Redundant CPUs, reconnection is performed for each route at the return check intervals (seconds), if a communication error has occurred in the following routes.

 The route specified in the Transfer Setup.

 The route to connect to system A.

 The route to connect to system B.

Maximum of 3 times the connection route timeout (seconds) is required to perform

Return check when all of the above connection routes have been disconnected

REMARK

If frequent accesses to the CPU module, which has communication errors, are executed before the return of normal communication, the communication with other communication targets will be delayed. In order to avoid this situation, please adjust [Return Check Interval (s)] and [Return Check Time-out (s)] at high speed.

During [Return Check Interval (s)] ], the connected targets, which have no communication errors, can communicate normally.

B-19

APPENDIX

Appendix 1.9 PLC status check

MELSOFT

The monitor tool checks for error occurrence in the CPU module and checks the projects.

The PLC status check indicates the following checks.

Check for CPU module stop error

Check for CPU module operation continue error

Check of project ID code

CPU model name check

Redundant CPU operation mode check

Redundant CPU control/standby system status check

Redundant CPU system A/B identification flag check

(1) Check details and error display positions in PLC status check

This section explains the check details and error display positions in PLC status check.

(a) Check for CPU module stop error

[Check details]

Whether a stop error has occurred in the CPU module or not is checked.

If a stop error has occurred in the CPU module, the "PLC CPU stopping error" alarm occurs on the monitor tool.

[Error display position]

The alarm is displayed on the monitor toolbar and in the alarm list.

(b) Check for CPU module operation continue error

[Check details]

Whether an operation continue error has occurred in the CPU module or not is checked.

If an operation continue error has occurred in the CPU module, the "PLC

CPU error" alarm occurs on the monitor tool.



B-20 B-20

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

(c) Check of project ID code

[Check details]

Whether the monitor target project set with the monitor tool matches the project in the CPU module or not is checked.

When the monitor target project does not match the project in the CPU module, illegal tag data write is prevented.

If the project ID codes do not match, the "project ID code inconsistency" alarm occurs on the monitor tool.

Monitor target project

(Assignment information database*)

Consistency check!

Project in

CPU module

B-21

*: The assignment information database indicates the "*.mdb" file created at execution of compile with the programming tool.

This file contains the assignment information of variables that stores tag data, etc. and the device information of the CPU module.



(d) CPU model name check

[Check details]

Read the PLC CPU type name from the PLC CPU of the system specified in "Transfer Setup" to compare with the PLC type of the assignment information database file.

When PLC type is incorrect, issue the "Incorrect PLC Type" alarm.

[Error display area]

The alarm is displayed in the monitor toolbar and alarm list.

B-21

APPENDIX

B-22

MELSOFT

(e) Redundant CPU operation mode check

[Check details]

Check if the operation mode has been changed or not.

[Display area]

The operation mode is displayed in the operation mode area of the communication status screen.

[Event record]

Record the operation mode switching event when the operation mode is changed.

(f) Redundant CPU control/standby system status check

[Check details]

Check the control/standby system status.

When an element of inconsistency is found in the control/standby system status, "Redundant system: Control/Standby System Status Error" for each system.

[Display area]

The control/standby system status is displayed in the Communication

Status system A/B area.



[Event record]

Record the control system switching event when the standby system is switched to control system.

(g) Redundant CPU system A/B identification flag check

[Check details]

When an element of inconsistency is found in the system A/B identification flag, issue the redundant system A/B identification error for each system.



POINT

If the "PLC CPU stopping error" or "PLC CPU error" occurs, download of data to the

CPU module can be performed.

When the error is caused due to the setting of illegal tag data, set the tag data again.

The error definition can be checked by the FBD program diagnostics of the programming tool.

REMARK

For details of monitor toolbar, refer to Section 6.3.

For details of alarm list, refer to Section 7.3.

B-22

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

(2) PLC status check timing

The PLC status check is performed at any of the following timings.

When the monitor tool starts

When the monitor target project is reloaded

At the "PLC status check interval (s)" set in the option setting (general)

(3) Recovery procedure and timing for alarm that has occurred due to

PLC status check

Use the following procedure to clear the alarm that has occurred due to PLC status check.

[CPU module stop error or CPU module operation continue error]

1) On the alarm list screen, double-click the line of the alarm that has occurred due to PLC status check.

The system alarm details dialog box is displayed.

( Section 7.3)

2) The error code is displayed in the system alarm details dialog box.

Click "PLC error" within the Help menu on the monitor toolbar to display the error code list. ( Section 6.3.1 (5))

Observe the "corrective action" in the error code list.

[Project ID code inconsistency error]

Reload the monitor target project ( Section 9.4).

Observe this instruction as well when PLC download is performed with the programming tool.

[When the PLC type is inconsistent]

The assignment information database file and the PLC CPU connected to the file are different in the PLC type. Correct the PLC connection target settings.

[When the redundant system control/standby status error has occurred]

The possible cause is that the tracking cable has not been connected or broken when the CPU is started.

Check the tracking cable.

[When the redundant system A/B identification error has occurred]

1) Check the Redundant CPU settings of network parameter.

2) The possible cause is that the tracking cable has not been connected or broken when the CPU is started.

Check the tracking cable.

To recover from the alarm that has occurred due to PLC status check, resolve the cause of the alarm.

B-23 B-23

APPENDIX

Appendix 1.10 Measures for delayed collection periods

MELSOFT

Following table describes the reasons and measures for delayed high-speed current value collection, high-speed process data collection and high-speeding tag data collection.

Reasons

The scan time of CPU module is long

Execute monitoring when multiple CPU module is connected with a single OPS

Execute monitoring when multiple CPU module is connected with multiple OPS

Network is crowded

Displaying control panel screen or pop-up faceplate in OPS

Different project tags exist in a same group of control panel screen

The range of assigned device of tag that executes trend collection becomes wide

The range of assigned device of monitor variable that executes trend collection becomes wider

Measures (execute operations (a) to (c))

(a) Please make the program start frequency of scan lower according to different period types of program.

(b) Divide this program into several small programs including necessary operation. Set some of them as "Scan" type and some of them as "normal" or "low" types also set their phase.

(c) Set "Communicates with peripherals after program execution" in program execution setting of the programming tool.

(For details, refer to the Operating Manual (Programming Tool).)

(a) Please reduce the number of CPU modules being connected and monitored with one OPS.

(a) Please configure the server/client monitoring system.

(b) Please reduce the collection of trend data and tuning trend from

CPU module.

(a) When Ethernet is applied, please reduce other kinds of OPS communication.

(b) When MELSECNET/10 or MELSECNET/H is applied, please reduce the number of station and total link station.

(c) Please set the communication speed at 25 Mbps.

(a) Please close the control panel screen or pop-up faceplate if it is not necessary in each OPS.

(a) Divide the control panel setting in several groups for each project.

(a) Please narrow the range of assigned device of tag that executes trend collection. Assignment device of tag is displayed in tag FB declaration window of programming tool.

For example, if No.1, No.2 and No.100 (line number) tags in tag

FB declaration window of programming tool are monitored, please move No.100 tag to No.3 in tag FB declaration window.

*1

(a) Gather the monitor variables which execute trend collection and assign to the devices.

The assigned devices of monitor variable can be checked by the methods shown below.

When a monitor variable is global variable, the Global Variable

Declaration window in programming tool

For global variable in which assigned device is not specified cannot be checked.

When a monitor variable is device direct specification, the

Monitor variable setting screen

For example, assign 4 monitor variables to the close addresses for each monitor variable such as D0, D1, D1000, D1001, do not assign apart such as assigning to the addresses of D0, D100,

D1000, D5000.

*1

: There are limits for moving (changing) tag FB line number in the tag FB declaration window of programming tool. For details, refer to "PX Developer Operating Manual (Programming Tool)".

B-24 B-24

APPENDIX

Appendix 1.11 Communication with Redundant CPU

MELSOFT

This section explains the communication with Redundant CPU using the monitor tool.

Appendix 1.11.1 Communication route for monitoring

The monitor tool monitors the Redundant CPU in the following communication routes.

(1) The communication route specified in "Transfer Setup".

Reads/Writes the tag data in the communication route specified for the

Redundant CPU specified as the connection target.

(2) The communication route that the monitor tool uses in the system

Always monitors CPUs of both system A and B in the two communication routes for both system A and B that the monitor tool use in the system.

Appendix 1.11.2 Monitor operation when the system is switched

This section explains the operation performed when Redundant CPU system switching occurs.


Target system When the system is switched

Control system

Standby system

System A

System B

Not specified

The communication is continued according to system switching.

The communication with system A is continued.

The communication with system B is continued.

• Via a module mounted to a main base unit or in CPU direct coupled connection:

The communication with the target CPU is continued.

• Via a module mounted to the redundant type extension base unit:

The communication is continued with following system switching.

<Example>

When system switching occurs during access to the Redundant CPU with the "control system" selected as the target system, access is continued as shown below.

<CPU direct coupled connection>

PX

Developer

PX

Developer

Connected to control system via standby system

Control system Standby system Standby system Control system

B-25

Tracking cable Tracking cable

(2) Communication route used by monitor tool in system

The Redundant CPUs of System A and System B are monitored regardless of whether system switching occurred or not.

B-25

APPENDIX

Appendix 1.11.3 Monitor operation when a communication error has occurred

MELSOFT

Target system

Control system

Standby system

System A

System B

Not specified

This section explains the operation performed when a communication error occurs while the Redundant CPU is being monitored.


(a) In the backup mode or separate mode

When a communication error has occurred.

When the CPU module is connected via the MELSECNET/H module or an Ethernet module mounted to a main base unit, the communication is continued by automatically switching the connection route.

(Automatic switching of communication route is hereafter abbreviated to route switching.)

A communication error occurs without route switching being executed.*1

*1: A communication error message is displayed and monitor operation is suspended.

The monitor operation is restarted when the normal communication of monitor tool has been confirmed.

When a communication error occurs during access to the Redundant CPU with

"System B" selected as the target system, access is continued as shown below.

1) When network error occurs

PX

Developer

PX

Developer

B-26

System A System B System A

Tracking cable

2) When tracking cable error occurs

PX

Developer

PX

Developer

Tracking cable

System B

System A System B System A System B


(b) In the debug mode

A communication error occurs without route switching being executed.

(Refer to (a)*1.)

(2) Communication route used by monitor tool in system

A communication error occurs without route switching being executed. (Refer to

(a)*1.)

B-26

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

POINT

If communication cannot be made with the Redundant CPU set in the transfer setup at the first connection in the monitor of the Redundant CPU, the monitor of that

Redundant CPU is not started. The first connection indicates the following case.

 When the monitor tool is started

 When "Apply" or "Reload" button is clicked in the monitor target project setting.

In this case, restart communication after removing the communication disturbance or changing the transfer setup to the station number of the other Redundant CPU.

<Example> When the control system is set as the target system and the station number and IP address (host name) of the Ethernet module in

System A is set as the PLC side I/F on the transfer setup screen

If communication cannot be made with the Ethernet module of

System A at the first connection to the monitor tool, a communication error occurs without route switching being executed.

To start communication in this case, set the station number and IP address (host name) of the Ethernet module in System B as the PLC side I/F.

PX

Developer

PX

Developer

System B station number and IP address setting

Ethernet

Control system

(System A)

Standby system

(System B)

Control system

(System A)

Ethernet

Standby system

(System B)


B-27 B-27

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

Appendix 2 Refreshing the monitoring data in the server/client monitoring system

Appendix 2.1 Refreshing the monitoring data in a secondary server

A secondary server starts up acquiring the setting data from a primary server.

The monitoring data are collected by the secondary server itself.

The secondary server treats the setting data differently depending on the status of connection to the primary server.

The following table shows the refreshing of the setting/monitoring data.

Status of connection to the primary server

Monitoring data Data refreshing

Setting data

Tag data

Trend data

Alarm data

Event data

Acquisition

Read

Write

Data collection

Occurrence/recovery of alarm

‘Confirm’/

‘Confirm All’/

‘Delete Recovered

Alarms’ operation

The secondary server acquires the setting data and assignment information database file from the primary server when the secondary server connects to the primary server or the setting data are changed in the primary server.

The secondary server uses the setting data and assignment information database file in the secondary server.

The secondary server communicates with the PLC and reads the tag data.

The secondary server communicates with the PLC and writes the tag data.

The secondary server collects the trend data.

The secondary server monitors the occurrence/recovery of alarms and refreshes the alarm data in the secondary server.

The secondary server reflects each operation in the alarm data in the secondary server.

Occurrence of event

The secondary server monitors the occurrence of events and refreshes the event data in the secondary server.

‘Confirm’/

‘Confirm All’/

‘Delete All’ operation

The secondary server reflects each operation in the event data in the secondary server.

Trend/Alarm/Event automatic CSV file

Export/deletion The secondary server performs the automatic export and automatic deletion.

B-28 B-28

APPENDIX

Appendix 2.2 Refreshing the monitoring data in clients

MELSOFT

Monitoring data

Setting data

Tag data

Trend data

Alarm data

Event data

In the server/client monitoring system, clients acquire the monitoring data from a server periodically and display it on screens.

The refreshing period of each monitoring data is as follows.

PLC communication status data

Refreshing period

A client acquires the setting data and assignment information database file from a server when the monitor tool client starts up, when it connects to the server or when the setting data is changed in the server.

A client acquires the tag data of all tags from a server when the monitor tool client starts up, when it connects to the server or when it acquires the setting data.

After acquiring the tag data of all tags in a batch, a client acquires the tag data of the following tags once every 0.5 second.

 Tags displayed on the control panel.

 Tags displayed on the pop-up faceplate/tuning.

 Tags whose tuning trend data is currently collected.

 Tags referred from the tag access control/faceplate control.

 Tags whose data is read/written with process control tag names of PX Developer in

InTouch.

A client acquires the trend pen data of the groups concerned from a server when it displays the trend graph screen or when it switches groups.

After acquiring the trend pen data in a batch, a client acquires the trend pen data from a server depending on the sampling period of each pen.

 Trend's sampling period is one second.

Getting the trend pen data once every five seconds.

 Trend sampling period is ten or more seconds.

Getting the trend pen data once every ten seconds.

A client acquires all records of the alarm data from a server with the following timing.

 When a client starts up.

 When a client connects to a server.

 When "Confirm All" is executed in a server/client.

 When "Delete Recovered Alarms" is executed in a server/client.

 When the monitor target project setting is changed in a server.

After acquiring all records of the alarm data in a batch, a client checks the change of the alarm data in a server once a second, acquires the differential records, and refreshes the data.

A client acquires all records of the event data from a server with the following timing.

 When a client starts up.

 When a client connects to a server.

 When "Confirm All" is executed in a server/client.

 When "Delete All" is executed in a server/client.

After acquiring all records of the event data in a batch, a client checks the change of the event data in a server once a second, acquires the differential records, and refreshes the data.

A client acquires the following PLC communication status data from a server once a second.

Acquiring the PLC communication status data enables a client to display "tag data cannot be read/written" / "tag data cannot be written" status on the faceplate.

B-29 B-29

APPENDIX

Appendix 3 Monitor Tool Startup Option

MELSOFT

The monitor tool can be started with the monitor toolbar/start-up screen hidden and by the mode that matches the authority of the user.

Appendix 3.1 Starting under hiding status

When the monitor tool starts up, it can start up without displaying the monitor toolbar and the start-up screen if the following arguments are specified.

Argument Operation

/h or /H

Starts up the Monitor tool without displaying the monitor toolbar.

Example

C:\Melsec\Fbdq\FBDQMon.exe /h

/nologo or

/NOLOGO

POINT

If starting up with specifying the arguments both /h and /nologo, the monitor tool can be activated without any influence on the displayed screen.

If starting up without displaying the monitor toolbar (/h specified), the monitor tool starts up in the mode corresponding to the user name and its authority registered at the top of the user setting ( Section 9.3).

Example 1) User setting goes as follows:

1 User001

2 User002

******

****

use the Operator Mode to activate the monitor tool.

Example 2) Initialized user settings (as shown below)

Operator1

Engineer

1 Admin

2

***** Engineer

use the Engineer Mode to activate the monitor tool.

(Normally the monitor tool is activated in the lock mode, refer to "Chapter 4

MODE ADMINISTRATION")

If starting up with specifying the user *

1

(/u, /p specified) as well as the monitor toolbar non-display (/h specified), the monitor tool starts up in the mode corresponding to the authority of the specified user.

*1: Refer to Appendix 3.3.

B-30 B-30

APPENDIX

Appendix 3.2 Switching between monitor toolbar show/hide after starting

MELSOFT

The monitor toolbar can be changed between Show/Hide after start-up.

(1) Use the icon in the task tray

The monitor toolbar can be changed between show/hide via the icon in the task tray.

The operation procedure goes as follows:

1. Start up the Monitor tool.

2. Display the icon of the monitor tool in the task tray.

[Show Monitor Toolbar]

1. If the monitor toolbar is hidden, right click the icon and select [Show Monitor Toolbar] in the displayed menu.

2. Show the monitor toolbar.

[Hide Monitor Toolbar]

1. If the monitor toolbar is in show, right click the icon in the task tray and select [Hide Monitor Toolbar] in the displayed menu.

2. The monitor toolbar is hidden again.

POINT

If the monitor toolbar is displayed from hidden status after activation, it will not occupy "Desktop" area, and the other windows can be overlapped over the monitor toolbar and be displayed.

(When the monitor toolbar is switched from hidden status to displayed status after normal start-up, the toolbar is always displayed in front of other windows.

Refer to "Section 6.1 Overview of Screen Configuration")

When the setting window is in display, the monitor toolbar cannot be hidden.

(2) Use the control application

Display status of the monitor toolbar can be switched using MonCtrl command during the Monitor tool start-up.

Refer to Appendix 5.2.

B-31 B-31

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

Appendix 3.3 Starting the Monitor Tool by the Mode That Matches the Authority of the

Specified User

This section explains how to specify the user who starts the monitor tool by using arguments.

Argument Description Example

/u or /U

Specify the user name to be used at the startup of the monitor tool by the mode that matches the authority of the specified user. (The user name is case sensitive.)

Enter the user name after the argument /u and a space.

/p or /P

Specify the password to be used at the startup of the monitor tool by the mode that matches the authority of the specified user. (The password is case sensitive.)

Enter the password after the argument /p and a space.

When the password has not been specified for the user

( Section 4.6), this argument specification is not needed.

This argument is always used with the argument /u.

Refer to the example below.

[Example]

C:\Melsec\Fbdq\FBDQMon.exe /u username /p password

[Example (when space is included in user name or password)]

When a space is included in the user name or password, enclose the user name or password in " " (double quotations).

C:\Melsec\Fbdq\FBDQMon.exe /u "PX Dev" /p "mon tool"

POINT

If the user name specified with the argument has not yet registered or the password does not match the preset one, the monitor tool starts up in the lock mode.

If the user is specified (/u, /p specified) as well as the monitor toolbar is set to be hidden (/h specified), the monitor tool is started up in the mode that matches the authority of the specified user.

When starting the monitor tool in the mode that matches the authority of the specified user, do not use a "/" (slash) or "-" (hyphen) in the first character of the user name and password.

B-32 B-32

APPENDIX

Appendix 4 Operation authority for tag data items

MELSOFT

(

Operation authority for tag data items is classified as shown below.

The authority of operation for changing can be set on User Authority Setting

Section 9.2) per unit of classified tag data items.

Classification

No.

Operation authority Description

1

2

3

4

5





Simulation/ tag stop *

1

Items which are to be process instruction values/mode such as SV,

MV, and Mode

Items which are to be alarm threshold values such as PH, HH, and

SH

Items which are to be tuning parameters such as P, I, D, and GG

Items which are to be process design values such as INH, CT, and

RH

Items which are to be simulation/tag stop such as SIM and TSTP

Only a user with the authority of engineer can operate the simulation/tag stop since the control output to the system is changed.

*1: The authority of operation for changing cannot be set on User Authority Setting.

B-33 B-33

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

(1) Loop tag (when the tag type is other than PGS, PGS2, PVAL,

HTCL)

Tag data item

Classification

No.

Tag data item

Classification

No.

Tag data item

Classification

No.

FUNC

MODE

0 INH 4 RH

4 RL

Tag data item

4 ALM2

MAN 1 4 PH

AUT 1 4 PL

CAS 1 4 HH

CMV 1 4 LL

CSV 1

MANI 4

4 SH

4 SL

4 ALPHA

4 HS

AUTI 4 4 CTIM

CASI 4 4 DPL

CMVI 4

CSVI 4 4 ST

CASDRI 4 ALML 4 SLNO

TSTPI 5 4 DML

ATI 4 4 DVL

OVRI 4 4 P

SIMI 5

ALM 4 4 D

MLA 0 4 SDV

MHA 0 4 DR

DVLA 0 4 RMAX

DPNA 0 4 RMIN

2 INH2

3 ALML2

4 DSVL

3 DOM

3 SIM

3 DIM

Classification

No.

0

0

0

0

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

2

0

PLA 0 4 GG

PHA 0

LLA 0

HHA 0 CTNO

4 KM

0 TM

SEA

OOA

DMLA 0 N

SPA

0 CTFN

4 UNIT

4 PV

0 TM1

4 TM2

4 MVP

MV

SVC

SV

DV

BIAS

HS0

HS1

PV1

PV2

MH

ML

3 DIM_MVTRK

0 ALPHA2

1 BETA2

0 CTDUTY

3 AT1STEPMV

4 AT1ST

3

3

3

4

3

3

4 AT1TOUT1 3

0 AT1TOUT2 3

0 AT2HS

2 AT2MVH

2 AT2MVL

3

3

3

ATTYPE 3

*1: The largest classified number in the tag data items of BOOL types that form the tag data items of WORD type

*2: For PV whose tag type is SEL, BC, or PSUM, classification number is 0.

*3: Only when the tag type is SWM, classification number is 0.

3

5

1

5

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

B-34 B-34

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

(2) Loop tag (when the tag type is PGS, PGS2)

Tag data item

MAN

AUT

CAS

CMV

CSV

MANI

AUTI

CASI

CMVI

CSVI

TSTPI

MLA

MHA

SVLA

SVHA

SPA

Classification

No.

1 MHL

1 SVLL

1 SVHL

1 SPL

1 CTNO

4

4

Tag data item

UNIT

N

4 PTNO

4 STNO

4 PVSTART

5 MV

0 TYP(PGS2)

0 TYP_HOLD

0 TYP_RETURN

0 TYP_CYCLIC

4 TUNIT

Classification

No.

Tag data item

Classification

No.

2

2

4 WAIT

4 RH

4 RL

4 SV0

0 SV0C

0 T1 to 32

4

4

SV1 to 32

MV1 to 16

1

4

4

1

0

1

1

1

1 DOM 0

1 DOM_ADV_START 1

1 TSTP

1 NOR

5

1

0

0 DIM_WAIT_MODE 0

1

1

1

1

MLI

MHI

SVLI

SVHI

ERRI

4 STC

4 T

4 MH

4 ML

4 PV

1

1

2

2

0

*1: The largest classified number in the tag data items of BOOL types that form the tag data items of WORD type.

B-35 B-35

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

(3) Loop tag (when the tag type is PVAL)

Tag data item

MAN

AUT

CAS

CSV

MANI

AUTI

CASI

CSVI

TSTPI

OVRI

SIMI

TOA

TRIPA

DVLA

DPNA

DPPA

PLA

PHA

LLA

HHA

SEA

SPA

Classification

No.

Tag data item

1 TRIPL

1 DVLL

1 DPNL

1 DPPL

4 PHL

4 LLL

4 HHL

4 SENL

5 SPL

4 CTNO

5 CTFN

0 PV

0 VOUT

0 VOUT_OPEN

0 VOUT_CLOSE

0 SVC

0 DV

0 HS0

0 DBND

0 PH

0 PL

4 HH

Classification

No.

Tag data item

Classification

No.

0

0

4 SVHA

4 DSVLA

4 INH2

4 SVLI

4 SVHI

4 DSVLI

4 ALML2

4 SVLL

4 SVHL

4 DSVLL

0 SV

0 DSVL

4

4

1

2

4 DOM 0

1 DOM_OPEN_SET 1

0 DOM_CLOSE_SET 1

0 DOM_STOP_SET 1

0

0

4

4

4

4

4

4

0 DOM_TO_RESET 1

0 TSTP 5

0 OVR

4 SIM

1

5

4 NOR

2 DIM

2 DIM_OPEN

2 DIM_CLOSE

1

0

0

0

TOI

TRIPI

DVLI

DPNI

DPPI

PLI

PHI

LLI

HHI

SEI

ERRI

4 SH

4 SL

4 ALPHA

4 HS

4 CTIM

4 DPL

4 DVL

4 TOT

4 DOT

4 SIMT

4

2 DIM_REMOTE

2

3

2

2

2

2

2

4

1

0


B-36 B-36

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

(4) Loop tag (when the tag type is HTCL)

Tag data item

MAN

AUT

CAS

CMV

CSV

MANI

AUTI

CASI

CMVI

CSVI

TSTPI

Classification

No.

Tag data item

1 MHI_HT

1 DMLI_HT

1 MLI_CL

1 MHI_CL

1 DMLI_CL

4 ERRI

4 ALML

4 MLL_HT

4 MHL_HT

4 DMLL_HT

5 MLL_CL

MLA_HT 0 DMLL_CL

MHA_HT 0 OOL

DMLA_HT 0 HBOL

MLA_CL 0 SPL

MHA_CL 0 CTNO

DMLA_CL 0 CTFN

OOA 4 FPNO

HBOA

SPA

0 PRM_TRK

4 MV_HT

MV_CL

SV

Classification

No.

Tag data item

4 MH_CL

4 ML_CL

4 SH

4 SL

4 DML_HT

4 DML_CL

4 P_HT

4 I_HT

4 D_HT

4 P_CL

4 I_CL

4 D_CL

4 DBND

4 HS

4 SPLT

4 PRM_SEL

4 DOM

0 TSTP

0 NOR

4 DIM

3 DIM_PID_HT

1 DIM_PID_CL

1

1

Classification

No.

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

4

3

3

2

2

2

2

2

2

3

3

0

5

1

0

0

0


B-37 B-37

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

(5) Alarm tag, Message tag (ALM tag type, MSG tag type)

Tag data item

Classification

No.

FUNC 0

ALM 0

ALM1 to 8 0

MSG 0

MSG1 to 8 0

ALML 4

ALML1 to 8 4

MSGCHK 4

MSGCHK1 to 8

ALM1 to 8NO

4

4

MSG1 to 8NO 4

(6) Alarm tag, Message tag (ALM_64PT tag type, MSG_64PT tag type)

Tag data item

Classification

No.

Tag data item

Classification

No.

ALM_W1

ALM1 to 16

ALM_W2

ALM17 to 32

ALM_W3

ALM33 to 48

ALM_W4

ALM49 to 64

ALML_W1

ALML1 to 16

ALML_W2

ALML17 to 32

ALML_W3

ALML33 to 48

ALML_W4

ALML49 to 64

ALM1 to 64NO

ALMG1 to 8NO

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

4

4

MSG 1 to 16

MSG_W2

MSG 17 to 32

MSG_W3

MSG 33 to 48

MSG_W4

MSG 49 to 64

MSGCHK_W1

MSGCHK1 to 16

MSGCHK_W2

MSGCHK17 to 32

MSGCHK_W3

MSGCHK33 to 48

MSGCHK_W4

MSGCHK49 to 64

MSG1 to 64NO

MSGG1 to 8NO

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

0

0

0

4

0

0

0

0

4

B-38 B-38

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

Tag data item

FUNC

MODE

MAN

AUT

MANI 4 FPNO

AUTI 4 DOM

OVRI 4 DOM_OPEN_SET

SIMI 5 DOM_CLOSE_SET

ALM

DPPA

PLA

PHA

TOA

TRIPA

INH

DPPI

PHI

ERRI

TOI

TRIPI

ERRI

ALML

DPPL

PHL

0 DOM_HOLD_RESET

0 DOM_RESET_SET

0 DOM_RESET_START_SET

0 DOM_STOP_SET

0 DOM_TO_RESET

4 DOM_SET1 to 5

4 OVR

4 SIM

4 NOR

4 DIM

4 DIM_OPEN

4 DIM_SEMI_CLOSE

4 DIM_FWD_SET

4 DIM_RUN

4 DIM_STOP

4 DIM_HOLD

TOL

TRIPL

CTNO

CTFN

UNIT

PV

PSV

SV

SUM2

SV1

SV2

MULT

Classification

No.

0 RH

0 RL

Tag data item

1 PH

1 CTIM

4 DIM_ON1 to 5

Classification

No.

Tag data item

4 TOT

4 DOT

2 SIMT

2 FPINH

2 FPINH1 to 5

4 BTNINH

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

5

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Classification

No.

2

4

1

0

4

0

4


B-39 B-39

APPENDIX

Appendix 5 External Control of the Monitor Tool

Appendix 5.1 ActiveX control

MELSOFT

The so-called ActiveX is a kind of compound technology offering service among different software components. Because the standard method of the so-called COM

(Component Object Model) is adopted, different software can converse in the network environment no matter what kind of languages used for different softwares.

If using ActiveX, the screens managed by other software can be embedded in the pages of Microsoft

R

Word

R

, as embedded the tables created using Microsoft

R

Excel

R

.

The so-called ActiveX control is a software component that executes particular process. It itself is not an executable application program component. ActiveX control needs to be plugged-in control containers like Visual Basic

R and Web browser program. Designer can create a software with wide range of functions by combining the exiting ActiveX controls without coding all of the necessary functions.

Control the whole application program

Control vessel

ActiveX control

The application program screen

Management of some graphic screens

POINT

When creating a graphic screen application which is executed with Visual Basic

R in 64-bit Windows

R

, create as a 32-bit application since ActiveX control provided by

PX Developer is 32 bit.

B-40 B-40

APPENDIX

Appendix 5.1.1 Tag Data Access Control

MELSOFT

Tag data access control is the ActiveX control that acquires or sets tag data value.

For format such as appearance please refer to the command button control provided by Visual Basic

R

.

The tag data access control button can be placed on the created screen. Click the button to display pop-up faceplate screen ( Section 7.6) of tags. When using the tag data access control, tag data items can be specified individually regardless of the button operation, and acquire or set the value.

The tag data access control can be used as the pop-up faceplate display button or control to acquire/set tag data.

(1) When used as a display button of pop-up faceplate.

Please set the property dialog box to display faceplate at click event.

(ClickedShowFaceplate = True)

Click the tag data access control button in the screen, and the pop-up faceplate screen of the specified tag appears.

(2) Used for acquiring or setting tag data value

Set the corresponding button hidden when required.

(Visible = False).

Use the item property of tag data access control to acquire/set tag-data item value in the program.

If the acquired tag-data item value is set for display programming on other control of the screen, such as text box, the tag item value will appear in the screen.

Or, the SV value can be set on user-created screen if programming by substituting the Item property of tag data access control with input value in text box.

POINT

The faceplate cannot be displayed when the monitor tool is not started.

And some value cannot be acquired/set according to the Item property.

After the faceplate is shown, even if the application program as a start-up resource is closed, the faceplate screen cannot be closed.

The faceplate control is executed through the monitor tool, so when the monitor tool is exit, the faceplate screen is closed too.

B-41 B-41

APPENDIX

Appendix 5.1.1 [1] Custom Property

MELSOFT

Item

The custom property is an interface to the container provided by the controller.

The following is a custom property list of tag data access control.

Custom property Description

TagName

ClickedShowFaceplate

Specify the name of target tag.

Additionally, properties can be acquired and set on the user-created screen.

Specify whether to show the faceplate by click event.

(TRUE: display/FALSE: not display)

Additionally, properties can be acquired and set on the user-created screen.

Tag data item value can be acquired and set.

The <<General>> tab in the custom property dialog box can be used to set the

TagName and ClickedShowFaceplate of the custom property of TagDataAccess control.

<Property dialog box>

Advanced setting

Item Description

When this control communicates with Monitor Tool

This setting is not applied to each control. This setting is applied as a common setting in the ActiveX container application.

Default:

When this control is in communication with Monitor Tool, an ActiveX container application follows the default processing. Normally, select this option.

Only update screen:

When this control is in communication with Monitor Tool, an ActiveX container application only updates the screen. When an error occurs in the control, the error may be resolved by using with this option.

B-42 B-42

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

Following paragraphs explain the custom properties of tag access data control itself.

Specify the name of the tag as access target.

TagName property

Argument

Data type

Comment

Example

Object: specify the name of tag data access control object.

TagName: specify the name of tag as access object to String type character string.

String type

Specify the name of tag as access object.

Additionally, tag name specified by TagName property can be acquired or set in execution.

If same tag name exist in different projects, the name shall be specified in format of (project name): (tag name).

If the same tag name exist in different projects and the name is not specified in the above format, the project tag whose priority is higher is taken as the access object.

<Acquire tag name>

<Set tag name>

Val=TagDataAccess1.TagName

TagDataAccess1.TagName="LIC001" or

TagDataAccess1.TagName="Project1: : LIC001"

Syntax

Argument

Data type

Comment

Example

Acquire tag data

Set tag data

Acquire/set the value of tag data item of tag name that is specified by TagName property of tag data access control.

Item property

Visual Basic

R

6.0: object.Item("Name"),

Visual Basic

R

.NET: Acquire tag data: object.get_Item("Name"),

Set tag data: object.set_Item("Name",Value)

Object:

Name:

Value: specify the name of tag data access control object. specify the tag data item name of acquire/setting value as String type character string.

Specify the setting value to the tag data item name as a Variant type.

Variant type

Acquire/setting value of tag data item in the tag that is specified by TagName property of tag data access control.

Value of tag data item specified by argument "Name" can be acquire/set in execution.

However, if the tag data item specified by argument "Name" does not exist, error will occur.

Error object will be created when error occurs.

Debug.Print TagDataAccess1!PV or

Debug.Print TagDataAccess1("PV") or

Debug.Print

TagDataAccess1.Item("PV")

TagDataAccess1!SV = 50.0 or

TagDataAccess1("SV") = 50.0 or

TagDataAccess1.Item("SV") = 50.0

Debug.WriteLine (TagDataAccess1!PV) or

Debug.WriteLine (TagDataAccess1("PV")) or

Debug.WriteLine (TagDataAccess1.get_Item("PV"))

TagDataAccess1!SV = 50.0 or

TagDataAccess1("SV") = 50.0 or

TagDataAccess1.set_Item("SV",50.0)

B-43 B-43

APPENDIX

Argument

Data type

Comments

Example

MELSOFT

POINT

For details about the tag item of tag data that can be written and read by users’ program, refer to "PX Developer Programming Manual".

I/O mode and control mode can be changing.

For details about mode changing conditions, refer to Section 10.3.2 and

Section 10.3.3.

There are limits in changing I/O mode and control mode according to different tag types.

For details, refer to "PX Developer Programming Manual".

Tag data cannot be set in the following situations.

1) The mode is in the lock mode, or the user does not have authority of operation for changing the tag data item on User Authority Setting

( Section 9.2).

(When setting the tag data, switch to a user who has the authority of operation for changing the tag data item.)


2) Faceplate with lockout tag

(Please remove the lockout tag from the faceplate that is related to the setting tag data)

To specify whether to display show faceplate by click event.

ClickedShowFaceplate property

Object: specify the name of tag data access control object.

ClickedShowFaceplate: specify whether to display faceplate by click event.

Boolean type

Set whether to display faceplate by click event.

TRUE: Display faceplate when click event occurs.

FAULSE: Does not display faceplate when click event occurs.

Additionally, contents specified by ClickedShowFaceplate property can be acquired or set in execution.

<Acquire whether display faceplate or not>

Val=TagDataAccess1.ClickedShowFaceplate

<Set whether display faceplate or not>

TagDataAccess1.ClickedShowFaceplate=True or

TagDataAccess1.ClickedShowFaceplate=False

B-44 B-44

APPENDIX

Appendix 5.1.1 [2] Method

MELSOFT

Method is the processing available for turning to objects for execution. The methods tag data access control are displayed.

ShowFaceplate method

Pop-up faceplate displayed.

The details are as follows:

Item Description

Name ShowFaceplate

Argument

Return value

Description

Example

Object: Specifying the name of tag data access control objects.

Display the executing result with Boolean type. (True: Success/False: Error Occur)

Pop-up faceplate screen is displayed in modeless status. In the screen, the displayed tag data are specified by tag names set in the property of tag data access control.

Error objects are generated at the occurrence of error.

Dim Ret As Boolean

Ret=TagDataAccess1.ShowFaceplate

Appendix 5.1.1 [3] Event

Event is a notification process about status change such as clicking control or keyboard operation from control to container.

The following events can be used in tag data access control.

For details, refer to MSDN library through the help function of Visual Basic

R

.

Event Description

Click

KeyDown

KeyUp

When objects are pointed using mouse, the event occurs after releasing the button.

When objects are focused, the event occurs after pressing the button.

When objects are focused, the event occurs after releasing the button.

DragDrop

DragOver

GotFocus

LostFocus

Validate

The event occurs after drag-drop operation completed.

In the drag-drop operation, the event occurs when mouse pointer is dragged over the object.

The event occurs when the focus is set at the object.

The event occurs when the object looses the focus.

The event occurs before moving focus to the control set as True in CausesValidation Property.

B-45 B-45

APPENDIX

Appendix 5.1.1 [4] Error list

MELSOFT

Occurrence timing

Click button when


=True

B-46

Error detection will be executed by tag data access control in the following cases:

(1) Error objects are not created

Error message box will be listed which gives the error contents.

Message

PX Developer monitor tool not found.

The connection with PX Developer monitor tool failed.

Failed in registering a tag name to the list of tags collected at high speed.

Setting window is being displayed.


Tag Name is incorrect.

Reasons

The Setting window of monitor tool is in display.

The name set by tag name property is invalid.

Measures

Monitor tool is not started. Please start the monitor tool.

Registry data has been damaged.

Please restart monitor tool.

Please close the setting window.

Please check the tag name.


The communication with the server has failed.


The setting data has been modified in the server.


Monitor Tool is establishing a connection from this client to the server.


The tag name is incorrect.

Faceplate cannot be displayed.


(a) The content of the OPS list has been modified in the server.

(b) The server does not start.

(c) The server is breakdown.

(d) The Ethernet cable is disconnected.

(e) The Ethernet equipment such as HUB is breakdown.

Though the setting data has been modified in the server, the secondary server/client has not acquired it yet.

The request cannot be processed because the monitor tool is establishing a connection to the server.

Tag name set by TagName property is invalid.

(a) Refer to the recovery procedures in case of server failure in "Section

12.1 Troubleshooting" and recover the server.

(b) to (e)

Resolve the reasons listed in the left column, and from the help menu, execute

Swicth Server for the redundant server system or

Connect Server for the nonredundant server system.

Please execute Acquire Server

Setting Data from the help menu in the monitor tool.

Please wait until the connection to the server is completed.

Please check tag name.


A message box is displayed. Or it is in the state which cannot display a faceplate.


Please close the currently displayed

Faceplate, and try again.



Setting window of monitor tool is in display.

(a) The message box is being displayed.

(b) Waiting for the user graphic screen to be closed.

A new Faceplate cannot be displayed because the

Faceplate being displayed is in operation.

Please close the Setting window.

(a) Close the message box.

(b) After the user graphic screen has been closed, display the faceplate.

Please close the Faceplate being displayed.








(b) to (e)


Swicth Server for the redundant server system or


(To the next page)

B-46

APPENDIX

Occurrence timing

MELSOFT

Click button when


=True



Message



Reasons



Measures




The container application requires administrative privileges to perform this action.

Please close the application and run it under an account that is an administrator on this machine.

For information about how to run as an administrator, see the application’s manual or help.

Monitor Tool requires administrative privileges to perform this action.

Please close Monitor Tool and run it under an account that is an administrator on this machine.

For information about how to run as an administrator, see the following manual:

PX Developer Version 1 Operating

Manual (Monitor Tool)

Privilege level of the container application is lower than the privilege level of the monitor tool.

Privilege level of the monitor tool is lower than the privilege level of the container application.

Close the container application and set it to run as an administrator.

Close the monitor tool and set it to run as an administrator.

REMARK

Control container is Visual Basic

R and Web browser that ActiveX controls are inserted to and applied.

High-speed current value collection is a type of communication executed by monitor tool. For details, refer to "Appendix 1.3 Collecting current value data".

High-speed current value collection of tag set by TagName property is executed on tag data access control.

B-47 B-47

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

(2) Create error object

Error object will be created when error occurs. The "No." in the following table are the code numbers of the created error object.

Occurrence timing

Setting

TagName property

No. Message

1001

1002

1003

1007

1010

1011

Reasons Measures

PX Developer monitor tool not found.


Failed in registering a tag name to the list of tags collected of high speed.




Monitor tool is not started.




Please start the monitor tool.















The processing failed because of the interruption from the windows task bar.

Though the setting data has been modified in the server, the client has not acquired it yet.


The pop-up menu of user-created screen is displayed on the taskbar

R R of Microsoft

System.

Windows Operating

R

This may occur only on Microsoft

Windows NT

R

Workstation 4.0

Operating System.






For information about how to run as an administrator, see the following manual: PX

Developer Version 1 Operating Manual

(Monitor Tool)



(a) Refer to the recovery procedures in case of server failure in

"Section 12.1

Troubleshooting" and recover the server.

(b) to (e)


Swicth Server for the redundant server system or Connect

Server for the nonredundant server system.

Please execute Acquire

Server Setting Data from the help menu in the monitor tool.


Please add error processing to Visual

R

Basic program.



B-48 B-48

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

Occurrence timing

No. Message Reasons Measures

1001

1002

1003

PX Developer monitor tool not found. Monitor tool is not started.





















"Section 12.1


(b) to (e)


Swicth Server for the redundant server system or Connect




Executing

Item property

1006 *

1

1007

1008 *

2





Failed in acquiring the tag data.



The tag Item name incorrect.





The set tag data item name is invalid.

The pop-up menu of user-created screen is displayed on the taskbar

R R of Microsoft

System.

Windows Operating


R

Windows NT

R

Workstation 4.0

Operating System.


Failed in setting the tag data.



The current user does not have an authority to operate it.

Please operate it by the user who has its operation authority.


Tag Item name is incorrect.


This item cannot be set.

The user is not authorized for executing this operation.

The set tag data Item name is invalid.

Setting value of tag data item whose value is not allowed to be set.

Set invalid data type to tag data item.


The specified type is incorrect.


Alternative bit items should be set to TRUE.

*1: Occur only when tag data are acquired.

*2: Occur only when tag data are set.

Set FALSE or 0 to this item.



Please check tag data item name.

Please add error processing to Visual

Basic

R program.


Please operate it by the user who has its operation authority.

Please check the tag data item name.

Please manage to acquire the value not setting the value of set tag data item.

Set valid data type to set tag data item.

Please do not set FALSE or 0 to this item.

B-49

(To the next page)

B-49

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

Occurrence timing



The state transition of Control mode is invalid.


It is not changed by the specified control mode in a present I/O mode.


Please operate this after changing control mode into MANUAL.


The state transition of I/O mode is invalid.


The corresponding disable bit is

TRUE.

The state transition of control mode is invalid.

Tried to change control mode by specifying untransferable mode.

Specify valid mode switch.

Tried to change control mode when I/O mode is OVERRIDE or TAG STOP.

Set I/O mode to the mode other than OVRRIDE and

TAG STOP.

The operation that is not executable in the control mode other than MANUAL is performed (I/O mode change or command bit setting in a status tag).

Set control mode to

MANUAL.

Illegal mode switch is executed in I/O mode setting.

The corresponding display disabled bit is

TRUE.

Please specify valid mode switch.

For restrictions of I/O mode switch, refer to

Section 10.3.2.

The corresponding disabled bit is TRUE.

Example: To execute mode change to the control mode whose corresponding bit of tag data mode inhibited (MDIH) is TRUE.

Please set the corresponding inhibited bit to FALSE.

Please set the corresponding display inhibited bit to FALSE.

Executing

Item property

1008 *

2


The corresponding display disable bit is TRUE.


A lockout tag is set, therefore data cannot be written.


The specified item cannot be set in the current mode. (I/O mode)


The specified item cannot be set in the current mode. (Control mode)


The setting value is out of range.

(Range: xx <= xx <= xx)


Communication status is abnormal.

As setting lockout tag on the faceplate, it is not allowed to set value to tag data item.

To set value of items that cannot be set in the current I/O mode.

To set value of items that cannot be set in the current control mode.

Value exceeding the range has been set.

Communication is not normally performed.

Please remove the lockout tag.

Please change to the I/O mode in which value can be set.

Please change to the control mode in which value can be set.

Please set value within the range.

Set communication status right.


The Project ID Code of the Monitor

Target Project is different from that in

PLC CPU:

*3

(a) The PLC connection target in the monitor target project setting is wrong.

(b) PLC download has not been performed after execution of compile with the programming tool.

(c) Reload of the monitor target project with the monitor tool has not been performed after execution of PLC download with the programming tool.

(a) Specify the correct connection target.

(b) Perform PLC download with the programming tool.

(c) Perform reload of the monitor target project with the monitor tool.


The following error is occurring.

(Redundant system: System A/B identification error)

The Redundant CPU settings of network parameters are wrong, or the tracking cable has not been connected or broken when the

Redundant CPU is started.

Correct the Redundant

CPU settings of network parameters or connect the tracking cable correctly to reset the Redundant CPU.


The following error is occurring.

(Redundant system: Control/ Standby system status error)


The PLC type in the assignment information database is different from that of the connected PLC CPU.

The tracking cable has not been connected or broken when the Redundant CPU is started.

The PLC connection target is wrong.

Connect the tracking cable correctly, and reset the

Redundant CPU.

Set the correct PLC connection target.


*3: Occurs only when "Write tag data (even if the PC's and PLC's project ID codes are different)" is set to invalid in the option setting (general).

(To the next page)

B-50 B-50

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

Occurrence timing



Operate after changing the control mode into AUTO.

The control mode is not in AUTO.

(at DOM_ADV_START command bit setting for PGS2)

Set the control mode to AUTO.

1008 *

2







(e) The Ethernet equipment such as

HUB is breakdown.

Executing

Item property

1010

1011










For information about how to run as an administrator, see the following manual: PX Developer Version 1

Operating Manual (Monitor Tool)






(a) Refer to the recovery procedures in case of server failure in "Section 12.1


(b) to (e)

Resolve the reasons listed in the left column, and from the help menu, execute Swicth

Server for the redundant server system or Connect

Server for the non-redundant server system.






B-51 B-51

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

Occurrence timing


Executing


1001 PX Developer monitor tool not found. Monitor tool is not started.

1002



Please start monitor tool.






The setting window of monitor tool is in display.

Tag name set by TagName property is invalid.


Please confirm tag name.

1003










(b) to (e)

Resolve the reasons listed in the left column, and from the help menu, execute Swicth Server for the redundant server system or Connect









A message box is displayed. Or it is in the state which cannot display a faceplate.


Please close the currently displayed

Faceplate, and try again.



The setting window of monitor tool is in display.

(a) The message box is being displayed.

(b) Waiting for the user graphic screen to be closed.

A new Faceplate cannot be displayed because the Faceplate being displayed is in operation.





(a) Close the message box.

(b) After the user graphic screen has been closed, display the faceplate.

Please close the Faceplate being displayed.

1005













(b) to (e)





(To the next page)

B-52 B-52

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

Occurrence timing

Executing


No. Message

1005

1007

1010

1011

Reasons Measures





The pop-up menu of user-created screen is displayed on the taskbar of Microsoft

R

Windows

R

Operating

System.

This may occur only in Microsoft

R

R

Windows NT Workstation 4.0

Operating System.











Please add error processing to Visual Basic

R program.



REMARK

High-speed current value collection is a type of communication executed by monitor tool. For details, refer to "Appendix 1.3 Collecting current value data".

High-speed current value collection of tag set by TagName property will be executed on the tag data access control.

B-53 B-53

APPENDIX

Appendix 5.1.2 Faceplate Control

MELSOFT

Faceplate control is the ActiveX control that displays faceplate on user-created screen.

The external appearance and function are as same as that of monitor tool faceplate.

The faceplate can be placed freely on the user-graphic screen to be created.

POINT

Faceplate cannot be displayed if monitor tool is not started.

Appendix 5.1.2 [1] Custom Property

Custom property

TagName

The following is a list of custom properties of faceplate control.

Description

Specify the target tag name.

Custom property TagName can be set through the <<General>> tab of property dialog box.

Comments

B-54

Advanced setting

Refer to Appendix 5.1.1 [1]

Following table describes the contents related to the custom properties of faceplate control.

TagName property

Specify the name of tag as access target.

If different projects have the same tag name, specify the name in (Project name): (tag name) format.

If different projects have the same tag name which is not specified in the above format, the tag which priority is higher will become access target.

If resetting the tag name in its execution, the display in a faceplate changes as well.

When the tag name is blank, the tag name display for faceplate is also blank.

B-54

APPENDIX

Appendix 5.1.2 [2] Error list

MELSOFT

(1) Error display by message box

When the faceplate control detects an error, the background color of tag name display area turns yellow and the tag name turns black. If the faceplate is clicked in this status, the following message will appear.

Occurrence timing

In executing faceplate controls

Message Reasons Measures

PX Developer monitor tool not found. Monitor tool is not started.








The name set by TagName property is invalid.

Please start monitor tool.











HUB is breakdown.


"Section 12.1 Troubleshooting" and recover the server.

(b) to (e)

Resolve the reasons listed in the left column, and from the help menu, execute Swicth Server for the redundant server system or












The pop-up menu of user-created screen is displayed on the taskbar of

R R

Microsoft

System.

Windows Operating

R

This may occur only in Microsoft

R

Windows NT Workstation 4.0

Operating System.

Failed in acquiring the faceplate setting information.



Please execute Acquire Server Setting

Data from the help menu in the monitor tool.



Please close the pop-up menu.

Close the setting window.








HUB is breakdown.



(b) to (e)



(To the next page)

B-55 B-55

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

Occurrence timing

In executing faceplate controls

Message Reasons Measures

















HUB is breakdown.



(b) to (e)























B-56 B-56

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

(2) Creation of error object

Error object will be created when an error occurs. The No.s in the following table are the code numbers of the created error objects.

Occurrence timing

Calling or

Setting

TagName property

Calling or

Setting

TagName property

B-57


1001 PX Developer monitor tool not found. Monitor tool is not started.

1002













1003








HUB is breakdown.



(b) to (e)












1007


The pop-up menu of user-created screen is displayed on the taskbar of

Microsoft

System.

R

Windows

R

Operating


R

Windows NT

R

Workstation 4.0

Operating System.

Please add error processing to Visual Basic

R

program.

1009

1010

1011

Failed in acquiring the faceplate setting information.














B-57

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

REMARK

High-speed current value collection is one type of communication executed by monitor tool.

For details, refer to "Appendix 1.3 Collecting current value data".

High-speed current value collection of tag set by TagName property will be executed on the tag data access control.

B-58 B-58

APPENDIX

Appendix 5.2 MonCtrl command

MELSOFT

Item

Hide monitor

Toolbar

Functions of the monitor tool can be called from external applications, such as

Microsoft

R

Visual Basic

R using the MonCtrl command (MonCtrl.exe).

(1) Restrictions on the MonCtrl command

The monitor tool cannot be called in the following cases:

• when the monitor tool is not started


• when the "Change Mode" dialog box is displayed

• when the monitor toolbar is displaying modal dialog boxes (message box or error message)

• when the monitor toolbar is closing an application opened from the usercreated screen buttons

• when the monitor screen is displayed additionally as the fifth screen in multiwindow mode

(2) Arguments of the MonCtrl command

The following shows arguments used for the MonCtrl command.

Only one function (argument) can be specified.

Argument*

1

/hide or

/h

Hides the monitor toolbar.

Format

MonCtrl.exe /hide or

MonCtrl.exe /h

Description*

2

Display monitor

Toolbar

/show or

/s

Exit monitor tool

/exit or

/e

Displays the monitor toolbar.

Format

MonCtrl.exe /show or

MonCtrl.exe /s

Exits the monitor tool.

Format

MonCtrl.exe /exit or

MonCtrl.exe /e

Restrictions

Point

When the monitor toolbar is displayed, only a user who has the authority of operation for exiting the monitor tool can exit.

Confirmation dialog box is not displayed.

Exits regardless of the mode (lock mode, operator mode or engineer mode) if the monitor toolbar is hidden.

Display control panel

/controlpanel Displays the control panel with the specified group name.

Format

MonCtrl.exe /controlpanel [Group name] [/position left coordinate, top coordinate, right coordinate, bottom coordinate] [/maximize]

Display trend graph

/trend

Display alarm list

/alarm

Displays the trend graph with the specified group name.

Format

Restrictions

MonCtrl.exe /trend [Group name] [/position left coordinate, top coordinate, right coordinate, bottom coordinate] [/maximize]

When specifying trend graph display position, the Monitor tool adjusts height to three-quarters of width automatically if height exceeds three-quarters of width.

Displays the Alarm list screen.

Format

MonCtrl.exe /alarm [/position left coordinate, top coordinate, right coordinate, bottom coordinate] [/maximize]

B-59 B-59

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

Item

Display event list

Argument*

1

/event

Display pop-up faceplate screen

/faceplate

Display find screen

/find

Description*

2

Displays the event list screen.

Format

MonCtrl.exe /event [/position left coordinate, top coordinate, right coordinate, bottom coordinate] [/maximize]

Displays the pop-up faceplate screen with the specified tag name.

Format

MonCtrl.exe /faceplate tag name [/position left coordinate, top coordinate, right coordinate, bottom coordinate]

Restrictions

When specifying faceplate display coordinates, the monitor tool adjusts aspect ratio to 5:1 automatically.

Displays the find screen.

Change mode /changemode Displays the change mode screen.

When user name and password are specified for argument, the mode is changed according to the registered user authority.

When "/lock" is specified for argument, the mode is changed to lock mode.

Note that user name, password, and lock are specified for argument, the change mode screen is not displayed.

Format

Restrictions

MonCtrl.exe /changemode [/user User name [/password Password]] or

MonCtrl.exe /changemode [/u User name [/p Password]] or

MonCtrl.exe /changemode /lock

When the Change mode screen is displayed, mode cannot be changed.

Display PLC communication status screen

Display

Server/Client communication status screen

Stop buzzer

/comstatus

/buzzeroff

Displays the PLC communication status screen.

/cscomstatus Displays the Server/Client communication status screen.

Stops the buzzer of the monitor tool.

Restrictions

A user who has the authority of operation for stopping the buzzer can stop.

*1: Arguments are not case-sensitive.

*2: Format is written without path. For actual use, describe with full path (refer to Application examples of the MonCtrl command) according to the install destination of PX Developer.

The following shows regulations for notation of arguments.

Notation

Underline ( )

Bracket ( [ ] )

Description

Information that the user must specify

Omittable item

POINT

"/" (slash) and "-" (hyphen) cannot be used for the first character of group names, user names or passwords.

Group names, user names or passwords are case-sensitive.

If group names, user names or passwords include any spaces, are included, quote them using " ” " (double quotation).

When group names, user names or passwords include " ” " (double quotation), specify them using three double quotations " ””” " for one double quotation " ” ".

Example) Specify "abc”””def" for the user name "abc”def".

B-60 B-60

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

(3) Display position and maximum display specification

The following explains the method for specifying display position and maximum display.

The display position and maximum display can be specified using the following arguments in combination with the arguments for display position and maximum display.

/controlpanel, /trend, /alarm, /event, /faceplate

Item Argument*

Display position /position

1

Description*

2

Specifies the display

position of a window.

Format

/position left coordinate, top coordinate, right coordinate, bottom coordinate

Point

• In single-window mode, this argument specification is ignored because the window is always displayed at maximum on the primary monitor. Note when displaying the pop-up faceplate screen, the window is displayed at the specified coordinates position.

• Specify the left, right, top, and bottom of coordinates within the range of –32768 to 32767, without including spaces and tabs between commas and numbers.

Maximum display

/maximize

Displays a window in its maximum size.

Format /maximize

Point

• Display coordinates at disabling maximum display can be set in advance by specifying an argument"/maximize" after "/position".

• In single-window mode, this argument specification is ignored.

*1: Arguments are not case-sensitive.

*2: The following table shows regulations for notation of arguments.

Notation

Underline ( )

Description

Information must be specified by a user

B-61 B-61

APPENDIX

Application examples of the MonCtrl command

MELSOFT

The following shows the application examples of the MonCtrl command using

Microsoft

R

Visual Basic

R application.

 Calling the faceplate whose tag name is TIC001

Dim RetVal

RetVal = Shell ("C:\Melsec\fbdq\MonCtrl.exe /faceplate TIC001")

 Calling the control panel whose group name is A tank by specifying the display position

Dim RetVal

RetVal = Shell ("C:Melsec\fbdq\MonCtrl.exe /controlpanel "A Tank" /position

110,150,1180,980")

 Calling the Change Mode screen

Dim RetVal

RetVal = Shell ("C:Melsec\fbdq\MonCtrl.exe /changemode")

B-62 B-62

APPENDIX

Appendix 6 Warning Message Appears on Windows Vista

R or later

MELSOFT

Appendix 6.1 Overview of warning message

As a user account control function has been added to Windows Vista

R

( warning message appears when you run the monitor tool.

Section 5.1)

< Windows Vista

R or later, a

B-63 B-63

APPENDIX

Appendix 6.2 Methods for preventing the warning message

MELSOFT

POINT

The user account control (UAC) function prevents a crash (e.g. prevention of startup of a program which executes unintended operation).

Before setting this function, grasp that the security function offered by UAC will be disabled and fully understand the risk.

The following two methods are available for preventing a warning message.

(1) Disabling the user account control function

The following shows a procedure for disabling the user account control function.

R

1) Select [Start] – [Control Panel].

2) Select [User Accounts].

B-64

(To the next page)

B-64

APPENDIX


3) Select [User Accounts].

MELSOFT

4) Select [Turn User Account Control on or off].

B-65

5) Deselect [Turn on User Account Control (UAC) to make your computer more secure] and click the "OK" button.

(Setting completion)

B-65

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

(b) When using Windows

R

7 or later


When using Windows

R

8, right-click the left bottom corner of the screen, and select [Control Panel].

2) Select [System and Security].

B-66

3) Select [Change User Account Control settings].

(To the next page)

B-66

APPENDIX


MELSOFT

4) Set the slide bar "Never notify" and click the "OK" button.


(2) Allowing the warning message without showing it

The following shows a procedure for allowing a warning message without showing it.


When using Windows

R

8, right-click the left bottom corner of the screen, and select [Control Panel].

2) Select [System and Security].

When using Windows Vista

R

, select [Classic View].

B-67

(To the next page)

B-67

APPENDIX


3) Select [Administrative Tools].

MELSOFT

4) Select [Local Security Policy].

* When user account control is enabled in

Windows Vista

R

, the following screen appears.

Click the "Continue" button or the "Yes" button.

< Windows Vista

R

> < Windows

R

7 or later >

5) Select [Local Policies].

(To the next page)

B-68 B-68

APPENDIX


6) Select [Security Options].

MELSOFT

7) Select [User Account Control: Behavior of the elevation prompt for administrators in Admin Approval

Mode Prompt for consent.

8) Select [Elevate without prompting] on the <<Local

Security Setting>> tab, and click the "OK" button.


B-69 B-69

APPENDIX

Appendix 7 Functions Added to and Changed from Old Version

MELSOFT

The following table indicates the functions added and changed with this upgrade.

Compatible version*

1

Version

1.04E

Added/changed function

Addition/change Reference

Microsoft R Windows R

XP compatibility

Help menu

Pop-up window

Event list

Pop-up tuning window

Compatible with Microsoft R and Microsoft R Windows R

Windows R XP Professional

XP Home Edition.

The error codes related to the CPU module error can be displayed from the monitor tool.

If a new pop-up window is opened when two pop-up windows have already displayed, the first opened one of the two on-screen windows is closed automatically.

The history of starting and exiting the monitor tool and the history of loading the monitor target projects are left as event history.

In pop-up tuning, the BOOL type items are displayed in a tree form. Also, BOOL type tag data can be changed.

The pop-up tuning window size can be changed regardless of the aspect ratio.

Number of event notifications received on communication condition screen



PLC status check

Monitor tool startup option

The number of event notifications received on the communication condition screen is changed to the

" " at a communication error, etc.

The function that outputs trend, alarm and event data to

CSV files automatically is added.

Whether the file specified in the monitor target project setting can be used with the monitor tool or not is displayed.


The setting can be made to disable tag data write at a project ID code inconsistency.

Disk free space check The disk free space check size can be set.

Faceplate

The "Close" button is added to the faceplate.

The display direction of the PV value bar on the faceplate can be changed.

When a project ID code inconsistency is detected, the background of the tag name is changed to light blue, and tag data write can be disabled.

The stop alarm (SPA) can be reset from the faceplate.

The error of the CPU module can be detected on the monitor tool. (The error is displayed as an alarm.)

Also, the consistency between the monitor target project set with the monitor tool and the project in the CPU module is checked.

The monitor tool can be started up by the mode that matches the authority of the user.

(The user name and password can be specified with the arguments for monitor tool startup.)

Section 2.2

Section 6.3.1 (5)

Section 6.5.2

Section 7.4.1

Section 7.7

Section 8.5

Section 8.7

Section 9.4

Section 9.17 (1)

Section 9.17 (1)

Section 10.1

Appendix 1.9

Appendix 3.3

*1: The compatible version can be confirmed within About PX Developer.

For details, refer to "Section 6.3.1 (5) Display button of help menu".

B-70 B-70

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

Compatible version*

1


Supported CPU

Monitor tool startup


The Redundant CPU is supported.

The monitor tool can be started without GX Developer.

Section 2.1.1

Section 5.1

Appendix 3.1

Version

1.06G

Alarm list

Even list

The following system alarms have been added.

Redundant system PLC parameter read error

Redundant system A/B identification error

Redundant system control/standby status error

PLC type inconsistency

Event notification source error

Event notification data receiving error

The following system events have been added.

Redundant system control switching history

Redundant system operation mode switching history

Communication condition screen

Monitor target project setting screen

Communication function

The display of redundant system status has been added.

"Transfer Setup" dialog box varies with the CPU type.

Communication route

Changing the I/O mode

Changing the control mode

Changing the motion type

Tag data access control

In the redundant system, event notification is issued when the operation status or operation mode is changed.

The following communication route are extended.

C24 connection, MELSECNET/H remote connection and G4 module connection in serial/USB

CC-Link connection

Coexistence network connection of other station

The mode selection in the change I/O mode dialog box is changed to a toggle button.

The mode selection in the change control mode dialog box is changed to a toggle button

No restrictions on control mode transition

The mode selection in the change motion type dialog box is changed to a toggle button.

The Visual Basic R .NET is supported.

Version

1.10L

Faceplate control

Event notification

Alarm list

Event list

The Visual Basic R .NET is supported

Tag name change during execution is enabled

Error contents of an error object have been added

The unreceivable cases of event notification have been added.

CC-Link connection

When connecting a PLC via MELSECNET/10(H) and

Ethernet in single network connection or connecting in coexistence network connection

When performing a monitor tool in a PC CPU, a PLC

CPU is connected using MELSECNET/H module

SVLA and SVHA of ALM2 item have been added

(changed with the addition of 2PIDH).

Tag stop has been added to the status change history for

I/O mode (changed with the addition of 2PIDH).



Section 7.3.1

Section 7.4.1

Section 8.5

Section 9.4

Appendix 1.2

Section 2.1.2

Section 9.4

Section 10.3.2

Section 10.3.3

Section 10.5

Section 10.3.4

Appendix 5.1.1

Appendix 5.1.2

Section 8.5.1

Section 7.3

Section 7.4

B-71 B-71

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

Compatible version*

1


Pop-up tuning

Setting window


The tag monitor is changed to a tab display (Basic/All tab).

Only highly used tag items are displayed in the Basic tab.

Changed the specifications of the tuning trend collection instructions button and the status display (enabled to restart tuning trend without clearing the data).

2PIDH has been added to auto tuning target.

Section 7.7

Section 7.7.3

The status bar has been added.

If the icon is displayed in the setting item, an error message will be displayed in the status bar.

Section 7.7.5

Section 9.1.1

Section 9.4

Section 9.7

Section 9.8

Section 9.14

Section 9.17

Section 10.5

Section 10.5.2

Section 10.1

Version

1.10L

Option setting

(Faceplate)

Faceplate

Monitor toolbar

Event list

Pop-up tuning

Option setting

SV limit excess setting, SV Pointer Color (2PIDH) and MV status color have been added to the setting item.

2PIDH (2-degree-of-freedom Advanced PID control) has been added to the tag type.

SVA has been added to the alarm display (changed with the addition of 2PIDH).

Tag stop (TAG STOP) mode has been added to the I/O mode (changed with the addition of 2PIDH).

The restriction on the I/O mode transition by operation mode is added.

CASCADE DIRECT mode has been added to the control mode (changed with the addition of 2PIDH).

The restriction on the control mode transition by I/O mode has been added.

The PV setting button has been added to the operation display type.

PV value can be set in a faceplate.

SV limit excess setting has been added to the SV setting.

Tag comment is added for alarm/event.

Event is added for the target of the faceplate screen display button.

The alarm list screen/event list screen are changed to be displayed by double-clicking.

Faceplate is changed to be displayed by double-clicking.

Status change record for PGS2 is added.

Descriptions for PGS2 are added.

Alarm/event display format of monitor toolbar is added.

Version

1.14Q


The executing step No. setting button, time in the step setting button, and pattern graph display have been added.

Faceplate

Auto tuning

User-created

PGS2 (Multi-point program setter) has been added to the tag type.

Limit Cycle method is added.

An existing method is defined as Step Response, the method can be selected.

The detail setting for interacting with GT SoftGOT1000 has been added.

The MonCtrl command option for controlling the monitor tool from Microsoft added.

R

Visual Basic

R application has been



Section 10.3.2

Section 10.3.3

Section 10.3.3

Section 10.3.1

Section 10.3.7

Section 10.3.8

Section 6.3.1

Section 6.3.1

Section 6.3.1

Section 7.4.1

Section 7.4.1

Section 7.7.1

Section 9.17

Section 10.3.1

Section 10.3.12

Section 10.3.13

Section 10.5.5

Section 3.2

Section 7.7.5

Chapter 11

Appendix 5.2

B-72 B-72

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

Compatible version*

1

Version

1.14Q


Communication route

Trend graph

Alarm list

Event list



Option setting

"Tag Comment" has been added to the export item.

Item Name Display Format has been added to an item in Trend Graph.

SCADA interaction


Specifications of redundant type extension base unit are added.

"Displays tag comment instead of tag name" checkbox has been added and the display can be switched between tag name and tag comment.

"Tag Comment" has been added to the display item.

"Tag Comment" has been added to Print and Export to

CSV file.

"Tag Comment" has been added to the display item.

"Tag Comment" has been added to Print and Export to

CSV file.

"Tag Comment" has been added to the export item.

Section 2.1.2

Section 7.2

Section 7.3

Section 7.4

Section 8.7.2

Interaction function with InTouch has been added.

Section 8.7.3

Section 9.17

PX Developer

Operating Manual

(InTouch

Interaction)

Chapter 2

Section 9.4

Section 2.1.1

Section 2.1.4

Section 2.2

Section 9.1

Section 10.1

Version

1.18U

Version

1.20W

Communication route CC-Link IE Controller Network is supported.

Supported CPU Q02PHCPU and Q06PHCPU are supported.

Supported OS Windows Vista R is supported.

Generate GOT screen GOT screen generator function has been added.

00A has been added to the alarm display.

Faceplate

The scale high/low limit display area illuminates when the PV value is outside the range of engineering high/low limit.

Monitoring system configuration with

Monitor Tool

Monitor toolbar

Pop-up faceplate

Alarm list

Faceplate

The server/client monitoring system can be configured.

Up to 16 PLCs can be connected.

Compatible with the redundant server system configuration.

As substitute for tag names, tag comments can be displayed in the alarm/event display area.

Display character counts in the alarm/event display area have been flexible depending on the screen resolution.

Up to 4 screens can be displayed.

The following system alarms have been added.

Event notification execution error

Client Communication Error

SWM (Manual setter with monitor) tag has been added to the tag type.



Section 10.3.7

Section 2.1.6

Section 5.1

Section 8.6

Section 8.7

Section 9.4

Section 9.5

Section 6.3.1

Section 6.5.2

Section 7.6

Section 7.3.1

Section 10.4

Section 10.5

Section 10.5.8

B-73 B-73

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

Compatible version*

1

Version

1.23Z


Event notification

Server/client monitoring system

Trend graph

Faceplate


SCADA interaction

Interaction function with JoyWatcherSuite has been added.


Event notification can be received in the CC-Link IE

Controller Network.

The setting data are synchronized between primary/secondary servers.

In the non-redundant server system, clients can reconnect to a server without quitting the monitor tool.

System alarms: "Server Initialization Error" and

"Server Communication Error" have been added in the alarm list.

CSV files output by the automatic trend CSV file export function can be displayed.

PFC_SF (Predictive functional control (simple first order lag)), PFC_SS (Predictive functional control (simple second order lag)), and PFC_INT (Predictive functional control (integral process)) tag have been added to the tag type.

PB (Push button operation) tag has been added to the tag type.

Trend group names can be included in names of CSV files to be output.

Section 2.1.2

Appendix 1.2

Section 2.1.6

Section 7.3.1

Section 8.6.4

Section 7.2

Section 10.5

Section 10.5.12

Section 10.6

Section 10.6.2

Section 8.7

Section 9.7

PX Developer

Operating Manual

(JoyWatcherSuite

Interaction)

Section 2.2

Version

1.28E

Supported OS

Trend graph

Alarm list

Communication error

Windows R 7 is supported.

Global variables and devices ca be displayed.

The item name of trend pen and comments can be displayed simultaneously and the displayed items can be switched.

Zoom in/out of the graph area can be operated with a mouse.

Double-clicking the graph area allows to switch display/hide the Y-axis scale can be switched by double-clicking the graph area.

The following system alarm has been added.

Invalid GX Simulator Version

The number of retry times can be set when a read error occurs.


GX Simulator connection is supported.

ActiveX control

The option that updates the ActiveX container application screen when this control is in communication with Monitor Tool is added.



Section 7.2

Section 8.5.3

Section 9.6

Section 9.8

Section 7.3.1

Section 8.5.1

Appendix 1.7

Section 9.4

Appendix 5.1

B-74 B-74

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

Compatible version*

1

Version

1.31H

Version

1.42U

Version

1.44W


Supported OS

Mode administration

Exiting Monitor Tool

Monitor toolbar

Alarm list

Event list


Faceplate

Communication route

Supported OS

Event list



Option setting

Modeless dialog box

Faceplate

User-created screen

Supported OS

Monitoring system configuration with

Monitor Tool


Windows

R

7 (64-bit edition) is supported.

The operator authority is segmented to limit the monitoring operation in accordance with the authority.

Log off/shut down of Windows

R

7 is supported.

The icons of user-created screen button and the character strings of tooltip can be changed.

The detailed name of tag data item can be displayed as the alarm content/event message.

Only checked items can be deleted when deleting the alarm list/event list.

Enable/disable the time adjustment among OPSs can be selected.

PVAL (Position-proportional output) and HTCL (Heating and cooling output) have been added to the tag type.

GOT transparent connection via GOT200 series is supported.

Windows

R

8 is supported.

"Previous Value" has been added to the display item.

"Previous Value" has been added to Print and Export to

CSV file.

GX Works2 format project is supported.

GX Simulator2 connection is supported.

Switching server/reconnection/no reconnection can be selected while displaying monitor screens or setting screen on the client.

"Exit monitor tool when windows logoff or shutdown." is added to “General”.

Multiple dialog box displayed from faceplate can be displayed.

Section 2.2

Chapter 4

Section 9.2

Section 5.2

Section 6.3.1

Section 7.3

Section 7.4

Section 8.6.6

Section 9.5

Section 10.5

Section 10.5.13

Section 10.5.14

Section 2.1.2

Section 2.2

Section 7.4

Section 9.4

Section 9.5

Section 9.17

ALM_64PT (64-points alarm) and MSG_64PT (64-points message) have been added to the tag type.

Interaction with GT SoftGOT2000 is supported.

Windows

R

8.1 is supported.

Up to eighteen OPSs (up to sixteen clients) can be connected.



Section 10.1 (3)

Section 10.7

Section 10.7.2

Section 10.8

Section 10.8.2

Chapter 11

Section 2.2

Section 2.1.6

Section 8.6.7

Section 9.5

B-75 B-75

APPENDIX

Appendix 8 Version Compatibility

MELSOFT

The following shows the monitor tool version compatibility, version compatibility between the programming tool and monitor tool, and version compatibility between GX application and monitor tool.

Appendix 8.1 Monitor tool version compatibility

(1) Setting data file

When an access is made to the setting data file of old version (when the monitor tool is started), the following dialog box appears.

Clicking "Yes" button converts the setting data file.

Clicking "No" button closes the dialog box without converting the setting data file.

(The monitor tool is not started.)

If the setting data file contains settings that are not supported by the version being used in the following table, the following dialog box appears and the monitor tool is not started.

Version with which the setting data files were saved

1.00A to 1.43V

1.44W or later

Setting contents

-

OPS setting/communication setting for client 8 or later

Not use

Use

Version with which the setting data files are used

1.00A to 1.43V 1.44W or later

: Supported, : Not supported

If the setting data file includes the data of unsupported PLC CPU, the following dialog box appears and the monitor tool is not started.

B-76 B-76

APPENDIX

B-77

MELSOFT

POINT

When using the Version 1.04E or earlier monitor tool to communicate the setting data file created using the PX Developer Version 1.06G or later, set the PLC connection target in the monitor target project setting screen again.

For details of setting data file, refer to Section 2.3.

(2) Alarm list data file

When an alarm list data file saved with the monitor tool version 1.30G or earlier is accessed with the monitor tool version 1.31H or later, the detailed names are not displayed on the alarm content even though "Tag Data Item Display of Alarm" on

Option Setting (Alarm/Event) is set other than [Item Name].

(3) Event list data file

When an event list data file saved with the monitor tool version 1.30G or earlier is accessed with the monitor tool version 1.31H or later, the detailed names are not displayed on the event message, status, or set value even though "Tag Data

Item Display of Event" on Option Setting (Alarm/Event) is set other than [Item

Name].

(4) Server/client monitoring system

For the server/client monitoring system, clients and a connection server must have the same product language, and clients must satisfy the conditions of versions.

For details, refer to POINT in Section 2.2.

For the redundant server system, a primary server and secondary server must have the same product language and product version.

This section explains the compatibility between the old version monitor tool and

ActiveX control.

If the user graphic screen that uses the ActiveX control provided by the monitor tool is started using the old version monitor tool, the screen may not operate correctly.

When the method that does not exist in the ActiveX control provided by the old version monitor tool is called, the created user graphic will not operate correctly.

(6) Automatic CSV file export

Tag comment field is not output to Automatic alarm CSV file and Automatic event

CSV file when using Monitor tool version 1.10L or earlier.

When upgrading from Version 1.10L or earlier to Version 1.14Q or later, tag comment field may not be output to Automatic alarm CSV file and Automatic event CSV file on the day when upload is carried out.

When upgrading the monitor tool from version 1.30G or earlier to version 1.31H or later, the detailed names of alarm content on the automatic alarm CSV files and event message, status, and set value on the automatic event CSV files may not output within the day.

B-77

APPENDIX

MELSOFT

Appendix 8.2 Version compatibility between monitor tool and programming tool

Monitor tool version

1.02C to 1.03D

1.04E

1.05F to 1.09K

1.10L to 1.12N

1.13P to 1.18U

1.20W

1.23Z

1.28E to 1.34L

1.42U or later

1.02C to

1.04E

(1) Assignment information database file

The following table shows the version compatibility between the monitor tool and the assignment information database file compiled using the programming tool.

Assignment information database file version compatibility

1.05F to

1.09K

Programming tool version used to compile

1.10L to

1.12N

1.13P to

1.18U

1.20W 1.23Z

1.28E to

1.34L

1.42U or later

*

1

*

3

*

3

*

3

*

3

*

3

*

1

*

1

*

4

*

2

*

4

*

2

*

4

*

1

*

4

*

2

*

4

*

2

*

4

*

2

*

1

*

4

*

5

*

2

*

4

*

5

*

2

*

4

*

5

*

2

*

5

*5

*

1

*

4

*

5

*

6

*

2

*

4

*

5

*

6

*

2

*

4

*

5

*

6

*

2

*

5

*

6

*5 *6

*6

: Usable, : Usable with restrictions, : Not compatible

*1: Can be used if tags with tag type added in PX Developer Version 1.10L or later are not set to assignment information database files.

The following shows the tag types added for each version.

1.10L 2PIDH

1.11M PGS2

1.20W SWM

1.22Y PFC_SF, PFC_SS, PFC_INT, PB

B-78

*2: Cannot be used only tag type which cannot be recognized in monitor tool of the versions concerned. For tag type added in the versions, refer to *1 shown in the above table.

*3: Auto tuning by the Limit Cycle method cannot be used.

*4: Cannot be used if the start of file register (ZR) has been changed from the default in the <<System Resource>> tab in the project parameter setting of the programming tool.

*5: Can be used if the device variables added to Version 1.28E is not set to assignment information database files.

*6: Cannot be used if GX project type is GX Works2 project.

When the Version 1.04E or earlier monitor tool is used to monitor the PLC CPU that includes projects compiled with the Version 1.06G or later programming tool, the event notification cannot be received.

To receive the event notification, use the Version 1.06G or later monitor tool.

B-78

APPENDIX

Appendix 8.3 Combined use of monitor tool and GX application

MELSOFT

The following table shows the combined use of the monitor tool and GX application.

Monitor tool version Restrictions on monitor tool startup

1.02C to 1.04E

1.06G to 1.34L

1.42U or later

GX Developer Version 7.20W or later must be installed.

GX Developer is not required.*

1

Installation of GX Works2 or GX Developer is not required. *

2

*1: GX Developer must be installed only when displaying CPU error help.

The help details of the installed GX Developer will be displayed.

*2: GX Works2 or GX Developer must be installed only when displaying CPU error help.

The help details of the installed GX Works2 or GX Developer will be displayed.

B-79 B-79

APPENDIX

MEMO

B-80

MELSOFT

B-80

Ind

INDEX

[2]

2PID (2-degree-of-freedom PID control)

................................................................ 10-31,35

2PIDH (2-degree-of-freedom Advanced PID control) .................................................... 10-31,37

[A]

Acquiring the server setting data .................. 8-18

ActiveX control .............................................. B-40

Admin .............................................................. 4- 4

Alarm

Alarm area color (No alarm) ................. 9-60,76

Alarm/Event display area .............. 6- 4,9-68,70

Alarm/Event display on 2nd line of monitor toolbar ........................................................ 9-55

Automatic CSV file export ......................... 8-29


........................................................... 7-22,9-56

Major alarm color .................................. 9-53,76

Minor alarm color .................................. 9-53,76

Alarm display area ................................... 10- 2, 5

Alarm list ........................................................ 7-15

Alarm list screen display button .................... 6-10

Alarm setting.......................................... 7-17,9-34

Alarm tag ..................................................... 10-71

ALM (alarm) ............................................ 10-31,72

ALM_64PT (64-points alarm) ................ 10-31,73

Application ..................................................... 9-37

Assignment information database ........ 9-14,B-21

AT reflection target ........................................ 7-66

Authorities ............................................... 4- 1,9-12

AUTO ........................................................... 10-12

Auto tuning .................................................... 7-54

Step Response method..................... A-22,7-55

Limit Cycle method ............................ A-22,7-57

[B]

Automatic CSV file deletion .......................... 8-33

Automatic CSV file export ............................. 8-21

Alarm .......................................................... 8-29

Event .......................................................... 8-31

Trend .......................................................... 8-24

Background color

Faceplate ................................................... 9-60

Lockout tag ................................................ 9-50

Status operation button, indicator ............. 9-43

C-1

[C]

Trend graph ................................................ 9-62

Backup mode ................................................ A-22

Batch count operation .................................. 10-27

BC (batch counter) ..................................10-31,55

Beep sound time interval ....................... 8- 1,9-58

Bit write .................................................. 7-29,B-15

Bit write in radio button format .............. 7-29,B-15

BPI (blend PI control) ..............................10-31,35

Broadcasting communication .................... B- 2, 4

Button background color, text color .......... 9-60,76

Buzzer type ............................................... 9-58,77

C24 ................................................................ A-21

CASCADE .................................................... 10-12

CASCADE DIRECT ..................................... 10-12

CC-Link board ............................................... A-21

CC-Link connection ........................................ 2- 2

Change Background/Text color dialog box

................................................................... 9-43,49

Change current value .................................... 7-53

Change mode button ..................................... 6-13

Close ....................................................... 6- 2,9- 2

Collected tag list ............................................. 7-64

Color selection dialog box .............................. 9- 5

Combined use of monitor tool and GX Developer

....................................................................... B-79

Communication among channel .................... B- 8

Communication error .................................... B-18

Communication route...................................... 2- 1

COMPLETE ................................................. 10-26

COMPUTER MV (CMV) .............................. 10-12

COMPUTER SV (CSV) ............................... 10-12

Confirm check

Alarm list ..................................................... 7-23

Event list ..................................................... 7-36

Confirm collectively

Alarm list ..................................................... 7-24

Event list ..................................................... 7-37

Collection period for each communication type

........................................................................ 8-12

Command button operation ......................... 10-30

Communication with Redundant CPU ......... B-25

Connecting to server ...................................... 8-18

Connection cables for CPU serial/USB connection

........................................................................ 2-11

Control mode change .............................10-12,32

Control panel .......................................... 7- 1,9-65

Control panel screen display button .............. 6-10

C-1

[D]

Control panel setting ................................ 9-30,65

Control system .............................................. A-23

Control vessel ................................................ B-40

Copy ............................................................... 9- 2

Copying monitoring environment of monitor tool to other computers ............................................. 9- 8

Count value setting ................................ 10-26,32

Count/Timer operation ........................... 10-28,32

COUNT1 (counter1) ............................... 10-31,67

COUNT2 (counter2) ............................... 10-31,67

CPU module .................................................. A-20

Current value collection ................................ B-13

Cut .................................................................. 9- 2

CYCLIC ....................................................... 10-15

Date/time display area ................................... 6- 4

DDC ........................................................ A-21,1- 1

Debug mode .................................................. A-22

Delete

Data of cell in setting .................................. 9- 4

Delete all

Event list ............................................. 3- 3,7-36

Delete recovered alarms ............................... 7-24

Details button ............................................... 10- 2

Dialog box

Change Background/Text color ........... 9-43,49

Color selection ............................................ 9- 5

File selection ............................................... 9- 5

GX Simulator connection setting .............. 9-20

Select lockout tag ............................. 9-50,10- 7

DIM ................................................. 7-29,10-33,64

Disk free space .............................................. 8-34

Disk free space error ..................................... 7-18

Display

Tool bar ...................................................... B-31

Monitor window button .............................. 6-10

Pop-up faceplate display ........................... 7-44

Pop-up tuning display ................................ 7-46

Display CSV file ...................................... 3- 3,7-13

Display PLC communication status ............... 8- 7

Display help menu button .............................. 6- 8

Display pop-up faceplate

From alarm list .................................... 3- 3,7-15

From monitor toolbar alarm display ........... 6- 7

From pop-up tuning ................................... 7-42


From control panel .............................. 3- 3,7- 2

From pop-up faceplate .............................. 7-45

C-2

[E]

Display redundant system status .................. 8-10

Display scale top/bottom limit (PV graph) ..... 9-47

Displayed character string ............................. 9-48

Displaying the server/client communication status

........................................................................ 8-20

Division number ............................................. 9-47

DOM ........................................................10-33,64

Duplicated project name ................................ 9-14

Duplicated tag name ...................................... 9-14

DV .................................................................. A-22

[F]

Edit .................................................................. 9- 2

Engineer mode ....................................... 4- 1,9-12

Error

Communication open ................................ B-18

Disk free space .......................................... 7-18

Exception .................................................... 7-18

File .............................................................. 7-18

Memory ....................................................... 7-18

Message ............................................... B-46,55

Object ................................................... B-48,57

PLC CPU ........................................... 7-18,B-20

PLC CPU stopping ............................ 7-18,B-20

Ethernet board ...................................... A-21,2-14

Ethernet connection ........................................ 2- 2

Ethernet module ..................................... A-21,2- 4

Event list ......................................................... 7-27

Event list screen display button ..................... 6-10

Event notification ........................................ B- 1, 4

Event notification UDP port No.(HEX) .. 9-57,B- 8

Event setting .................................................. 9-35

Exception error ............................................... 7-18

Exit ................................................................... 5- 7

Exit button ...................................................... 6-13

Export to CSV file

Alarm list ............................................. 3- 3,7-26

Event list ............................................. 3- 3,7-39

Pop-up tuning ..................................... 3- 4,7-65

Setting data ......................................... 3- 5,9- 7

Trend Graph ....................................... 3- 3,7-12

Faceplate.............................................. A-22,10- 1

Faceplate control .......................................... B-54

Faceplate display button ................................. 6- 6

Faceplate display pattern setting................... 9-43

Faceplate display pattern write ...................... 7-29

Faceplate display scale setting ..................... 9-46

C-2

Ind

[G]

Faceplate MV characters setting .................. 9-48

FB ........................................................... A-21,1- 1

FBD ......................................................... A-21,1- 1

File .......................................................... 2-21,9- 2

File error ........................................................ 7-18

File selection dialog box ................................. 9- 5

Find ................................................................. 8- 4

Find button ..................................................... 6-13

Find with group names of the control panel .. 8- 5

Find with group names of the trend graph .... 8- 6

Find with tag names ............................... 7-42,8- 5

Frame color (No lockout tag) ................... 9-60,76

Full tag read ................................................... B-15

G4 module .............................................. A-21,2- 2

Global variable .............................................. A-22

Graph 1 to 8 colors ................................... 9-62,76

Gridline .......................................................... 9-62

Gridline color ............................................ 9-62,76

Gridline interval setting

Pop-up tuning ..................................... 3- 4,7-63

Trend graph ........................................ 3- 3,7-10

Group .......................................................... 7- 2, 9

Group name ............................................. 9-30,33

GX application ............................................... A-20

GX Developer ........................... A-20,2-18,19,5- 1

GX Simulator ........................................A-20, 2-20

GX Simulator2 ............................................... A-20

GX Works2 .................................................... A-20

[H]

High-speed current value collection ............. B-14

[I]

High-speed tag data collection ..................... B-15

HOLD (hold button) ..................................... 10-27

HOLD (motion type) .................................... 10-15

HTCL (heating and cooling output) ....... 10-31,61

I/O mode change .................................... 10-10,32

I/O mode display area .................................. 10- 2

IPD (I-PD control) ................................... 10-31,35

[L]

Latest value display ........................................ 7- 9

Limit Cycle method ................................ A-22,7-57

List

Alarm .......................................................... 7-15

Error ...................................................... B-46,55

C-3

Event........................................................... 7-27

Function ....................................................... 3- 2

Menu ............................................................ 9- 2

System alarm ............................................. 7-18

Lock mode ....................................................... 4- 1

Lockout tag .................................................... 10- 7

Lockout tag display area ........................... 10- 2, 7

Loop tag ....................................................... 10-33

Low-speed current value collection .............. B-14

Low-speed tag data collection ...................... B-15

[M]

Major alarm .................................................... 9-58

MANUAL ...................................................... 10-12

MELSECNET/10 .................................... A-21,2- 1

MELSECNET/10 board ........................ A-21,2-13

MELSECNET/H ..................................... A-21,2- 1

MELSECNET/H board .......................... A-21,2-13

MELSECNET/H module ........................ A-21,2- 1

MELSECNET/H remote .................................. 2- 2

MELSOFT application program ...................... 5- 1

Memory error.................................................. 7-18

Menu ............................................................... 9- 2

Message contents .......................................... 9-35

Message history ............................................. 7-31

Message tag................................................. 10-74

Minor alarm .................................................... 9-58

Mode ............................................................... 4- 1

Mode change ......................................... 4- 2,9-64

Modeless dialog ............................................ A-23

MONI (monitor) .......................................10-31,48

Monitor function .............................................. 7- 1

Monitor target project setting ......................... 9-13

Monitor Tool .................................................. A-20

Monitor toolbar ................................................ 6- 4

Monitor Tool version compatibility ................ B-76

Monitor variable setting.................................. 9-27

Monitor window font .................................. 9-53,73

MOUT (manual output) ...........................10-31,47

MSG (message) ......................................10-31,76

MSG (64-points message) .....................10-31,77

Multiple CPU system ..................................... 2-18

Multi-window mode ............................ 1- 4,6- 1,14

MV ................................................................. A-22

MV status ..................................................... 10-38

MV value setting .....................................10-24,32

MVAL1 (ON/OFF control1) .....................10-31,65

MVAL2 (ON/OFF control2) .....................10-31,65

MWM (manual output with monitor) .......10-31,51

C-3

[N]

[O]

Network board ............................................... 2-13

Network module ............................................ A-21

NORMAL ..................................................... 10-10

NREV (Motor Irreversible Control) ......... 10-31,65

[P]

One-shot tag read ......................................... B-15

ONF2 (2 position ON/OFF control)

................................................................ 10-31,40

ONF3 (3 position ON/OFF control)

................................................................ 10-31,40

Open setting ................................................... B- 8

Operating environment ................................. 2-19

Operating Manual ........................................... 6- 8

Operation display types ............................... 10- 8

Operation history ........................................... 7-29

Operation mode ............................................ A-22

Operation mode change ............................... A-22

Operator mode ....................................... 4- 1,9-12

Option setting ................................................ 9-51

(Alarm/Event) ............................................. 9-56

(Faceplate) ................................................. 9-59

(General) .................................................... 9-53

(Server/Client) ........................................... 9-54

(Trend graph) ............................................. 9-62

OPS setting ................................................... 9-21

OVERRIDE .................................................. 10-10

Password ............................................ 4- 2, 3,9-12

PB (Push button operation) ................... 10-31,69

PC CPU module .................................... A-21,2-10

PFC_INT (Predictive functional control (integral process)) ................................................. 10-31,57

PFC_SF (Predictive functional control (simple first order lag)) ............................................... 10-31,57

PFC_SS (Predictive functional control (simple second order lag)) .................................. 10-31,57

PGS (Program Setting Device) .............. 10-31,42

PID (PID control) .................................... 10-31,35

PID control ..................................................... A-22

PIDP (Position type PID control) ........... 10-31,35

PLC CPU error ....................................... 6- 8,7-18

PLC CPU stopping error ....................... 7-18,B-20

PLC status check .......................................... B-20

PLC transfer setup ................................... 9-17,78

Pop-up faceplate ........................................... 7-42

Pop-up tuning ................................................ 7-45

C-4

Pop-up window .......................................... 6- 1,16

PRE-COMPLETE ........................................ 10-26

Print

Event list ............................................. 3- 3,7-38

Alarm list ............................................. 3- 3,7-25

Entire displayed desktop ............................. 8- 2

Print screen ..................................................... 8- 2

Print screen button ......................................... 6-12

Printer ............................................... 2-14,9-53,80

Process CPU ................................................ A-20

Process data collection ................................. B-17

Product information ......................................... 6- 8

Programming Tool ................................. A-20,1- 1

Project ID code ............................................. B-21

Project ID code inconsistency ....................... 7-18

PSUM (Pulse Integrator) ........................10-31,55

PV .................................................................. A-22

PV graph display direction ........................... 10-19

PV high high/low low limit .............................. 9-60

PV high/low limit ............................................. 9-60

PV value bar positive direction color ............. 9-60

PV value display .......................................... 10-19

PVAL (position-proportional output) .......10-31,59

PX Developer ......................................... A-20,1- 1

[R]

R (Ratio control) ....................................10-31,35

Redundant CPU ............................................ A-20

Redundant parameter ................................... A-23

Redundant system ........................................ A-23

Refreshing the monitoring data .................. B-28 in clients ..................................................... B-29 in a secondary server ................................ B-28

[S]

RESET ......................................................... 10-28

RESET/START .......................................10-27,28

RETURN ...................................................... 10-15

Return check ......................................... 9-53,B-19

REV (motor reversible control) ...............10-31,65

RS-232 ............................................................ 2- 1

RUN .........................................................10-27,28

Sampling period ............................................. 9-33

Save the setting data ...................................... 9- 6

Screen alignment ............................................ 8- 3

SEL (loop selector) .................................10-31,53

Select display of alarm ................................... 7-23

Select lockout tag dialog box ............... 9-50,10- 7

C-4

Separate mode .............................................. A-22

Serial ......................................................... 9-17,18

Setdata .......................................................... 2-24

Setting

Apply ........................................................... 9- 6

Cancel ......................................................... 9- 6

Data file ...................................................... 2-24

Export data to CSV file ............................... 9- 7

Save the setting data.................................. 9- 6

Setting data in the secondary server/clients

....................................................................... 8-14

Setting of display color .................................. 9-74

Setting window ............................................... 9- 1

Setting window button ................................... 6-13

Setting window font .................................. 9-51,73

Server/client monitoring system ........... 2-15,8-14

SIMULATION .............................................. 10-10

Simulator ....................................................... A-20

Simulator connection .................................... 9-79

Single-window mode ................................. 6- 1,14

SPA ............................................................... 10- 5

SPI (sample PI control) .......................... 10-31,35

ST .................................................................. A-21

Standalone configuration .............................. 2-18

Standby system ............................................. A-23

Start as Client ...................................................... 5- 4 as Server .................................................... 5- 3 as Standalone ............................................. 5- 2

Hiding status .............................................. B-30

Starting the Monitor Tool by the Mode That

Matches the Authority of the Specified User

................................................................... B-32 usual status ................................................. 5- 1

Starting screen ............................................... 5- 1

Status bar ....................................................... 9- 2

Status change history ................................... 7-30

Status operation ..................................... 10-29,32

Status tag .................................................... 10-64

Step Response method ........................ A-22,7-55

STOP ........................................................... 10-28

Stop buzzer .................................................... 8- 1

Stop buzzer button ........................................ 6-12

STOP/RESET ............................................. 10-27

SV .................................................................. A-22

SV limit excess setting .................................. 9-60

SV (Current) pointer .................................... 10-23

SV (Target) pointer ...................................... 10-23

SV value setting ..................................... 10-22,32

C-5

SV/MV limit value bar color ........................... 9-60

SV/MV pointer color ....................................... 9-60

Switching server ............................................. 8-17

Switching groups to be displayed ............... 7- 2, 9

SWM (manual setter with monitor) .........10-31,49

Sysdata .......................................................... 2-24

System A ....................................................... A-22

System B ....................................................... A-22

System alarm ................................................. 7-17

System alarm details dialog box ................... 7-15

[T]

Tab .............................................................. 7- 2, 9

Tag .................................................. A-22,10- 1,31

Tag data .................................. A-22,10- 1,B- 1,13

Tag data access control ............................... B-41

Tag data collection ........................................ B-15

Tag data item ............................... A-22,7- 3,10- 1

Tag FB .................................................... A-22,1- 2

Tag monitor .................................................... 7-47

TAG STOP (TSTP) ...................................... 10-10

Tag type

Alarm tag .............................................10-31,71

Loop tag ...............................................10-31,33

Message tag ........................................10-31,74

Status tag ............................................10-31,64

Task tray icon ................................................. 6-17

Text box ........................................................... 9- 4

Text color................................................... 9-59,76

Faceplate .................................................... 9-59

Lockout tag ................................................. 9-50

Status operation button, indicator .............. 9-43

TIMER1 (timer1) .....................................10-31,67

TIMER2 (timer2) .....................................10-31,67

Title bar ........................................................... 6- 2

Toolbar ............................................................ 6- 1

Tracking transfer function ............................. A-23

Trend binary data file ............................. 2-24,7- 8

Trend graph ..................................... 3- 3,7- 3,9-62

Trend graph screen display button................ 6-10

Trend setting .................................................. 9-32

Trouble shooting ........................................... 12- 1

Tuning trend ........................................... 3- 4,7-51

Tuning trend collection instruction ................. 7-52

Type

Alarm .......................................................... 7-17 communication ........................................... B- 1

Event........................................................... 7-29

Operation display type .............................. 10- 8

C-5

tag ............................................................ 10-31

[U]

[V]

Unit setting ..................................................... 9-42

USB .......................................................... 9-17,18

User account control ..................... 2-23,5- 5,B-60

User authority setting .................................... 9-10

User name ......................................... 4- 2, 3, 9-12

User setting ........................................... 4- 3, 9-12

User-created screen...................................... 7-40

User-created screen setting .......................... 9-36

Version compatibility ..................................... B-76

Version compatibility between monitor tool and programming tool .......................................... B-78

[W]

Window

Alarm list .................................................... 7-15

Cascade ................................................. 6- 4,12

Change size ................................................ 6- 3

Close ........................................................... 6- 2

Control panel .............................................. 7- 1

Event list .................................................... 7-27

Maximize, Minimize ........................... 6- 2, 3,15

Monitor ....................................................... 6-14

Pop-up ....................................................... 6-16

Pop-up faceplate ....................................... 7-42

Pop-up tuning ............................................ 7-45

Tile ......................................................... 6- 4,12

Trend graph ................................................ 7- 3

User-created screen .................................. 7-40

Window mode................................... 6-14,9-53,81

Word write ............................................. 7-29,B-16

Write tag data ................................................ B-16

[Y]


Pop-up tuning ..................................... 3- 4,7-63

Trend graph ........................................ 3- 3,7-11

Y-axis scale top, bottom limit ........................ 9-33

C-6 C-6

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT and Visual Basic are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and other countries.

Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporation.

Pentium and Celeron are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.

Ethernet is a trademark or a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.

All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of respective companies.

SH(NA)-080370E-M(1507)KWIX

MODEL:SW1D5C-FBDQ-O-MON-E

MODEL CODE: 13JU39

HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN

NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN

When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the

Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

PX Developer Version 1 Operating Manual (Monitor Tool)

PX Developer Version 1

Operating Manual

(Monitor Tool)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

[Startup/Maintenance Precautions]

CAUTION

CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT

Related manuals

Mitsubishi Electric

MELSEC iQ-R

Mitsubishi Electric

MELSEC iQ-R

Mitsubishi Electric

PX Developer Version 1

Mitsubishi Electric

PX Developer Version 1

Mitsubishi Electric

PX Developer Version 1

Mitsubishi Electric

PX Developer Version 1

Mitsubishi Electric

PX Developer Version 1

Mitsubishi Electric

PX Developer Version 1

Table of contents